Copyright: Copyright 2002 Telex Communications, Inc.


Welcome to Help for AZedit!

We recommend that you take a moment to read the following topics before starting to use the application.

Use the F1 Key on your Computer Keyboard

Connecting to the Intercom System

Intercom Configuration notes for AZedit Users

Getting Started with Intercom Setup (for New Users)

Comments and Questions


Intercom Configuration Notes for AZedit Users

AZedit is pre-configured to work on a single-frame ADAM intercom system (ADAM-136). This means that if you have an ADAM CS intercom system, AZedit will display more resources than are available in your intercom system. On the other hand, if you have a multi-frame ADAM intercom system, AZedit will not display all of the resources that are available in your system.

To ensure that the AZedit configuration matches the intercom configuration, simply connect to the intercom system. If you see the message "Configuration Conflict" when you connect, press the F1 key for further information. If you do not see the Configuration Conflict message, AZedit is already configured the same as your intercom system.

Note: 	It is also possible that the intercom system itself is not properly configured to show the correct amount of resources. To quickly check that your basic intercom configuration is correct, do this:

1.	If you have been working on a setup file, save it.

2.	If you are not connected to the intercom system, connect now.

3.	In the AZedit Options menu, select Intercom Configuration.

4.	If you see a warning message, click OK.

5.	Click on the Resources tab if it is not already selected.

6.	Check that the current settings for Frames and Intercom Type match your actual intercom system.

7.	If the resource setting does not match your intercom system, you should change it before proceeding with intercom setup. See Changing the Master Controller Configuration Settings.

Note: 	You may also wish to modify other settings on the Resources and Options tabs. However, many users will find the standard settings satisfactory. For further information about the intercom configuration and how to change it, click here. (To return to the Welcome screen after reading about intercom configuration settings, click the Back button at the top of the help window.)


Context Sensitive Help

The help system gives you help information for the screen that you are currently looking at. Simply press the F1 key while viewing a screen.


Getting Started for New Users

Return to Welcome screen

If you are just starting to use AZedit for the first time, we recommend that you use the following approach to begin configuring your intercom system.

1.	You can begin to create an intercom setup file in FILE mode, without being connected to the intercom system. However, we recommend that you get connected first.

Note: The Mode pane always indicates the current mode.

Getting connected accomplishes two things:

First, when you connect, AZedit compares its intercom configuration settings to the intercom system. If the settings do not match, it prompts you and asks you if you want to reconfigure the application. Normally, you should select “Yes, reconfigure this application”. This assures that all of the resources in your intercom system are available to you in the application.

Second, an advantage to creating a setup file while being connected is that you can check your progress by periodically sending your changes to the intercom system. Then you can see directly what effect these changes have.

2.	Name the resources that you will be using. By resources, we mean the intercom ports, party lines, etc. All resources have default names. For example, intercom ports are named N001, N002 etc. By creating your own names, you personalize the intercom system and make it easier for both yourself and others to identify people and places in the intercom system. Enter names for intercom ports using Port Alpha setup.3.	If you are working on a setup file in FILE mode, use Save to periodically save your changes to disk. If you are connected to the intercom system and working with the ONLINE setup, use Send Changes to periodically send your changes to the intercom system.

Note: 	You should also use Save to make a disk copy of the online setup. However, you can probably do this only once at the end of each edit session, providing that you use the Send Changes command fairly frequently. Whenever you send changes, the setup information is stored in non-volatile memory in the intercom system's master controller. This means that you will not lose the setup information even if the intercom system loses power. If the configuration computer loses power while you are editing the online setup, you will only lose the changes that you have made since you last used the Send Changes command.

4.	After you have named any party lines, IFB's etc. that will be required, you can begin to configure them using the following procedures:

Party Line Setup

IFB Setup

Special List Setup

ISO Setup

5.	Once you have configured any party lines, IFB's etc., you can start assigning keypanel keys to talk and listen to them. You do this using keypanel setup.

6.	By now, you should now be getting a good basic sense of how to use AZedit to set up your intercom system, but there are also many other features of AZedit that have not been explored. If you have questions about how to locate or use a feature, use the Search button at the top of the help screen to get help. Also, keep in mind that for most screens, you can press the F1 key to get help.

Return to Welcome screen


Comments and Questions

If you have comments or questions about this Help file, please feel free to email us at Intercom.helpfile@us.telex.com.

Customer Service

Telex Communications, Inc.

12000 Portland Avenue South

Burnsville, MN 55337 U.S.A

1(800) 392-3497

1(800) 323-0498


Keypanel / Ports Setup Main Screen

NOTE: 	This is the default help screen when you request help with Keypanels / Ports setup. However, if you are just getting started with AZedit, you may wish to review the topics on the Welcome Screen before proceeding. Experienced users may wish to read the “What’s New” information on the Welcome Screen before proceeding.

The Keypanels / Ports main screen has several uses:

Keypanel Setup: You use this screen whenever you want to connect a keypanel to a particular intercom port and then set up that keypanel. Keypanel setup includes assigning the keys and setting other keypanel options.

Non-keypanel Usage of a Port: Even if you are not using a keypanel at a port, there may still be a few items that you will want to configure.

View Keypanel Activity: You can view keypanel activity, such as key activations, during operation in ONLINE or SERVER mode.

GPI Input Assignment: You can use GPI inputs to simulate keypanel keys even when no keypanel is connected at an intercom port. First, you use GPI Input setup to define which "key" to activate at a specific port. Then you use keypanel setup to select that port and assign the "key".


Party Line Setup Main Screen

Party Line Description

Use this screen to assign members to party lines as follows:

1.	Type the number of a party line in the PL text box, then press Enter. Or, select the name of a party line in the Alpha list box.

2.	Intercom port numbers are listed in the middle of the screen. Click on a port number to select it, and then click the PL Talker and/or PL Listener buttons on the right side of the screen. PL Talker makes the port a talking member of the party line. PL listener makes the port a listening member.

Tip:

To select several ports, hold down the Ctrl key on the computer keyboard, and then click to select the desired ports. Or, if you want to select a series of adjacent ports (for example ports 3 through 10) click on the first port to select it, then hold down the Shift key on the computer keyboard and click on the last port. All ports from the first to the last in the series should now be selected.

3.	Party Line Tallies: This feature is used when 2 or more keypanels have keys assigned to talk to the same party line. Note that we are not referring to keypanels that are members of the party line, but keypanels that can talk to the party line with an intercom key. Here is how party line tally works. Let's say two different keypanels have the same party line assigned to a talk key. If one of the keypanels activates the party line talk key, the tally indication will be supplied at the other keypanel. Typically, the tally indication is in the form of a flashing alphanumeric display (KP9x series keypanels) or a continuously lit red talk key LED indicator (most other keypanels). The tally indication tells the keypanel operator that activating the party line key will break in on a conversation that is in progress.

NOTE: 	Currently a party line tally selection is available only for the Local intercom system. Future versions of the master controller firmware will also support party line tallies for trunked intercom systems. In this case, you will also see a Trunk check box.

4.	Set the Scroll Enable check boxes to determine how the party line will appear in scroll lists.

5.	This completes the party line setup. If you are currently working in FILE mode, use Save to save your changes to disk. (Use Send File later, in ONLINE mode, to send your party line setup information to the intercom system.) If you are currently working in ONLINE mode send your changes to the intercom system. Once your changes have been sent, the ports that you assigned to the party line should be able to talk and/or listen to one-another all the time.

NOTE: 	You can also assign the party line to a key on a keypanel if the keypanel operator will need to occasionally talk to all members of the party line. You do this using keypanel setup.

NOTE: 	The Key? column only provides a valid indication in ONLINE or SERVER mode. This column indicates when an intercom port is talking or listening to the party line using intercom keys. This column is refreshed (updated with current information) frequently during normal operation. To force a refresh, use the Refresh command on the View menu, or press Ctrl+Space. Possible display indications are:

•	Talk: The port has a talk key pressed to talk to the party line

•	Listen: The port has a listen key pressed to listen to the party line

•	Both: The port has both a talk and listen key pressed for 2-way communication with the party line

NOTE: 	Occasionally, you may wish to change the list order based on information in a particular column. You can do this by right clicking or left clicking on the column heads. For example, if you want to quickly see which intercom ports are talkers on a party line, click (left mouse button) on the P-T column head.


IFB Setup Main Screen

IFB Description

The IFBs main screen summarizes the basic settings for standard, talk-only IFBs. Press Ctrl+Tab to view additional settings that are used for 2-way IFB operation and tone override IFB operation. (Before you press Ctrl+Tab, first make sure AZedit, and not the help file, is the active window. Click anywhere on the AZedit screen to make AZedit the active window.) To change the settings for an IFB, click to select it in the list, then press Enter (or double-click). This will open the Edit IFB dialog.

IFB Column: Displays the IFB number. This number cannot be changed. However, you can control how many IFBs are available for use by changing the intercom configuration settings. For further information about the intercom configuration, click here.

Alpha Column: This column displays the name that has been assigned to the IFB. Default names are IF01, IF02 etc. You can change these names to ones that are more meaningful to keypanel operators. Click on the row where you want to change the name, and then press Ctrl+F12. (NOTE: You may have to activate the Ctrl+F12 feature if you want to use it. For further information, click here.)

Dim? Column: This column lists the Dim Level that you set in the Edit IFB dialog. NO indicates that no dimming value has been set, In this case, the program audio will be completely muted during IFB operation.

Scroll Enable (LC, TK, AE) Columns: This column indicates the scroll enable settings. LC indicates Local, TK indicates Trunk, and AE indicates AZedit. For each type of scrolling, the letters will appear green if that type of scrolling is enabled, and brown (or red when selected) if that type of scrolling is disabled.

Input Port, Input Alpha, Output Port, and Output Alpha: These columns indicate the port settings that you have set up for each IFB.

Gain: This column lists the analog output gain for the intercom port that has been designated as the IFB Output. If the IFB listening device that is connected to the output port does not have a volume control, you may wish to adjust the analog output gain to suit the listener's preference. The analog output gain can be adjusted either in AZedit or from an LCP-102 that is operating in PAP mode.

Column Sort Notes:

Occasionally, you may wish to change the sort order based on information in a particular column. For columns that contain a single item, you can alternate the sort order by right clicking or left clicking on the column heads. For example, you can alternate the sort order for the Alpha column by right clicking and left clicking on the Alpha button.

AZedit Only: The Scroll Enable column lists 3 settings. You can sort for each setting by repeated clicks on the column head. For example, to quickly find out which IFBs have Local Scroll Enable checked, click (left click) 3 times on the Scroll Enable column head. On one of the 3 clicks, all IFBs that are green (enabled) will appear at the top of the column.


Special List Setup Main Screen

Special List Description

Use this screen to set up special lists as follows:

1.	Type the number of a special list in the SL text box, then press Enter. Or, select the name of a special list in the Alpha list box.

2.	Intercom ports are listed in the middle of the screen. Click on a port number to select it, and then click Add to SL to make the port a member of the special list. Or, click Remove from SL to remove it.

Tip:

You can also use the Select All, De-select All, and Invert Selections buttons for fast port selection. You can also use the Ctrl and Shift keys on the computer keyboard: To select several ports, hold down the Ctrl key, and then click to select the desired ports. Or, if you want to select a series of adjacent ports (for example ports 3 through 10) click on the first port to select it, then hold down the Shift key and click on the last port. All ports from the first to the last in the series should now be selected.

3.	You can assign up to four relays to each special list. These relays will be triggered whenever someone calls the special list from a keypanel. To assign a relay, either type the relay number under Relay, or select the relay name under Alpha.

4.	Set the Scroll Enable check boxes to determine how the special list will appear in scroll lists.

5.	This completes the special list setup. The next step is to assign the special list to a talk or listen key on a keypanel using keypanel setup. Then the keypanel operator can activate that key to talk or listen to the members of the special list. However, NOTE that unlike a party line, the special list members will not be able to hear or talk to one-another on the special list.

6.	Remember to send your changes to the intercom system.

NOTE: 	Occasionally, you may wish to change the list order based on information in a particular column. For columns that contain a single item, you can alternate the list order by right clicking or left clicking on the column heads. For example, you can alternate the list order for the Alpha column by right clicking and left clicking on the Alpha button.


GPI Output Setup Main Screen

GPI Description

This screen lists the configuration information for GPI Outputs in summary format. To change the settings for a GPI Output, select it from the list and press Enter, or just double-click on the GPI Output. The Edit GPI Output dialog box will open. Press F1 in the GPI Output Dialog for further assistance, or click here.

NOTE:	You use this screen to setup a GPI output for activation whenever someone talks to a specific output port. Alternatively, you can assign a GPI output directly to a specific keypanel key for activation when the keypanel operator presses that key. For direct key assignment see Keypanel Setup.

Once you have set up one or more GPI Outputs, the setup information will be summarized in this screen as follows:

GPI Output Column: Displays the GPI Output number. This number cannot be changed. However, you can control how many GPI Outputs are available for use by changing the intercom configuration. (For example, your basic system hardware gives you 8 GPI outputs. If you do not have any additional UIO-256 frames attached, you can limit your GPI outputs to 8.) For further information about the intercom configuration, click here.

Alpha Column: This column displays the name that has been assigned to the GPI output. Default names are RY01, RY02 etc. You can change these names to ones that are more meaningful to keypanel operators. Click on the row where you want to change the name, and then press Ctrl+F12. (NOTE: You may have to activate the Ctrl+F12 feature if you want to use it. For further information, click here.) Scroll Enable (LC, TK, AE) Columns: This column indicates the scroll enable settings. LC indicates Local, TK indicates Trunk, and AE indicates AZedit. For each type of scrolling, the letters will appear green if that type of scrolling is enabled, and brown (or red when selected) if that type of scrolling is disabled.

Input, Alpha, Output, Alpha: These columns indicate the port settings that you have set up for each GPI Output.

Status: This column only displays meaningful information in ONLINE or SERVER mode. If the GPI Output is activated, ON will display, otherwise, OFF will display. The information in this column will update periodically. To force an update, select Refresh from the View menu at the top of the screen. Or, press Ctrl+Space on the computer keyboard.

NOTE: Occasionally, you may wish to change the list order based on information in a particular column. For columns that contain a single item, you can alternate the list order by right clicking or left clicking on the column heads. For example, you can alternate the list order for the Alpha column by right clicking and left clicking on the Alpha button.

The Scroll Enable column lists 3 settings. You can sort for each setting by repeated clicks on the column head. For example, to quickly find out which GPI Outputs have Local Scroll Enable checked, click (left click) 3 times on the Scroll Enable column head. On one of the 3 clicks, all GPI Outputs that are green (enabled) will appear at the top of the column.


ISO Setup Main Screen

ISO Description

This screen provides ISO setup information in summary format. To configure an ISO, select it in the list and press Enter (or double-click). The Edit ISO dialog box will open.

Once you have set up one or more ISOs, the setup information will be summarized in the ISOs Main Screen as follows:

ISO Column: Displays the ISO number. This number cannot be changed. However, you can control how many ISO's are available for setup by changing the intercom configuration. For further information about the intercom configuration, click here.

Alpha Column: This column displays the name that has been assigned to each ISO. Default names are IS01, IS02 etc. You can change these names to ones that are more meaningful to keypanel operators. Click on the row where you want to change the name, and then press Ctrl+F12. (NOTE: You may have to activate the Ctrl+F12 feature if you want to use it. For further information, click here.)

Self? Column: Yes will display for each ISO that has ISO Self enabled. Otherwise, No is displayed.

Scroll Enable (LC, TK, AE) Columns: This column indicates the scroll enable settings. LC indicates Local, TK indicates Trunk, and AE indicates AZedit. For each type of scrolling, the letters will appear green if that type of scrolling is enabled, and brown (or red when selected) if that type of scrolling is disabled.

Output Port and Output Port Alpha: These columns display the Output Port Number and Alpha that you have selected for each ISO.

NOTE: 	Occasionally, you may wish to change the list order based on information in a particular column. For columns that contain a single item, you can alternate the list order by right clicking or left clicking on the column heads. For example, you can alternate the list order for the Alpha column by right clicking and left clicking on the Alpha button.

AZedit Only: The Scroll Enable column lists 3 settings. You can sort for each setting by repeated clicks on the column head. For example, to quickly find out which ISOs have Local Scroll Enable checked, click (left click) 3 times on the Scroll Enable column head. On one of the 3 clicks, all ISOs that are green (enabled) will appear at the top of the column.


GPI Input Setup Main Screen

GPI Description

This screen lists the configuration information for GPI Inputs in summary format. To change the settings for a GPI Input, select it in the list and press Enter. Or, double-click on it in the list. This will open the Edit GPI Input dialog box.

Once you have set up one or more GPI Inputs, the setup information will be summarized in this screen as follows:

GPI Input Column: Displays the GPI Input number. This number cannot be changed. However, you can control how many GPI Inputs are available for use by changing the intercom configuration. (For example, your basic system hardware gives you 8 GPI inputs. If you do not have any additional UIO-256 frames attached, you can limit your GPI inputs to 8.) For further information about the intercom configuration, click here.

Keypanel, Keypanel Alpha, Key, Key Type: These columns indicate the keypanel and key that you have assigned to be activated by each GPI input. When No Key is assigned as the key type, the Key Type column will be blank. Otherwise, Talk or Listen will display as the key type.

Status: This column only displays meaningful information in ONLINE or SERVER mode. If the GPI Input is activated, ON will display, otherwise, OFF will display. The information in this column will update periodically. To force an update, select Refresh from the View menu at the top of the screen. Or, press Ctrl+Space on the computer keyboard.


User Programmable Logic (UPL) Statement Main Screen

User Programmable Logic Description

This screen provides summarized information about User Programmable Logic (UPL) statements. To view the detailed setup information for a UPL statement, select it in the list and press Enter (or double-click). The Edit UPL Statement dialog box will open.


Inter-panel DIM Table Main Screen

Inter-panel Dims Description

1.	In the upper-left corner, position the cursor in the DIM text box and type a number to create a new inter-panel dim table (or just accept number 1 if this is your first inter-panel dim table).

2.	From the list in the center area of the screen, select any intercom ports where there are keypanels connected that are very close to one-another, typically within 5 feet (1.5 m). Or, if there are two or three keypanels where you are experiencing a known feedback problem, select the port numbers for those keypanels.

NOTE: 	To select more than 1 intercom port, click on the first port that you want to select. Then, hold down the Ctrl key on the computer keyboard while selecting additional ports.

NOTE: 	There may be several keypanels closely spaced in a room, but there may only be feedback between one keypanel and another keypanel right next to it. In this case, select only those two keypanels. If two other keypanels are having a separate feedback problem, create a different dim table for those keypanels.

3.	With one or more intercom ports selected, click Add to Dim. Yes will appear in the "Dim Member?" column for each intercom port that you selected.

4.	After you have placed the desired keypanels in the dim table click the down arrow of the Gain list box (upper-left corner of the screen). Scroll up or down in the list to select the desired amount of dimming. Use the minimum amount of dimming required, eliminating feedback. Generally, start with -6dB. Later, you can increase the amount to -7 or -8 etc. if feedback still occurs. Or, decrease the amount to -4 or -3 if feedback is not a problem.

NOTE: 	Any adjustments to the volume controls on the keypanels may cause the feedback problem to return. Allow for the worst-case scenario.

5.	If the Ctrl+F12 naming feature is activated, you can press Ctrl+F12 and then assign a description (up to 24 characters) for the inter-panel dim table. This description will appear in the upper-left corner of the screen under the DIM text box.

6.	In order for dim tables to work, you must assign the dim function as a talk level 2 key assignments for each key that has a feedback problem. Make the level 2 assignment as follows:

a.	Access keypanel setup.

b.	Select one of the keypanels that you assigned to the DIM table

c.	Locate the key assignment that has the feedback problem. Click on the talk level 2-combo box for that key, then type DIM and press Enter. Alternatively, click the right mouse button on the box. This will cause the Key Assignment Select dialogue box to open. Select Special Function, then select DIM and click OK.

d.	Repeat steps b and c for each additional keypanel that you have assigned to the DIM table.

7.	Remember to save your changes and send them to the intercom system.

8.	Check operation by going to the keypanels and activating the keys that have the feedback problem. NOTE that -6dB dimming causes a significant reduction in the speaker output level. If a situation allows it, you might try changing to -3dB of dimming for example. Just remember that adjusting the volume controls on the keypanels may cause the feedback problem to reappear.

NOTE: 	When you activate dimming on a keypanel, the intercom system will not dim that keypanel, but only any other keypanels that are communicating with the same destination. This applies only when the other keypanels have keys activated to talk to the destination or when the destination has keys activated to talk to them. Only by activating keys at other keypanels will the speaker at your keypanel be dimmed.

NOTE: 	By default, there are 32 inter-panel dim tables allocated in the intercom configuration settings, and these are numbered 1 to 32. You can reduce this number if 32 inter-panel dim tables are not required. For more information on the intercom configuration, click here.

Inter-panel Dim Table Example


Crosspoint Status Main Screen

You can use this screen to select an intercom port and then see which other intercom ports that port is talking or listening to. One use of this might be to locate an unattended keypanel where a talk key has accidentally been left on and it is causing unwanted noise at some other intercom port. You can also use this screen to select an intercom port and then block certain talk or listen paths. For example, you could block all but a few selected ports from talking to an IFB output. You can also select an intercom port and force a certain talk or listen path to always be on. For example, you could force the talk path from a 2-way radio to a particular keypanel. (Although, if the 2-way radio has a keying contact output, you could use that with a GPI input to activate the talk path. See GPI description for further information.) Finally, you can inspect any crosspoint and find out what the current gain settings are.

1.	Select an intercom port by either of the following methods:

•	position the cursor in the Port text box and type the port number, then press Tab. (Tab enters your selection and moves the cursor to the next box.)

•	select a port in the Alpha list box

2.	Any intercom ports that the selected intercom port is talking to are displayed in the "Is Talking To..." column. Any ports that the selected intercom port is listening to are displayed in the "Is Listening To..." column.

•	In ONLINE or SERVER mode, if a talk or listen path is currently activated, YES will be indicated in the "Closed" column, otherwise, NO will be indicated.

•	In any mode, if a talk or listen path has been forced to be on continuously, "F" will appear in the "F/I" (Force/Inhibit) column.

•	In any mode, if the path is being blocked, or inhibited, "I" will appear in the "F/I" column.

NOTE:	If a talk or listen path is forced or inhibited in the Crosspoint Status screen, this takes precedence over any other means of turning the path on or off. For example, if you assign a keypanel key to talk to an inhibited path, it will not be able to do so. If you assign an IFB to a keypanel key, and the output port that is defined in that IFB is inhibited for the intercom port where you have assigned the IFB key, that port will not be able to talk to either the port or the IFB. If you assign several intercom ports as listeners on a party line, but one of those ports is inhibited from listening to some other port that is also assigned to the party line, the one port will not be able to hear the other port in the party line.

3	To create a continuously activated talk path from the selected port to another port, select the other port in the "Is Talking To" column, then click the Force button.

To prevent the selected intercom port from talking to another port under any conditions, select the other port in the "Is Talking To..." column, and then click the Inhibit button.

You can force or inhibit listen paths the same as talk paths. To force or inhibit the listen path from the selected intercom port to another port, select the other port in the "Is Listening To" column, and then click the Force or Inhibit button.

To clear any forced or inhibited path, select that path, and then click the Release button.

4.	While operating in ONLINE or SERVER mode, click the Inspect button to open the Crosspoint Inspection Results dialog, where you can view detailed information about the selected talk or listen path.

5.	If you make any changes to crosspoints, remember to send your changes to the intercom system.


Crosspoint Gain Main Screen

Gain Adjustment Description

1.	At the upper-left corner of the screen, select an intercom port. This is the port that will hear the adjusted level. Select the port by either of the following methods:

•	Position the cursor in the Port text box and type the port number, then press Tab (Tab enters your selection and moves the cursor to the next box)

•	Select a port in the Alpha list box

2.	In the center area of the screen click on an intercom port to select it. This is the port that will be heard by the port that you selected in step 1.

3.	Adjust gain using either of two methods:

•	Select a gain level in the Gain list box at the left side of the screen, and then click Set Gain. The new gain level will appear in the Gain column of the list in the center of the screen.

•	While watching the Gain column in the center of the screen, click the Set Gain up or down arrow to set the gain.

4.	After you send the changes to the intercom system, the intercom port that you selected in step 1 will hear the intercom port that you selected in step 2 at the new level that you set in step 3.

NOTES:

•	The default level of +0.0 dB is also called the unity gain level. Normally, the list in the center of the screen will show the gains for all intercom ports. If you check Show Non-Unity Only, you will see only those intercom ports that are not set at the default level.

•	Use the Reset Gain button to reset the gain for whichever ports are currently selected in the list in the center of the screen. This will reset gains to the default level of +0.0 dB.

•	It is also possible to adjust crosspoint gains via the Gain button during keypanel setup or port setup.


Party Line Gain Main Screen

Use this screen to adjust the level at which a selected intercom port listens to one or more selected party lines.

1.	Select an intercom port:

•	Type the intercom port number in the Port text box, then press enter

•	Or select the port name in the Alpha list box

2.	Select one or more party lines from the list in the center of the screen. Use any of the following methods to select party lines:

•	to select an individual party line, click on that party line in the list

•	to select several consecutive party lines, click and drag the mouse down the list. Or, click the first party line, then hold down the Shift key on the computer keyboard and click on the last party line

•	to select several random party lines, hold down the Ctrl key on the computer keyboard, then click on the desired party lines in the list

•	to select or de-select all party lines, click on the Select All or De-select All button on the right side of the screen

•	to select all party lines that are not currently selected, click the Invert Selections button

3.	Adjust gain using either of two methods:

•	Method 1: Absolute Adjustment

Use this method to set all selected party line gains to the same level.

Select a gain value in the Gain list box

Click the Set Gain button

The new gain value(s) will appear in the list in the center of the screen.

•	Method 2: Relative Gain Adjustment

Use this method to change each selected party line gain up or down from its current level.

Click the up/down arrows

The new gain value(s) will appear in the list in the center of the screen.

4.	Send the changes to the intercom system. After you send changes, the intercom port that you selected in step 1 will hear the party line(s) that you selected in step 2 at the new level that you set in step 3.

NOTES:

•	The default level of +0.0 dB is also called the unity gain level. Normally, the list in the center of the screen will show the gains for all party lines. If you check Show Non-Unity Only, you will see only those party lines that are not set at the default level.

•	Use the Reset Gain button to reset the gain for whichever party lines are currently selected in the center of the screen. This will reset gains to the default level of +0.0 dB.

NOTE: 	It is also possible to adjust the party line gains for a specific intercom port while viewing the setup screen for that port. Access keypanel setup, and then select the desired intercom port in the upper-left corner of the screen and click the Gain button.


Alpha Select Main Screen

Double-click on a row to change the Alpha name for that row. The Edit Alpha / Description Dialog will appear.


Analog Input / Output Gain Main Screen

Important: 	Do not make an adjustment here, when it would be better to adjust a Crosspoint gain. Usually you adjust an analog input or output gain when you need to interface an intercom port to an external device that operates at a different audio level than the intercom system. In this case, the adjustment will correct the level between that port and all other ports. You should use Crosspoint gain when you want to adjust the level between two specific intercom ports.

1.	The input gain and output gain values for each intercom port are displayed in the center area of the screen.

By default, the gains for all ports are displayed. To display only the gains for ports that have been adjusted to non-standard levels, check the Show Non-Unity Only box.

2.	To set or reset gains, select one or more ports using any of the following methods:

•	To select an individual port, click on that port

•	To select several consecutive ports, click and drag the mouse down the list. Or click the first name, then hold down the Shift key and click the last name

•	To select several random ports, hold down the Ctrl key then click on the desired ports

•	To select or de-select all ports, click on the Select All or De-select All button at the right side of the screen

•	To select all ports that are not currently selected, click the Invert Selections button

3.	For the selected port or ports, adjust gains using either of two methods:

•	Method 1: Absolute Adjustment

Use this method to set all selected gains to the same level.

Select a gain value in the Gain list box

To set the input gain to the selected value, click Set Input Gain

To set the output gain to the selected value, click Set Output Gain

The new gain value(s) will appear in the list in the center of the screen.

•	Method 2: Relative Gain Adjustment

Use this method to change each selected gain up or down from its current level.

To set the input gain use the up/down arrows next to Set Input Gain

To set the output gain use the up/down arrows next to Set Output Gain

The new gain value(s) will appear in the list in the center of the screen.

4.	To reset all selected gains to 0dB (unity gain), click the Reset Input Gain and/or Reset Output Gain buttons.

5.	In ONLINE mode, if Real-Time Changes is checked, gain adjustments will be automatically sent to the intercom system as you make the adjustments. If this is not checked, you will have to send changes in order for them to take effect.


LCP-102 Setup Main Screen

LCP-102 Description

Panel and Mode Selection

1.	Select the LCP-102 you want to set up.

NOTE: 	The number you select here corresponds to the Panel Address that you set at the LCP-102. See Setting the Panel Address in the LCP-102 User Manual.

NOTE: 	If you are operating in ONLINE mode (ONLINE displays at the lower-right corner of the screen) and the selected LCP-102 is detected by the intercom system, a heartbeat icon will appear at the top of the LCP-102 setup screen.

When an LCP-102 is detected, AZedit will upload and display the current settings for that LCP-102. And, it will periodically recheck the settings and refresh the screen (usually every few seconds). When you make changes in AZedit, the items you change are not refreshed. Thus, you could see some control settings change, but only ones that you have not already changed in AZedit. When you send your changes to the intercom system AZedit will merge your new settings with the latest settings that it reads from the LCP-102. Changes made in AZedit take precedence over changes made at the LCP-102.

2.	In the Mode list box, select the LCP-102 operating mode that you want to set up:

•	Analog I/O Gains Mode: In this mode, you assign intercom ports to the LCP-102 displays, then you use the knobs on the LCP-102 to adjust the input and output gains for those intercom ports. See the setup procedure below for details.

NOTE: Your LCP-102 may use the word "TRIMS". This is the same as Analog I/O Gains mode in AZedit.

•	PAP Mode: In this mode you assign IFBs to the LCP-102 displays, then you use the knobs on the LCP-102 to adjust the listen level for each IFB. See the setup procedure below for details.

•	CDP Mode: In this mode, you assign intercom ports to the LCP-102 displays. Then you use the LCP-102 knobs to adjust the level at which each intercom port hears a selected party line. See the setup procedure below for details.

Setup for Analog I/O Gains Mode

3a.	For each setup page, there are 16 combo boxes. Right-click on a combo box to select it. The Select Key Assignment dialog will open. Typically, you will select Ports in the left column, then click on an intercom port in the right column, then click OK. The selected intercom port name will appear in the combo box. To clear a combo box, select Special Functions in the left column, then click OK.

3b.	Repeat step 1 for as many combo boxes as you want.

3c.	At this point, you can either send your changes to the intercom system, and then adjust the Analog I/O Gains from the LCP-102 (in TRIMS mode). Or, you can access Analog I/O Gain setup and set the initial gains from within AZedit.

3d.	See steps 4 to 6 below for Mode Enable and Change Setup.

Setup for PAP Mode

3a.	For each setup page, there are 16 combo boxes. Right-click on a combo box to select it. The Select Key Assignment dialog will open. Typically, you will select IFBs in the left column, then click on an IFB name in the right column, then click OK. The selected IFB name will appear in the combo box. To clear a combo box, select Special Functions in the left column, then click OK.

3b.	Repeat step 1 for as many combo boxes as you want.

3c.	Use IFB setup within AZedit to define the output port for each IFB that you assigned in steps 1 and 2. You can also optionally define the input intercom port for each IFB, but you can also do this from the LCP-102, or later change it at the LCP-102.

3d.	Use AZedit to define the level at which each defined IFB output hears its defined IFB input. You do this by adjusting the crosspoint gain from the IFB input port number to the IFB output port number. Note that you can also make this adjustment from the LCP-102 during normal operation.

3e.	See steps 4 to 6 below for Mode Enable and Change Setup.

Setup for CDP Mode

3a.	For each setup page, there are 16 combo boxes. Right-click on a combo box to select it. The Select Key Assignment dialog will open. Typically, you will select Ports in the left column, then click on an intercom port in the right column, then click OK. The selected intercom port name will appear in the combo box. To clear a combo box, select Special Functions in the left column, then click OK.

3b.	Repeat step 1 for as many combo boxes as you want.

3c.	For each intercom port that you assigned to an LCP-102 display, you can use Party Line setup within AZedit to assign that intercom port to a party line. Or, you can do this from the LCP-102 itself.

3d.	For each intercom port that you assigned to an LCP-102 display, you can use Party Line Gains setup within AZedit to individually adjust the level at which that intercom port hears the party line to which it is assigned. You can also do this from the LCP-102 itself.

4.	If you place a check mark in the Mode Enabled check box, an operator at the LCP-102 can access the currently selected mode and then change settings. If you remove the check mark, you can only access this mode and change settings using AZedit (or ZEUSedit).

NOTE: 	To see the Mode Enabled check box, you would normally need to connect to an intercom system that supports this feature. However, in FILE mode, you can use Reset Capabilities (Options menu) to activate all current LCP-102 capabilities that are supported by AZedit (along with ALL other AZedit capabilities). When you connect to an intercom system, the capabilities will be reset to match those reported by the intercom system.

5.	In each of the operating modes, there are 4 setup pages, and each setup page contains a complete set of assignments for the front panel of the LCP-102. Of course, the LCP-102 can only display one setup page at a time, but in AZedit all 4 pages are displayed and can be set up simultaneously. The page that is currently set as the active page at the LCP-102 is indicated as Active in AZedit or ZEUSedit. To change the active page, click the Change Setup button in the upper-right corner, and then select a different active page.

6.	Remember to send your changes to the intercom system.


IFB Priorities Main Screen

IFB Description

IFB Priority Description

Select one or more intercom ports in the list. Then, click a number button on the left to set the priority.


User Programmable Logic (UPL) Resource Main Screen

UPL Resource Description

This screen provides summary information about the current Scroll Enable setting for each UPL Resource. To change the Scroll Enable setting for a UPL Resource, select it in the list and press Enter. (Or, just double-click.) This will open the Edit UPL Resource dialog, where you can insert or remove check marks to enable or disable scrolling.

 If Ctrl+F12 Alpha Editing is activated, you can also use the summarized list to assign names (Alphas) for UPL Resources. Click on the UPL Resource that you want to name (do not press Enter or double-click to open the Edit UPL Resource dialog). Then, with the UPL Resource selected, press Ctrl+F12 to open the Edit Alpha / Description dialog. You can press F1 to get help with that dialog, or click here.


Master Controller Version Information

Use this screen to view the firmware version of the active master controller. You can also update the master controller firmware from this screen.

Zeus intercom systems: There is only one master controller, and it is always the active master controller.

ADAM and ADAM CS intercom systems: There are two master controllers: the active master controller and the standby master controller. This screen displays the version information only for the active master controller. To find out the version information for the standby master, you can reset the active master controller card. For further information about active and standby master controller identification, click here.


Keypanel Version Information

You use this screen to check the firmware version for selected keypanels. You can also use this screen to update the firmware in selected keypanels.


Audio I/O Card Version Information

You use this screen to view the firmware versions for Audio I/O cards in an ADAM CS or ADAM Intercom System. You can also update the Audio I/O Card firmware from this screen.

NOTE: There are no Audio I/O cards in a Zeus intercom system.


Port Status Screen

Use this screen to view connection status and data communication errors between the master controller and data devices that are connected to intercom ports. Data devices include keypanels, camera delegate panels, and TIF Telephone Interfaces. You can also use this screen to upgrade the firmware in certain types of keypanels connected to intercom ports.

Port Column

Indicates the intercom port number. These numbers cannot be changed. However, you can resize the intercom resources to display only the number of intercom ports that are available in your intercom system.  For further information, click here.

Alpha Column

Indicates the alpha name that was assigned using Port Alpha Setup or Ctrl+F12 alpha editing.

Status Column

"--    --"

Two consecutive dashes indicate that there has never been any data communication with a device at the port.

Bad Cut:

Indicates that there was communication with a data device, but communication has stopped.

OK KP 1-7

Indicates that the device connected to the port is a normally functioning keypanel. The numbers 1-7 indicates the keypanel DIP switch settings for switches SW1-1 through SW1-3 on the keypanel rear panel as summarized in the table below. Refer to the keypanel's installation instructions for information on DIP switch settings. In the case of a keypanel that does not have DIP switches on its rear panel, "KP 7" will appear to indicate that the keypanel is a normally functioning keypanel.

Number	     Switch Settings

SW1-1	SW1-2	SW1-3

   0	Open	Open	Open

   1	Open	Closed	Open

   2	Closed	Closed	Open

   3	Same as 2

   4	Open	Open	Closed

   5	Open	Closed	Closed

   6	Closed	Closed	Closed

   7	Same as 6

Ok?

Indicates that the data device connected to the port is a keypanel with an unknown or earlier version of software.

OK TIF

Indicates that the data device connected to the port is a TIF Telephone Interface.

Communication Errors

The Error and BER columns show communication errors between the master controller and any data device connected to an intercom port. For further information, click here.


Enhanced Port Status Main Screen

Port Column

Indicates the intercom port number. These numbers cannot be changed. However, you can resize the intercom resources to display only the number of intercom ports that are available in your intercom system. For further information, click here.

Alpha Column

Indicates the alpha name that was assigned using Port Alpha Setup or Ctrl+F12 alpha editing.

Status Column

"--    --"

Two consecutive dashes indicate that there has never been any data communication with a device at the port.

Bad Cut:

Indicates that there was communication with a data device, but communication has stopped.

OK KP 1-7

Indicates that the device connected to the port is a normally functioning keypanel. The numbers 1-7 indicates the keypanel DIP switch settings for switches SW1-1 through SW1-3 on the keypanel rear panel as summarized in the table below. Refer to the keypanel's installation instructions for information on DIP switch settings. In the case of a keypanel that does not have DIP switches on its rear panel, "KP 7" will appear to indicate that the keypanel is a normally functioning keypanel.

Number	     Switch Settings

SW1-1	SW1-2	SW1-3

   0	Open	Open	Open

   1	Open	Closed	Open

   2	Closed	Closed	Open

   3	Same as 2

   4	Open	Open	Closed

   5	Open	Closed	Closed

   6	Closed	Closed	Closed

   7	Same as 6

Ok?

Indicates that the data device connected to the port is a keypanel with an unknown or earlier version of software.

OK TIF

Indicates that the data device connected to the port is a TIF Telephone Interface.

Poll Delay

Reports the current poll delay setting (set in keypanel setup, Edit button, Advanced tab).

Requests

Provides a running count of talk/listen key closures.

Power Ups

Provides a running count of how many times the connected device has been turned on.

KP Type

Reports the type of keypanel that is connected. If the port has been reserved for trunking, "Trunk Port" will display.


Master Controller Status Main Screen

You can use this screen to find out if an active master controller is functioning properly. You can also use this screen to update the master controller firmware. Updating the firmware lets you add new or custom features to your intercom system. Consult with your intercom dealer regarding this feature. The columns contain the following information:

MC Column

This column identifies the frame number for each active master controller. In a Zeus or ADAM CS intercom system, this number will always be 001. This is also the case for a single-frame ADAM system, or for a multi-frame ADAM system that uses Dual Bus Expansion (DBX) cards. In a multi-frame ADAM system that uses Single Bus Expansion (SBX) cards, the numbers indicate the following:

•	001 Active master controller in master frame

•	002 Active master controller in first slave frame

•	003 Active master controller in second slave frame

•	004 Active master controller in third slave frame

•	005 Active master controller in fourth slave frame

Slot Column

This column is not applicable for a Zeus Intercom System. For an ADAM or ADAM CS Intercom System, this indicates which of the 2 master controller slots is the active slot. (The other slot is currently the standby master controller slot. For status information on that slot, select Standby Controller from the Status menu.)

NOTE: 	In a multi-frame ADAM intercom system (with SBX cards), Slot identification is only provided for the active master controller in the master frame (frame 001).

Status Column

OK indicates that the master controller is functioning correctly. Anything else indicates a problem with the card.

Communication Error Columns

The Error and BER columns show communication errors between the master controller and the configuration PC. For further information, click here.


Standby Master Controller Status Main Screen

The information in the screen is identical to that found in the Master Controller Status screen, except that the Slot information will be reversed (if the Master Controller Status screen displays Right Slot, the Standby Master Controller slot will display Left Slot etc.). Also, you cannot update the standby master controller firmware from this screen. The normal procedure to update firmware is to update the active master controller first. Then when the update is completed, the system will switch slots: the standby master controller will become the active master controller and will be ready to update. For more information about updating the master controller firmware, click here.

Slot Column

n/a

Indicates that there is not a standby master controller card inserted in any slot.

Right or Left

Indicates which of the two available master controller card slots is currently the standby controller.

Status Column

"--    --"

Two consecutive dashes indicate that there has never been any data communication between the standby controller and the master controller during the current edit session. This could be because the device is not connected.

Bad Cut:

Indicates that there was a connection to the standby controller, but it is now not connected or there may be a power failure or other problem somewhere in the system.

OK Cur

Indicates that the standby controller is connected and operating, and that it has been updated with the current intercom system configuration.

OK Old

Indicates that the standby controller is connected and operating, but that it has not been updated with the current intercom system configuration.

Communication Error Columns

The Error and BER columns show communication errors between the master controller and the standby master controller. For further information, click here.


Trunk Master Status Main Screen

This table shows connection status and communication errors between the trunk master and the local ADAM or ADAM CS master controller card.

Status Column

"--    --"

Two consecutive dashes indicate that there has never been any data communication between the trunk master and the local master controller.

Bad Cut:

Indicates that there was a connection to the trunk master, but it is now not connected or there may be a power failure or other problem somewhere in the system.

OK Cur

Indicates that the trunk master is connected and operating, and that it has been updated with the current intercom system configuration.

OK Old

Indicates that the trunk master is connected and operating, but that it has not been updated with the current intercom system configuration.

Communication Error Columns

The Error and BER columns show communication errors between the master controller and the trunk master. For further information, click here.


Audio I/O and DBX Card Status Main Screen

You can use this screen to find out if Audio I/O Card and DBX cards are functioning properly. You can also use this screen to update the Audio I/O Card firmware. Updating the firmware lets you add new or custom features to your intercom system. Consult with your intercom dealer regarding this feature. The columns contain the following information:

I/O Column

This column identifies the frame number and slot number for AIO and DBX cards. For example “1: 001” signifies “frame 1, slot 1” In an ADAM CS or single-frame ADAM system, the frame number will always be 1.

Ports Column

If there are no card or an AIO card in a slot, the Ports column indicates which intercom ports would be contained on a card in that slot. If there is a DBX card in the slot, DBX will be indicated.

Status Column

“OK” indicates that there is a card in the slot and it is functioning correctly. Dashes indicate that no card was found in the slot. “Cur” indicates that the master controller has no new information to send to the card. Old indicates that something has been updated (for example a key has been pressed) and the master controller has not yet sent the information to the card. You may occasionally see the Old indication, but it will not normally persist for very long.

Communication Error Columns

The Error and BER columns show communication errors between the master controller and the card in each slot. For further information, click here.


PAP and LCP-102 Status

This table shows connection status and communication errors between Program Assign Panels and/or LCP-102's and the ADAM or ADAM CS master controller card. See Status Menu help for a general description of status tables and communication errors.

Status Column

"--    --"

Two consecutive dashes indicate that there has never been any data communication between a PAP or LCP-102 and the master controller during the current edit session. This could be because the PAP or LCP-102 is not connected.

Bad Cut:

Indicates that there was a connection to the PAP or LCP-102, but it is now not connected or there may be a power failure or other problem somewhere in the system.

OK PAP

Indicates that the Program Assign Panel or LCP-102 is connected and operating.

Communication Error Columns

The Error and BER columns show communication errors between the master controller and the PAP or LCP. For further information, click here.


UIO-256 Status

This table shows connection status and communication errors between a UIO-256 and the master controller card. If there are several UIO-256's interconnected in a ring configuration, the table will only show status and errors for the UIO-256 directly connected to the intercom system. See Status Menu help for a general description of status tables and communication errors.

Status Column

"--    --"

Two consecutive dashes indicate that there has never been any data communication between the UIO-256 and the master controller during the current edit session. This could be because the device is not connected.

Bad Cut:

Indicates that there was a connection to the UIO-256, but it is now not connected or there may be a power failure or other problem somewhere in the system.

OK Cur

Indicates that the UIO-256 is connected and operating, and that it has been updated with the current intercom system configuration.

OK Old

Indicates that the UIO-256 is connected and operating, but that it has not been updated with the current intercom system configuration.

Communication Error Columns

The Error and BER columns show communication errors between the master controller and the UIO-256. For further information, click here.


KP-32 Key Assignment Notes

NOTE: 	This help information appears if you press F1 while viewing a keypanel port that is configured for use with a KP-32 Keypanel, AND the Default View is set to View by Panel Type. For information on the Keypanel / Ports main screen click here.

An Intercom Port set for use with a KP-32 Keypanel

Selecting View by Panel Type

View by Panel Type

In view by Panel Type mode, all 32 keys on the KP-32 will display on one screen. In this mode, it is not possible to display the talk, listen, and talk level 2 assignments all at the same time. Therefore, a selection arrow will appear at the upper-right corner of the key group. Click on the arrow to select which type of keys you want to assign.

Selecting the type of keys to assign

Click on the selection arrow, and then select the type of keys that you want to assign. The name for the type you select will appear above the keys at the left side of the screen.

NOTE: 	More levels will display if you have set that up in the Intercom Configuration (Options menu).

View by Setup Page

In view by Setup Page mode, only 16 keys on the KP-32 will display in one screen. However, you can assign talk, listen, and talk level 2 all in the same screen as for any other keypanel. To assign the first 16 keys, select the setup page that is currently assigned to the main keypanel.

KP-32 Keys 1-16 Selected (Top Row Keys)

To assign the remaining 16 keys, select the setup page that is currently assigned to expansion panel Exp1.

KP-32 Keys 17- 32 Selected (Bottom Row Keys)


IFB Listen Source Main Screen

This screen lists the IFB Listen Sources and Tone Override Inputs for all IFBs. To view all of the other IFB settings, press Ctrl+Tab on the computer keyboard. To change the settings for an IFB, click to select it in the list, then press Enter (or double-click). This will open the Edit IFB dialog.

IFB Description

IFB Setup Procedures


IFB Listen Destination Main Screen

This screen lets you view and change the IFB listen destinations for intercom ports. Each intercom port is listed in the Listener Alpha column. The corresponding listen destination is listed in the Output Alpha column. By default, each intercom port is its own listen destination for IFB listening. You can redirect IFB listening away from the keypanel's speaker or headphones and to a monitor speaker or similar device connected to some other intercom port. This is useful when several people besides the director need to monitor the talent during IFB operation.

Example: Redirect IFB listen away from intercom port 2 and to intercom port 12.

1.	In the Listener Alpha column, select the intercom port that you want to redirect. In this example, intercom port 2.

2.	In the Port text box or Port Alpha list box, select the port where you want to send the IFB listen audio. In this example, port 12.

3.	Click Set Listen Output.

4.	The new IFB destination will appear in the Output Alpha column.

5.	When you send your changes to the intercom system, the IFB talent will now be heard at the new destination when the operator at the Listener keypanel operator activates an IFB listen key.

NOTE: 	You can also change the IFB Listen Destination for a particular intercom port in the Keypanels / Ports setup screen. Click the KP button on the toolbar. Select the intercom port that you want to redirect. Click the Edit button. Select the Advanced tab. Select the port where you want to send IFB listen audio in the IFB Listen Destination field. Click OK to close the Edit window, and then send your changes to the intercom system.

IFB Description

IFB Setup Procedures


DBX Link Status Main Screen

The DBX Link status screen consists of 6 columns:

DBX Column

The DBX cards are listed by frame and slot number. For example 1: 009 indicates frame 1, card slot number 9.

Status Column

Any of the following indications can be given:

<2 dashes>: card is not talking

OK Active: card is talking, and is active card in frame

OK Standby: card is talking, and is standby card in frame

OK: card is talking, but is neither active nor standby

Link A and Link B Columns

Any of the following indications can be given:

<2 dashes>: the link is down

OK #: the link is up (for # hops)

OK ALL: the link is up (for ALL hops)

The hops count indicates how many consecutive links are up. For instance, if card 1:009 reports Link A status of “OK 3 hops”, that means that it could send a message out its Link A and that message could travel up to three hops before coming to a down link. (A “hop” means the jump from one DBX card to another, and to continue a hop the receiving DBX card turns around and transmits the message out its other port).

OK ALL means that all links are up (in this case every card’s link status should read OK ALL).

Audio A and Audio B Columns

Any of the following indications can be given:

<dash>: this link is not being used for audio

###-###	: this link is being used for the timeslots indicated

Example 1

The following information would be displayed for a 2-frame system without redundant DBX cards. There is one DBX card per frame (in slot 9). Both DBX cards are “active” in their frame, and ALL links are up.

DBX       Status        Link A   Link B    Audio A   Audio B

1:009   OK Active   OK ALL   OK ALL        -         129-252

2:009   OK Active   OK ALL   OK ALL        -         001-124

Link A is not being used for audio in either direction. Link B, in frame 1, is being used to drive timeslots 129-252 from frame 2, and Link B in frame 2, is being used to drive timeslots 1-124 from frame 1.

Note that in systems where there is only 1 DBX card per frame (2 frame, and 3 frames systems without redundant controllers), and if test audio is enabled, then only 124 timeslots can be forwarded between frames. A DBX link can forward 128 timeslots, but test audio requires 4 timeslots per link. In the 256x256 (2 frame), and 384x384 (3 frame) systems which have only 1 DBX card per frame, all timeslots per link are needed for audio, but if test audio is enabled, the last 4 timeslots in each frame are not available.

This means that the last four ports in each frame can listen to, but not talk to ports in other frames. Similarly, ports in other frames can talk to, but not listen to the last four ports in each frame. Within any frame, any port can talk or listen to any other port in that frame, the timeslots are only lost going between frames.

Test Audio is artificially generated audio by the DBX that it can produce, publish, forward, receive, and test. It is used by the DBX to ensure that the links are passing valid audio between frames. If the DBX detects that the link is up, but that the audio is corrupt, the DBX tears down the link and builds it up again.

Example 2

DBX        Status       Link A   Link B   Audio A   Audio B

1:009   OK Active      OK 1      -  -        129-252        -

2:009   OK Active      OK 1      -  -        001-124        -

In this example, the link connecting Port B of 1:9 to Port B of 2:9 has been broken. The audio automatically switched over to the A links, and the “hop” count for the A links shows 1 instead of ALL.

Note that even though this intercom is called a 2 frame non-redundant system, it actually has redundant audio because both links go between frame 1 and 2. The intercom does not have redundant control because there is only one DBX card per frame, and if any card fails, connectivity is lost.

Note that it is possible for the audio from frame 1 to frame 2 to be carried on one link while audio in the other direction is carried on another link.


Trunk Inspection

There is a two-column list box on the left side of this screen. The first column lists the port numbers in this intercom that are defined as Trunk ports in the Trunk Master. The second column lists the alpha for each Trunk port.

When you select (highlight) a Trunk Port in this list, AZedit performs a Trunk Inspection, and displays the results on the right side of the screen.

The right side of the screen is divided into four quadrants. The upper two quadrants are used to show trunk definitions, and the lower two quadrants are used to show trunk assignments.

When you select a Trunk Port from the list the upper left quadrant will show the trunk definition involving this port. It shows the trunk number and the intercom and port on each end of the trunk. The trunk definition is made in the Trunk Master.

If this trunk is in use the lower two quadrants will show the key assignments on each end of the trunk. Normally a trunk is used to allow a port in one intercom to talk to a port (or another resource, like a PL or IFB) in another intercom. If the port on one end of the trunk decides to call another resource in the same intercom as his first call it is possible to re-use the same trunk through a process called “forking”.

A trunk can be “forked” on only one end, that is, one end of the trunk can have multiple (up to eight) key assignments and the other end must only have one assignment. You cannot fork a trunk at both ends because there would be no way to sort out the audio for all the involved ports.

For example:

A and B are in intercom 1. C and D are in intercom 2. If A calls C and D, a trunk is forked with A on one end and C and D on the other end. If B then calls D and the same trunk is used, there is no way to prevent C from also hearing B because the trunk is carrying audio from both A and B, and since A is talking to C, there is no way to separate A’s audio from B’s audio.

The lower left quadrant shows the assignments for one end of the trunk and the lower right quadrant shows the assignments for the other end of the trunk (only one end will be able to show more than one assignments).

Beside each assignment there are indicators to show whether that assignment is talking, or listening to the assignment on the other side of the trunk. The indicators are gray if there is no talk or listen, and red if there is a talk or listen. There is also a special case where there is no keypanel connected (indicated by yellow).


Auto Dials Resource Screen

The Auto Dial resources are used to make TIF dialing easier for end users. Each Auto Dial resource has the following data associated with it:

•	An alpha

•	An alias

•	A description

•	Scroll enables

•	A phone number

An Auto Dial resource can be programmed onto a panel key, but only on Talk Level 2 when there is already a port assignment on Talk Level 1. Typically this port assignment will be a TIF port.

When the user presses a key with a TIF port and Auto Dial assignment, the Auto Dial phone number is displayed in the keypanel menu window and the user is given the option to automatically have the TIF go off-hook and dial this phone number.

On both the KP-12 and KP-32 panels if there is a TIF port on Talk Level 1 and an Auto Dial on Talk Level 2, the panel will display the alpha for the Auto Dial instead of the TIF (normally only the alpha for Talk Level 1 is displayed).

This screen presents a tabular display (like the IFB and ISO screens). The first column displays the resource number. The second column displays the alpha. The third column displays the scroll enables. The fourth column displays the phone number.

If you press enter or double click on a row in the table an “edit dialog” will appear.


Group Call Screen

This screen is very similar to the Special List screen. Only one Group is displayed at a time and there is a list box, which shows which ports, are members of the Group. The Add, Remove, and Selection buttons function the same as on the Special List screen. A box is provided to change Scroll Enables.

Instead of displaying Relay information (as is done in the Special List screen), there is an area provided to change group options.

The first check box “Switch Audio to P.A.”, when checked, will route the audio from a group call to a speaker associated with a Large Panel Display.

The second check box “2nd Call Tally”, when checked, will allow a group member who already is in a private conversation from a previously answered page to still receive tallies from new pages.

The third check box “2nd Call to Keypanel”, when checked, will allow a group member who already is in a private conversation from a previously answered page to still hear audio from new pages. NOTE: This option is disabled if the first check box “Switch Audio to P.A.” is checked.

The fourth check box “Merge New Calls”, when checked, will allow subsequent calls between two groups that are already in a private conversation to be merged together. NOTE: Only one of the groups involved must have the “Merge New Calls” option checked.


Remote Intercom Status

This screen shows a two-column list box on the right hand side. The first column lists the remote intercom names. The second column displays the communications status for each intercom (either OK or -).

There are four operations that can be performed from this screen, as indicated by the four radio button options on the right side of the screen. Depending on which intercom is highlighted in the list, the text description of options 1 and 3 changes.

The four options available are:

1.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

2.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

3.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in the selected intercom, where the resources are scroll restricted.

4.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in all intercoms, where the resources are scroll restricted.

The first two options refer to the case where an intercom that used to be in service has been removed from service (disconnected from the Trunk Master). These options allow you to remove all key assignments for a disconnected intercom (or intercoms) from all keypanels in your intercom.

The last two options refer to the case where remote resources that had been available to this intercom, and had been programmed onto keys, are now scroll restricted and are not available to this intercom. These options allow you to remove restricted resource key assignments from all keypanels in your intercom.

Once one of the four options is selected and the Clear button is pressed a dialog will appear asking for confirmation of the clearing action. By clicking on the OK button you will acknowledge that the clear command should be carried out. If you wish to cancel the operation, click on the Cancel button.


Assigning Names (Alphas) for Intercom Ports

Port Description

Intercom ports have default names N001, N002 etc. These names are also called “Alphas” because when you assign keypanel keys, these are the names that will appear in the alphanumeric displays above the keypanel keys (on keypanels so equipped). You will almost always want to change the default names to names that are more meaningful to keypanel operators. You can also add brief descriptions to help you keep track of what your intercom ports are being used for. There are 2 ways to assign names for intercom ports

•	If you want to assign several names at the same time, click the Port Alpha button on the toolbar at the bottom of the screen. Then, if you need further help, press the F1 key on your computer keyboard, or click here.

•	If you just want to change the name for a particular intercom port while you are viewing the keypanel setup screen for that port, press Ctrl+F12. Note: this feature will only work if it is activated in the application preferences. To find out if the feature is activated, close all dialogs. Then, select Preferences in the Options menu and click on the Alphas tab. There should be a check next to Allow alpha edit from any view (CTRL+F12). If not, click to insert a check mark, and then click Apply and OK. You should now be able to use the Ctrl+F12 feature.


Keypanel Setup, General Procedure

Keypanel setup consists of the following general steps:

1.	Select an intercom port that you want to set up for use with a keypanel. Use either of the following methods to select a port:

•	Type the port number in the Port text box in the upper-left corner of the screen, then press Enter on the computer keyboard.

•	Select the port name (alpha) in the Alpha list box.

NOTE: If all key assignments are disabled (grayed out) on the selected intercom port, and “Trunk Port” displays at the top of the screen, this means the port is reserved for trunking and cannot be used for any other purpose. To reclaim the port, you must run CStrunk and remove the trunking allocation.

2.	Check and / or change various keypanel properties by clicking the Edit button.

This will open the Keypanel / Port Configuration dialog.

3.	Check basic settings by clicking on the Setup tab.

4.	Check the advanced settings by clicking the Advanced tab.

NOTE: While viewing Setup or Advanced settings, press F1 if you need help. Then press the Back button at the top of the help window to return to this topic when finished.

NOTE: While editing Setup or Advanced settings, you can click Apply at any time to enter your changes and then continue making changes.

5.	Exit the Keypanel / Port Configuration dialog when finished by clicking either OK (to record changes) or Cancel (to cancel all changes made since opening the dialog or clicking the Apply button). You should now be viewing the Keypanels / Ports main screen again.

6.	Start assigning keys.

7.	To prevent a keypanel operator from changing a key assignment, click on the Restrict checkbox (R) above that key assignment. (Or press Ctrl+R on the computer keyboard while the key assignment is selected.)

NOTE: You may wish to set all of the restriction check boxes for all setup pages at all intercom ports. You can do this quite easily using the Copy and Paste Special commands. For more information, click here. (Use the Back button in help to return here when finished.)

8.	Some keypanels feature electronic key latching. To disable latching for a key assignment, click on the Disable check box (D) above that key assignment. (Or, press Ctrl+D on the computer keyboard while the key assignment is selected.)

9.	Repeat steps 4-6 for all other setup pages that you want to use.

NOTE: Even if expansion panels are not connected, you can still assign the keys on more than one setup page. Then, by changing the page assigned to the main keypanel, you can instantly change the key assignments on the keypanel.

10.	There may be occasions where you need to reduce or increase the volume level of certain key assignments relative to other key assignments. For example, the keypanel operator may want to monitor a party line, but at a lower level than the normal intercom volume. Or, the keypanel operator may want to listen to background music coming from some intercom input port, but at a reduced level. You can make these types of adjustments using the gain button.

11.	Use the Scroll Enable check boxes to control who can assign this intercom port to keypanel keys.

This completes the Keypanel Setup Procedure.

12.	Save your changes and/or send them to the intercom system.

NOTE: If your intercom system uses any keypanels that do not have alphanumeric displays, you may wish to print out designation strips for those keypanels. You can then insert the designation strips into the keypanels to identify the key assignments. To print out designation strips for a keypanel, select Print from the File menu. Then, if you need help with the Print command, press the F1 key, or click here.

NOTE: The Port Status indicators provide information about keypanel operation in ONLINE mode. Other indications are also provided. For further information see view keypanel activity.


Assigning Names for Party Lines

Party Line Description

Party lines have default names PL01, PL02 etc. You can change these to names that are more meaningful to keypanel operators. You can also add brief descriptions to help you keep track of what your party lines are being used for. Then, press the F1 key on your computer keyboard if you need further help, or click here.


Moving a User to a New Intercom Port

As you set up your intercom system, you will establish many types of relationships between intercom ports and the other types of intercom resources. The most obvious relationships are the point-to-point key assignments that let users talk to one-another. If you move a user from one intercom port to another, you will have to search the intercom system and find all keys at all other intercom ports that are assigned to talk or listen to the user at the old port. Then, you will have to update these keys to the new port where the user is connected. If the user was also defined in one or more party lines, special lists, IFBs or ISOs, you will have to update those as well. In order to make sure that all affected resources are properly updated the following procedure is suggested. In many cases, you may skip the first 8 steps if you are certain that the user is not associated with any of these resources.

Check for participation in party lines, IFBs etc.

1.	Check for party line participation:

Access party line setup. Check all party lines that are currently set up in your intercom system. If the user is a member of a party line, remove it from the PL Talker and/or PL Listener lists. If you know the new port number to which the user will be connected, select that port and add it to the PL Talker and/or PL Listener lists.

2.	Check for IFB participation:

Access IFB setup, then scroll down the IFB list and check to see if the old port is included in any of the Input or Output columns. If it is, double-click on that IFB, and change the port setting from the old port to the new port.

3.	Check for GPI Output participation:

Access GPI Output setup, then scroll down the list of GPI Outputs and check to see if the old port is included in any of the Input or Output columns. If it is, double-click on that GPI Output, and change the port setting from the old port to the new port.

4.	Check for ISO participation. Access ISO setup.

5.	Check for GPI Input participation. Access GPI Input setup.

6.	Check for UPL statement participation. Access UPL setup.

7.	Check for Dim table participation. Access Dim Table setup.

8.	Check for forced or inhibited crosspoint participation. Access Crosspoint Status.

9.	Check for key assignments

10.	Access search by any of the following means:

•	Press Ctrl-f on the computer keyboard

•	Select Search for Key Assignment from the Edit menu

•	Click the Search button

11.	In the Search for Key Assignment dialog box, click the radio button for the type of key assignment that you want to search for (in this case, Port).

12.	In the list at the right side of the dialog box, click the name of the user that you want to move.

13.	Click on Do Search. Or, just double-click on the name.
A Key Assignment Search Results list will appear. This list contains the names of all ports that have keys assigned to the target user.

14.	Click the first name in the list, and then click on Go To Panel. Or, just double-click on the first name in the list.
The Keypanel / Ports edit screen will open for the chosen port.

15.	Click on the key that has the assignment that you are searching for.

NOTE: Sometimes, there may not appear to be a key assigned to the target user. In this case select another setup page in the Page list box. You might have to check all 4 setup pages to locate the target user key.

16.	With the key selected, click the Gain button and check the Point-to-Point Listen Gain.
The default Gain setting should be +0.0 dB. If the setting is different, note the setting, then reset it to +0.0 dB.

17.	Click OK to exit.

18.	Use the normal key assignment procedure to change the key assignment. You should enter the name of the new intercom port to which the user will be connected. (It does not matter if that port currently has the wrong name.)

NOTE: After the key has been reassigned, you may want to reset the listen gain if the default setting as not used previously.

19.	With the key selected, click the Gain button again and change the Gain to the setting that you noted in step 6.

20.	Click OK to exit.

21.	Repeat the above steps until all intercom ports in the search list have been changed.

22.	Now, move the user’s configuration information (key assignments, restrictions, etc.) to the new intercom port. (If there is no configuration information, skip steps 8-12.) Click on the KP button on the toolbar.

23.	Select the user’s old port name in the Alpha list box.

24.	From the edit menu, select Copy. Or, press Ctrl-c on the computer keyboard.

25.	Select the user’s new intercom port in the Alpha box.

26.	Select Paste from the edit menu. Or, press Ctrl-v on the computer keyboard. The user’s information should now appear in the new intercom port.

27.	Using the normal procedure to assign names (alphas) for intercom ports, remove the user’s name from the old intercom port, and change the name of the new port to the user’s name.

28.	Save your changes.

29.	Send the changes to the intercom system.

NOTE: Do not forget to disconnect the user’s intercom cable from the old intercom port, and connect it to the new port.

This completes the procedure to move a user. All personnel who could previously communicate with the user at the old location should now be able to communicate with the user at the new location.


Assigning Keys

1.	Right-click on the combo box for the talk or listen key that you want to assign. (Or, position the cursor in the box, then press Ctrl+Enter.)
The Select Key Assignment dialog box appears.

NOTE: If you are assigning keys on a KP-32 Keypanel, review the notes regarding differences between KP-32 setup and other keypanels.

2.	In the Select Key Assignment dialog box, click the desired type of assignment in the left-most column:

•	Port

•	Party Line

•	IFB

•	Special List

•	GPI Output

•	ISO

•	UPL Resource

•	Special Function

3.	Once you select a type of key assignment, select the desired name from the list in the right-most column.

4.	Click OK. Or, just double-click the desired name.
The Select Key Assignment dialog box will close, and the name that you selected will appear in the combo box on the Keypanels / Ports screen.

NOTES:

•	For the setup page that is assigned to the main keypanel, you cannot assign or use key 16, as this is used for incoming messages (this is also referred to as the call waiting window, or CWW). For all other setup pages, you may assign and use key 16.

•	If you are working with keypanels and expansion panels that have more or less than 16 keys, we strongly recommend that you set the Default View (Edit button, Setup tab) to by Panel Type and not by Setup Page. However, if you are using view by Setup Page note that you can switch to view by Panel Type by pressing Ctrl+Tab.

•	You can also assign a key by positioning the cursor in the key assignment text box and then typing the name.  However, if there are any duplicate alphas in your intercom system, the key may take on the wrong assignment.

•	After you assign a talk key, you will notice that a new key assignment text box activates under the talk key (except the KP-32 in View by Panel Type mode). This can be used for a second key assignment that will activate along with the first key assignment. This is referred to as a level-2 talk key.

If more than 2 talk levels have been defined in the intercom configuration (or if you are working with a KP-32 in View by Panel Type mode) you will also see a scroll arrow at the right side of the screen. Use this scroll arrow to select which talk levels you want to view.

•	In many cases, we recommend one of the Special Function key assignments (particularly the auto-follow special function) for your listen keys.

Back to Keypanel Setup General Procedure


Ctrl-c

Press and hold down the “Ctrl” key, then press the “c” key. Now, release both keys.


Ctrl-v

Press and hold down the “Ctrl” key, then press the “v” key. Now, release both keys.


Ctrl-f

Press and hold down the “Ctrl” key, then press the “f” key. Now, release both keys.


IFB Priority Setup

IFB Priority Description

NOTE: You can use the IFB Priorities setup screen to set the IFB priorities for several keypanels at the same time. You can also set the IFB priority for an individual keypanel during keypanel setup.

1.	From the list box in the center of the screen, select one or more ports using any of the following methods:

•	to select an individual port, click on that port

•	to select several consecutive ports, click and drag the mouse down the list; or click the first name, then shift-click to select the last name

•	to select several random ports, hold down the control key then click on the desired ports

•	to select or de-select all ports, click on the Select All or De-select All button on the left side of the screen

•	to select all ports that are not currently selected, click the Invert Selections button

2.	Set the IFB priority for the selected ports by clicking one of the buttons on the left side of the screen.

3.	Repeat the above steps for additional ports or groups of ports.

This completes the IFB Priority setup procedure. Remember to save your changes and send them to the intercom system.


Assigning Names (Alphas) for IFBs

IFB Description

IFBs have default names IF01, IF02 etc. You can change these to names that are more meaningful to keypanel operators. You can also add brief descriptions to help you keep track of what your IFBs are being used for. You can assign a name to an IFB during IFB setup by using Ctrl+F12 alpha editing.


Assigning Names (Alphas) for Special Lists

Special List Description

Special lists have default names SL01, SL02 etc. You can change these to names that are more meaningful to keypanel operators. You can also add brief descriptions to help you keep track of what your special lists are being used for. You can assign a name to a special list during special list setup by using Ctrl+F12 alpha editing.


Assigning Names (Alphas) for GPI Outputs

GPI Description

GPI outputs have default names RY01, RY02 etc. You can change these to names that are more meaningful to keypanel operators. You can also add brief descriptions to help you keep track of what your GPI outputs are being used for. You can assign a name to a GPI output during GPI output setup by using Ctrl+F12 alpha editing.


Assigning Names (Alphas) for ISOs

ISO Description

ISOs have default names IS01, IS02 etc. You can change these to names that are more meaningful to keypanel operators. You can also add brief descriptions to help you keep track of what your ISOs are being used for. You can assign a name to an ISO during ISO setup by using Ctrl+F12 alpha editing.


Assigning Names (Alphas) for UPL Resources

UPL Resource Description

UPL resources have default names U001, U002 etc. You can change these to names that are more meaningful to keypanel operators. You can also add brief descriptions to help you keep track of what your UPL resources are being used for.


Assigning Descriptions for GPI Inputs

GPI Description

GPI inputs do not have names, since they are never assigned directly to intercom keys. However, you can add brief descriptions for GPI inputs to help you keep track of what they are being used for. You can assign a description to a GPI input during GPI input setup by using Ctrl+F12 alpha editing.


Assigning Descriptions for Inter-panel Dims

Inter-panel Dims Description

Inter-panel Dims do not have names, since they are never assigned directly to intercom keys. However, you can add brief descriptions for Inter-panel Dims to help you keep track of what they are being used for. You can assign a description to an Inter-panel Dim table during Dim table setup by using Ctrl+F12 alpha editing.


Panel Poll Delay Activation

1.	In the Options menu at the top of the screen, click on Preferences.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.

3.	Select Enable panel poll delay support.

4.	Click Apply.

5.	Click OK.
Panel poll delay should now be adjustable in the Keypanel / Ports Advanced Information dialog.


Merging

Use Merge with partial setup files that have been previously saved using partial save.


How to Enable Trunking

1.	Close all open dialogs.

2.	In the Options menu, select Preferences.

3.	Click the Advanced tab and select Enable trunking support.

4.	Click Apply, and then OK.
Trunking should now be enabled in all views. You do not need to send this change to the intercom system.


Alpha and Alias Settings in the INI File

NOTE: AZedit Versions 2.0 or higher do not use an .ini, rather reference the preferences in the registry editor on your computer. You can access the Preferences through the Options menu in AZedit.

The following items correspond to the Alphas settings, which are located on the Options menu, under Preferences. Making changes in the AZedit.ini file can only activate some of these settings. This file is located in the AZedit folder of your computer. You can make changes in a text editor, such as Windows Notepad. After you open the file in the text editor, scroll down to the [alphas] settings. The [alphas] settings are summarized below, with default settings shown. After making changes, save the file as a text-only file in the same location and with the same name.

[alphas]

EnableMultiSizeSupport=N

•	N=The Default alpha size list box and the Show all alias sizes on alpha views check box are not selectable, and all alphas will have the number of characters set under DefaultAlphaSize (below).

•	Y=The Default alpha size list box is selectable, giving several alpha character lengths to choose from for the default. Also, the Show all alias sizes on alpha views check box is selectable.

ShowAllSizes=N

•	N=The Show all alias sizes on alpha views check box is not checked

•	Y=The Show all alias sizes on alpha views check box is checked

AllowAlphaEditFromAllViews=Y

•	N=Ctrl+F12 cannot be used to change alphas

•	Y=Ctrl+F12 can be used to change alphas

DefaultAlphaSize=4

•	Sets the number of characters for alphas (4 is default, with options of 6- and 8-character alphas.)

AlphaSortMode=3

•	3=Sort alphas by number (ascending)

•	1=Sort alphas by alpha (ascending)

AutoCheckDuplicateAlphas=Y

•	N=No checking for duplicate alphas is performed when opening files

•	Y=Check for duplicate alphas is performed when opening files

PromptBeforeAutoCheck=Y

•	N=Duplicate alpha checking proceeds automatically, with no prompting

•	Y=User must respond to prompt before duplicate alpha checking will proceed


Connecting and Disconnecting

Connecting from FILE Mode (when FILE displays in lower-right corner of screen)

Select Connect in the Online menu or click the Connect button.

Three Methods to Disconnect from ONLINE Mode (when ONLINE displays in lower-right corner of screen)

•	Select New from the File menu or click the New button.

•	Select Open from the File menu or click the Open button....

...then open a file from disk.

•	Select Save from the File menu or click the Save button...

...then save the online configuration. When given the option to stay online or enter file mode, choose to enter file mode.

Disconnecting from SERVER Mode (when SERVER displays in lower-right corner of screen)

If you have activated SERVER mode, then you must turn this feature off if you want to disconnect from the intercom system and continue working. First, click on Server Mode in the Online menu to remove the check mark. Then, use any of the three methods listed above to disconnect in ONLINE mode.

Connect at Startup Option

By default AZedit will try to connect to an intercom system upon startup. If you do not want to do this, change the startup settings as follows:

1.	In the Options menu at the top of the screen, select Preferences.

2.	In the Application Preferences window, select the Startup / Shutdown tab.

3.	De-select Auto-connect at startup and Auto enter SERVER mode.

4.	Click Apply.

5.	Click OK.
The application will now start in FILE mode.

Capabilities Conflict Message

After the application connects to the intercom system, you may see the warning message “Capabilities Conflict”. This may happen if you are connecting for the first time, or if you have updated the master controller firmware. Typically, you should just select “Yes, reconfigure AZedit”. However, you may also want to read the topic Intercom Configuration Notes for AZedit Users in the Welcome screen.

Trouble Connecting?

1.	Check that the intercom system power is ON, and verify that the PC to intercom cable is properly connected.
Refer to the cable information in your Intercom System Installation Manual.

NOTE: Connecting the intercom cable while components are operating is not recommended and could cause unpredictable results, including inability of the computer to communicate with the intercom system. You may have to restart the computer and/or reset the master controller in the intercom system.

2.	Check that the COM Port and Baud Rate, or the USB cable is secure at each end, or the Network connection and IP are working correctly.
In the Options menu, select Communications, and verify that the settings match those of the intercom system. By default, AZedit is set for COM1 and 38,400 kbps (38.4K baud). The baud rate set in AZedit must match the baud rate setting of the master controllers in the ADAM or ADAM CS frame (DIP switch #1). The 38,4000 kbps setting provides the fastest possible file uploads and downloads, but you may experience more communication errors operating at this speed than at a lower baud rate setting. Cable lengths of 30-50 ft (9-15 meters) have been used successfully with the 38,4000 kpbs setting. However, this may not always work under all operating conditions. If you suspect that you are experiencing communication problems operating at this speed, check the Master Controller Status screen (Status menu). Rapid accumulations of communication errors will be indicated in the right side of that screen. In such cases, check cable construction, or cable routing, or use a shorter cable. Try to find a remedy which will still permit operation at 38,4000 kbps.


Scroll Enable Setup using Copy and Paste Special

Scroll Enable Description

You can disable or enable scrolling for all destinations of a particular type (Ports, Party Lines, etc.) using the Copy and Paste Special commands. The procedure varies slightly, depending on the destination type:

Scroll Enable Setup for all Intercom Ports

1.	If the application is running in ONLINE mode or SERVER mode, exit this mode and enter FILE mode.

Hint: If you want to change all Scroll Enable settings in the ONLINE configuration, save the ONLINE configuration to disk, then open it in FILE mode and change the Scroll Enable settings as described below. Resave the file when finished. Then connect to the intercom system and use send file to update the intercom system.

2.	Close all open dialogs, and then access keypanel setup.
When you access keypanel setup, you will be viewing the setup for some intercom port. It does not matter which intercom port is selected.

3.	Set the Scroll Enable check boxes the way you want them to appear for all intercom ports. In this example, the default check mark next to Local has been removed. (All other types of scrolling are inactive because the example system does not use trunking or an LCP-102.)

4.	In the Edit menu at the top of the screen, select Copy.
This copies all settings for the intercom port, including the Scroll Enable settings.

5.	In the Edit menu, select Paste Special.
The Paste Special dialog appears. Initially, all items will be selected in the Paste Special dialog. This means that if you click Paste at this time, all settings for the current intercom port will be pasted. However, you only want to paste the Scroll Enable setting(s).

6.	Click Clear All, and then, select the Scroll Enable check boxes.
Note that in this case, you are not activating the Scroll Enable setting(s) you are just selecting items to paste.

7.	In the Destination field, select All Ports, and then click Paste.
If you follow this example, you should now note that the Local check box is unchecked for all intercom ports.

NOTE: If Paste cannot be selected, you may still be in ONLINE mode. Enter FILE mode, and repeat the proceeding steps as needed.

Scroll Enable Setup for all Party Lines or all Special Lists

1.	If the application is running in ONLINE mode or SERVER mode, exit this mode and enter FILE mode.

Hint: If you want to change all Scroll Enable settings in the ONLINE configuration, save the ONLINE configuration to disk, then open it in FILE mode and change the Scroll Enable settings as described below. Resave the file when finished. Then connect to the intercom system and use send file to update the intercom system.

2.	Close all open dialogs, and then access party line setup or special list setup .

NOTE: The following steps use party line setup as an example. If you want to change special lists, just substitute special list for party line.

When you access party line setup, you will be viewing the setup for a party line. It does not matter which party line is selected.

3.	Select the Scroll Enable check boxes the way you want them to appear for all party lines. In this example, all scrolling has been disabled.

4.	In the Edit menu at the top of the screen, select Copy.

5.	In the Edit menu, select Paste Special.
The Paste Special dialog appears.

6.	Select the Scroll Enable check boxes if they are not already selected.
Note that in this case, you are not activating the Scroll Enable setting(s) you are just selecting items to paste.

7.	In the Destination field, select All.

8.	Click Paste.
It may take a few moments to paste the Scroll Enable settings from the currently selected party line to all other party lines. If you follow this example, you should note that the Local check box is now unchecked for all party lines.

NOTE: If Paste cannot be selected, you may still be in ONLINE mode. Enter FILE mode, and repeat the proceeding steps as needed.

Scroll Enable Setup for all IFBs, or all GPI Output, or all ISO’s, or all UPL Resources

1.	If the application is running in ONLINE mode or SERVER mode, exit this mode and enter FILE mode.

Hint: If you want to change all Scroll Enable settings in the ONLINE configuration, save the ONLINE configuration to disk, then open it in FILE mode and change the Scroll Enable settings as described below. Resave the file when finished. Then connect to the intercom system and use send file to update the intercom system.

2.	Close all open dialogs, and then access IFB setup, or GPI OUT setup, or ISO setup, or UPL Resource setup.

NOTE: The following steps use IFB setup as an example. If you want to change GPI Output setup instead, just substitute GPI Output for IFB. The same applies for ISO setup or UPL Resource setup.

3.	Double-click any row in the IFB list.
It does not matter which row. The Edit IFB dialog appears.

4.	In the Edit IFB dialog, select the Scroll Enable check box(s) the way you want them to appear for every IFB. In this example, all scrolling has been disabled.

5.	Click Done.

6.	Make sure the same IFB is still highlighted in the IFB list, and then in the Edit menu at the top of the screen, select Copy.

7.	In the Edit menu, select Paste Special.
The Paste Special dialog appears.

8.	Select the Scroll Enable check box(s) if they are not already selected. Note that in this case, you are not activating the Scroll Enable setting(s) you are just selecting items to paste.

9.	In the Destination field, select All.

10.	Click Paste.
It may take a few moments to paste the Scroll Enable settings from the currently selected IFB to every other IFB. If you follow this example, you should note that the Local check box is now unchecked for all IFBs.

NOTE: If Paste cannot be selected, you may still be in ONLINE mode. Enter FILE mode, and repeat the proceeding steps as needed.

Other Examples of Copy and Paste Special

Assigning Auto-Follow to All Listen Keys

Restricting All Intercom Keys at All Intercom Ports

Restricting All Setup Pages at All Intercom Ports


Downloading Firmware Updates

Master Controller Firmware Update

Audio I/O Card Firmware Update

How to Download Firmware to Multiple Cards

Keypanel Firmware Update

Updating a Master Controller Firmware

Caution: The following procedure will cause one or more brief disruptions in intercom communications. Also, save your intercom system configuration before proceeding. (Use Save on the File menu. Then later, if you need to restore the intercom configuration from disk, use Send File in the Online menu.)

Master Controller Update, Part 1: All Intercom Systems

1.	Connect to the intercom system, and make sure that SERVER mode is deactivated.

2.	If you have not already done so, open the Master Controller Status screen.

NOTE: You can also perform this procedure from the Master Controller Version Information screen, but the procedure is written using the Master Controller Status screen, since that screen provides slightly more feedback during the update process. As an option, you can access both screens and then switch back and forth between them using the Go Back and Go Forward buttons.

3.	Select the master controller that you want to update:

•	ADAM CS, or Single-Frame ADAM: There is only one master controller, and it should already be selected. If not, click to select it.

•	Multi-frame ADAM Systems with Slave Frame Master Controllers (Non DBX Systems): Select ONLY the master controllers for all slave frames. These are numbered 002, 003 etc. Do not select the master controller for the master frame (001). To select the master controllers in all slave frames, click on the 002 master controller to select it. Then, hold down the Shift key on the computer keyboard and click on the last slave master controller in the list.

4.	Make sure AZedit is the active window, and not the help file.
(Click anywhere on the AZedit window to make it the active window.)

5.	Press Ctrl+Shift+D on the computer keyboard or right click on the master controller and select Firmware Download.
This opens the Firmware Download dialog.

NOTE: If Ctrl+Shift+D does not work, firmware download may be disabled. To enable this feature, go to the Options menu and select Preferences. Then, click on the Advanced tab. In the Advanced settings, place a check next to Allow firmware download, then click Apply. Click OK to exit. You should now be able to use the firmware download feature. Repeat step 4, above.

6.	Select the disk drive and folder where the firmware file is located, and then select the file that you want to download.

NOTE: For an ADAM or ADAM CS intercom system, the firmware file name is combined.hex.

7.	Click OK.
The Download Device Firmware dialog will appear, and the download information will display in the upper-left corner.

8.	Click Begin Download.
First the file will load. Then it will download to the master, and the percentage will be reported.

NOTE: If there is any disruption in the communications link during the download, you will get an error message. In this case, repeat the download.

When the file has been 100% downloaded, the master controller will begin processing the update.

Important: Any disruption at this point, such as a loss of power, removing or resetting cards (ADAM, ADAM CS) etc. will result in master controller failure! If this happens, you will either have to return the affected unit for replacement, or you will have to remove the EEPROM chip(s) from the affected unit and manually reprogram them with an EEPROM programming tool. Also, ADAM and ADAM CS users, do not proceed with the update of any more cards until you identify the problem.

•	ADAM CS or Single-Frame ADAM Systems: Allow 1 or 2 minutes for the update to complete. You may also see a message that the intercom connection has been lost. If this happens, wait about 15 to 30 seconds, and then click Retry to restore the connection. You may have to do this once or twice. At some point, you will see the Slot indication change in the Master Controller Status screen. For example, if the Slot originally was Right, it will change to Left. This indicates that the standby master controller has taken over as the active master controller and is now ready to be updated. Proceed to Update, Part 2, ADAM CS and Single-Frame ADAM Systems.

•	Multi-Frame ADAM Systems with Slave Frame Master Controllers (Non DBX Systems): Allow 1 or 2 minutes for the update to complete. During this time, the Master Controller Status screen will display OK Old for all slave master controllers. Finally, you may see a message that the intercom connection has been lost. If this happens, wait about 15 to 30 seconds, then click Retry to restore the connection. You may have to do this once or twice. At some point, the slave master controllers will indicate OK Cur. This indicates that the standby slave master controllers have taken over as the active master controllers and are now ready to be updated. Proceed to Update, Part 2, Multi-Frame ADAM Systems.

Master Controller Update, Part 2, ADAM CS and Single-Frame ADAM Systems

The following steps basically repeat the steps that you just performed, except that this time, you will be updating the standby master controller(s), which is now operating as the active master controller.

1.	Select the master controller if it is not already selected. Then, press Ctrl+Shift+D.

2.	Select the disk drive and folder where the firmware file is located, and then select the file that you want to download (combined.hex).

3.	Click OK.

4.	Click Begin Download.
If there is an error during the download, repeat only the Part 2 update. Allow 1 or 2 minutes for the update to complete. You will eventually see a message that the intercom connection has been lost. If this happens, wait about 15 to 30 seconds, and then click Retry to restore the connection. You may have to do this once or twice.

After the update, you will also see a Capabilities Conflict message. This happens because the new firmware has now added new capabilities to both master controllers. NOTE: For more information about capabilities, click here.

5.	Click Yes to update the capabilities.

After you have cleared all messages, you will see the Slot indication change in the Master Controller Status screen. For example, if the Slot originally was Left, it will change to Right. This indicates that the standby master controller has taken over. Note that this is the master controller that you first updated, so both master controllers are now updated.

This completes the procedure to update an ADAM CS or single-frame ADAM intercom system. Skip the remaining steps. Note that the new firmware version should display in the Master Controller Version Information screen.

NOTE: Depending on the differences between the old and new firmware, your intercom system may perform a “first birthday reset”. For an ADAM CS Intercom System, this means that the intercom configuration settings in your master controller will be reset to the default size for an ADAM CS Intercom System. In a single-frame ADAM Intercom System (ADAM-136) this means that the intercom configuration settings in your master controllers will be reset to the default size for an ADAM-136 Intercom System. If you previously customized your intercom configuration settings, you will have to redefine these in the master controller. To check the master controller intercom configuration, make sure that you are ONLINE, then access intercom configuration setup. Then, if the resource configuration is not correct for your intercom system size, perform the procedure Changing the master controller configuration settings.

Master Controller Update, Part 2, Multi-Frame ADAM Systems

NOTE: Applies Only For Systems with Slave Frame Master Controllers (Non DBX Systems)

In this part, you update the standby master controllers in the slave frames (these have now switched over and become the active master controllers).

1.	Select the same master controllers you selected in part 1. Then, press Ctrl+Shift+D.

2.	Select the disk drive and folder where the firmware file is located, and then select the firmware file (combined.hex).

3.	Click OK.

4.	Click Begin Download.
If there is an error during the download, repeat only the Part 2 update. Allow 1 or 2 minutes for the update to complete. During this time, the Master Controller Status screen will display OK Old for all slave master controllers. Finally, you may see a message that the intercom connection has been lost. If this happens, wait about 15 to 30 seconds, then click Retry to restore the connection. You may have to do this once or twice.

You may also see a Capabilities Conflict message after the update. For more information about the capabilities conflict, click here.

5.	Click Yes to update the capabilities settings.
The slave master controllers should now indicate OK Cur. All slave master controller cards have now been updated. Proceed to Update, Part 3, Multi-Frame ADAM Systems.

Master Controller Update, Part 3, Multi-Frame ADAM Systems

NOTE: Applies Only For Systems with Slave Frame Master Controllers (Non DBX Systems)

In this final part, you update the master controllers in the master frame.

1.	Select only master controller 001.

2.	Press Ctrl+Shift+D on the computer keyboard to reopen the Firmware Download dialog.

3.	Select the disk drive and folder where the firmware file is located, and then select the firmware file (combined.hex).

4.	Click OK.

5.	Click Begin Download.
If there is an error during the download, repeat only the Part 3 update. Allow 1 or 2 minutes for the update to complete. Finally, you may see a message that the intercom connection has been lost. If this happens, wait about 15 to 30 seconds, and then click Retry to restore the connection. You may have to do this once or twice.

 When the connection is restored, you will notice that the Slot has changed (from Right to Left or vice-versa). You are now ready to update the last master controller card.

6.	Select only master controller 001.

7.	Press Ctrl+Shift+D on the computer keyboard to reopen the Firmware Download dialog.

8.	Select the disk drive and folder where the firmware file is located, and then select the firmware file (combined.hex).

9.	Click OK.

10.	Click Begin Download.
If there is an error during the download, repeat only from step 7.
Allow 1 or 2 minutes for the update to complete. Finally, you may see a message that the intercom connection has been lost. If this happens, wait about 15 to 30 seconds, and then click Retry to restore the connection. You may have to do this once or twice. When the connection is restored, you will notice that the Slot has again changed (from Right to Left or vice-versa).

You may also see a Capabilities Conflict message after the update. For more information about the capabilities conflict, click here.

11.	Click Yes to update the capabilities settings.
The slave master controllers should now indicate OK Cur. All slave master controller cards have now been updated.

Important! Depending on the differences between the old and new firmware, your intercom system may perform a “first birthday reset”. This means that your multi-frame intercom system will be resized to the default intercom configuration for a single-frame (ADAM-136) Intercom System. You must restore the default intercom configuration to the proper setting for your intercom system. Or, if you have been using custom resource settings, you will have to redefine these in the master controllers. To check the intercom configuration, access resource configuration setup. Then, if the resources are not correct for your intercom system size, perform the procedure Changing the master controller configuration settings.

Updating Audio I/O Card Firmware

Caution: The following procedure will cause one or more brief disruptions in intercom communications.

1.	Connect to the intercom system, and make sure that SERVER mode is deactivated.

2.	If you have not already done so, open the Audio I/O Card Status screen.

NOTE: You can also perform this procedure from the Audio I/O Card Version Information screen, but the procedure is written using the Audio I/O Card Status screen, since that screen provides slightly more feedback during the update process. As an option, you can access both screens and then switch back and forth between them using the Go Back and Go Forward buttons.

3.	Select one or more of the Audio I/O cards. These are numbered 001, 002 etc.

Important: Be aware that there is a 20-30 second period during the download process where the master controller will take each Audio I/O card off line and reprogram its firmware. Any disruption at this point (loss of power, card removal, manually resetting cards) will result in I/O card failure! If this happens, you will either have to return the affected cards for replacement, or you will have to remove the EEPROM chips from the affected cards and manually reprogram them with an EEPROM programming tool. Since this could potentially result in a major disruption, we recommend that you only update a limited number of I/O cards at a time, and updating should be performed during non-critical periods of intercom usage.

4.	Make sure AZedit is the active window, and not the help file. (Click anywhere on the AZedit window to make it the active window.)

5.	Press Ctrl+Shift+D on the computer keyboard.
This opens the Firmware Download dialog.

NOTE: If Ctrl+Shift+D does not work, firmware download may be disabled. To enable this feature, go to the Options menu and select Preferences. Then, click on the Advanced tab. In the Advanced settings, place a check next to Allow firmware download, then click Apply. Click OK to exit. You should now be able to use the firmware download feature. Repeat step 4, above.

6.	Select the disk drive and folder where the firmware file is located, and then select the file that you want to download.

NOTE: For an ADAM CS Intercom System, the file name is Aio_cs.hex; for ADAM, the file name is Aio_std.hex.

7.	Click OK.
The Download Device Firmware dialog will appear, and the download information will display in the upper-left corner.

8.	Click Begin Download.
First the file will load. Then it will download to the master, and the percentage will be reported.

NOTE: If there is any disruption in the communications link during the download, you will get an error message. In this case, repeat the download.

When the file has been 100% downloaded, the master controller will begin updating the I/O cards. During this time, the Status column may display OK Old next to individual I/O cards, or it may display nothing. Also, intercom ports will go offline.

Important: Any disruption at this point (loss of power, card removal, manually resetting cards) will result in I/O card failure as previously described!

When the update is completed, the intercom ports will come back on line, and one-by-one, the status for I/O cards will change to OK Cur. The complete update procedure may take 3-5 minutes. You can verify the new firmware version in the Audio I/O Card Version Information screen.

Updating Keypanel Firmware

General Information

When you update keypanels, the update information is downloaded to the master controller from the configuration computer. Then, the update information is simultaneously sent to all of the Audio I/O cards where keypanels are being updated. From there, the update information is downloaded to individual keypanels.

You can update one or several keypanels at the same time. However, when updating multiple keypanels connected to the same Audio I/O card, the update time could potentially be much longer. This is because the Audio I/O card must address each keypanel separately and then download the update information to that keypanel. As a general rule in this case, expect the total update time to be the update time for one keypanel times the number of keypanels on the same Audio I/O card that are being updated. For example, if the update time for one keypanel is 10 minutes, the update time for six keypanels of the same type on the same Audio I/O card could be as much as 60 minutes. When updating keypanels on separate Audio I/O cards, there is no additional time involved, since each Audio I/O card processes updates independently.

Other factors affecting the overall download time include the amount of activity in the intercom system (potentially a major factor) and the baud rate for communications between the intercom system and the configuration computer (a relatively minor factor). Updates will proceed more quickly during periods of little activity, and when the baud rate has been set to the highest possible speed.

KP-12, DKP-8, DKP-12, KP-8T Keypanel Update

BKP-4, MKP-4, TKP-4, WKP-4 Keypanel Update

KP-32 Keypanel Update

Updating KP-12, DKP-8, DKP-12, and KP-8T Keypanels (KP-12 Type Keypanels)

Caution: Do not remove power or disconnect the keypanel during this procedure. If you do, the flash EPROM in the keypanel will have to be replaced. Usually, downloads proceed without any type of problem. However, to be on the safe side, you may wish to limit downloads to small quantities of keypanels at a time.

NOTE: As a general rule, it takes at least 10 minutes to update a KP-12 Type keypanel. To update multiple KP-12 type keypanels on the same Audio I/O card will therefore take about 10 minutes times the number of keypanels being updated.

1.	Open the Keypanel Version Information screen.

2.	Select the keypanel (or keypanels) that you want to update.
The KP-12, DKP-8, DKP-12, and KP-8T keypanels will all show up as KP-12 version, and any combination of these keypanels may be selected for update. Also, it does not matter if they currently have different versions of firmware. However, do not also select keypanels of a different type, like ZEUS or KP-32, along with the KP-12 type.

To select several keypanels at random, click on the first keypanel, and then hold down the Ctrl key on the computer keyboard while clicking on additional keypanels. To select a range of keypanels, click on the first keypanel, then hold down the Shift key and click on the last keypanel in the range.

3.	With the keypanels now selected, press Shift+Ctrl+D.
This opens the Firmware Download dialog.

4.	Select the folder where the firmware file is located, and then select the file that you want to download.

5.	Click OK.
The Download Device Firmware dialog appears, and the download information will display in the upper-left corner.

6.	Click Begin Download.
First the file will load. Then it will download to the master controller in the intercom system, and the percentage will be reported. When the file has been 100% downloaded, the master controller will begin sending the information to the keypanel. The keypanel will display DOWNLOAD in the Incoming Messages window, and all keypanel activity will be locked out while the flash is being re-written. It will take 4-5 minutes at this point for the keypanel to update. If you are viewing the Port Status screen, the Status column will display OK until just before the update is completed. Then Bad will display for a few moments and OK will return. The update is now completed. If you are viewing the Keypanel Version Information screen, the new keypanel version will appear when the update is completed.

7.	Repeat the above steps to update more keypanels.

BKP-4, MKP-4, TKP-4, WKP-4 Keypanel Update (Zeus Type Keypanels)

NOTE: Zeus type keypanels can all recover from a failed download procedure. No, chip replacement is needed. Just follow the instructions as listed below for this event.

NOTE: As a general rule, it takes at least 4 minutes to update a Zeus keypanel. To update multiple Zeus keypanels on the same Audio I/O card will therefore take about 4 minutes times the number of keypanels being updated.

1.	Open the Keypanel Version Information screen.

2.	Select the keypanel (or keypanels) that you want to update. Select only keypanels that are identified as ZEUS version. It does not matter if the keypanels have different versions of firmware. To select several keypanels at random, click on the first keypanel, and then hold down the Ctrl key on the computer keyboard while clicking on additional keypanels. To select a range of keypanels, click on the first keypanel, then hold down the Shift key and click on the last keypanel in the range.

NOTE: Versions at 1.x.x need to have the boot down loader preconfigured before the download will work correctly.

3.	With the keypanels now selected, press Shift+Ctrl+D.
This opens the Firmware Download dialog.

4.	Select the folder where the firmware file is located, and then select the file you want to download. For ZEUS type keypanels, the firmware file name is zkp.hex.

5.	Click OK.
The Download Device Firmware dialog will appear, and the download information will display in the upper-left corner. Note that at this time you can check the list of ports that you have selected.

6.	Click Begin Download.
First the file will load. Then it will download to the master controller in the intercom system, and the percentage will be reported as the download progresses. When the file has been 100% downloaded, the master controller will begin sending the information to the Audio I/O cards. Since each selected keypanel on a card must be addressed separately, you will observe the following sequence of events occurring at different times for each keypanel. First RQDL will display in the Call waiting window. Then the Headset LED will flash green as the first chunk of data is being read from the Audio I/O card. After about 1 to 2 minutes, OK 1 will display. This indicates that the first of 2 chunks of data has been updated. Again the Headset will flash green while the second chunk of data is being read. After another 1 to 2 minutes, OK 2 will briefly display and the keypanel will return to normal operation. The download is complete. Once normal operation is restored, the new keypanel version will appear in the Keypanel Version Information screen of AZedit.

NOTE: If an error occurs at any time during the download, a lower-case “e” will appear in the left segment of the Call waiting display. The keypanel will automatically request that the failed chunk of data be resent. Allow 1 to 2 minutes for the keypanel to repeat the previous step in the download process. If another error occurs, the first “e” will shift to the left and another “e” will appear. Again, the keypanel will request that the failed chunk be resent. This process will go on indefinitely until either the download is successfully completed, or until someone downloads different firmware to the intercom system. Repeated download failures could indicate a problem with the intercom cable, or with the data transceiver on an Audio I/O card, or a data port problem on a particular keypanel.

KP-32 Keypanel Update

NOTE: The KP-32 can recover from a failed download procedure. No, chip replacement is needed. Just follow the instructions as listed below for this event.

NOTE: As a general rule, it takes at least 10 minutes to update a KP-32 Type keypanel. To update multiple KP-32 type keypanels on the same Audio I/O card will therefore take about 10 minutes times the number of keypanels being updated.

1.	Open the Keypanel Version Information screen.

2.	Select the keypanel (or keypanels) that you want to update.
Select only keypanels that are identified as KP-32 version. It does not matter if the keypanels have different versions of firmware. To select several keypanels at random, click on the first keypanel, and then hold down the Ctrl key on the computer keyboard while clicking on additional keypanels. To select a range of keypanels, click on the first keypanel, then hold down the Shift key and click on the last keypanel in the range.

3.	With the keypanels now selected, press Shift+Ctrl+D.
This opens the Firmware Download dialog.

4.	Select the folder where the firmware file is located, and then select the file  you want to download. For the KP-32, the firmware file name is kp32.hex.

5.	Click OK.
The Download Device Firmware dialog appears, and the download information will display in the upper-left corner. Note that at this time you can check the list of ports that you have selected.

6.	Click Begin Download.
First the file will load. Then it will download to the master controller in the intercom system, and the percentage will be reported as the download progresses. When the file has been 100% downloaded, the master controller will begin sending the information to the Audio I/O cards. Each keypanel will display “Code Download in progress” in the left side of the panel, and the chunk number will display. There are 10 chunks of data for the complete download. When the download is complete, the KP-32 will briefly display asterisks, and then it will return to normal operation. Once normal operation is restored, the new keypanel version will appear in the Keypanel Version Information screen of AZedit.

NOTE: If an error occurs at any time during the download, the keypanel will automatically request that the failed chunk of data be resent. “Try 2” will appear in the keypanel display. If another error occurs, “Try 3” will appear, and so forth. This process will go on indefinitely until either the download is successfully completed, or until someone downloads different firmware to the intercom system. Repeated download failures could indicate a problem with the intercom cable, or with the data transceiver on an Audio I/O card, or a data port problem on a particular keypanel.


Assigning Auto-Follow to all Listen Keys using Copy and Paste Special

This procedure shows you how to quickly set all listen keys to auto-follow for all intercom ports.

1.	Close all open dialogs.

2.	If the application is running in ONLINE mode or SERVER mode, exit this mode and enter FILE mode.

3.	Access keypanel setup.
When you access keypanel setup, you will be viewing the setup for some intercom port. It does not matter which intercom port is selected.

4.	If it’s not already, make sure that View by Setup Page is selected.

5.	Select any setup page EXCEPT the one that is assigned to the Main keypanel.
This allows you to set auto-follow for key 16. In this example, Page 2 has been selected.

6.	Select the combo box for listen key 1.

7.	Starting with the first listen key on the left, assign auto-follow to all of the listen keys. Here is one way to do that:

a.	Click on the text box for listen key 1.

b.	Type AF (or af).

c.	Press the Tab key to move the cursor to listen key 2.

d.	Again, type AF (af).

e.	Repeat for all keys.

Auto-follow should now be assigned to all listen keys on setup page 2.

8.	From the Edit menu, select Copy.
This copies the entire setup for the intercom port.

9.	From the Edit menu, select Paste Special.
This opens the Paste Special dialog, where you can select the items that you want to paste to the other intercom ports.

By default, all items in the Paste Special dialog will be selected. However, you only want to paste the listen key assignments from setup page 2 to all other pages on all intercom ports.

10.	Click Clear All.

11.	Check All Setup Pages.

12.	Then, remove the check mark.

(This is necessary to activate the Individual Key Settings check boxes.)

13.	Check All Ports.

14.	Check All Keys if it is not already checked.

15.	Remove all check marks in Individual Key Settings except Listen Key Assignments.

16.	Under Copy Setup Pages, remove all check marks, except Page 2. And, select Page 2 to... Page 1.

17.	Click Paste.

It will take a few moments to copy the page 2 listen key settings to page 1 for all intercom ports. Then, the Paste Special dialog will close.

NOTE: If Paste cannot be selected, you may still be in ONLINE mode. Enter FILE mode, and repeat the proceeding steps as needed.

18.	Select Paste Special from the Edit menu.

19.	Set Page 2 to copy to Page 2.

20.	Click Paste.

21.	Repeat for Pages 3 and 4.
You should now see that all listen keys are set to AF on all setup pages at all intercom ports.

Hints:

•	You can save a setup file where you have only configured the AF settings. When you want to create a new setup file, open your AF setup file and use save as to save it under a new name. Then, add your other configuration settings, such as talk key assignments, party lines etc.

•	If you want to add AF assignments to the ONLINE configuration, save the ONLINE configuration to disk, then open it in FILE mode and add the AF assignments as described above. Resave the file when finished. Then connect to the intercom system and use send file to update the intercom system.

Other Examples of Copy and Paste Special

Scroll Enable Setup for All Intercom Ports, Party Lines, etc.

Restricting All Intercom Keys at All Intercom Ports

Restricting All Setup Pages at All Intercom Ports


Converting a CSedit File to AZedit or ZEUSedit
Converting a CSedit File to AZedit

To convert a setup file from CSedit to AZedit:

1.	Run CSedit and download the configuration to the intercom system.

2.	Run AZedit and upload the configuration.

3.	Use Save or Save As on the File menu to save a copy of the setup file to disk.


Uninstalling AZedit or ZEUSedit

Use the Uninstall program that is supplied with AZedit.

NOTE: During installation, AZedit created three subfolders within the application folder. These are called Firmware, Logs, and Setups. The Firmware folder is the default folder where the application looks for firmware update files. The Logs folder is the default location where the application saves log files. The Setups folder is the default location where the application saves setup files.  When you remove the application, these subfolders will not be removed.


Activating or Deactivating the Advanced Settings Tab in the Options Menu Preferences

Use the Advanced tab in the Preference settings (Options>Preferences) to enable or disable the Advanced Settings Tab in the AZedit.ini file.

To enable this feature, do the following:

1.	Open the AZedit.ini file in a text editor, such as Windows Notepad. This file is located in the AZedit folder.

2.	Once the file is open, scroll down to the [advanced] settings.

3.	To enable the Advanced tab, set ShowAdvancedFeatures=Y

4.	To disable the Advanced tab, set ShowAdvancedFeatures=N

5.	Save the file as a plain text file in the same folder and with the same name.

6.	Restart AZedit.

7.	From the Options menu, select Preferences.
The Advanced features tab should be visible if you enabled this feature, and it should be removed if you disabled this feature.


Enabling Intercom Configuration Resizing in ONLINE Mode

1.	Close all open dialogs.

2.	Make sure that SERVER mode is not activated. (In the Online menu, make sure that Server Mode is not checked.)

3.	From the Options menu, select Preferences to open the Application Preferences dialog.

4.	Click the Advanced tab.

5.	Select Allow intercom resizing in ONLINE mode.

6.	Click Apply.

7.	Click OK.
You should now be able to resize the intercom system in ONLINE mode.


Ctrl+F12 Alpha Editing

Ctrl+F12 alpha editing lets you change the name for a particular port, party line etc. while you are viewing its setup screen.

Activating the Ctrl+F12 Alpha Edit Feature

In order for Ctrl+F12 to work, this feature may have to be activated as follows:

1.	Close all open dialogs.

2.	From the Options menu, select Preferences.

3.	Click the Alphas tab.

4.	Select Allow alpha edit from any view (CTRL+F12).

5.	Click Apply.

6.	Click OK.
You can now use Ctrl+F12.

Using Ctrl+F12 Alpha Editing

To name an intercom port, party line, etc. while you are setting it up, press Ctrl+F12 on the computer keyboard.

Example: If you are viewing the Keypanel / Ports setup screen for intercom port 12, you can press Ctrl+F12 to change the alpha for that intercom port.

Example: Change the name for IFB 003 from within IFB setup. First, access IFB setup. Then, in the IFB list, select IFB 003. (Just click once to highlight it; do not double-click to open the setup window.) With IFB 003 highlighted, press Ctrl+F12 to change the alpha name.

Example: Change the name for partly line PL 3 from within Party Line setup. First, access Party Line setup. Then, select party line 3 (PL03) in the upper-left corner of the screen. Now, press Ctrl-F12 to change the alpha name.

Example: Change the name for special list SL03 from within Special List setup. First, access Special List setup. Then, select special list 3 (SL03) in the upper-left corner of the screen. Now, press Ctrl-F12 to change the alpha name.


Key Restriction Setup using Copy and Paste Special

This procedure shows you how to quickly set all of the restriction check boxes for all intercom ports. This will prevent any keypanel operator at any intercom port from changing the assignment on any key.

1.	Close all open dialogs.

2.	If the application is running in ONLINE mode or SERVER mode, exit this mode and enter FILE mode.

3.	Access keypanel setup.
When you access keypanel setup, the setup for an intercom port appears. It does not matter which intercom port is selected.

4.	Select View by Setup Page.

5.	Select any setup page except the one that is assigned to the Main keypanel. This allows you to set the restrict check box for key 16. In this example, Page 2 has been selected.

6.	Click on the combo box for listen key 1.

7.	Press Shift+Ctrl+r (hold down the Shift Key and the Control Key, then press the r key).
The R check boxes for all listen keys are selected.

8.	Click on the combo box for talk key 1, and then press Shift+Ctrl+r again to restrict all of the talk keys.

9.	From the Edit menu, select Copy.
This copies the entire setup of the intercom port.

10.	From the Edit menu, select Paste Special. This opens the Paste Special dialog, where you can select the items that you want to paste to the other intercom ports.
By default, all items in the Paste Special dialog will be checked. However, you only want to paste the R settings from setup page 2 to all other pages on all intercom ports.

11.	Click Clear All.

12.	Select All Setup Pages.

Then remove the check mark.

(This is necessary to activate the Individual Key Settings check boxes.)

13.	Select All Ports.

14.	Select All Keys if it is not already checked.

15.	Remove all check marks in Individual Key Settings except Talk Key Restrictions and Listen Key Restrictions.

16.	Under Copy Setup Pages, remove all check marks, except Page 2. And, select Page 2 to... Page 1.

NOTE: If you set up restrictions for some other page instead of page 2, substitute that page for Page 2.

17.	Click Paste.

It may take a few moments to copy the page 2 listen key settings to page 1 for all intercom ports. Then, the Paste Special dialog will close.

NOTE: If Paste cannot be selected, you may still be in ONLINE mode. Enter FILE mode, and repeat the proceeding steps as needed.

18.	Select Paste Special from the Edit menu.

19.	Set Page 2 to copy to Page 2.

20.	Click Paste.

21.	Repeat for Pages 3 and 4.
You should now see that all R boxes are checked on all setup pages at all intercom ports.

Hints:

•	You can save a setup file where you have only configured the R settings. When you want to create a new setup file, open your R setup file and use save as to save it under a new name. Then, add your other configuration settings, such as talk key assignments, party lines etc.

•	If you want to add R assignments to the ONLINE configuration, save the ONLINE configuration to disk, then open it in FILE mode and add the R assignments as described above. Resave the file when finished. Then connect to the intercom system and use send file to update the intercom system.

Other Examples of Copy and Paste Special

Scroll Enable Setup for All Intercom Ports, Party Lines, etc.

Assigning Auto-Follow to All Listen Keys

Restricting All Setup Pages at All Intercom Ports


Restricting Setup Page Reassignment for all Intercom Ports Using Copy and Paste Special

This procedure shows you how to quickly restrict the setup page assignments for all intercom ports. This will prevent any keypanel operator at any intercom port from changing the setup page assignments.

1.	Close all open dialogs, and then access keypanel setup.
When you access keypanel setup, you will be viewing the setup for some intercom port. It does not matter which intercom port is selected.

2.	Click Edit.

3.	Click the Setup tab.

4.	Select Setup Restrict under Setup Page Options.

5.	Click OK.

6.	From the Edit menu, select Copy.
This copies the entire setup for intercom port that you are currently viewing.

7.	From the Edit menu, select Paste Special.
This opens the Paste Special dialog, where you can select the items that you want to paste to the other intercom ports.
By default, all items in the Paste Special dialog are selected. However, you only want to paste the Setup Restrict setting, do the following:

8.	Click the Clear All button.

9.	Select the Setup Restrict check box near the center of the screen.

10.	Select the All Ports check box.

You are now ready to paste the setup page restriction to all other intercom ports.

11.	Click Paste.

The Paste Special dialog will close, and you should now see that Setup Restrict is checked for all intercom ports.

Other Examples of Copy and Paste Special

Scroll Enable Setup for All Intercom Ports, Party Lines, etc.

Assigning Auto-Follow to All Listen Keys

Restricting All Intercom Keys at All Intercom Ports


Activating Crosspoint Inspection in FILE Mode

By default, the Inspect button in the Crosspoint Status screen will only function in ONLINE or SERVER mode. You can also activate the Inspect button for use in FILE mode:

1.	Close all open dialogs.

2.	From the Options menu at the top of the screen, select Preferences.

3.	Select the Advanced tab

4.	Select Allow crosspoint inspection in FILE mode.

5.	Click Apply, then OK.
The Inspect button in the Crosspoint Status screen should now function in FILE.


Port Configuration for Non-Keypanel Usage

The following are items that you may wish to configure in an intercom port when connecting non-keypanel devices.

Scroll Enable settings: By default, any keypanel operator can assign keypanel keys to talk or listen to any intercom port. You may wish to make some or all intercom ports inaccessible for key assignment, including intercom ports where there are no keypanels connected. You use the scroll enable feature to do this.

Gain Settings: There may be occasions where you need to adjust the listen gain for a non-keypanel device that is listening to a party line or to some specific intercom port. For example, a belt pack operator may want to monitor a party line, but at a lower level than the normal intercom volume. Or, a belt pack operator may want to listen to background music coming from some intercom input port, but at a reduced level. To make gain adjustments, click on the gain button.

Then press the F1 key if you need help with gain adjustments.

NOTE: If all controls are disabled (grayed out) on the selected intercom port, and “Trunk Port” displays at the top of the screen, this means the port is reserved for trunking and cannot be used for any other purpose. To reclaim the port, you must run CStrunk and remove the trunking allocation.


Auto SERVER Mode

If you use UPL statements to load files, AZedit must be running in SERVER mode. You may wish to set the application so that it always starts in SERVER mode. Do this as follows:

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences.

2.	Select the Startup / Shutdown tab.

3.	Select Auto enter SERVER mode. (NOTE: it does not matter if you check Auto connect at startup.)

4.	Click Apply.

5.	Click OK.

6.	Restart AZedit to assure that connects to the intercom system in SERVER mode.
SERVER should be indicated in the lower-right corner of the screen.

NOTE: As additional insurance, you could place AZedit in you Windows startup folder. This would assure that the computer reconnects to the intercom system in SERVER mode whenever the computer is restarted.


Starting the Application in FILE Mode

Typically, AZedit is set to start in ONLINE or SERVER mode, and it will automatically connect to the intercom system at startup. However, you may wish to start AZedit in FILE mode, even though the configuration computer is still connected to the intercom system. Set this up as follows:

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences.

2.	In the Application Preferences, click on the Startup / Shutdown tab.

3.	De-select Auto connect at startup and Auto enter SERVER mode.

4.	Click Apply.

5.	Click OK.

6.	Restart AZedit.


Inter-panel Dim Table Example

Suppose you and I are seated near each other in a VTR room (video tape recorder room in a broadcast studio). And, we each have a talk key assigned to talk to the director. Suppose I am currently listening to the director (either the director is talking to me, or I have a listen key activated). At this moment, you press your talk key to the director, and feedback is immediately noted in the keypanel speakers. Why? Because your audio enters your mic, then comes out the director’s speaker, then re-enters the director’s mic, then comes out my speaker, then re-enters your mic to create a continuous feedback loop.

To eliminate the feedback, we set up a DIM table with you and I as members, and we set the dim value to -9dB. We then assign the DIM function on Talk Level 2 of our keys that talk to the director. Now suppose the director is talking to me, and your talk key to the director is off. I will hear the director at the normal level. However, when you press your talk key to the director, you activate the DIM function (via the talk level 2 assignment on your talk key). The master controller searches for any DIM tables in which you are a member, then dims the volume from the director to all other members of the same DIM table by the dim amount specified in that DIM table. In this case, there is only one DIM table, with you and I as members, and with a dim amount of -9dB. So, when you press your talk key, the volume from the director to me is dimmed by 9dB, which should hopefully reduce or eliminate the feedback. If I were to then press my talk key to the director, the volume from the director to you would also be dimmed by 9dB.

Suppose there are three of us in the VTR room (Ralph is on your right and I am on your left). We all have talk keys assigned to the director. Suppose that there is a feedback problem between you and I, and between you and Ralph, but Ralph and I can talk and listen to the director without feedback occurring. In this instance we create two DIM tables, one with you and I as members, and one with you and Ralph as members. When you then press your talk key to the director, both of the DIM tables with you as member become active. If I am listening to the director, the listen volume from the director to me is dimmed by the amount specified in the DIM table where you and I are members. If Ralph is also listening to the director, the volume from the director to Ralph is dimmed by the amount specified in the DIM table where you and Ralph are members.

If there were a feedback problem between Ralph and me, we could use one DIM table with all three of us as members (with only one dim amount). Or, we could use a third DIM table with Ralph and me as members (say with only -6db dimming since we sit further apart).


Entering File Mode from Online or Server Modes

To enter File mode from Server Mode (SERVER displayed in the lower-right corner of the screen), first exit Server mode: In the Online menu, click on Server Mode to remove the check mark. This will place the application in Online mode.

To enter File mode from Online mode (ONLINE displayed in the lower-right corner of the screen), either start a new file, or open a setup file from disk.

•	To start a new file, select New from the File menu, or click the New button.

•	To open a setup file, select Open from the File menu, or click the Open button.

In File mode, FILE will display in the lower-right corner of the screen.


Changing the number of talk levels

Talk levels are defined in the Intercom Configuration settings (Options menu). Before changing intercom configuration settings, we recommend that you read the Intercom Configuration description.

Intercom Configuration Description

Procedure to change the intercom configuration


Server Mode Activation or Deactivation

You must be ONLINE in order for this feature to be selectable. In the Online menu, click Server Mode. A check mark will appear next to this item when it is active, and the word SERVER will appear in the lower-right corner of the screen. To deactivate this feature, click on Server Mode again, ONLINE will appear in the lower-right corner of the screen.

NOTE: If you are using UPL statements to periodically update your intercom system, you may assure that your intercom system always connects to the intercom system in SERVER mode. Set this feature as follows:

1.	Close all open dialogs.

2.	From the Options menu, select Preferences.

3.	Select the Startup / Shutdown tab.

4.	Select Auto enter SERVER mode.

5.	Click Apply, then OK.
You will have to restart AZedit in order for this setting to activate.


UPL Statement Examples

Timed Setup File Update

Using a UPL Resource Key to Load a Setup File

Using Keypanel Keys to Control Talk and Listen for Non-Keypanel Devices

Timed Setup file Update

Here is an example of how UPL works: Let’s say that you have a broadcast news show every day at 5 pm, and you want the intercom system to automatically load an entire intercom system setup file every day at 4:30 pm for this broadcast. Here is how you could set up a UPL statement to do this:

1.	Open the setup file that will be running BEFORE the file that you want to load at 4:30.

2.	Access UPL Statement setup.
This will open the User Programmable Logic Statements main screen.

3.	To start building a statement, double click line 001.
The Edit UPL Statement Dialogue box opens for statement 001.

4.	Type “Load Nightly News Setup” into the Comment field.
This just serves as a reminder of what the UPL statement does.

5.	In the Input A Type combo box, scroll down and select “Current Time”.
After “Current Time” is selected as the input condition, the Operation field is set to “=” by default, which means an output action will occur when the current time = some time that you specify.

6.	In the Time field, type 16:30:00.
Note that a 24-hour clock is used, so 16:30:00 is the same as 4:30 pm.

7.	In the Output Action combo box, select “Load File”.

8.	Select the file to load.
For this example, we’ll say that the intercom system setup file for the nightly news was previously created and saved to disk as “5pmset.adm”.

The UPL statement is now completed, and the finished Description reads as shown below.

Once these changes are sent to the intercom system, the 5pmset.adm setup file will automatically load at the specified time. Within the 5pmset.adm file, you could also create a UPL statement to load some other setup file at a later time.

NOTE: The computer must be online and operating in SERVER mode in order for setup files to load.

Using a UPL Resource Key to Load a Setup file

This example shows how you could set up a keypanel key that will load an intercom system setup file when the key is pressed. Suppose, for example, that the key will load an intercom setup file for a broadcast program at 5pm. First, you open the setup file that will be running BEFORE the 5pm setup file. In that file, you name a UPL resource. You could call it “5PM”, for example. Then you assign 5PM to an intercom key. Next, you create a UPL statement that tells the intercom system to load your 5PM setup file when someone presses the 5PM key. Here’s how you would set up this example:

1.	Open the intercom system setup file that will be running just before the 5PM setup file.

Name a UPL Resource:

2.	 Access UPL Resource Alphas

3.	 Click OK.
This opens the UPL Resource Alphas list box.

4.	Select UPL Resource UR001 by double-clicking on it.
The Edit Alpha / Description dialog opens.

5.	Enter a Description for the UPL resource.
This is just something to remind you what the UPL resource is being used for. In this example, the UPL resource will be used to load the intercom system configuration for the 5PM broadcast (for example, “Load 5PM Setup”).

6.	In the Alpha text box, enter a name for the UPL resource.
This is the name that will appear in the alphanumeric display of a keypanel when you assign the UPL resource to a key. For this example, 5PM.

NOTE: If the trunking feature activated, you will see an additional text box called Alias. This is the name that will appear in scroll lists and keypanel displays in remote intercom systems. You can use the same name here as was used for the Alpha. Or, you can type a different 4-character name.

7.	Click Done.

Assign the UPL resource to an intercom key.
For purposes of our example, let’s say that we want to assign the UPL resource to the first key on a keypanel that is connected to intercom port number 1.

1.	Access keypanel setup.
This opens the Keypanels / Ports main screen.

2.	Select intercom port 1 in the upper-left corner of the screen.

3.	Right-click on the talk key number 1 combo box.

4.	Select UPL Resource to display the list of UPL Resources.

5.	In the list, select 5PM.

6.	Click OK.
You should now see the name 5PM in the talk key combo box.

NOTE: For more information about key numbers, click here.

Create a UPL statement that will load the 5PM setup file when the UPL resource key is pressed.

1.	Access UPL statement setup.
This opens the User Programmable Logic Statements main screen.

2.	Double-click the first row in the list.
This will open the Edit UPL Statement dialog.

3.	In the comment field, enter a brief description of what the UPL statement will do. For example, “Load 5pm file from 5pm key”.

4.	Setup Input A as follows:

a.	 In the Type list box, select UPL Resource.

b.	In the UPL Resource list box, select 5PM.

c.	In the Output Action list box, select Load File.
The File Name list box will appear. In a real situation, you would have previously set up an intercom system setup file for the 5pm broadcast. You would then save that file to disk. For purposes of the example, we’ll assume that a setup file was created and saved as 5pmset.adm.

NOTE: As you enter items in the various fields, the UPL statement is built in the Description box at the bottom of the screen. In this example, the completed UPL statement would appear as follows.

You have now completed the UPL statement.

5.	Click Done.

6.	Save your setup file.

7.	Finally, connect to the intercom system and use Send File (Online menu) to send the file.

8.	Activate SERVER mode in the Online menu.
AZedit must be operating in SERVER mode in order for the intercom system to be able to load files.

9.	Leave AZedit running and connected to the intercom system.
When the 5PM key is pressed, the intercom system will request the 5pmset.adm file from AZedit. AZedit will load the file and send it to the intercom system.

NOTE: To insure that AZedit is operating in SERVER mode, you may wish to have it always start in SERVER mode. For further information, click here.

Using Keypanel Keys to Control Talk and Listen for Non-Keypanel Devices

This example demonstrates an important note about certain types of UPL statements: when you use a UPL statement to activate a key assignment, you must also create another UPL statement to shut the key assignment off.

Example: Let’s say that you have a keypanel connected at intercom port 1. A camera director in a television broadcast studio is using this keypanel. Let’s also say that there is a camera intercom connected at intercom port 2. Finally, let’s say that there are 4 possible party lines that the camera operator may need to communicate with (we’ll assume that these party lines have already been set up and are called CAM1, CAM2, CAM3, and CAM4). Here is one way to set up 4 keys on the camera director’s keypanel so that the director can control which party line the camera operator communicates with.

1.	Name 4 UPL resources. Call them PL1, PL2, PL3, and PL4.

2.	Assign the 4 UPL resources to keys on the director’s keypanel.

3.	Access the keypanel setup screen for the intercom port where the camera intercom station is connected. Then, assign each of the 4 party lines (CAM1, CAM2, etc.) to a talk key. Also assign auto-listen to the listen keys. Let’s say that talk keys 1 through 4 are used for CAM1 through CAM4.

4.	Create a UPL statement for each of the 4 UPL resource keys.
Each UPL statement uses one of the UPL resource keys as the Input Condition (Input a), and one of the talk keys at intercom port 2 as the Output Action. For example, if PL1 is selected as the Input Condition, the Output Action would be set to “Force Talk Key Closure”, the Port# would be set to 2, and the Key# would be set to 1.
The UPL statements that you just created will activate the required talk paths when the UPL resource keys are pressed, but the talk paths will not turn off when the UPL resource keys are released.

5.	Create a second UPL statement for each of the UPL statements that you already created.
For the second UPL statement, use the first UPL statement as the Input Condition (Input A).

6.	Select Invert Input A.

7.	Select “Force Talk Key Open” and then, specify the same talk key that was forced closed by the first UPL statement.

8.	Send your changes to the intercom system.

Now, let’s say that the PL1 key on the director’s keypanel is currently off. This means that the first UPL statement associated with that key is false. Therefore, the CAM1 talk key will not be activated. However, the second statement is true, and this will force the CAM1 talk key off. When the PL1 key is pressed, the first UPL statement becomes true, which forces the talk key on. Since the second UPL statement is now false, it is ignored. When the PL1 key is released, the second UPL statement again becomes true, which forces the CAM1 talk key off.


Enabling or Disabling the Configuration Conflict Message

The configuration conflict message occurs whenever you connect to the intercom system, and the application detects that its settings are not the same as the intercom system settings. If this message has been disabled, and you wish to enable it again (or disable it) proceed as follows:

1.	Close any open dialog windows (except help).

2.	From the Options menu, select Preferences.

3.	Click the Startup / Shutdown tab.

4.	To enable the configuration conflict message, select Warn about changes in configuration. To disable the message, remove the check.

5.	Click Apply and then OK to finish.


Procedure to Change Intercom Configuration Settings

Warning! If you make changes to any of the intercom configuration settings and then click the Apply button, all current setup information will be erased. This includes all key assignments, party line configurations, etc. Also, if you are operating in ONLINE mode, the intercom system will be reset, all communications will cease, and you will have to reload your setup. For a large intercom system, it may take up to 10 minutes to restore the system after changing settings. In any case, if you have not yet saved your setup, click Cancel, and save it before proceeding.

Changing the master controller configuration settings

Changing the AZedit intercom configuration

Changing the configuration settings in setup files

Changing the master controller configuration settings

1.	Connect to the intercom system if you are not already connected.
Make sure that AZedit is not operating in SERVER mode: (ONLINE should display in the lower-right corner of the AZedit screen. If SERVER displays close any open dialog, then click on the Online menu. Click on Server Mode to remove the check mark.)

2.	Access intercom configuration if you have not already done so.
If you are not able to select or change any items in the Intercom Configuration, AZedit is probably not set to allow intercom resizing in ONLINE mode. To enable intercom resizing in ONLINE mode, click here, and then repeat from step 3 after you have enabled intercom resizing. Otherwise, skip to step 5.

3.	Eject the standby master controller (in a multi-frame ADAM Intercom System that has slave frame master controllers, eject only the standby master controller in the master frame).

NOTE: If you are not familiar with active and standby master controller identification, click here.

4.	In the Intercom Configuration dialog window, click the Resources tab to view and change resource settings.

5.	Click the Options tab to view and change option settings.

NOTE: While viewing either tab, you can press the F1 key to get further help. When finished, press the Back button at the top of the AZedit help window to return to this help screen.

6.	After you have configured the resources and options the way you want them, click the Test button.

7.	If the test fails, this indicates that you have selected more resources than can be stored in system memory. Click OK, then reduce the quantities of one or more resources and test again.

NOTE: In all cases, there is sufficient memory for all of the intercom ports in your intercom system. Memory test failures generally are the result of allocating too many of some other type of resource.

Warning! Clicking Apply will deactivate intercom system operation and will erase all setup information, such as key assignments, party line configurations, etc. If you have not saved your online setup, click Cancel, and save it before proceeding. You will then have to restore your intercom system setup from the saved file after completing the changes to the intercom configuration.

8.	If the test is a success, click OK to close the test results screen, then click Apply.

9.	We recommend that you select “Make this configuration the system default (in INI file)”.

NOTE: usually it is best to set the AZedit default to match the settings of the master controller. The only time you might not want to do this is if you are running AZedit on several different intercom systems. In that case, you may wish to use different settings for AZedit and for individual setup files. For further information on these topics, you can scroll down to “Changing the AZedit configuration”, or “Changing the Configuration Settings in Setup files”.

10.	Click Continue.
The master controller will reconfigure itself at this time, and the system will momentarily go offline.

11.	When you see the message to retry the intercom connection, click Retry. (You may have to do this more than once.)

12.	Insert the standby master controller back into the frame.
The master controller will write the new configuration information to the standby master controller.

This completes the steps that are normally required to configure the intercom system and AZedit. If you create new setup files at this time, they should also match the intercom configuration. However, you can change the configuration settings for AZedit or for setup files independently of the master controller configuration settings. You might want to do this if you are using AZedit with several different intercom systems, or if you previously created one or more setup files, and you now wish to resize those files to match the master controller configuration. The following procedures describe how to resize AZedit or individual setup files.

Changing the AZedit intercom configuration

You might use this procedure when you are just starting out with AZedit, and you want to start creating setup files before connecting to the intercom system. Or, you might use this procedure when you are using AZedit on several different intercom systems, but you want to set the resources to the size that will accommodate all of the systems.

NOTE: If you are currently working on a file in FILE mode, save it before proceeding.

1.	AZedit should be in FILE mode. If it is not in FILE mode, select New from the File menu. If you see the prompt “Select Intercom Size”, select either configuration, it does not matter which. Then, click OK.

2.	In the Options menu, click on Intercom Configuration.

3.	Click OK when you see the warning message.

4.	Select the Resources tab.

5.	Set resources as appropriate for your intercom system.
For explanations of resources, press F1 while viewing the Resources tab.

6.	You may also wish to click on the Options tab and review option settings.

7.	After you have configured all settings the way you want them, click the Apply button.

8.	Click OK on the warning message.

9.	When asked if you would like to make the new settings the default settings, select Yes.

This completes the procedure to reconfigure AZedit independently of the master controller. If you create new setup files, they will be created with the new AZedit default settings. However, you can also configure setup files independently of the AZedit settings as described below.

Changing the configuration settings in setup files

NOTE: If you are not yet familiar with the intercom configuration settings, you may wish to click here for a brief introduction. Then, use the Back button in Help to return here when finished.

Reconfiguring a previously created setup file to have the default AZedit configuration:

You may wish to use this procedure to resize a setup file that you created prior to reconfiguring AZedit. You might use this procedure, for example, after you have eliminated unused resources from the master controller and have then reconfigured AZedit to match the new master controller settings. Or, you may need to resize a setup file after you have added more hardware to your intercom system (such as adding more Audio I/O cards, or adding a UIO-256 frame). In this case, you should resize the intercom system first as previously described, and accept the new settings as the AZedit defaults. Then, use the following procedure to add resources to setup files to match the enlarged intercom system configuration.

1.	If you have made changes to your setup file and have not yet saved them, save them now.

2.	Select New from the File menu. Then, if you are prompted to either “Load Default Configuration” or “Use Current Configuration”, select “Load Default Configuration”. (If you do not see any prompt, the AZedit default configuration is already loaded.)

3.	Select Merge from the File menu. Then select the setup file that you want to resize, and click OK.

•	If the file that you are merging has a larger set of resources than the AZedit default configuration, you will see a list of the resources in the setup file. If you click OK, only that portion of the resources that fits in the default configuration will be merged. For example, if the file you are merging has 136 ports, but your default configuration only has 72, all settings for ports 73-136 will not merge.

•	If the setup file that you are merging has a smaller set of resources than the default configuration, you will see a list of the resources in the file. If you click OK, the entire set of resources in the file will be loaded, and the resulting new file will have a larger set of resources than the original. For example, if the file you are merging has 72 ports, but your default configuration has 136, the new file will preserve all of you port settings for ports 1-72, and new empty port configurations from 73-136 will be added onto the file.

•	If the file that you are merging has the same set of resources as the default resource configuration, you will not see any warning about a mis-match of resources. In this case, you did not need to perform any procedure to resize the file. You may cancel the entire procedure and use the file in its current configuration.

4.	Save your new file to disk.
You may use a new file name (recommended). Or, you can overwrite the previously saved file.

Reconfiguring a setup file to have non-default settings for resources:

Typically, you will only use this procedure if you running the same copy of AZedit to set up several differently sized intercom systems. For example, if your AZedit is configured for an ADAM-136 intercom system, but it is also being used to configure an ADAM CS intercom system, you may wish to create your ADAM CS setup files with the normal ADAM CS configuration settings. You don’t have to do this, but it will prevent anyone from trying to configure items that don’t exist in your ADAM CS intercom system. Create a non-default setup file as follows:

1.	If you have made changes to your setup file and have not yet saved them, save them now.

2.	Select New from the File Menu.
You may be prompted to either “Load Default Configuration” or “Use Current Configuration”. If you know which configuration most closely matches the new settings that you want, select that option; otherwise, it does not matter which choice you select.

3.	Resize the intercom configuration to the new size that you want using the Intercom Configuration screens.

4.	After you have set the Resource and Option settings the way you want them, click the Apply button.

IMPORTANT: Do not make the new settings the default settings.

You should now have a new blank setup file that is set to the configuration that you want. You will now merge the previously saved setup file into the new setup file.

5.	Select Merge from the File menu.

6.	Select the setup file that you want to resize, and click OK.

•	If the setup file that you are merging has a larger set of resources than the new setup file, you will see a list of the resources in the setup file that you are merging. If you click OK, only that portion of the resources that fits in the new setup file will be loaded. For example, if the file you are merging has 136 ports, but your new setup file has 72, settings for ports 73-136 will not load.

•	If the setup file that you are merging has a smaller set of resources than the new setup file, you will see a list of the resources in the setup file that you are merging. If you click OK, the entire set of resources in that setup file will be loaded, and the resulting new setup file will have a larger set of resources than the original. For example, if the setup file you are merging has 72 ports, but your new setup file has 136, the new setup file will preserve all of the port settings for ports 1-72, and new blank port settings will be added for ports 73-136.

•	If the setup file that you are merging has the same set of resources as the new setup file, you will not see any warning about a mismatch of resources. In this case, you did not need to perform any procedure to resize the file. You may cancel the entire procedure and use the original setup file in its current configuration.

7.	To save your new setup file, we recommend you use a new name. Use the Save As command to do this.

Creating a new setup file with non-default resource settings

1.	Select New from the File menu.

2.	Access the Intercom Configuration screens.

3.	Set the resources and options as desired.

4.	After you have set everything the way you want it, click Apply.

5.	Click OK on the warning message.

6.	When asked, “Would you like to make this configuration the AZedit default?”, select NO.

7.	Save the new configuration file.

You can now edit the new setup file, or work on some other setup file. Whenever you open the new file, the configuration settings for that file, and not the AZedit default settings, will be loaded.


IFB Setup Procedures

Use the following procedure to setup any of these types of IFB:

•	Standard, one-way IFB, where the keypanel operator only needs to talk to the listener.

•	Two-way IFB, where the keypanel operator can talk and monitor the talent during IFB operation.

•	Two-way IFB, where the keypanel operator can talk and several people can monitor the talent over an external speaker or other device during IFB operation.

NOTE: For Tone override IFB setup, using an external control box and a 2400 kHz tone, click here.

Setup Procedure for standard one-way and two-way IFB

In steps 1 to 7, you name an IFB. This will be the name that appears on the keypanel when the IFB is assigned to a key.

1.	Select IFB Alphas, and then click OK.

2.	Double-click on a row to edit the alpha.

3.	In the Alpha field, type in a name (up to 4 characters). (Example: Type PAGE for an IFB that talks to a paging speaker.)
For trunked (remote) intercom systems only, enter an Alias name, if desired, that will be more meaningful to keypanel operators in the remote intercom system.

4.	If desired, type a brief Description (up to 24 characters) as a reminder of what the IFB is used for. (Example: Paging speaker.)

5.	Click Done.

In steps 7 to 13 you configure the IFB that you just named.

6.	Click the IFB button on the toolbar.

7.	Locate the IFB that you just named, and double-click on that row to open the Edit IFB dialog.

8.	In the Input field, type the Port Number, or select the Port Alpha of the intercom port where the normal audio source is connected.
For example, if you are setting up an IFB for paging with interruptible background music, connect the background music to an intercom port input then select that intercom port in the Input field. If you are setting up an IFB to cue broadcast talent, create a talent mix-minus signal. (This should be the broadcast audio minus the talent voice audio. This is usually created at an external audio mixer.) Then connect the mix minus signal to an intercom port input and select that intercom port in the Input field.

9.	In the Output field, type or select the intercom port that will normally hear the audio signal selected in step 10.
For paging, select the intercom port where the paging speaker output is connected. For talent cueing, select the intercom port where the talent earset or headset is connected.

By default, the audio source will be completely cut off, or muted, while the keypanel operator is talking. If you only want the signal to be diminished by a certain amount during IFB operation, select a different amount in the Dim Level select box. For example, if you select -6dB, the background music, talent mix-minus, etc. will seem to diminish by about half volume during IFB operation.

10.	You may not want keypanel operators to have the ability to assign this IFB to keys on their keypanels. In this case, make sure the Scroll Enable boxes are not checked. For further information, see Scroll Enable Description.

11.	The Listen Source field is only used for 2-way IFB operation. It lets the keypanel operator and/or other studio personnel listen to the talent during IFB operation. Connect the talent mic signal (the direct mic signal, not the mix-minus signal) to an intercom port input. Then, select that port in the Listen Source field.

NOTE: The Tone Override Input field is not used for standard IFB.

12.	Click Done.

In steps 14 to 21, you set up a keypanel to use the IFB that you just configured. Some steps may be omitted for standard, talk-only IFB.

13.	Click the KP button on the toolbar.

14.	Select the intercom port where the operator keypanel is connected.

15.	Click on an unused talk key box, and type the Alpha name of the IFB. (The Alpha name you set up previously.)

16.	If you previously set up a Listen Source, select the listen key box and type AT.

NOTE: AT (Auto Table) is a reserved listen key name for use with IFB talk keys. When you define a listen key as an AT key, AZedit automatically searches the table of IFBs and locates the IFB that is assigned to the talk key. It then uses the defined Listen Source for that IFB as the listen key assignment. There are two big advantages to this. First, you never have to remember which intercom port is the listen source after you have set up a particular IFB. Second, if you change the talk key assignment to a different IFB later, the listen key will automatically take on the Listen Source assignment for the new IFB.

By default, all keypanels are assigned the lowest IFB priority. This means that any keypanel can talk to the IFB listener, and all talkers will be heard. You can give a keypanel a higher IFB priority if desired. During IFB operation, a keypanel with a higher IFB priority will override any keypanel with a lower priority, and the IFB listener cannot hear the lower priority keypanels. To raise the priority number for a keypanel, access the keypanel advanced features as follows:

Advanced Features Access

a.	Click the Edit button, and then click the Advanced tab.

b.	In the IFB Priority field, type a higher number.

NOTE: by default, only 3 IFB Priority levels are allowed. If you want more, you can set that up in the Options menu under Intercom Configuration.

c.	Type 3 if you need a higher priority.
Note there is also a setting for Trunk IFB Priority. This sets the priority for keypanels in the local intercom system when talking to an IFB in a remote intercom system.

d.	Click OK when finished.

If you want the talent microphone signal to go to a studio monitor or similar device during IFB operation, you need to define that destination. Access the keypanel advanced features as follows:

Advanced Features Access

a.	Click the Edit button, and then click the Advanced tab.

b.	In the IFB Listen Destination field, select the intercom port where the studio monitor or other output is connected.

c.	Click OK when finished.

17.	Send your changes to the intercom system.
The new key assignment should appear on the operator’s keypanel, and the normal audio source should be audible at the IFB output.

18.	Activate the IFB key to check operation.
The audio source should diminish or mute, and the keypanel mic audio should be audible at the IFB output.

19.	If a Listen Source and listen key have been assigned, activate the listen key to check operation.
The talent mic signal should be audible at the operator keypanel, or at the defined Listen Destination if you are using an external monitor or similar device.

This completes the IFB setup procedure for 1-way and 2-way IFBs.

Tone Override IFB Setup

To use Tone Override Input, you must first activate this feature.

1.	Close all open dialogs.

2.	Select Preferences from the Options menu at the top of the AZedit screen.

3.	Click the Advanced tab, and select Enable IFB tone override input support.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Click the IFB button on the toolbar, and then double-click on the IFB where you want to define an IFB Tone Override Input.

6.	In the Tone Override Input field, select the intercom port where the 2400 kHz tone source is connected.


Using the Keypanel Tone Generator

The following is just one example of how you might use a keypanel tone generator to try and isolate a problem with the keypanel audio.

1.	Close any open dialog windows.

2.	Connect to the intercom system.

ONLINE should display in the mode pane at the lower-right corner of the screen. If SERVER mode displays, deselect Server mode in the ONLINE menu.

3.	Click KP to access keypanel setup.

4.	Select the intercom port where the problem keypanel is connected.

5.	Click Edit.

6.	Click the Advanced tab.

7.	Check Enable Tone to turn the tone generator on.

8.	Click OK.

9.	To check the path from this keypanel back to itself, assign a talk key to talk to it. For example, if you are checking a keypanel at port 1, assign a key at port 1 to talk to port 1.

10.	Send the changes to the intercom system.

11.	At the keypanel being tested, activate the key that you just assigned. You should be able to hear the tone. (Turn up the volume if necessary. Also make sure headset or speaker is selected as appropriate.)

NOTE: If the keypanel address is not set correctly, you will not see the key assignment that you just sent. Also, the keypanel will not receive the signal to turn on the tone generator. In this case, the problem may be an incorrectly set keypanel address. Or, if other keypanels connected to the same Audio I/O card are having similar problems, there could be a malfunction in the data transceiver on that Audio I/O card.

12.	If you can’t hear the test tone, try assigning and activating a key to talk to a known-good second keypanel. If you can hear the tone at the second keypanel, this means the talk path from the first keypanel is OK, but there may be a problem with the listen path from the first keypanel to the intercom system.

If you can’t hear the test tone at the second keypanel, try sending a test tone from the second keypanel to the keypanel being tested. (Turn on the tone generator in the second keypanel, then assign and activate a talk key to talk to the first keypanel.) If the tone is audible at the first keypanel, then there may only be a problem in the talk path from the first panel. If the tone is not audible, there may be a complete break or disconnect in the cable.

13.	To turn the tone generator off when finished, de-select Enable Tone and send the change to the intercom system.

NOTE:  If you turn on a tone generator from AZedit you must also turn it off from AZedit. If you turn on a tone generator from the keypanel, you must turn it off from the keypanel.


Select Allow Intercom Resizing in ONLINE Mode

If you plan on using the Intercom Sizing Wizard in ONLINE Mode, you must remember to select the Allow Intercom Resizing in Online Mode checkbox.

To select the Allow Intercom Resizing in Online Mode, do the following:

1	From the Option menu, select Preferences.
The Application Preferences screen appears.

2	Click the Advanced tab.
The Advanced screen appears.

3	Select the Allow Intercom Resizing in ONLINE Mode checkbox.

NOTE: You must use the Intercom Sizing Wizard if you are changing the number of frames, the number of ports, or the Intercom Setup options in your system.


Show/Hide the Toolbars

Sometimes it is convenient to hide the toolbar on an application screen to open up space on the application desktop. By default, AZedit has the navigation toolbars showing, however, you can hide them.

To hide the Navigation/Standard Toolbars, do the following:

1	From the View menu, select Navigation/Standard Toolbar or Navigation/Standard Toolbar2.
The checkmark is removed from next to your selection.

To show the Navigation/Standard Toolbar, do the following:

1	From the View menu, select Navigation/Standard Toolbar or Navigation/Standard Toolbar2.
A checkmark appears next to your selection.

NOTE: When the Navigation Toolbars are not docked to the edge of the application screen, you can hide them by clicking the X in the upper right corner of the toolbar.


Dock and Undock the Toolbars

Quite often you may need to create space on the application desktop, but do not want to lose the usefulness of the navigation toolbar. AZedit gives you the freedom to have docked or floating (undocked) toolbars. The floating toolbars can be moved inside and outside the application desktop giving you more space to work.

To Undock a toolbar, do the following:

1	On the far left side of the toolbar, click and move the toolbar away from its docked position.
The Toolbar becomes detached from the Application Desktop.

NOTE: You may also undock the toolbar by double-clicking the far right side of the toolbar. This will unlock the toolbar in its last floating position.

To Dock a toolbar, do the following:

1	Double-click the blue banner bar on the toolbar.
The toolbar docks itself to the bottom of the application desktop.

NOTE: You may also click the blue banner on the toolbar and drag it to the bottom or top of the application desktop to manually dock it.


Customize a Toolbar

To customize the Standard, Standard 2, Navigation, or Navigation 2 toolbar, use the Customize Toolbar screen to arrange your most used icons to be easily accessible.

To customize a toolbar, do the following:

1	From the View menu, select Customize Toolbars.
The Customize Toolbars popup menu appears.

2	From the Customize Toolbar menu, select Standard, Standard 2, Navigation, or Navigation 2, depending on which toolbar you want to customize.
The Customize Toolbar screen appears.

3	Select your individual preferences, then click Close.
The Toolbar dynamically changes and the Customize Toolbar screen closes.


Enable Vox

VOX or voice activated switching is the threshold level of audio at which point a channel becomes active. When the threshold is set, a microphone will not activate until the preset audio level is attained. This prevents a channel from staying ON in a high activity area.

NOTE: Vox is supported only on Cronus systems and AIO-16 cards.

Default gain structures are as follows:

Cronus 	-20 dB to +20 dB

AIO-16  	-126 dB to 0.0 dB

There are two ways to enable Vox on a port: via the Vox tab on the Keypanel/Port Configuration screen or on the Vox Settings screen.

To enable VOX from the Keypanel/Ports Configuration screen, do the following:

1.	On the Keypanel/Ports screen, select the port from the Alpha drop down list you want to enable Vox.

2.	Click the Edit button.
The Keypanel/Port Configuration screen appears.

3.	Click the Vox tab.
The Vox screen appears.

4.	Select Enable Vox.
Vox is enabled on the port.

5.	Using the Vox Threshold up and down arrows set the Vox Threshold.

6.	Using the Hold Time up/down arrows set the Hold Time for the port to stay active before shutting off.
Once Vox is enabled, you will see the Vox icon on the Keypanels/Ports screen.

To enable Vox from the Vox Settings screen, do the following:

1.	From the System menu, select Vox.
The Vox Settings screen appears.

2.	From the Port column, select the port on which to enable Vox.

3.	From the Threshold field, use the adjust up/down arrows to set the threshold at which Vox is activated.

4.	From the Hold Time field, use the Adjust up/down arrows to set the amount of time the port will stay active before shutting off.

5.	Click Enable Vox.


How to Download Firmware to Multiple Cards

To save time in updating individual cards one at a time with the same firmware, AZedit is able to update multiple cards with the same firmware simultaneously.

NOTE: 	You can download firmware from either the I/O Card Status screen or the I/O Card Version Information screen. For the purpose of this example, the I/O Card Version Information screen is used.

To download firmware to multiple cards, do the following:

1.	From the Status menu, select Software Versions, and then I/O Cards.
The I/O Card Version Information screen appears.

2.	Select multiple cards. (To select multiple cards, hold down the Ctrl button and click each card).

NOTE: 	When downloading the same firmware to multiple cards, you may only download to similar cards.

3.	Right-click on any of the highlighted cards and select Download Firmware….
The Firmware Download screen appears.

4.	Select the firmware file (usually ends in .hex, .bib, .mot extensions) or browse to find the file.

5.	Click OK.
The Download Device Firmware screen appears.

6.	Click Begin Download.
Depending on the number of cards you are updating, will determine the amount of time the download process takes.

NOTE: 	Do not power OFF the Intercom System or remove any cards while the download is in process. By doing so will result in undesirable effects.

Once the Download is complete, a message saying, “AZedit has successfully completed sending the firmware. However, it may still be being delivered to the target device(s).
Please use the Software Version screens to verify the success of the download before removing or re-powering the target device(s).”

7.	Click OK.

8.	On the I/O Software Versions screen, verify the firmware was upgraded on each of the specified cards.


How to Enable Key Labels

Key Labels allow you to rename ports to more meaningful names, without losing assignment type information of the keypanel key.

NOTE: 	Intercom Configuration options Panels with Key Labels and Key Labels per Panel must be set before using the Key Label feature.

IMPORTANT!:	Before you set key labels in your Intercom System, be sure to SAVE your existing setup file.

To set the Key Label configuration do the following:

1.	From the Options menu, select Intercom Configuration.
A warning message that reads, “WARNING! Changing these settings may cause a mismatch between AZedit and the settings in the intercom. Normally, we recommend that you change the settings for the intercom first (in ONLINE mode), then accept those settings as the defaults for AZedit” appears.

2.	Click OK.
The Intercom Configuration screen appears.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	In the Panels with Key Labels field, enter the number of keypanels allowed to have key labels (up to 272 keypanels per frame)

NOTE: 	For each additional frame, the number of keypanels allowed to have key labels assigned decreases due to the number of DBX cards in the system and the number of Frames.

5.	In the Key Labels per Panel, enter the number of key labels allowed on a keypanel (up to 64 labels per keypanel).

To enable Key Labels, do the following:

1.	On the Keypanel/Ports screen, click Edit.
The Keypanel/Port Configuration screen appears.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.

3.	Select the Key Label.
 Key Labels appear on the Keypanel/Ports screen.

You are now ready to assign a key label.


Assign a Key Label

To Assign a Key Label, do the following:

1.	In a Key Label field, enter a meaningful name for a Talk Key.
Repeat this for as many key labels as desired.

2.	Once you are finished adding key labels, save the setup file.

3.	Send the new setup file to the Intercom.
The Key Labels will appear in the appropriate keypanel window.


How to Enable Snoop Tallies

Snoop Tally, when enabled, provides an indication to keypanel users that somebody is listening to them. For example, snoop tallies are displayed on a keypanel 1 if keypanel 2, which is listening to keypanel 1 via a point-to-point or a special, list, but is not talking to keypanel 1. Snoop tallies are supported on KP-32 family keypanels.

Snoop Tally requires the minimum firmware versions:

Master Controller V9.24.0
DBX V1.15.0 with Peripheral Controller V10.15.0

NOTE: 	Hot Mic must be activated on the keypanel for snoop tally to work.

To enable Snoop Tallies, do the following:

1.	From the Options menu, select Intercom Configuration.
A warning message that reads, “WARNING! Changing these settings may cause a mismatch between AZedit and the settings in the intercom. Normally, we recommend that you change the settings for the intercom first (in ONLINE mode), then accept those settings as the defaults for AZedit” appears.

2.	Click OK.
The Intercom Configuration screen appears.

3.	Click Options.

4.	Select the Generate Snoop Tallies option.

5.	Click Apply.
A warning message that reads, “ WARNING! You are about to reconfigure the intercom! The existing intercom setup will be ERASED and intercom system will be reset” appears.

6.	Click OK.
A message that reads, “Would you like to make this configuration the AZedit default” appears.

7.	Click Yes if you want to make this configuration the default, otherwise click No.
A message that reads, “ Remove the Standby Master Controller from the intercom frame. Note: The Standby Master Controller is the card in slot 19 or slot 20 that does NOT have red LED #23 on.”, appears.

8.	Click OK.
The Intercom Configuration has been modified.

9.	Send the changes to the Intercom.

When snoop tallies have been enabled on a keypanel, and amber color light appears on the mic-mute LED on KP-32 family keypanels.


How to Enable Do Not Interrupt

To enable do not interrupt on a port, do the following:

1.	From the Alpha drop down list on the Keypanel/Port screen, select the port you want to enable Do Not Interrupt.

2.	Click Edit.
The Keypanel/Port Configuration screen appears.

3.	Click Advanced.

4.	Select the Do Not Interrupt check box.

5.	Click Apply.

6.	Click OK.

7.	Send your changes to the intercom.
Do Not Interrupt is enabled for the selected port.

NOTE: 	When Do Not Interrupt is active on a port, and one keypanel is talking to another keypanel, no other keypanel can interrupt the call (unless the caller is on a trunked system). When the caller tries to reach the keypanel with Do Not Interrupt enabled, they will see the Alpha blink intermittent with asterisks in the keypanel window.

However, once the call is released from the first caller, the second caller is connected (if they are still waiting).


Connect Cronus to the PC and the Network over Ethernet

NOTE: 	You must be running version 2.06.07 or later of AZedit and have an Ethernet card installed.

Verify the Cronus system is connected to the PC using either a USB (universal) or RS-232 (ADAM standard) cable. The USB drivers can be found in the AZedit software directory (C:\Telex\AZedit\v.xxx\USB).

Before you can connect Cronus to the network over Ethernet, you must first setup the Ethernet connection over a serial connection.

To connect Cronus to the PC with a serial cable, do the following:

1.	Open AZedit.
The Keypanel/Ports screen appears.

2.	From the Options menu, select Ethernet Setup.
The Ethernet Setup screen appears.

3.	In the IP Address field, enter the IP Address for the Cronus system.

4.	IN the Network Mask field, enter the Network Mask for the Cronus system.

5.	Where appropriate, in the Default Gateway field, enter the gateway number for Cronus.

NOTE:	If you do not know these numbers, your system administrator can give you the IP Address and Netmask to use.

6.	Click Apply.

7.	Click Close.
The Ethernet Setup window is closed.

8.	Connect the Cronus to your network with an Ethernet cable.

9.	Connect the PC to your network with an Ethernet cable.

Once you have enter the IP Address and Network Mask, do the following:

1.	From the Options menu, select Communications.
The Communications screen appears.

2.	In the Connection area, select the Network radio button

3.	In the IP Address field, either enter the Cronus IP Address you wish to connect with, or click the Search button.
The search button scans the network for any Cronus devices. If multiple units are on the network each will appear in the list. Select the Cronus you wish to work with.

4.	Click OK.
The Communications screen closes.


How to Use the Intercom Sizing Wizard

If you plan on using the Intercom Sizing Wizard in ONLINE< you must remember to select the Allow Intercom Resizing in Online Mode checkbox.

To select the Allow Intercom Resizing in ONLINE mode, do the following:

1.	From the Option menu in AZedit, select Preferences.
The Application Preferences screen appears.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.
The Advanced screen appears.

3.	Select the Allow Intercom Resizing in ONLINE Mode checkbox.

NOTE: 	You must use the Intercom Sizing Wizard if you are changing the number of frames, the number of ports, or the Intercom Setup options in your system.

To access the Intercom Sizing Wizard, do the following:

1.	From the Options menu, select Intercom Configuration.
A warning message that reads, “ WARNING! You are about to reconfigure the intercom! The existing intercom setup will be ERASED and intercom system will be reset” appears.

2.	Click OK.
The Intercom Configuration screen appears.

3.	Click Intercom Sizing Wizard.
The Intercom Sizing Wizard begins.

NOTE: 	In ONLINE mode, the wizard will automatically determine your intercom system size, and then will walk you though to get more specific information to configure your system.

In FILE mode, you will have to pick your intercom system, and then the wizard will walk you through the different options to determine the intercom system setup.


Search and Replace Key Assignments

To perform a search and replace, do the following:

1.	From the Edit menu, select Search For Key Assignment.


Set the Cronus Front Panel Control Password

1.	From the System menu, select Miscellaneous.
A popup menu appears.

2.	From the Miscellaneous menu, select Cronus Password.

The Cronus Passwords screen appears.

3.	In the Front Panel Configuration field, enter a password for the Cronus (up to 20 alpha-numeric characters).

4.	Click OK.


Show or Hide List columns

On any screens with column views you have the ability to hide columns, if desired. This is useful to hide columns that you rarely use or don’t want other users to see data in certain columns.

To hide columns, do the following:

1.	Open the screen (with column views) you want to hide a column.

2.	Right-click the column header, and select Hide.

The column closes.

3.	Repeat step 2 for any other columns that you want to hide.

To show hidden columns, do the following:

1.	Right click the column header, and then select Show Column.
The Show Column popup menu displays.

2.	From the Show Column menu, select the column you want to show.
or
Select All to show all the hidden columns.


Download License File to Cronus

To link more than one Cronus system together, you must have linking software installed on the system (normally, this is loaded at time of purchase). If you are adding a Cronus Intercom System to an existing Cronus matrix, you may need to load a license file on your existing system. Each license file is uniquely stamped with the MAC address of the master controller running in the intercom system.

NOTE: 	The Cronus system must be in “Stand Alone” state shown on the front panel display. Once the License file is loaded, the “Download License” option in the Options menu disappears.

To download the Cronus license file, do the following:

1.	From the Options menu, select Download License, and then Select a license file to download.
The Download License submenu appears.

2.	Select the license file to download or use browse to navigate to the file

3.	Click Open.
The License file begins to download. Once the file is downloaded, the message “AZedit download successful! The license file X:\XXX.lic was downloaded and accepted by the intercom.

4.	Click OK.
On the Cronus front panel, you should see Frame 1 appear after the download completes.


How to Create a Desktop Shortcut to AZedit

A desktop shortcut, usually represented by an icon, is a small file that points to a program, folder, document, or Internet location. Clicking on a shortcut icon takes you directly to the object to which the shortcut points. Shortcut icons contain a small arrow in their lower left corner. Shortcuts are merely pointers—deleting a shortcut will not delete the item to which the shortcut points.

With AZedit, you can create a unique shortcut to multiple AZedit sessions or logons for the application.

To create a shortcut to AZedit, do the following:

1.	Either click the Shortcut icon [image] or select Create Shortcut from the Authentication menu.
The Create Desktop Shortcut screen appears.

2.	Select the Intercom checkbox.

3.	Enter the name of the intercom in the intercom field.

NOTE:	If desired, you can create an AZedit session logon based on the user. For more information on Authentication, see Authentication.

4.	If desired, select the User Name check box and fill in the User field to create a shortcut that is user specific.

5.	In the Shortcut Name field, enter a recognizable name for your AZedit session.

6.	In the Description field, enter a short description of the AZedit session that is meaningful to the user.

7.	Click OK.
The Shortcut is created on the PC desktop.


How to Set Vox on Several Ports at the Same Time

To set Vox on several ports at the same time, do the following:

1.	Open the Vox screen in AZedit.

2.	Using the Threshold up and down arrows, set the threshold you want to reach before the port becomes active.

3.	Using the Hold Time up and down arrows, set the amount of time to wait before the port closes.

4.	In the Port Columns, select the ports you want to enable Vox on, by using either of the following procedures:

a.	While pressing the Ctrl key, select different Ports (can be done randomly).

b.	While pressing the Ctrl and Shift key, select a block of Ports.

5.	Once you have selected your ports, click Enable Vox.

To disable vox on a port, do the following:

1.	Open the Vox screen in AZedit.

2.	In the Port columns, select the port you want to disable Vox on, by using one of the following methods,

a.	While pressing the Ctrl key, select different  Ports (can be done randomly).

b.	While pressing the Ctrl and Shift key, select a block of Ports.

3.	Once you have selected the ports, click Disable Vox.


Add an IFB to an IFB Special List

To add an IFB to and IFB Special List, do the following:

1.	Open the IFB SL screen in AZedit.

2.	In the IFB SL field, enter the IFB SL resource number with which you want to add an IFB SL.
You can also use the alpha drop down list to select from.

3.	In the IFB Columns, you select the IFB resource you want to add to the IFB SL.

4.	Once you have selected your IFB resource, click Add to IFB SL.


Add Multiple IFBs to an IFB Special List at the Same Time

To add multiple IFBs to an IFB Special List, do the following:

1.	Open the IFB SL screen in AZedit.

2.	In the IFB SL field, enter the IFB SL resource number with which you want to add an IFB SL.
You can also use the alpha drop down list to select from.

3.	In the IFB Columns, you can choose multiple IFB resources using a few different methods, as noted below:

a.	While pressing the Ctrl key, select different IFB resources (can be done randomly).

b.	While pressing the Ctrl and Shift key, select a block of IFB resources.

4.	Once you have selected your IFB resources, click Add to IFB SL.

To remove multiple IFBs from an IFB Special List, do the following:

1.	Open the IFB SL screen in AZedit.

2.	In the IFB Columns, you can choose multiple IFB resources using a few different methods, as noted below:

a.	While pressing the Ctrl key, select different IFB resources (can be done randomly).

b.	While pressing the Ctrl and Shift key, select a block of IFB resources.

3.	Once you have selected your IFB resources, click Remove from IFB SL.


Create an Administrator Profile

An Administrator can add and delete users, change passwords, change admin states, change restrictions file requirements or enable/disable authentication on any of the connection types.

To create an Administrator Profile, do the following:

1.	From the Authentication menu, select Configuration….
The Authentication Configuration screen appears.

2.	On the Authentication Configuration screen, click Add.
The Add User screen appears.

3.	In the User Name field, enter the user name of the Administrator.

4.	In the Password field, enter a password (any password will work, this will be changed later by the administrator).

5.	Select the User is an Administrator check box, if they are to be an Administrator.

6.	Select the User requires Restrictions check box, if you want restrictions for the user enabled when they sign on.

7.	Click OK to add the user as an Administrator. Otherwise, click Cancel.


Remove IFBs from an IFB Special List

1.	From the Alpha drop down list, select the IFB SL Alpha you want to modify/remove.

2.	From the IFB SL columns, select the key assignments you want to remove.
The IFB SL that belongs to a group will have a green Yes in the IFB SL Member? column.

3.	Click Remove IFB SL.
The selected ports are removed from the assignment group list.


Resize Columns

Occasionally, the columns in AZedit are too thin to display all their information at one time.  When this happens, you can resize any column to any width you like.

To resize a column, do the following:

1.	Open a screen with a column view.

2.	Place your cursor over a column marker, left-click and hold (see below).

3.	Drag your cursor to the desired column width.


Order Columns

It is now possible to reorder the way columns appear on a screen. For example, on the Port Alpha screen the columns are ordered: Port, Alpha, Alias, and then Description.  However, by simply dragging and dropping a column in the position you want, you can reorder the columns to best fit your needs.

To reorder columns using drag and drop, do the following:

1.	Open a screen with a column view.

2.	Click and hold the column you want to move to another position.

3.	Drag the column to the new position and release.
The column has now been reordered.


How to set the delay time for screen saver mode

A screen saver is an animated image that is activated on a display when no user activity has been sensed for a certain time.  With the KP-32 family of keypanels (firmware version 2.06 or higher) you have the option to set a screen saver for the keypanel display.

To set the screen saver delay time, do the following:

1.	On a KP-32 keypanel (or KP-632 and 832), press Menu.
Display appears on the keypanel display.

2.	Press the ↓↓ button to scroll to Service.

3.	Press PGM.
Aux Inputs appears on the keypanel display.

4.	Press the ↓↓ button to scroll to Scr Saver

5.	Press PGM.
Delay appears on the keypanel display.

NOTE: 	There are three options to choose from this list: Delay, DSP Off, and Activate. When DSP Off is selected, the keypanel display turns off (pressing any key will re-activate the display).  When Activate is selected, the screen saver is immediately enabled (pressing any key will re-activate the display).

6.	Press PGM.
30 min appears on the keypanel display.

7.	Using ↓↓ scroll through the following times to determine how much inactivity on the keypanel must pass before the screen saver is activated.
30 min
1 hr
2 hr
4 hr
6 hr
8 hr
10 hr
12 hr

To set the screen saver displays see How to create/change the screen saver display.


How to create/change the screen saver display

The screen saver display is the scrolling message that appears when inactivity on a keypanel has attained a certain time limit.

To create or change the message, do the following:

1.	From the System menu in AZedit, select Miscellaneous.
A popup menu appears.

2.	From the Miscellaneous menu, select Keypanel Screen Saver.
The Keypanel Screen Saver screen appears.

3.	In Screen Saver Line 1, enter a message (up to 39 characters).

4.	In Screen Saver Line 2, enter a message (up to 39 characters). (Optional)

NOTE:  	The screen saver delay time can only be set from a KP-32 family keypanel. To set the screen saver delay time, see How to set the delay time for screen saver mode


Add/Remove a Port to a Special List
Add/Remove a Port to/from a Special List

A Special List is a group of intercom ports that a keypanel operator can talk or listen to by activating a single key. Special lists are typically used for paging, all call, group call, etc.

To add a port to a special list, do the following:

1.	On the Special Lists screen in AZedit, select the port or ports you want to add to a special list from the Special List columns.

2.	Once you have selected the port or ports you want, click Add to SL.
The selected port(s) turn yellow and a green Yes appears in the SL Member? column.

3.	Repeat as necessary.

To remove port(s) from a special list, do the following:

1.	On the Special Lists screen in AZedit, select the port or ports you want to remove from the special list.

2.	Once you have selected the port or ports you want, click Remove to SL.
The selected port(s) turn yellow and a red No appears in the SL Member? column.

3.	Repeat as necessary.


How to Create an Assignment Group

An Assignment Group is a list of arbitrary key assignments (both local and remote) of any key type that can be created in AZedit and which is available in a single scroll list to any keypanel. Assignment Groups logically group different types of key assignments into one single scroll list.

To create an Assignment Group, do the following:

1.	From the Alpha drop down list, select the Assignment Group Alpha you want to create.

2.	Click Add to Group.
The Select Key Assignment screen appears.

3.	From the Type column, select the type of port (for example, IFBs) you want to add to your assignment group.

4.	From the # and Alpha columns, select the port(s) you want to add to the assignment group.

5.	Click Add to Group.
The selected ports are added to the assignment group list.

6.	From the Scroll Enable radio buttons, select the type of scroll list in which you want assignment group to appear.

NOTE: 	You can add different types of key assignments to the each assignment group. For example, you can assign all the key assignments for a particular studio to one assignment group. This is a convenient way to see only the key assignments for a particular studio instead of having to search through all the ports to find a particular assignment.

7.	If you want to add more key assignments, repeat steps 3, 4, and 5. Otherwise, click Done.

8.	Once you have created your assignment group, send your changes to the Intercom.


Add / Remove Assignments in Assignment Groups
Remove Assignments in Assignment Groups

4.	From the Alpha drop down list, select the Assignment Group Alpha you want to modify/remove.

5.	From the Assignment Group columns, select the key assignments you want to remove.

6.	Click Remove from Group.
The selected ports are removed from the assignment group list.


How to Use an Assignment Group at the Keypanel

Assignment Groups are a convenient way of grouping similar key assignments (i.e. all studio A key assignments) in a scroll list, which in turn will allow the user to access the key assignments by logical groups rather than having to scroll through the entire list of assignments.

Once you have created and sent your assignment group, you can start using the assignment.

To see the assignment group from the keypanel, do the following:

1.	While the keypanel is in an idle state (the CWW window is clear), tap the PGM/SEL key.
The Assignment groups will appear in the call-waiting window.

2.	Using the ↑↑ or ↓↓, scroll to the Assignment Group you want.

3.	Once you have found the Assignment Group, tap PGM/SEL.
A list will appear in scroll form, allowing you to view the members of the assignment group.

NOTE: 	You can copy any assignment within the Assignment group to a key on the keypanel by using the copy CWW key.


How to redisplay the maintenance tab using the Registry Editor
How to re-display the maintenance tab using the Registry Editor

When you choose to hide the maintenance tab in the Applications Preferences dialog, you must use the Registry Editor to activate the tab again so that it can be seen

NOTE:	The Registry Editor is an advanced tool that enables you to change settings in your system registry, which contains information about how your computer runs and the programs that runs on it. You should not edit the registry unless it is absolutely necessary. Generally, it is best to use AZedit controls to change your program settings. If an error is made in the registry, the software may become nonfunctional.

WARNING: 	Make sure to make a backup .reg file of the registry before making any changes, so that you can import the working version if a mistake is made.

To open the Registry and activate the maintenance tab, do the following:

1.	From the start menu, click Run.
The Run window appears.

2.	In the Open: field, type regedit.

3.	Click OK.
The Registry Editor opens.

4.	Expand HKEY_CURRENT_USER.

5.	Expand Software.

6.	Expand AZeditV3. (If you are using an earlier version of AZedit [v 2.9 or earlier) you will expand AZedit)

7.	Expand Intercoms.

8.	Expand Default.

9.	Expand Users.

10.	Expand Default.

11.	Expand maintenance.
The maintenance tab options appear in the display window.

12.	Double click HideMaintencePreferences.
The Edit String screen appears.

13.	In the Value Data field type a capital N.

14.	Click OK.
The Maintenance tab is now active in AZedit.


How to display output alphas, input alphas, and aliases on alpha screens

To display the Output Alphas, Input Alphas, and Aliases on the Alpha screen, do the following:

1.	From the Options screen, select Preferences.
The Application Preferences screen appears.

2.	Click the Alpha Tab.
The Alpha screen appears.

3.	Select the Show all sizes on alpha views.

4.	Click Apply.
Now, Alphas with 4,6, and 8-character names will appear.

To display Aliases, do the following:

NOTE: 	An alias is a name that something or someone is also known as.

1.	Click the Advanced tab.
The Advanced screen appears.

2.	On the Advanced screen, select Enable trunking support.

3.	Click enable.
Trunking is now available. Aliases are only used in trunking situations.

To display the Input Alphas, do the following:

1.	From the Options menu, select Intercom Configuration.
A “Warning! Changing these settings may cause a mismatch between AZedit and the intercom. Normally, we recommend that you change the settings for the intercom first in ONLINE mode, then accept those settings as the defaults for AZedit.

2.	Click OK.
The Intercom Configuration screen opens.

3.	Click the Options tab.
The Options page appears.

4.	Select User input alphas.

5.	Select Apply.
The Aliases are now enabled and displayed on the Alpha screens.


How to set preferred alpha sizes

To set preferred alpha sizes, do the following:

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences.
The Application Preferences screen appears.

2.	Click the Alphas tab.
The Alphas screen appears.

3.	From the Preferred alpha size drop down list, select the preferred alpha size you want: 4-character, 6-character, or 8-character.

4.	Click Apply.

NOTE:  	When you choose 6 or 8-character Alphas, you may have up to 6 or 8-character alphas. However, 4-character alphas will still display even when 6-character or 8-character alphas are chosen.


Connect

Connect is available in the Online menu and also via the Connect button.

If AZedit is operating in FILE mode*, you can click this button to connect to the intercom system. Before connecting, the program checks to see if you have made any changes to your current intercom setup file. If there are changes, you will be allowed to cancel the connection and save your file before connecting. If there are no changes, the current intercom system setup file will immediately upload from the intercom system master controller, and this will over-write any setup file that is currently open. When you connect, ONLINE will display in the lower-right corner of the screen. In ONLINE mode, you can view the intercom system configuration and make changes, and you can also check various intercom statistics, such as which crosspoints are closed, which keys are active on a specific keypanel, the versions of firmware in various system devices, etc.

*	FILE mode means that you are not currently connected to the intercom system. This is indicated by the word "FILE" in the lower-right corner of the screen.


Send Changes

Send Changes is available in the Online menu and also via the Send Changes button.

Send changes can only be selected in ONLINE mode. ONLINE mode is indicated by the word "ONLINE" in the lower-right corner of the screen. If SERVER or FILE is indicated, Send Changes will not be available. When you make changes, the changed items are highlighted in yellow. When you select Send Changes, these items will be sent to the intercom system.


Abort Changes

Abort Changes is available in the Online menu and also via the Abort button.

You must be in ONLINE mode to select this. ONLINE mode is indicated by the word "ONLINE" in the lower-right corner of the screen. If SERVER or FILE is indicated, Abort Changes will not be available. When you select Abort Changes, any changes that you have made to the Online configuration (since the last time you sent changes) will be erased.


New

New is available in the File menu and also via the New button.

•	If you are currently editing a file in FILE mode, clicking New will clear all settings and open a new, blank setup file (you will be prompted for confirmation first).

•	If you are in FILE mode, but no changes have been made, clicking New will immediately start a new setup file without any prompts.

•	If you are in ONLINE mode, clicking New will cause the computer to disconnect from the intercom system and enter FILE mode (you will be prompted for confirmation). Then, a new, blank setup file will be started.

•	If you are operating in SERVER mode, you cannot start a new file.


Open

Open is available in the File menu and also via the Open button.

•	If you are currently editing a file in FILE mode, clicking Open will clear all settings and open a file that you select from disk (you will be prompted for confirmation first).

•	If you are in FILE mode, but no changes have been made, clicking Open will immediately let you select a file to open from disk without any prompts.

•	If you are in ONLINE mode, clicking Open will cause the computer to disconnect from the intercom system and enter FILE mode (you will be prompted for confirmation). Then, you can select a file to open.

•	If you are operating in SERVER mode, you cannot open a file.


Save

Save is available in the File menu and also via the Save button.

•	If you are currently editing a new file in FILE mode, clicking Save will let you select a file name and location to save.

•	If you are in FILE mode, and editing a previously opened setup file, clicking Save allows you to save the file with the same file name or with a different name.

•	If you are in ONLINE mode, clicking Save will cause the computer to upload the current intercom system configuration and merge it with any changes you have made but not sent to the intercom system. This assures that the latest settings are saved. For example, if one or two keypanel operators change key assignments on their keypanels while you are editing the Online configuration, both your changes and their changes will be saved.

•	If you are operating in SERVER mode, you cannot save a file.

NOTE: By default, all setup files are saved in a folder called Setups, which is located in your AZedit program folder. This folder will not be deleted if you use the Uninstall utility to remove AZedit. We recommend that you save your files in this folder.


Save As

Save As is available in the File menu and also via the Save As button.

•	If you are currently editing a new file in FILE mode, clicking on Save As will let you select a file name and location to save.

•	If you are in FILE mode, and editing a previously opened setup file, clicking Save As allows you to save the file with a new file name.

•	If you are in ONLINE mode, clicking Save As will cause the computer to upload the current intercom system configuration and merge it with any changes you have made but not sent to the intercom system. This assures that the latest settings are save. For example, if one or two keypanel operators change key assignments on their keypanels while you are editing the Online configuration, both your changes and their changes will be saved.

•	If you are operating in SERVER mode, you cannot use Save As.

Note: By default, all setup files are saved in a folder called Setups, which is located in your AZedit program folder. This folder will not be deleted if you use the Uninstall utility to remove AZedit. We recommend that you save your files in this folder.


Partial Save

The Partial Save command lets you save parts of the setup file that you are currently working on. Later, you can send the partial configuration to the intercom system using the Send File command. Or, you can use the Merge command to merge the partial file into another setup file that you are working on. For example, you might use Partial Save to save all of your UPL Resources and UPL Statements in their own file. You can then merge this file into your other setup files, as needed using the Merge command.


Print

Print is available via the File menu and the Print button.

This command prints the configuration information for whatever views you are currently looking at. For example, to print the configuration information for party lines, press the PL button on the toolbar to view the party line configuration information, then select print.


Print Preview

The Print Preview command lets you see how the printed page will look before you print it.


Print Setup

The Print Setup command lets you select a printer, the orientation of the paper, and any other options that are available for your selected printer.


Exit

Exit lets you close AZedit. Normally, you will first see a warning and you will be given a chance to cancel if you have not saved your configuration information. You can deactivate the warning if desired:

1.	In the Options menu, select Preferences.

2.	Click the Startup / Shutdown tab.

3.	De-select Ask for confirmation before exit.

4.	Click OK to finish.


Undo

Undo is available in the Edit menu and via the Undo button.
.

Undo will undo up to 20 consecutive previously made changes. The Undo command is cleared every time you save your setup file or sends your changes to the intercom system in ONLINE mode.


Redo

Redo is available in the Edit menu and via the Redo button.

Redo will redo up to 20 consecutive changes that you previously canceled with the Undo Button.

The Redo command is cleared every time you save your setup file or sends your changes to the intercom system.


Cancel Changes

Cancel Changes is available only in ONLINE mode and only when an item is selected that has been changed since the last time changes were saved or sent to the intercom system. Cancel Changes can be accessed in the Edit menu or via the Cancel Changes button.

Unlike Undo, which only lets you work on a "stack" of changes (last change made, is the first change undone), Cancel Changes lets you move from screen to screen and clear the changes made to any item. Also, when you select an item and then select Cancel Changes, the confirmation dialog asks whether you would like to Cancel Changes for ALL items of the selected type. For example, if you are viewing the IFB screen and click on an IFB, then select Cancel Changes, the confirmation dialog will read "Are you sure you want to Cancel Changes for the selected IFB?", and there will also be a check box that reads "Cancel Changes for ALL IFBs".


Cut

This feature is not currently implemented.


Copy

Copy is available in the Edit menu and via the Copy button.

When selectable, this command copies the entire contents of the screen that you are currently viewing. For further information and important applications, click here.


Paste

Paste is available in the Edit menu and via the Paste button.

This command is used after the copy command, which is also available in the Edit menu, or via the Copy button.

Copy button.

The Paste command pastes the entire contents of the Windows Clipboard into the current configuration screen (if that screen is of the same type as the one that was copied).

NOTE: 	To select which items that you want to paste, or to simultaneously paste to multiple screens, use Paste Special instead of Paste. Paste Special is also available in the Edit menu.


Paste Special

Paste Special is available in the Edit menu. It gives you greater control over pasting than you get when using the Paste command. You can paste portions of the Windows Clipboard to a screen. Or, you can paste to multiple screens. For important applications of the Paste Special command, see Listen Key Setup using Copy and Paste Special, or Scroll Enable Setup using Copy and Paste Special.


Search

Search is available in the Edit menu and via the Search button.

Search (and Replace) helps you change ports without search for all ports that are affected. Search is sometimes useful, for example, when you are moving a user from one intercom port to another. You will have to search for all keypanels that have keys assigned to that person's old port, and change them to the new port. For further information about moving users, click here.


Toolbar

Toolbar and Toolbar2 is also available From the View menu. They turn the toolbar ON or OFF (at the bottom of the screen, above the Status Bar).


Status Bar

Turns the status bar buttons (at the bottom of the screen, below the Toolbar) ON or OFF.


Refreshing Screens

Refresh is available in the View menu and also by pressing Ctrl+Space on the computer keyboard.

In ONLINE or SERVER modes, selecting Refresh will cause AZedit to retrieve the most current configuration and status information from the intercom system. You can use Refresh with any screen that provides status information. For example, if you are viewing a particular Keypanel / Port screen, you can see which keys are currently activated by selecting Refresh. For each key that is on, a red dot will appear above that key on your viewing screen.

NOTE: 	The screens refresh automatically, usually every few seconds. However, the time between refreshes can vary, depending on intercom activity, and the size of the intercom system. To be sure you are viewing the most recent information for a particular screen use Refresh.


Go Back

Go Back is available in the View menu and also via the Go Back button.

It lets you go back to previously viewed screens (up to 20).


Go Forward

Go Forward is available in the View menu and also via the Go Forward button.

It lets you go forward again when you have used Go Back to look at previously viewed screens.


Keypanel / Ports Setup

Keypanel/Ports Setup provides access to the Keypanel / Ports setup screen. Use to set up keypanels (assign keys etc.) Also use to assign GPI Inputs, to set scroll restrictions for intercom ports, and to view keypanel activity. For further information, click here.


Party Line

Provides access to the Party Line setup screen, where you can assign intercom ports to party lines (conference lines). For further details, click here.


IFB Priority

Provides access to the IFB Priority list, where you can view and change the IFB priorities for all intercom ports from a single list. For further information on the IFB feature, click here.


Special List

Provides access to the Special List setup screen, where you can configure special lists. For further information about special lists, click here.


GPI Output

Provides access to the setup screen for GPI (General Purpose Interface) outputs. For further information about the GPI Interface, click here.


ISO

Provides access to the ISO (Isolate) setup screen. For further information about isolates, click here.


GPI Input

Provides access to the setup screen for GPI (General Purpose Interface) inputs. For further information about the GPI Interface, click here.


Dim Table

Provides access to the setup screen to assign keypanels to inter-panel dim tables. For further information, click here.


XPT (Crosspoint)

Lets you see which intercom ports are currently talking and/or listening to each other. Lets you turn talk and/or listen paths on or off between selected intercom ports. Lets you view all events and settings that are currently affecting the gain between two intercom ports.


Crosspoint Gains

Adjust the level from a specific intercom port to another intercom port.


Party Line Gains

Adjust the listen level from a specific party line to a specific intercom port.

Party Line Description


Analog I/O Gains

Some external audio sources may provide output levels that are higher or lower than what is required for the intercom system audio input. And, some external devices may require an audio input level that is higher or lower than the standard intercom system output level. In such cases, you can use the Analog I/O Gain feature to compensate for the non-standard levels.


Port Alphas

Assign names and descriptions for intercom ports. These names will appear in the alphanumeric displays on keypanels when you assign the ports to keypanel keys (using keypanel setup). You can assign 4-, 6-, and 8-character alphas and allocate a 24-character description.

NOTE: 	You can also change the name for a particular intercom port by pressing Ctrl+F12 while viewing that port. For more information, click here.

Port Description


Party Line Alphas

You can assign 4-, 6-, and 8-character alphas and allocate a 24-character description.

NOTE: 	You can also change the name for a particular party line using Ctrl+F12 alpha editing. For more information, click here.

Party Line Description


IFB Alphas

You can assign 4-, 6-, and 8-character alphas and allocate a 24-character description.

NOTE: 	You can also change the name for a particular IFB using Ctrl+F12 alpha editing. For more information, click here.

IFB Description


Special List Alphas

You can assign 4-, 6-, and 8-character alphas and allocate a 24-character description.

NOTE: 	You can also change the name for a particular special list using Ctrl+F12 alpha editing. For more information, click here.

Special List Description


GPI Output Alphas

You can assign 4-, 6-, and 8-character alphas and allocate a 24-character description.

NOTE: 	You can also change the name for a particular GPI output using Ctrl+F12 alpha editing. For more information, click here.

GPI Description


ISO Alphas

You can assign 4-, 6-, and 8-character alphas and allocate a 24-character description.

NOTE: 	You can also change the name for a particular ISO using Ctrl+F12 alpha editing. For more information, click here.

ISO Description


GPI Input Alphas

You can assign 4-, 6-, and 8-character alphas and allocate a 24-character description.

NOTE: 	You can also change the description for a particular GPI input using Ctrl+F12 alpha editing. For more information, click here.

GPI Description


Dim Table Alphas

You can assign 4-, 6-, and 8-character alphas and allocate a 24-character description to inter-panel dim tables.

NOTE: 	You can also change the description for a particular dim table using Ctrl+F12 alpha editing. For more information, click here.

Inter-panel Dim Table Description


Port Status

Use the Port Status to view connection status and data communication errors between intercom ports and the master controller. You can also use this to upgrade the firmware in certain types of keypanels connected to intercom ports.

Port Status Screen Information


Master Controller Status

Use Master Controller Status to view connection status and data communication errors between the master controller and the configuration PC. You can also use this to upgrade the master controller firmware.

NOTE: 	In an ADAM or ADAM CS intercom system this item displays status information about the active master controller card, and the standby master controller card status can be viewed with the Standby Controller item on the Status menu.

Master Controller Status Screen Information


Standby Controller Status

Use Standby Controller Status to view connection status and data communication errors between the standby master controller card and the active master controller card.

Standby Controller Status Screen Information


Trunk Master Status

If your intercom system uses an optional FR9589 Trunking Master Controller, you can use this menu item to view connection status and data communication errors between the FR9589 and the active master controller in your local ADAM or ADAM CS intercom system.

Trunk Master Status Screen Information


I/O Card Status

Use I/O Card Status to view connection status and data communication errors between Audio Input / Output Cards and the active Master Controller Card. You can also use this to upgrade the firmware in Audio Input / Output Cards.

Audio I/O Card Status Screen Information


PAP and LCP-102 Status

Use the PAP and LCP-102 Status to view connection status and data communication errors between the master controller and any Program Assign Panels or LCP-102 Level Control Panels that are connected to the intercom system.

PAP and LCP-102 Status Screen Information


UIO-256 Status

Use the UIO-256 Status to view connection status and data communication errors between the master controller and any UIO-256 Universal Input / Output Frames that are connected to the intercom system.

UIO-256 Status Screen Information


Master Controller Versions

Use the Master Controller Versions to check the Master Controller firmware version. You can also use this to upgrade the Master Controller firmware.

Master Controller Version Screen Information


I/O Card Versions

Use I/O Card Versions to check the firmware versions of Audio Input / Output Cards. You can also use this to upgrade the firmware in Audio Input / Output cards.

Audio I/O Card Version Screen Information


Keypanel Versions

Use Keypanel Versions to check the firmware versions of keypanels. You can also use this to upgrade the firmware in certain types of keypanels.

Keypanel Version Screen Information


Warn on Exit

AZedit will ask you to confirm whenever you attempt to exit the program.


Connect on Startup

AZedit will automatically attempt to log onto the intercom system whenever the program is started.


Sort Alphas Numerically

If checked, AZedit will sort alpha list boxes by port number. If not checked, alpha list boxes will be sorted alphabetically.


Communications

Select the COM port and baud rate for communication between the PC and the intercom system.


Intercom Configuration

Use Intercom Configuration to view the number of available resources and options, such as intercom ports, party lines, number of talk levels, etc. In an ADAM, ADAM CS, or Cronus intercom system, you can also use Intercom Configuration to change the resource and option settings.


Reset Capabilities

This item can only be selected in FILE mode. Use it to reactivate any capabilities of AZedit that may have been disabled. AZedit capabilities may have been disabled in several ways:

•	Some AZedit features may be disabled by default because they are not commonly used.

•	AZedit capabilities may have been disabled by directly editing the [capabilities] section of the AZedit.ini file (This file is located in your Windows folder and can be edited in any text editor, such as Windows Notepad.) Editing the [capabilities] section of the AZedit.ini file is not recommended.

•	 AZedit features may have been disabled by connecting to an intercom system that uses older firmware, with fewer capabilities than what is supported by your AZedit version. In this case you will see a prompt that there is a capabilities conflict, and you will be given the choice to reset AZedit capabilities to match the intercom system. If you do this, some capabilities may be deactivated, and you will not be able to use those features. See Capabilities Conflict Message for further details.


Disable Logging

Stops the logging feature from recording any talk and listen key activity.


Log to File

The logging feature will automatically log all talk and listen key activity to a file on disk.


Log to Serial Port

The logging feature will output talk and listen key activity in ASCII text format via an RS232 serial port. Requires a separate COM port connection at the computer. See logging description for further details.


View Log

Starts an auxiliary program called Log Viewer, which lets you view files that have been saved with the Log to File feature.


Help Index

Shows the help contents.


Using Help

Shows how to use Windows help.


About AZedit

Shows the version of the software, its build date, and copyright information.


Restore

Restores the AZedit window to the previously changed size.


Move

Allows you to move the window to any space on the screen using the arrow buttons on the keyboard.


Size

Allows you to change the size of the window using the arrow buttons on the keyboard.


Minimize

The window will be reduced to a button in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen.


Maximize

The window will expand to fill the entire screen.


Close

The AZedit application will close.


Mode Pane

This pane indicates the current operating mode as follows:

•	FILE Indicates that the computer is not communicating with the intercom system. In this mode, you can create new setup files, and also open and edit existing setup files. This mode is recommended if you are making many changes and want to save your file to disk periodically, but do not need to immediately download the changes to the intercom system.

•	ONLINE Indicates that the computer is communicating with the intercom system but is not in SERVER mode. This means that you can make changes to the intercom configuration, or manually send new setup files to the intercom system. NOTE: if you are making many changes to an intercom setup file and want to save it periodically, you will be able to do this much more quickly in FILE mode.

•	SERVER Indicates that the computer is online and operating in SERVER mode. This means that you can view the current intercom system configuration, as well as intercom activity, but you cannot make any changes.


Communication Status Pane

This pane indicates the data transmission activity between the configuration computer and the intercom system. A green light in the left window indicates that the computer is sending data to the COM port specified in the Communications dialog. This indicator will flicker occasionally whether the computer is connected to the intercom system or not, since the computer always periodically polls the port. A green light in the right window indicates that the computer is receiving data from the intercom system. This indicator will be active only when the computer is connected to the intercom system and the configuration software is in ONLINE mode or SERVER mode.


Intercom Status Pane

This pane provides any one of the following indications:

----	No intercom detected

LOCL	Intercom detected, but type not recognized

SLV	Slave frame of a multi-frame ADAM system detected (won't go ONLINE, all system configuration is performed via the master frame connection)

CS9X	CS9x00 intercom detected (won't go ONLINE)

ADAM	ADAM or ADAMCS intercom detected (will only go ONLINE if running AZedit)

name	The alpha name assigned to an ADAM or ADAM CS intercom system that is operating in a trunking environment (names assigned using CStrunk)


Intercom System Name (Alpha)
Intercom System Name Pane (Intercom Alpha)

When you are viewing most screens, this pane displays the name of the intercom system where the currently selected resource is located. In the keypanel setup view or the LCP-102 setup view, if you move the cursor over an assignment, this pane will also display the name of the intercom system where that assignment is located. If your intercom system is not interconnected with any other intercom systems, this pane will display LOCL for all resources. This indicates that the resource is located in the local intercom system. If your intercom system is part of a larger trunking* intercom system, then some resources which are being used in your intercom system may actually be located in a remote intercom system. For example, a key on a keypanel in your intercom system could be assigned to talk to a person in a remote intercom system. In such cases, this pane will display the name of the remote intercom system.

* For more information about trunking, click here.


Resource Type Pane

When you are viewing most screens, this pane displays the type of resource that is currently selected. In the keypanel setup view or the LCP-102 setup view, if you move the cursor over an assignment, this pane will also display the type of resource that is assigned. For more information about types of resources, click here.

NOTE: 	Whenever there is a resource type displayed here, the pane immediately to the right of this pane will indicate the identification number of the resource.


ID Number Pane

When you are viewing most screens, this pane displays the ID number (identification number) of the resource that is currently selected. In the keypanel setup view or the LCP-102 setup view, if you move the cursor over an assignment, this pane will also display the identification number (ID number) of the assignment.

NOTE: 	Whenever there is a number displayed here, the pane immediately to the left of this pane will indicate the type of key assignment or resource: PP (point-to-point), PL (party line) etc.


LCP-102 Assignment

Set up an optional LCP-102 Level Control Panel.


Gain

Adjust crosspoint and party line gains.


Help

Accesses help information for whatever Main Screen you are currently viewing. For more information on screen types, click here.


Question Mark Cursor

Click the question mark icon, then point and click on any menu item or toolbar button for a brief description.


Information Pane

This pane displays additional information for any toolbar button or menu item that you are currently pointing to with the cursor.


Load File

Load File (in the Online menu) is only available in ONLINE mode. Load File lets you select a file from disk, view its contents, and then merge it into the ONLINE configuration, if desired. The settings in the file that you are loading will overwrite any corresponding settings in the online configuration, and whatever is changed will be highlighted in yellow. For example, if you load a file that contains only settings for intercom port 1, you will notice that only items for intercom port 1 are highlighted. Note that these changes will NOT be sent to the intercom system until you use the Send Changes command (Online menu). Generally, you use Load File when you want to merge into the ONLINE configuration a file that was saved using the Partial Save command. You can then either use the Send Changes command to send the partial changes to the intercom system. Or, you can use the Save command on the File menu to create a new disk file which contains both current settings from the intercom system and previously saved settings from a partial intercom file.

NOTE: 	If your real intention is to completely overwrite the ONLINE configuration using a file from disk, you should use Send File (also located in the Online menu).


User Programmable Logic Statements

Create programming statements to cause events based on specified conditions. For more information about UPL statements, click here.


Send File

Send File is only available in ONLINE mode. You can access Send File in the Online menu, or with the Send File button.

Send File lets you select a file from disk, view its contents, and then send it to the intercom system. If the file is a complete setup file, all configuration information in the intercom system will be overwritten. If the file was created using the Partial Save command, only those items contained in the file will be overwritten in the intercom system.


Server Mode

You can only select Server Mode when the computer is connected to the intercom system and communicating with it. (ONLINE must first appear in the lower-right corner of the screen.  Then, when you select Server Mode, ONLINE will change to SERVER.) When SERVER mode is on, you can view the online configuration and also observe intercom activity, but you cannot make any changes and you cannot manually load or send files. However, the intercom system can request files from the computer via UPL statements. In fact, SERVER mode must be activated if you want to use UPL statements to download files.

Select Server Mode to turn it ON. De-select it to turn it OFF.

NOTE: 	You can set AZedit to always enter SERVER mode at startup: In the Options menu, select Preferences, then click on the Startup / Shutdown tab. Click to place a check mark next to Auto enter SERVER mode.


UPL Resources

Use this menu item to set up the Scroll Enable feature for UPL Resources. If Ctrl+F12 Alpha Editing is activated, you can also use this menu item to assign names (Alphas) for UPL Resources.


Merge

Merge is available in the File menu and also via the merge button.

Use merge to combine the contents of a previously saved file into the file you are currently editing. Typically, you will use merge with partial setup files that have been previously saved using partial save.


IFB

Provides access to the IFB setup screen, where you define IFB inputs and outputs. For further details, click here.


Preferences

All optional user settings for AZedit are available on the Preferences menu.


UPL Resources

Use this to name UPL Resources. UPL Resource Description.


Check for Duplicate Alphas

In a large-scale intercom system, the possibility exists that you may accidentally assign the same name (alpha) to two different resources. This should never be allowed for two resources of the same type. For example, no two intercom ports should have the same name; no two IFBs should have the same name, etc. On the other hand, you may decide that you do want to use the same name for two resources of different types. For example, you may decide to use the same name for both an intercom port and an IFB. Although you can do this, we strongly recommend that you do not. (In the case where you give an intercom port and an IFB the same name, you may want to turn off Scroll Enable for the intercom port so that only keypanel operators can assign the IFB to keypanel keys.)

By default, AZedit will prompt you and offer to check for duplicate alphas whenever you open a file from disk. You can activate or deactivate both the prompt and the check: in the Options menu, select Preferences, and then click on the Alphas tab. You will find two check boxes titled Automatically check for duplicate alphas after opening a file, and Prompt before checking for duplicate alphas.

You can also select Check for duplicate alphas... in the Alphas menu at any time to identify and correct duplicate alphas in your setup file or in the online configuration.


Log Status Pane

No information available.


Font Size Extra Large

You can select several different text sizes for viewing the setup screens. If you select one of the larger text sizes, the complete setup information will not fit on your screen. In this case, scroll bars will appear on the screen.


Font Size Large

You can select several different text sizes for viewing the setup screens. If you select one of the larger text sizes, the complete setup information will not fit on your screen. In this case, scroll bars will appear on the screen.


Font Size Medium

You can select several different text sizes for viewing the setup screens. If you select one of the larger text sizes, the complete setup information will not fit on your screen. In this case, scroll bars will appear on the screen.


Font Size Small

You can select several different text sizes for viewing the setup screens. If you select one of the larger text sizes, the complete setup information will not fit on your screen. In this case, scroll bars will appear on the screen.


Refresh Alphas

This item is available only in ONLINE mode. It allows you to upload all current names from the intercom system to AZedit.


Advanced Alpha Copy Utility

Opens the Copy Alphas screen.

Use Advanced Copy to quickly copy and paste selected alpha or alias names. For example, you could copy all Alpha names and paste them to all Alias names. This is something you might want to do if you have just added trunking to a previously operating intercom system and now you want to add Alias names that are the same as the Alpha names.


View Mode

This item toggles between normal and enhanced views for some setup screens. It is the same as pressing Ctrl+Tab on the computer keyboard. As of this writing, view mode is used only with the Keypanel / Ports screen to toggle between view by Panel Type and view by Setup Page.


Trunk Ports

Use this feature to view a list of trunk ports in the connected intercom. You will then be able to inspect the trunk port usage (as from TrunkEdit).


Remote Intercoms

You can use this feature to view the status of remote intercoms. You will then be able to choose to clear key assignments that refer to disconnected intercoms. For more information, Click Here.


IFB Listen Source

IFB Listen Sources let you define a talent mic source for use with each IFB. Listen sources are used with the Auto Table feature so that the listen key for an IFB will always be assigned to listen to whatever is assigned to the IFB talk key. The IFB Setup Procedures demonstrate how IFB Listen Sources are used.


IFB Listen Destination

IFB Listen Destination is a keypanel setting that is used with the IFB Listen Source feature. It lets you redirect the IFB listen audio from the keypanel speaker or headset to an external device, such as a studio monitor, when the keypanel operator activates a key to listen to the talent mic audio. The IFB Setup Procedures demonstrate how IFB Listen Destination is used.


DBX Links

Use DBX Links to view information about the links between DBX (Dual Bus Expansion) cards in a multi-frame ADAM intercom system that uses this type of card. This item is only selectable in ONLINE mode when AZedit is connected to a DBX system.

After you select DBX links and are viewing the DBX Links screen, you can press F1 for help. Or, click here to access the help information now.


Auto Dials Alpha

The Auto Dials Alphas screen is just like any other alpha screen such as PL, IFB, ISO, etc… A list of Auto dial resources is displayed along with their Alpha, Alias, and Description. The Auto Dial alias is unused because the Auto Dial resources are not visible outside the local intercom (an alias is only used for trunking).

The Auto Dial alpha is what will be displayed on a keypanel when an Auto Dial resource is programmed onto a panel key.

The Auto Dial description is for documentation purposes only (like all descriptions) and is visible only in AZedit (but is stored in the intercom like other data).


Auto Dials

Auto Dials makes TIF dialing easier for end users. The Auto Dial function allows predefined auto dialing to be configured for use from keypanels.


Groups

Group Calls allow users to page a group or department consisting of a number of keypanels. This is useful when you are not looking for one person in particular and just need to talk to anyone in that group, or when you are looking for someone, but do not know which station they are at.

When somebody in the group answers the page, a private conversation is initiated.


Groups Alpha

The Groups Alpha screen allows you to assign Alpha, Alias, and Descriptions for Group Calls.


Port Edit Box

The Port Edit box displays the port number for the port setup currently being viewed. Typing a different port number in this box will show the setup information for the specified port.


Alpha combo box

The Alpha box displays the alpha for the port setup currently being viewed. Selecting a different alpha in this box will show the setup information for the specified port.


Page combo box

The Page box displays/controls the page of assignments are displayed for the current keypanel view.


Edit button

Click the Edit button to access additional/advanced and Vox setup features for the current port/keypanel view.


Volume button

Click the Volume button to access the gain controls for the current port/keypanel view.


Port status bitmap grid

The following items are displayed in the Port Status group (upper-right corner of the Keypanels / Ports screen): Most of these icons activate based on keypanel features detected by the intercom system master controller.

Heartbeat Icon: Indicates that a data device (keypanel, TIF, or Camera Delegate Panel) is connected to the intercom port

Warning Icon: Indicates that the intercom port is defined as an IFB output (in the IFB Setup screen).

Headset Icon: Indicates that the connected keypanel has a headset selected

LED Icons: Indicate the on/off state of any local GPI inputs and outputs. These indicators function only when a keypanel with a local GPI port is connected. Bright Green/ Bright Red=On (Asserted), Green/ Red=Off (Inhibited) in 16 slices to show RVON GPI activity.

Question Mark Icon: Indicates that the keypanel type you have selected (with the Edit button) does not match what is reported by the intercom system.


Panel status bitmap grid

The following icons are displayed in the Keypanel / Port Settings group (next to the Port Status group). These icons remind you that certain selections have been made using the Edit button.

Musical Note Icon: Indicates that Enable Tone is checked.

Sunglass Icon: Indicates that Keypanel Privacy is checked

No Phone Dial Icon: Indicates that TIF Dial-Out Restrict is checked

Modem Icon: Indicates that a Panel Poll Delay has been specified

Phone Icon: Indicates that Port is TIF is checked

"No" Symbol: Indicates that Setup Restrict is checked.


Listen key latch disables

Some keypanels feature electronic key latching. To disable latching for a key assignment, click on the Disable check box (D) above that key assignment. (Or, press Ctrl+D on the computer keyboard while the key assignment is selected.)


Listen key key restricts

To prevent a keypanel operator from changing a key assignment, click on the Restrict check box (R) above that key assignment. (Or press Ctrl+R on the computer keyboard while the key assignment is selected.)

NOTE: 	You may wish to set all of the restriction check boxes for all setup pages at all intercom ports. You can do this quite easily using the Copy and Paste Special commands. For more information, click here.


Talk key latch disables

Some keypanels feature electronic key latching. To disable latching for a key assignment, click on the Disable check box (D) above that key assignment. (Or, press Ctrl+D on the computer keyboard while the key assignment is selected.)


Talk Key key restricts

To prevent a keypanel operator from changing a key assignment, click on the Restrict check box (R) above that key assignment. (Or press Ctrl+R on the computer keyboard while the key assignment is selected.)

NOTE: 	You may wish to set all of the restriction check boxes for all setup pages at all intercom ports. You can do this quite easily using the Copy and Paste Special commands. For more information, click here.


Show volume buttons

Click the Show Volume button to show the current listen levels for the keypanel being viewed. The listen levels display only when a listen key is assigned.


Description

This is an optional description supplied by the user when defining alphas for the keypanel/port.


Panel type description

This is the current panel type as reported by the intercom or as set by the user.


PL Number

The PL Number displays the number assigned to the party line (PL) currently being viewed.


PL Alpha combo box

The PL Alpha displays the alpha assigned to the party line (PL) currently being viewed.


Local party line tallies

This feature is used when 2 or more keypanels have keys assigned to talk to the same party line. Note that we are not referring to keypanels that are members of the party line, but keypanels that can talk to the party line with an intercom key. Here is how party line tally works. Let's say two different keypanels have the same party line assigned to a talk key. If one of the keypanels activates the party line talk key, the tally indication will be supplied at the other keypanel. Typically, the tally indication is in the form of a flashing alphanumeric display (KP9x series keypanels) or a continuously lit red talk key LED indicator (most other keypanels). The tally indication tells the keypanel operator that activating the party line key will break in on a conversation that is in progress.


Trunk party line tallies

This feature is used when 2 or more keypanels have keys assigned to talk to the same party line. Note that we are not referring to keypanels that are members of the party line, but keypanels that can talk to the party line with an intercom key. Here is how party line tally works. Let's say two different keypanels have the same party line assigned to a talk key. If one of the keypanels activates the party line talk key, the tally indication will be supplied at the other keypanel. Typically, the tally indication is in the form of a flashing alphanumeric display (KP9x series keypanels) or a continuously lit red talk key LED indicator (most other keypanels). The tally indication tells the keypanel operator that activating the party line key will break in on a conversation that is in progress.


PL Talker button

Clicking on this button will make the selected port(s) permanent talkers (P-T) for the currently viewed PL assignment. The permanent talker assignment is usually only used with non-intelligent devices (i.e. devices that cannot instruct the intercom system on how to route the audio). This option is usually not used with keypanels.


PL Listener button

Clicking on this button will make the selected port(s) permanent listeners (P-L) for the currently viewed PL assignment. The permanent listener assignment is usually only used with non-intelligent devices (i.e. devices that cannot instruct the intercom system on how to route the audio). This option is usually not used with keypanels.


NOT PL Talker button

Click the NOT PL Talker button to make the selected port(s) not permanent talkers (P-T) for the currently viewed PL assignment.


NOT PL Listener button

Click the NOT PL Listener button to make the selected port(s) not permanent listeners (P-L) for the currently viewed PL assignment.


Select All button (for all item views)

Selects all list items in the current view.


De-select All button (for all item views)

De-selects All lists items in the current view.


Invert Selections (for all item views)

Inverts all selected lists items in the current view.


SL Number

The SL Number box contains the number assigned to the Special List currently being viewed.


SL Alpha combo box

The SL Alpha combo box contains the alpha assigned to the Special List currently being viewed.


Relay Number

The Relay Number box contains the number assigned to the selected relay.  Relays are optional in special lists. If a relay is selected, then the relay will close when the special list currently being viewed is activated from a keypanel.


Relay Alpha

The Relay Alpha box contains the alpha assigned to the selected relay. Relays are optional in special lists. If a relay is selected, then the relay will close when the special list currently being viewed is activated from a keypanel.


Add to SL

Click the Add to SL button to add the selected port(s) to the special list.


Remove from SL

Click the Remove from SL button to remove the selected port(s) from the special list.


Dim Number

The DIM Number box contains the DIM entry number.


Gain combo box

The Gain box contains the amount of DIM associated with the DIM entry number.


Add to Dim button

Click Add to Dim to add the selected port to the DIM assignment being viewed.


Remove from Dim button

Click Remove from Dim to remove the selected port from the DIM assignment being viewed.


XPT Port number

The XPT Port Number field contains the number assigned to the port currently being viewed.


XPT Port alpha

The XPT Port Alpha field contains the alpha assigned to the port currently being viewed.


XPT Force button

Click the XPT Force button to force a crosspoint closure between the port currently being viewed and the port selected.


XPT Inhibit button

Click the XPT Inhibit button to inhibit a crosspoint closure between the port currently being viewed and the port selected.


XPT Release button

Click the XPT Release button to force the crosspoint closure between the ports currently being viewed and the port will be released.


XPT Inspect button

Click the XPT Inspect button to provide detailed status information on the crosspoint connection between the port currently being viewed and the port selected.


XPT Port number

The XPT Port Number field contains the number of the port currently being viewed.


XPT Port Alpha

The XPT Port Alpha field contains the number of the alpha currently being viewed.


XPT Gain combo box

To set the gain (either boost +, cut -, or none 0), select the gain from the combo box list and click on the Set Gain button.


XPT Gain button

Click the XPT Gain button to set the gain for the selected crosspoint to the number contained in the Gain combo box.


XPT Gain spin control

To adjust the gain incrementally, click on the up button to increase the gain, or click on the down button to decrease the gain.


XPT Reset gain button

Click the XPT Reset Gain button to set the selected port(s) to unity (0 dB) gain.


XPT Show non-unity only checkbox

Placing a checkmark in next to this entry will show only the ports whose gain is not at unity (0 dB). Removing the checkmark next to this entry will show the gain status for all ports.


PL Port number

The PL Port Number field contains the number of the port currently being viewed.


PL Port alpha

The PL Port Alpha field contains the number of the alpha currently being viewed.


PL Gain combo box

To set the gain (either boost +, cut -, or none 0), select the gain from the combo box list and click on the Set Gain button.


PL Gain button

Click the PL Gain button to set the gain for the selected crosspoint to the number contained in the Gain combo box.


PL Gain spin control

To adjust the gain incrementally, click on the up button to increase the gain, or click on the down button to decrease the gain.


PL Reset gain button

Click the PL Reset Gain button to set the selected port(s) to unity (0 dB) gain.


PL Show non-unity only checkbox

Placing a checkmark in next to this entry will show only the ports whose gain is not at unity (0 dB). Removing the checkmark next to this entry will show the gain status for all ports.


LCP combo box

The LCP combo box contains the number assigned to the LCP currently being viewed.


Mode combo box

The Mode box contains the mode being used with the LCP currently being viewed.


Mode Enabled checkbox

A check mark in the box next to the Mode Enabled entry will allow an operator to access the mode and change settings.


Change Setup button

Clicking on Change Setup will allow you to change the active setup page.


LCP key assignment

This is an LCP assignment. To change the assignment type the new assignment in the box for the key of interest, or right click on the assignment of interest and choose the Change Assignment option.


IFB priority buttons

Clicking these buttons will assign a priority to the selected port for use in determining override order when accessing IFB assignments. The higher the priority is the higher the priority in access to the port. Ports with the same priority level will be allowed to access a given IFB on a first-come first-serve basis.


Set output gain button

Clicking on this button sets the output gain for the selected port to the gain specified in the gain combo box.


Output Gain spin control

Clicking on the up/down arrows will increase/decrease the output gain for the selected port.


Reset output gain button

Clicking on this button will reset the output gain for the selected port to unity (0 dB).


Analog Gain combo box

Clicking on this box and selecting a gain from the displayed list can select the amount of desired gain.


Set Input Gain button

Clicking the Input Gain button will set the input gain for the selected port to the gain displayed in the gain combo box.


Input Gain spin control

Clicking the up/down arrows will increase/decrease the input gain for the selected port.


Reset input gain button

Clicking the Reset button will reset the gain for the selected port to unity (0 dB).


Show non-unity only checkbox

Placing a checkmark in this box will cause the software to list only ports with gains that are not at unity (0 dB).


Real-time changes checkbox

Placing a check mark in this box will cause changes to track in real time.


Port Status List - Port column

This is a list of ports in the intercom system.


Port Status List - Alpha column

This is a list of alphas in the intercom system.


Port Status List - Comm column

This column indicates if communications is active.


Show Enhanced Status checkbox

Placing a checkmark in this box will change the display information to show Poll Delay, Requests, Power Ups, and KP Type.


Clear Button

Click Clear to reset the error counters.


Clear errors button

Click Clear to clear the error counters.


AIO/DBX Card Status - Clear errors button

Click Clear to clear the error counters.


PAP/LCP-102 Clear errors button

Click Clear to clear the error counters.


UIO Clear errors button

Click Clear to clear the error counters.


TM Clear errors button

Click Clear to clear the error counters.


Remote List - Name Column

This screen shows a two-column list box on the right hand side. The first column lists the remote intercom names. The second column displays the communications status for each intercom (either OK or -).

There are four operations that can be performed from this screen, as indicated by the four radio button options on the right side of the screen. The text description of options 1 and 3 changes depending on the intercom highlighted in the list.

The four options available are:

1.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

2.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

3.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in the selected intercom, where the resources are scroll restricted.

4.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in all intercoms, where the resources are scroll restricted.

The first two options refer to the case where an intercom that used to be in service has been removed from service (disconnected from the Trunk Master). These options allow you to remove all key assignments for a disconnected intercom (or intercoms) from all keypanels in your intercom.

The last two options refer to the case where remote resources that had been available to this intercom, and had been programmed onto keys, are now scroll restricted and are not available to this intercom. These options allow you to remove restricted resource key assignments from all keypanels in your intercom.

Once one of the four options is selected and the Clear button is pressed a dialog will appear asking for confirmation of the clearing action. By clicking on the OK button you will acknowledge that the clear command should be carried out. If you wish to cancel the operation, click on the Cancel button.


Remote List - Status column

This screen shows a two-column list box on the right hand side. The first column lists the remote intercom names. The second column displays the communications status for each intercom (either OK or -).

There are four operations that can be performed from this screen, as indicated by the four radio button options on the right side of the screen. The text description of options 1 and 3 changes depending on the intercom highlighted in the list.

The four options available are:

1.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

2.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

3.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in the selected intercom, where the resources are scroll restricted.

4.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in all intercoms, where the resources are scroll restricted.

The first two options refer to the case where an intercom that used to be in service has been removed from service (disconnected from the Trunk Master). These options allow you to remove all key assignments for a disconnected intercom (or intercoms) from all keypanels in your intercom.

The last two options refer to the case where remote resources that had been available to this intercom, and had been programmed onto keys, are now scroll restricted and are not available to this intercom. These options allow you to remove restricted resource key assignments from all keypanels in your intercom.

Once one of the four options is selected and the Clear button is pressed a dialog will appear asking for confirmation of the clearing action. By clicking on the OK button you will acknowledge that the clear command should be carried out. If you wish to cancel the operation, click on the Cancel button.


Remote Clear button

This screen shows a two-column list box on the right hand side. The first column lists the remote intercom names. The second column displays the communications status for each intercom (either OK or -).

There are four operations that can be performed from this screen, as indicated by the four radio button options on the right side of the screen. The text description of options 1 and 3 changes depending on the intercom highlighted in the list.

The four options available are:

1.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

2.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

3.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in the selected intercom, where the resources are scroll restricted.

4.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in all intercoms, where the resources are scroll restricted.

The first two options refer to the case where an intercom that used to be in service has been removed from service (disconnected from the Trunk Master). These options allow you to remove all key assignments for a disconnected intercom (or intercoms) from all keypanels in your intercom.

The last two options refer to the case where remote resources that had been available to this intercom, and had been programmed onto keys, are now scroll restricted and are not available to this intercom. These options allow you to remove restricted resource key assignments from all keypanels in your intercom.

Once one of the four options is selected and the Clear button is pressed a dialog will appear asking for confirmation of the clearing action. By clicking on the OK button you will acknowledge that the clear command should be carried out. If you wish to cancel the operation, click on the Cancel button.


Remote In Selected/Status not OK

This screen shows a two-column list box on the right hand side. The first column lists the remote intercom names. The second column displays the communications status for each intercom (either OK or -).

There are four operations that can be performed from this screen, as indicated by the four radio button options on the right side of the screen. The text description of options 1 and 3 changes depending on the intercom highlighted in the list.

The four options available are:

1.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

2.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

3.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in the selected intercom, where the resources are scroll restricted.

4.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in all intercoms, where the resources are scroll restricted.

The first two options refer to the case where an intercom that used to be in service has been removed from service (disconnected from the Trunk Master). These options allow you to remove all key assignments for a disconnected intercom (or intercoms) from all keypanels in your intercom.

The last two options refer to the case where remote resources that had been available to this intercom, and had been programmed onto keys, are now scroll restricted and are not available to this intercom. These options allow you to remove restricted resource key assignments from all keypanels in your intercom.

Once one of the four options is selected and the Clear button is pressed a dialog will appear asking for confirmation of the clearing action. By clicking on the OK button you will acknowledge that the clear command should be carried out. If you wish to cancel the operation, click on the Cancel button.


Remote In All/Status not OK

This screen shows a two-column list box on the right hand side. The first column lists the remote intercom names. The second column displays the communications status for each intercom (either OK or -).

There are four operations that can be performed from this screen, as indicated by the four radio button options on the right side of the screen. The text description of options 1 and 3 changes depending on the intercom highlighted in the list.

The four options available are:

1.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

2.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

3.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in the selected intercom, where the resources are scroll restricted.

4.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in all intercoms, where the resources are scroll restricted.

The first two options refer to the case where an intercom that used to be in service has been removed from service (disconnected from the Trunk Master). These options allow you to remove all key assignments for a disconnected intercom (or intercoms) from all keypanels in your intercom.

The last two options refer to the case where remote resources that had been available to this intercom, and had been programmed onto keys, are now scroll restricted and are not available to this intercom. These options allow you to remove restricted resource key assignments from all keypanels in your intercom.

Once one of the four options is selected and the Clear button is pressed a dialog will appear asking for confirmation of the clearing action. By clicking on the OK button you will acknowledge that the clear command should be carried out. If you wish to cancel the operation, click on the Cancel button.


Remote In Selected/Scroll Restricted

This screen shows a two-column list box on the right hand side. The first column lists the remote intercom names. The second column displays the communications status for each intercom (either OK or -).

There are four operations that can be performed from this screen, as indicated by the four radio button options on the right side of the screen. The text description of options 1 and 3 changes depending on the intercom highlighted in the list.

The four options available are:

1.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

2.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

3.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in the selected intercom, where the resources are scroll restricted.

4.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in all intercoms, where the resources are scroll restricted.

The first two options refer to the case where an intercom that used to be in service has been removed from service (disconnected from the Trunk Master). These options allow you to remove all key assignments for a disconnected intercom (or intercoms) from all keypanels in your intercom.

The last two options refer to the case where remote resources that had been available to this intercom, and had been programmed onto keys, are now scroll restricted and are not available to this intercom. These options allow you to remove restricted resource key assignments from all keypanels in your intercom.

Once one of the four options is selected and the Clear button is pressed a dialog will appear asking for confirmation of the clearing action. By clicking on the OK button you will acknowledge that the clear command should be carried out. If you wish to cancel the operation, click on the Cancel button.


Remote In All/Scroll Restricted

This screen shows a two-column list box on the right hand side. The first column lists the remote intercom names. The second column displays the communications status for each intercom (either OK or -).

There are four operations that can be performed from this screen, as indicated by the four radio button options on the right side of the screen. The text description of options 1 and 3 changes depending on the intercom highlighted in the list.

The four options available are:

1.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

2.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

3.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in the selected intercom, where the resources are scroll restricted.

4.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in all intercoms, where the resources are scroll restricted.

The first two options refer to the case where an intercom that used to be in service has been removed from service (disconnected from the Trunk Master). These options allow you to remove all key assignments for a disconnected intercom (or intercoms) from all keypanels in your intercom.

The last two options refer to the case where remote resources that had been available to this intercom, and had been programmed onto keys, are now scroll restricted and are not available to this intercom. These options allow you to remove restricted resource key assignments from all keypanels in your intercom.

Once one of the four options is selected and the Clear button is pressed a dialog will appear asking for confirmation of the clearing action. By clicking on the OK button you will acknowledge that the clear command should be carried out. If you wish to cancel the operation, click on the Cancel button.


Main Panel Type

Use the Main Panel Type drop down list to assign the type of keypanel being configured (for example, KP-32).


EXP 1 Panel Type

Use the EXP 1 Panel Type drop down list to assign the type of expansion panel attached to the keypanel (for example, EKP-20).


EXP 2 Panel Type

Use the EXP 2 Panel Type drop down list to assign the type of expansion panel attached to the keypanel (for example, EKP-20).


EXP 3 Panel Type

Use the EXP 3 Panel Type drop down list to assign the type of expansion panel attached to the keypanel (for example, EKP-20).


Main Setup Page

The Setup Page drop down list gives users a list of pages available for configuration on the keypanel.


EXP 1 Setup Page

The Setup Page drop down list gives users a list of pages available for configuration on the expansion panel.


EXP 2 Setup Page

The Setup Page drop down list gives users a list of pages available for configuration on the expansion panel.


EXP 3 Setup Page

The Setup Page drop down list gives users a list of pages available for configuration on the expansion panel.


View by panel type

View by Panel Type displays the correct quantity of Talk and Listen keys based on the type settings. For example, a setup page that is assigned to the KP-12 will display only 12 Talk and Listen keys. Typically, view by Panel Type is preferred because the user cannot assign more keys than are actually available on the keypanel.

NOTE: 	When viewing the setup pages for a particular intercom port, you can switch between View by Panel Type and View by Setup Page by pressing Ctrl+Tab on the keyboard. If you want to change the view mode for all intercom ports, use Shift+Ctrl+Tab.


View by setup page

View by Setup Page displays all 16 Talk and Listen key assignments available on the setup page, regardless of whether the keypanel or expansion panel has that number of keys.

NOTE: 	When viewing the setup pages for a particular intercom port, you can switch between View by Panel Type and View by Setup Page by pressing Ctrl+Tab on the keyboard. If you want to change the view mode for all intercom ports, use Shift+Ctrl+Tab.


Show type set by user

Show Type Set By User allows the user to manually choose the type of keypanel being configured.


Show type as reported by intercom

Show Type As Reported by Intercom automatically chooses the type of keypanel being configured.


Setup Restrict checkbox

Use the Setup Restrict checkbox to restrict other users to change the setup configuration from a keypanel. By default, keypanel operators can change the setup page user from their keypanels.

NOTE: 	To limit users from changing the setup options, you may want to select the Setup Restrict checkbox for all intercom ports.


IFB Priority edit box

IFB Priorities determine which keypanel gets first access to an IFB in cases where two or more keypanels are trying to access the same IFB at the same time. By default, the IFB priority for each intercom port can be individually set to any number from 1 through 3. With 3 being the highest priority.

With the priority set to 3, the keypanel overrides any other keypanel set at a lower priority. Keypanels that are set to the same priority can simultaneously access IFBs.

NOTE: 	Before changing intercom configuration settings, we recommend you read the intercom configuration description.


Trunk IFB Priority edit box

Trunk IFB Priorities determines which keypanel gets first access to a remote IFB in cases where two or more keypanels are trying to access it at the same time.

For each keypanel, the trunk IFB priority can be set to any number from 1 through 3, with priority 3 being the highest priority. With the priority set to 3, the keypanel overrides any other keypanel set to a lower priority. Keypanels that are set to the same priority can simultaneously access IFBs.

NOTE: 	Before changing intercom configuration settings, we recommend you read the intercom configuration description.


Trunk Priority edit box

Depending on how many trunking ports are setup, there may be occasions when there are not enough available for everyone to use. In such cases, Trunk Priority settings control the order in which keypanels gain access to trunked ports.

Each keypanel can be assigned a trunk priority ranging from 1 through 10, with 10 being the highest priority. With a trunk priority setting of 10, a keypanel will take over a trunking port from a keypanel with a lower setting when there are no other trunking ports available.

NOTE: 	Before changing intercom configuration settings, we recommend you read the intercom configuration description.


Panel Poll Delay edit box

Panel Poll Delay is used when a keypanel's data line is connected to the intercom port via a modem link from a remote location. In this situation, there may be a slight delay in data transmission from the remote keypanel to the intercom system. This can cause sporadic operation or no operation at all.

The panel poll delay first must be activated through the Options>Preferences menu. For more information on activating the Panel Poll Delay options, see Panel Poll Delay Activation.

For more information on Panel Poll Delay Activation, see Panel Poll Delay Activation.


Panel Poll Delay reset button

The Panel Poll Delay Reset button clears the Panel Poll Delay field and sets the delay at zero. Zero is the default setting.


IFB Listen destination port number

The IFB Listen Destination Port Number is the port number of the keypanel setting used with the IFB Listen Source feature. It redirects the IFB listen audio from the keypanel speaker or headset to an external device, such as a studio monitor, when the keypanel operator activates a key to listen to the talent.


IFB Listen destination alpha

The IFB Listen Destination Alpha is the alpha or name of the keypanel setting used with the IFB Listen Source feature. It redirects the IFB listen audio from the keypanel speaker or headset to an external device, such as a studio monitor, when the keypanel operator activates a key to listen to the talent.


Enable tone checkbox

Digital matrix keypanels are equipped with internal tone generators for signal tracing and troubleshooting. The tone signal feeds directly into the matrix so it can be used as a voice substitute for testing purposes.

To enable tone, select the Enable Tone checkbox.


Keypanel Privacy checkbox

The Keypanel Privacy feature prevents other keypanels from listening to another keypanel by means of a point-to-point listen key. However, if the private keypanel talks to another keypanel, it will be heard. The keypanel privacy feature requires ADAM Master Controller Firmware version V9.5.0 or greater.

NOTE: 	Keypanel privacy does not prevent someone from listening to a private panel via other means. For example, if the private keypanel is a member of a party line or special list, it can be heard by anyone listening to the party line or special list.

To enable keypanel privacy, select the Keypanel Privacy checkbox.


TIF Dial-out restrict checkbox

TIF Dial-out Restrict prevents a keypanel operator at an intercom port from dialing out via a TIF interface. The keypanel operator is able to receive incoming phone calls but cannot dial out or send a hang-up signal from the keypanel.

In most cases, the TIF will detect the caller at the far end has hung up and it will also hang up. However, some telephone systems do not provide any hang up indication. In this case, if an incoming call is answered from a keypanel that has TIF dial-out restrict enabled, the phone line will remain engaged after the caller at the other end hangs up.


Port is TIF checkbox

Port is TIF appears only when TIF support is configured. This check box enables the enhanced dialing features of the KP-32 keypanels.


Input port edit box

The Input Port edit box shows the port number of the keypanel to which the user is adjusting the listen gain level.

NOTE: 	You can also select the Input Port Alpha first, from the Input Port Alpha drop down list. If the Port Alpha is selected first, the Input Port will automatically fill with the appropriate port number.


Input port alpha

The Input Port Alpha is the recognizable name the user renamed the port.

NOTE: 	You can also enter the Input Port first. If the Input Port is entered first, the Input Port Alpha will automatically fill with the appropriate port alpha.


Input port gain combo box

Gain is the level at which the port will hear the input port you select. Gain adjustments can range from +6dB to –99dB.

NOTE: 	Gain adjustments take effect when you send your changes to the intercom system.  Gain settings are saved in your setup file if you save it to disk.


Party Line edit box

The Party Line field displays the input port number of the keypanel which the user is adjusting the gain level.

NOTE: 	You can also select the Party Line Alpha first. If the Party Line Alpha is selected first, the Party Line field will automatically fill with the appropriate port number.


Party Line alpha

The Party Line Alpha is the recognizable name the user renamed the port.

NOTE: 	You can also enter the Party Line field first. If the Party Line field is entered first, the Party Line Alpha will automatically fill with the appropriate port alpha.


Party Line Gain combo box

Gain is the level at which the port will hear the party line port you select. Gain adjustments can range from +6dB to –99dB.

NOTE: 	Gain adjustments take effect when you send your changes to the intercom system.  Gain settings are saved in your setup file if you save it to disk.


Analog I/O Input Gain

The Input Gain is the amount of gain the input level to the intercom port has been increased or decreased. Gain adjustments can range from +20dB to –20dB.

NOTE: 	Gain adjustments take effect when you send your changes to the intercom system.  Gain settings are saved in your setup file if you save it to disk.


Analog I/O Output Gain

The Output Gain setting is the amount of gain the output level to the intercom port has been increased or decreased. Gain adjustments can range from +20dB to –20dB.

NOTE: 	Gain adjustments take effect when you send your changes to the intercom system.  Gain settings are saved in your setup file if you save it to disk.


Port Gain Reset Button

The Port Gain Reset button restores the current gain setting to its default dB.

NOTE: 	Gain resets take effect when you send your changes to the intercom system. Gain settings can also be saved in your setup file, if you save it to disk.


Resource Type combo box

The Resource Type combo box contains the different types of resources within the application that you can perform Partial Save.

The resources include

•	Keypanels

•	Ports

•	Keypanel Types

•	Party Lines

•	IFBs

•	IFB Special Lists

•	Special Lists

•	Special List Functions

•	GPI Outputs

•	ISOs

•	Assignment Groups

•	GPI Inputs

•	Interpanel Dims

•	Forces/Inhibits

•	Input/Output Gain

•	Vox Settings

•	Crosspoint Gain

•	Party Line Gains

•	LCP-102s

•	PAP-32s

•	UPL Statements

•	UPL Resources

•	Alphas

•	Descriptions

•	Keypanel Screen Saver

•	Keypanel Passwords

•	Cronus Passwords


Advanced Select Button

Opens the Advanced Partial Save Selection screen.


Available List

The Available List displays the Resources available to perform a partial save. The available list displays the resources available for the resource selected from the Resource type drop down list.  For example, if keypanels is selected as the resource type, Port numbers and alphas will appear in the Available list.


Selected List

The Selected List displays the resources you chose to perform the partial save. Add more resources to the Selected field by using the Add button or Remove resources from the list by using the Remove button.


Add button

The Add button adds selected items in the Available list to the Selected List.


Remove button (global)

The Remove button removes selected items in the Selected list and moves them to the Available list.


Select All Button

The Select All button selects (highlights) all the items from the Available or Selected list.


De-select all button

The De-select All button de-selects any selected items from the Available or Selected list.


Invert Button

Inverts all selected list items in the current view.


All keypanels checkbox

Select the All Keypanels checkbox to display a printable report on all keypanels in the intercom system.

For more information, see Keypanel Print Options.


List of keypanels

From the List of Keypanels select the keypanels you wish to display a printable report.

For more information, see Keypanel Print Options.


Report type: Setup page report

Select Setup Page report if you want to print all talk and listen key assignments for all four (4) setup pages.

For more information, see Keypanel Print Options.


Report Type: Designation strips

Select Designation Strips if you want to print designation strips to fit in keypanel designation strip holders. When designation strips are selected Compressed Output, Expanded Output, Use Listen Assignments and Use Key Labels becomes active.

For more information, see Keypanel Print Options.


Use Listen assignments checkbox

Select Use Listen Assignments if you want to print the listen key assignments instead of the talk key assignments.

NOTE: Normally, only the talk key assignments are printed.

For more information, see Keypanel Print Options.


Compressed Output checkbox

Select Compressed Output if you want to print the designation strips with no space between them. This will save extra work when cutting them apart.

NOTE: 	If neither the compressed output nor the expanded output checkbox is selected, designation strips will be printed for each setup page, with space in between the setup pages.

For more information, see Keypanel Print Options.


Expanded Output checkbox

Select Expanded Output to print the designation strips with spaces between the setup pages, as well as spaces between keys 1 through 8 and 9 through 16 of each setup page. These strips will require the most work to cut apart.

NOTE:	If neither the compressed output nor the expanded output checkbox is selected, designation strips will be printed for each setup page, with space in between the setup pages.

For more information, see Keypanel Print Options.


Search Item again button

Using the same criteria given for the initial search, the search is re-done.


Stop Button

Stops the Search.


New search button

Opens the Search For Key Assignment screen so a new search may be performed.


Go to panel button

When the Go to Panel button is clicked, the Keypanel displays on the Keypanels/Ports screen. If you are in a different screen, you will be taken to the Keypanel/Ports screen. It will also route to the key that is being searched.


Done Button

Closes the active window.


Search results list

Displays the results of the search performed.


Auto connect at startup checkbox

Use Auto connect at startup checkbox to automatically enter ONLINE mode when you open the application.

To enable Auto connect at startup, select the Auto connect at startup checkbox.


Auto enter SERVER mode checkbox

Select Auto enter SERVER mode when you want to have an AZedit session to always boot up to SERVER mode.  This configuration is used to ensure that AZedit will come back in SERVER mode after a power interruption to allow for minimal downtime.


Warn about changes in configuration checkbox

Select the Warn about changes in the Configuration checkbox when you want to have a warning message appear every time changes to the system configuration are made.


Save window position on exit checkbox

Select Save window position on exit when you want to save a window position you have customized. This setting will keep the last window placement when you exit the program and will remember the setting when you initiate the program again.


Ask for confirmation before exit checkbox

Select the Ask for confirmation before exit checkbox when you want to receive a popup message "You are about to exit this application.", to which you must select OK to exit. Otherwise select Cancel.


Alpha sort mode combo box

From the Alpha sort mode combo box, select how you would like to view alphas that appear in a list; either by alpha or by number.

If by alpha is selected, the alphas will appear in alphabetical order. However, if by number is selected, the alphas will appear in numerical order.


Allow alpha edit from any view checkbox

Select the Allow alpha edit from any view checkbox if you would like to be able to edit alphas from any screen within the AZedit application.  By selecting this configuration option you are not limited to editing alphas in the Alpha window.


Show all sizes on alpha views checkbox

Select Show all sizes on alpha views checkbox when you want to see the (4) Alpha column, (6) Alpha column, and the (8) Alpha column.  These columns refer to the character size of the alpha – either 4-character, 6-character, or 8-character alphas.

NOTE: 	When you enter a 4-character alpha, and are view all sizes on Alpha views, the 4-character alpha will populate the 6-character field and the 8-character field.


Automatically check for duplicate alphas after opening a file checkbox

Select Automatically check for duplicate alphas after opening a file to have AZedit automatically search for duplicate Alphas whenever a new file is loaded into the application. By having this options selected, safeguards your application against having duplicate alphas for different ports.


Prompt before checking for duplicate alphas

Select Prompt before checking for duplicate alphas to have a message appear that reads, "Do you want to check for duplicate alphas"? every time you load a new setup file.


Suppress default alphas from pick lists

When selected, the Suppress default alphas from pick lists keep any alphas with a default name (N001, N002, N003 etc.) hidden.


Preferred alpha size combo box

The Preferred alpha size combo box gives you the choice as to what size alpha (4-character, 6-character, 8-character) you can display in the drop down lists throughout the application.


Enable SERVER mode logging checkbox

Select the Enable SERVER mode logging checkbox when you want to log events that occur while in SERVER mode (For example, an Intercom system that requests a file from a keypanel).


Enable standard talk/listen logging support checkbox

Select the Enable standard talk/listen logging support checkbox when you want to have standard logging in ONLINE and File mode (key press logging).


Set standard log mode at startup checkbox

Select the Set standard log mode at startup checkbox to determine what type of logging you want to begin at the start of the application – Disable Logging, Log to File, or Log to Serial Port.


Disable logging radio

When Disable logging is selected, logging is not active.


Log to file radio

When Log to file is selected, logging is sent to a specified file on the computer or network.


Log to serial port radio

When Log to serial port is selected, the log is written to a device connected over a serial port.


Automatically create .BAK files checkbox

When Automatically create .BAK files is selected, a backup file is created when you save a file that already exists. The original file is renamed with the .BAK file extension and then overwritten with the newly saved file. This file resides in the Setup file on your hard drive.

NOTE: 	If this option is not set, then any file that already exists is simply overwritten if you save with the same name.


Confirm file name before Save in FILE mode checkbox

When Confirm file name before Save in FILE mode is selected, a message appears stating "Are you sure you want to save this setup as: <file path>?  Click Yes to Save, otherwise click No to rename the file.  Click Cancel to exit.


Warn when editing keypanel setup for IFB output port checkbox

When Warn when editing keypanel setup for IFB output port is selected, the message "This port is configured as an IFB output bus for at least one IFB. There may not be a physical keypanel associated with this port" appears.


Automatically latch disable keys when IFB is assigned checkbox

When Automatically latch disable keys when IFB is assigned is selected, you cannot latch ON any key with an IFB key assignment.


Warn when setting key states on an incompatible keypanel

When Warn when setting key states on an incompatible keypanel is selected, the message "This command may not work as expected due to physical design of this port's keypanel" appears.


Enable panel poll delay support checkbox

When Enable panel poll delay support is selected, the Panel Poll Delay field on the Keypanel Configuration Advanced screen becomes active for you to set the panel poll delay. To set the panel poll delay, see Panel Poll Delay edit box .


Enable TIF/phone support checkbox

When Enable TIF/phone support is selected, the enhanced phone dialing features are active on applicable keypanels.

NOTE: 	The four- and eight-key keypanels, may not have the dialing functionality, but they can still answer incoming calls.


Enable trunking support checkbox

When Enable trunking support is selected, it enables the alias alphas and expects trunking to be employed.


Enable SERVER mode support checkbox

When Enable SERVER mode support is selected, the ability to enter into SERVER mode is activated.

For more information, see Server Mode .


Allow intercom resizing in ONLINE mode checkbox

When Allow intercom resizing in ONLINE mode is selected, changes can be made to the Intercom system via the Intercom Sizing Wizard. If it is not selected, no configuration changes may be made to the Intercom.


Allow crosspoint inspection in FILE mode checkbox

When Allow Crosspoint inspection in FILE mode is selected, you are able to review Crosspoint connections in FILE mode. Essentially, this allows you to test your new Setup files (Party Lines, Special Lists, etc…) before going live with the file.


Allow firmware download checkbox

When Allow firmware download is selected, you may download firmware through AZedit. If this option is not selected, you cannot download software through AZedit.


Allow key state changes checkbox

When Allow key state changes is selected, you are able to turn the key function talk or listen ON and OFF.


Serial connection radio button

Serial connection is selected when the AZedit Session is being run over a serial port.  When Serially connected, the COM port combo box and the Baud rate combo box will be active.


COM port combo box

The COM port is the computer's communication port that the Intercom system is connected through (For example COM1, COM2, COM3, etc…)

NOTE: 	Where a COM port number is required that is out of range, this can be edited to COM “n”, by use of the AZedit PC keyboard.


Baud rate combo box

The Baud rate is the transmission of data rate per second. AZedit has three different baud rates to choose between: 38.4 kbps, 19 kbps, and 9600 bps.  The default setting is 38.4 kbps.


Advanced button

Opens the Secondary AZedit Sessions communications configurations screen.


Reset to defaults button

Resets the page to default values for each field.


Talk levels edit box

Displays the default number of Talk Levels available in the system. You can change this number to accommodate your particular intercom system.


Listen levels edit box

Displays the number of Listen Levels available in the system. Currently, 1 listen level is allowed. This number cannot be changed.


Setup pages per port edit box

Currently, 4 setup pages are allowed for each port, however, up to 15 pages are supported. This number can be changed.


Physical panels per port edit box

Currently, 1 keypanel and 3 expansion panels (4 panels total) are allowed per port. This number cannot be changed.


Keys per setup page edit box

Currently, 16 talk/listen key pairs are allowed per setup page. This number cannot be changed.


Maximum IFB priority edit box

The Maximum IFB priority edit box allows you to set the maximum IFB priority available for use. You may use a number between 1 and 8. For more information, see IFB Priorities Description .


Use input alphas checkbox

Input Alphas give a separate list of alphas for each port on the intercom. In earlier versions of AZedit, a port had a single alpha representing both the audio input, and audio output ports of the port. This is used for keypanels where both the input and output paths of the port would often be used for different purposes (i.e., IFB program inputs or listen sources on the input side, and an IFB output on the output side).

In version 3.02.0 or higher, it is now possible to give separate alphas to both the input and output portion of a port (by default, the input alpha tracks the output alpha unless you specifically change the input alpha, so that, normally, they are the same which would be typical for port with keypanels attached).


Auto listen functions pick up all talk levels checkbox

When this box is selected, and auto-listen is assigned to a key, and the key also has several assigned talk levels, the keypanel operator will automatically be able to talk and listen to all talk levels whenever the talk key is activated.

NOTE: 	The listen-level adjustment only adjusts a single listen crosspoint level.


Allow for remote trunk master checkbox

Select this option when your intercom system is connected to a remote trunk master via a modem. In this case, there may be some data transmission delay, so the timeout period will be extended to compensate. Also, the normal baud rate for direct connection to the trunk master (76.8 kbaud) will be changed to 9600 baud for the modem connection. (This overrides the setting of DIP switch 4 on the master controller in an ADAM or ADAM CS frame.)


Always stack callers in call waiting windows checkbox

Select this option to stack callers in the call-waiting window.

For more information, see Intercom Configuration: Options .


Configure onboard GPI outputs in FR9528 mode checkbox

By default, this option is selected for use with an FR9528 Relay Frame. Remove the check mark if you are using the GPI connector on your ADAM or ADAM CS frame instead of FR9528.


Generate in-use tallies checkbox

Tallies are used to indicate there is audio activity from another source on a port. Audio can mix with other audio or take priority, if configured. When the checkbox is selected, tallies will appear on the keypanel when it is “In use”.  When the check box is not selected, no tallies will appear.


Defaults button

Resets all values to their set default value. When a parameter is set as a default in Authentication, the default icon appears next to it.


Alpha Type combo box

The Alpha Type combo box lists the different types of alphas that are available to copy.

1.	From the Type drop down list, select the type of Alpha you want to copy.

For more information, see Copy Alphas


Alpha Source combo box

The Alpha Source combo box lists what you are copying. For example, if you select Default Alphas, you will copy the default alphas of the ports (N001, N002, N003, etc.).

NOTE: 	If you have Show all sizes on alpha views checkbox , Enable trunking support checkbox , and Use input alphas checkbox  selected, the choices to select from for both the source and destination drop down list are as follows:

Default Alphas
Output Alphas (4 character)
Output Alphas (6 character)
Output Alphas (8 character)
Input Alphas (4 character)
Input Alphas (6 character)
Input Alphas (8 character)
Aliases (4 character)
Aliases (6 character)
Aliases (8 character)

1.	From the Source drop down list, select the source you want to copy.

For more information, see Copy Alphas .


Alpha Destination combo box

The Alpha Destination combo box lists what alphas you are copying to. For example, if you select Default Alphas, you will copy the default alphas of the ports (N001, N002, N003, etc.).

NOTE: 	If you have Show all sizes on alpha views checkbox , Enable trunking support checkbox , and Use input alphas checkbox  selected, the choices to select from for both the source and destination drop down list are as follows:

Output Alphas (4 character)
Output Alphas (6 character)
Output Alphas (8 character)
Input Alphas (4 character)
Input Alphas (6 character)
Input Alphas (8 character)
Aliases (4 character)
Aliases (6 character)
Aliases (8 character)

1.	From the Destination drop down list, select the destination where you want to copy.

For more information, see Copy Alphas.


All checkbox

The All checkbox selects all of the items in the Item and Alpha columns.


Alpha List

The Alpha list contains two columns; the item column and the alpha column. The item column is the resource you want to copy. The alpha column displays the alpha for each item.

When port is selected from the Type drop down list, the item will be port numbers. When special lists are selected from the Type drop down list, special list ports will be displayed in the Alpha list. Different resources and resource alphas can be displayed in this area depending upon what is chosen from the Type drop down list.


Input port number

The Input Port Number is the port number of the intercom port where the normal audio source is connected.


Input port alpha

The Input Port Alpha is the port alpha of the intercom port where the normal audio source is connected.


Output port number

The Output Port Number is the intercom port number where the talent earset or headset is connected.


Output port alpha

The Output Port Alpha is the port alpha of the port number where the talent earset or headset is connected.


Dim level combo box

The Dim Level combo allows you to choose to diminish the speaker or headphone audio level by a specific amount. Dim levels range from –1.0dBto –72.2 dB and MUTE.

From the Dim Level combo box, choose the Dim setting you desire.
NO indicates that no dimming value has been set, In this case, the program audio will be completely muted during IFB operation.

NOTE: 	By default, the audio source is muted while the keypanel operator is talking. If you want the signal to be diminished by certain amount during IFB, select a different amount in the DIM Level drop down list.


Output gain edit box

The Output gain displays the analog output gain for the intercom port that has been designated as the IFB Output. If the IFB listening device that is connected to the output port does not have volume control, you can adjust the output gain to suit the listener’s preferences on the Analog Input/Output Gains screen or from and LCP-102 that is operating in PAP mode.


Listen source port number

The Listen Source Port Number is the intercom port number where the studio is connected.

NOTE: 	The Listen Source field is only used for 2-way IFB operation. It allows keypanel operators and/or studio personnel to listen to the talent during IFB Operation. Connect the talent Mic signal (the direct mic signal, not the mix-minus signal) to an intercom port input. Then, select that port in the Listen Source field.


Listen source port alpha combo box

The Listen Source Port Alpha is the alpha of the port where the studio is connected.

NOTE: 	The Listen Source field is only used for 2-way IFB operation. It allows keypanel operators and/or studio personnel to listen to the talent during IFB Operation. Connect the talent Mic signal (the direct mic signal, not the mix-minus signal) to an intercom port input. Then, select that port in the Listen Source field.


Tone override port number edit box

NOTE: 	The Tone override is not used for Standard IFB assignments.

1.	In the Tone Override Port Number field, enter the port number you want to apply the tone override upon.


Tone override port alpha combo box

NOTE: 	The Tone override is not used for Standard IFB assignments.

1.	From the Tone Override Port Alpha drop down box, enter the port alpha you want to apply the tone override upon.

For more information, see IFB Tone Override.


GPI Input port number

Displays the GPI Input Port for the GPI Output.

1.	In the GPI Input Port field, enter the port you want to set for the GPI output.

NOTE: 	You may also select the port alpha from the GPI Input Port Alpha drop down list.


GPI Input port alpha

Displays the GPI Input Port Alpha for the GPI Output.

1.	From the drop down list, select the alpha you want to set for the GPI output.

NOTE: 	You may also manually enter the port number in the GPI Input Port number field.


GPI Output port number

Displays the GPI Output Port for the GPI Output.

1.	In the GPI Output Port field, enter the port you want to set for the GPI output.

NOTE: 	You may also select the port alpha from the GPI Output Port Alpha drop down list.


GPI Output port alpha

Displays the GPI Output Port Alpha for the GPI Output.

1.	From the drop down list, select the alpha you want to set for the GPI output.

NOTE: 	You may also manually enter the port number in the GPI Output Port number field.


ISO Local scroll checkbox

When ISO Local scroll is selected, the ISO assignment is scroll enabled for the LOCAL keypanels.


ISO Trunk scroll checkbox

When ISO Trunk scroll is selected, the ISO assignment is scroll enabled for the Trunked keypanels.


ISO AZedit scroll checkbox

When ISO AZedit scroll is selected, the ISO assignment is scroll enabled for AZedit in the trunked session.


ISO Self? checkbox

When ISO Self? is selected, the keypanel’s active talk key assignments are suspended while the ISO key is pressed. Once the key is released, the keypanel goes back to normal operation.


ISO Output port number

The ISO Output port number is the number of the port the ISO is listening on.


ISO Output port alpha

The ISO Output port alpha is the name of the port the ISO is listening on.


Key number edit box

The Key Number field is the number of the actual key on the keypanel. They are numbered from bottom left to top right.

1.	In the Key Number field, enter the number of the key you want to have the GPI Input assigned.


Talk key radio button

Select this radio button to set the GPI port as a Talk key.


Listen key radio button

Select this radio button to set the GPI port as a Listen key.


No key radio button

Use the No Key radio button when you are not assigning the GPI Input to an actual keypanel key. For example, when the GPI input is used in a UPL statement it is not assigned to keypanel key.


Keypanel port number

Displays the port number of the keypanel with the GPI Input


Keypanel port alpha

Displays the port alpha of the keypanel with the GPI Input


UPL Trunk scroll checkbox

When selected, the resource is scroll enabled for trunk systems.

For more information on Scroll Enable, see Scroll List Description.


UPL AZedit scroll checkbox

When selected, the resource is scroll enabled in AZedit.

For more information on Scroll Enable, see Scroll List Description.


UPL Comment edit box

Use the UPL Comment edit box to assign a descriptive title to the UPL statement you create.


UPL Enabled checkbox

The UPL Enabled checkbox determines whether the UPL statement is active in the Intercom System or the UPL statement is inactive in the Intercom System.

When the UPL Enabled checkbox is selected, the UPL statement is active. If the checkbox is not selected, then the UPL statement is not active.


UPL Input A type combo box

The UPL Input A Type combo box allows you to set conditions that must be met before an Output Action is initiated.  You can use any of the following to write conditions on:

•	UPL Statement

•	GPI Input

•	GPI Input (Local)

•	GPI Output

•	GPI Output (Local)

•	Talk Key

•	Listen Key

•	UPL Resource

•	Crosspoint

•	Input Talking

•	Output Listening

•	Headset Transfer

•	Current Date

•	Current Time

•	IFB Interrupted

•	Counter

•	Vox Audio

•	Any Talk Key


UPL Input B type combo box

The UPL Input B Type combo box allows you to set a second condition that must be met before the Output Action is initiated.  You can use any of the following to write conditions on:

•	UPL Statement

•	GPI Input

•	GPI Input (Local)

•	GPI Output

•	GPI Output (Local)

•	Talk Key

•	Listen Key

•	UPL Resource

•	Crosspoint

•	Input Talking

•	Output Listening

•	Headset Transfer

•	Target Date

•	Target Time

•	IFB Interrupted

•	Target Value

•	Vox Audio

•	Any Talk Key


UPL Operation combo box

The Operation combo box displays operators used to build input conditional statements. The standard operators for input conditions (except for Current Time, Current Date, and Counter) are:

AND	both Input A and Input B must be true.

OR	either of Input A or Input B must be true

XOR	exactly one of Input A or Input B must be true (but not both)

The following operators are only available to be used when Input A is set to "Current Date", "Current Time", or "Counter", and in these cases Input B is then used as the value to be compared with

=	equal to

! =	not equal to

<	less than

> 	greater than

<=	less than or equal to

>=	greater than or equal to


UPL Invert Input A checkbox

The Invert Input A checkbox is used to inhibit or reverse the Input A criterion.  A good example of an Inverted Input A statement (where Input A is in bold) is:

While port #1 (N001) local GPI input #1 is not asserted, close the crosspoint from input #1 (N001) to output #1 (N001).


UPL Invert Input B checkbox

The Invert Input B checkbox is used to inhibit or reverse the Input B criterion.  A good example of an Inverted Input B statement (where Input B is in bold) is:

While port #1 (N001) local GPI input #1 is asserted and port #1 (N001) local GPI input #1 is not asserted, inhibit GPI output #1 (RY01).


UPL Output action type combo box

The UPL Output Action Type combo box allows you to set the action that will occur when the UPL input limits are met. For example, an output action could be a file upload on a certain day (Input criteria).

Available Output Action Types are:

•	Close Crosspoint

•	Inhibit Crosspoint (Opens the Crosspoint)

•	Assert (enables) GPI Output

•	Inhibit (disables) GPI Output

•	Assert (enables) GPI Output (Local)

•	Inhibit (disables) GPI Output (Local)

•	Force Talk Key Closure

•	Force Talk Key Open

•	Dim Crosspoint Volume

•	Load File

•	Force Listen Key Closure

•	Force Listen Key Open

•	Clear Counter

•	Inhibit (disables) Output

•	Inform Command Line Protocol

•	Set Headset Transfer State

•	Set Talk Key LED State

•	Set Listen Key LED State

•	Set IFB Program Input


Save advanced communications settings locally

Select Save advanced communications settings locally checkbox when you want to save the communications settings for the intercom locally on the ADAM.


Key Labels

Key Labels provide an alternative display for an individual user's keypanel key, other than the actual key assignment alpha on the Talk key. For example, you may label a key on a keypanel as BRIT, even though the underlying key assignment is a TIF with the alpha HY62.  The keypanel user will see Brit instead of the underlying alpha HY62.

NOTE: 	Key Labels are specific to the keypanel (or user) not to AZedit.

When Key Labels has been set on a key, you will see [image] in the Keypanel / Port settings field.

See, How to Enable Key Labels


Key Labels Assignment field

Enter the Key Label you want to display on the keypanel.

NOTE: 	Key Labels are specific to the port (or user) not to AZedit.

When Key Labels has been set on a key, you will see [image] in the Keypanel / Port settings field.


Do Not Interrupt

Do Not Interrupt, when enabled, allows only one keypanel at a time to call a keypanel for which this option is enabled. If a second keypanel tries to call, the call does not go through. The keypanel that is being called will receive no notification as to the second keypanel call and the caller receives a busy signal.

To prevent a call from being interrupted, the talk key must be latched for the duration of the call.

When Do Not Interrupt has been set on a port, you will see [image] in the Keypanel Port Settings field.

NOTE: 	In a trunked environment, trunk calls ignore Do Not Interrupt. Trunk calls will always connect.

For more information, How to enable Do Not Interrupt.


Network connection radio button

The Network connection button is selected when there is a network connection present between the intercom system and AZedit. When Network is selected, the Main and Partner IP Address fields become active.


USB connection radio button

The USB connection button is selected when there is a USB connection being made between the Intercom system and AZedit. When there is a USB connection, it is a direct, completely open connection.


Main IP Address field

When connected to the network with Ethernet an intercom system has two Master Controllers (the Active and Standby).  Where the Standby Master Controller acts as the Active Master Controller's backup in failover protection.

The Main IP Address is the IP Address given to the Active Master Controller. If you do not know the IP Address, you can browse to find the machine you want to configure.

Basically, there are two IP Address that AZedit can use to contact the intercom system – the Main and Partner. If AZedit gets no response from one of the IP addresses, then it switches to the other IP Address.


Partner IP Address field

When connected to the network with Ethernet an intercom system has two Master Controllers (the Active and Standby).  Where the Standby acts as the Active Master Controller's backup.

The Partner IP Address is the IP Address given to the Standby Master Controller.

Basically, there are two IP Address that AZedit can use to contact the intercom system – the Main and Partner. If AZedit gets no response from one of the IP addresses, then it switches to the other IP Address.


Port J9 connection

The Port J9 connection field displays the serial connection for a multiple session of AZedit from an ADAM system.  The ADAM system exclusively supports multiple serial connections to AZedit.


Port J10 connection

The Port J10 connection field displays the serial connection for a multiple session of AZedit from an ADAM system.  The ADAM system exclusively supports multiple serial connections to AZedit.


Port J9 Baud Rate drop down list

Use the Port J9 Baud Rate drop down list to configure the baud rate for the AZedit session connection.  You can choose from the following four options:

Disabled

9600 bps

19.2 kbps

38.4 kbps


Port J10 Baud Rate drop down list

Use the Port J10 Baud Rate drop down list to configure the baud rate for the AZedit session connection.  You can choose from the following four options:

Disabled

9600 bps

19.2 kbps

38.4 kbps


AZedit Protocol

Select the AZedit Protocol checkbox if you want to use the AZedit interface for your multiple session of the application.


Command Line Protocol

Select the Command Line Protocol checkbox if you want to use command line programming for your multiple session of the application.


Intercom Configuration - Resources - Ports

The Ports field displays the number of total ports in the Intercom system.

NOTE: 	If you want to change the number of ports displayed, you must use the Intercom Sizing Wizard.


Intercom Configuration - Resources - Intercom Sizing Wizard Button

The Intercom Sizing Wizard button opens the Intercom Sizing Wizard.

For more information on the Intercom Sizing Wizard, see Intercom Sizing Wizard Description


Intercom Configuration - Resources - Reset to Defaults button

Resets the Resources page to the default values for each field.


Intercom Configuration - Options - Panels with Key Labels

Displays the number of keypanels that have Key Labels. This number is configurable.


Intercom Configuration - Options - Key Labels per Panel

Displays the number of Key Labels per keypanel. This number is configurable.


Intercom Configuration - Options - Keys per Setup Page

Currently, 16 talk/listen key pairs are allowed per setup page. This number cannot be changed.


Intercom Configuration - Options - Don't Generate Tallies for In-use Trunk Assignments

Select this option if you do not want to generate Tallies for In-Use Trunk Assignments.


Intercom Configuration - Options - Don't Generate Tallies for Off-hook TIF Assignments

Select this option you do not want to generate Tallies for Off-Hook TIF Assignments.


Intercom Configuration - Options - Don't Generate Indefinite PL Tallies

Select this option if you do not want to generate Tallies for Indefinite PLs.


Intercom Configuration - Options - Generate Snoop Tallies

Select this option if you want to generate snoop tallies.  Snoop Tallies provide an indication to keypanel users that somebody is listening to them.

NOTE: 	To use Snoop Tallies, the keypanel must be working in HOT MIC (USM) mode. This is available only on KP-32 keypanels.


Trunk party line checkbox

This feature is used when 2 or more keypanels want to talk over the same trunk. If one of the keypanels activates trunk talk key, the tally indication will be supplied at the other keypanel. Typically, the tally indication is in the form of a flashing alphanumeric display (KP9x series keypanels) or a continuously lit red talk key LED indicator (most other keypanels). The tally indication tells the keypanel operator that activating the party line key will break in on a conversation that is in progress.


RVON Card drop down list

Select the slot in which the RVON card resides.


IP Address field

Enter the IP Address you have assigned to the RVON card.


Network Mask field

Enter the Network Mask of the network to which the RVON card is connected.


Default Gateway field

Enter the Default Gateway Address (if applicable of the network to which the RVON card is connected. A Default Gateway is only needed if the RVON connections are between LANs.


Target IP Address field

Enter the Target IP Address of the device you want to connect to over Ethernet.


Serial Baud Rate

From the Serial Baud Rate drop down list, select the baud rate at which the data is transmitted.

The available baud rates are:

9600 kbps

19.2 kbps

38.4 kbps


RVON Channel drop down list

Select the Channel you want to use to communicate to another device across the network.


Device IP Address field

Enter the IP Address of the device to which you want to connect.


Device Type drop down list

From the Device Type drop down list, select the type of device to which the RVON is connecting.


Device Channel drop down list

From the Device Channel drop down list, select the channel on the device to which the RVON card will communicate.


CODEC Type drop down list

From the CODEC Type drop down list, select the CODEC type you want to use for this channel.

NOTE: 	A CODEC is an algorithm used to compress audio. There are 5 Codices supported by Telex: G.711μs law, G.711A law, G.729AB, G.723 (5.3k), and G.723 (6.3k). The type of CODEC will dictate the quality of audio you hear and the network bandwidth used. The packet size determines how much audio data is carried across the network in each transmitted packet. The CODEC type and packet size chosen require different amounts of bandwidth from the network.

The Intercom System Engineer and the Network Administrator may want to work together in choosing the CODEC type and pack size suitable for the size of the network.


Packet Size drop down list

From the Packet Size drop down list, select the size of each audio packet.

As with the CODEC type, the packet size you choose for the audio transfer will affect the audio you hear and the bandwidth you use over the network. The larger the audio packet you choose to use, the lower the bandwidth use. However, the larger packet size can result in higher delay and longer gaps if the packet is lost. On the other hand, smaller packet sizes result in larger bandwidth use, but lower delays and smaller gaps if the packet is lost.

The Intercom System Engineer and the Network Administrator may want to work together in choosing the CODEC type and pack size suitable for the size of the network.


Enable VAD (voice activity detection) checkbox

Select Enable VAD (Voice Activity Detection) to conserve bandwidth when the audio level is below a given threshold.


Apply Button

The Apply button sends all the changes to all the cards in the intercom. It saves all changes you have made and does not close the active window.


IP Address (Internet Protocol Address)

An IP Address is an identifier or numerical name for a computer or device on a network. Data between computers is routed over the network using these addresses to identify the computer the message is being sent to and the computer the message is being sent from. The format of an IP Address is a 32-bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods.. For example, an IP Address looks like 10.100.1.1


Default Gateway Address

A gateway is a node on a network that serves as an entrance to another network. The gateway routes traffic from a computer to an outside network that is serving the web pages. For example, the gateway from a home computer is the ISP provider that connects the user to the Internet.

In a corporate environment, the gateway often acts as a proxy server and a firewall. Gateways are similar to routers and switches, in that they forward data to the destination and provide the path for which the data will travel to the destination.


CODEC Specifications

Compression	Bit Rate	Coding Delay	Playout Delay	Bandwidth
G.711	64 K	125 μs	20-60 ms	160-224 kbps
G.728AB	8 K	10 ms	20-120 ms	32 112 kbps
G.723	5.3 K /6.3 K	30 ms	60 – 120 ms	29-45 kbps
*Data rate depends on CODEC selection.


VAD (Voice Activity Detection)

Voice Activity Detection saves network bandwidth by stopping the flow of audio packets when silence is detected. VAD is similar to VOX.


Card/Channel tab

The Card/Channel tab is used to set up both ends of the RVON connection to display the status. On this tab, select the RVON card and channel you want to view the status.


Connection Tab

The Connection tab displays different connection status data, such as Attempts/Drops, Current Call State, Origination/Termination, Release Reason, Connection Duration, Compression Algorithm, Audio Packet Size, and Voice Activity Detect status.


VoIP tab

The VoIP tab displays the different voice over IP playout statistics such as Playout Buffer Size, Nominal Playout Delay, Average Playout Delay, Voice Playout Buffer Underrun, Voice Playout Buffer Overrun, Missing Sequence Packets, Replayed Packets, and Average Frame Jitter.


Network tab

The Network tab displays the different network statistics associated with transmit and receive of audio packets over the network. The network statistics shown on this page are: Voice Playout Packets, DTMF Relay Packets, Silence Detection Packets, Silence Suppressed Packets, Packet Interarrival Time, Recent Bandwidth Use, and Average Bandwidth Use.


Errors tab

The Errors tab displays the following errors that could occur with the RVON card: Invalid Headers, Invalid MAC address, Invalid SSRC, Invalid Payload, Invalid Destination, Lost Packets, DSP to Micro Overrun.


Pass-Through tab

The Pass-Through tab shows the Serial to Ethernet and the Ethernet to Serial data that is received and transferred over the network. The following information is displayed:

Serial to Ethernet:

Bytes transferred

Bytes lost

Errors

Tx IP Address

Baud Rate

Ethernet to Serial

Bytes Transferred

Bytes Lost

Errors

Rx IP Address

Unexpected bytes


Local Channel drop down list

From the Local Channel drop down list, select the channel you want to view the status.


Remote Channel field

The Remote Channel field displays the channels at the other end of the connection that the device is using.


Attempts / Drops field

The Attempts / Drops field displays the number of times a call attempt has been made and dropped.

NOTE: 	The number of attempts should always be one greater than the number of drops.


Current Call State field

The Current Call State field displays the state of the connection. There are two connection states: Connected or Idle.


Origination / Termination field

The Origination / Termination field displays which end of the connection originated or terminated the call:

Local: RVON card

Remote: Device at the other end of the connection


Release Reason field

The Release Reason field displays why the connection was terminated, for example, congestion, network error, local release, or remote release.


Connection Duration field

The Connection Duration field displays the duration of the connection. This is shown in hh/mm/ss.


Compression Algorithm

The Compression Algorithm, Audio Packet Size, and Voice Activity Detect (VAD) fields display what type of configuration the connection is using. This can be different than the original configuration if both ends of the channel are not configured the same. If the configuration is different, these fields will be in red.


Audio Packet Size

The Compression Algorithm, Audio Packet Size, and Voice Activity Detect (VAD) fields display what type of configuration the connection is using. This can be different than the original configuration if both ends of the channel are not configured the same. If the configuration is different, these fields will be in red.


Voice Activity Detect field

The Compression Algorithm, Audio Packet Size, and Voice Activity Detect (VAD) fields display what type of configuration the connection is using. This can be different than the original configuration if both ends of the channel are not configured the same. If the configuration is different, these fields will be in red.


Playout Buffer Size field

The Playout Buffer Size field displays how much audio can be received from the network before packets are lost. This is four times bigger than configured packet size. This is a static system setting.


Nominal Playout Delay field

The Nominal Playout Delay field displays how much audio is collected before playout begins. Playout begins at half the Playout Buffer Size, which is two times the configured packet size. This is a static system setting.


Average Playout Delay field

The Average Playout Delay field displays the actual average audio collected before packets are play out. This is measured over the length of the connection.


Voice Playout Buffer Underrun field

The Voice Playout Buffer Underrun field displays the number of packet times that packets were not played because the Playout Buffer was empty.

NOTE: 	If VAD is enabled, there will be playout buffer runs because there are no packets being received during silence.


Voice Playout Buffer Overrun field

The Voice Playout Buffer Overrun field displays the number of packets that were discarded because the playout buffer was full.


Missing Sequence Packets field

The Missing Sequence Packets field displays how many audio packets were missed in the sequence.


Replayed Packets field

The Replayed Packets field displays how many audio packets were replayed.


Average Frame Jitter field

The Average Frame Jitter field displays the measure of consistency of packet arrival times. Lower jitter is better.


Voice Playout Packets (Tx/Rx) field

The Voice Playout Packets (Tx/Rx) field displays the number of voice packets transmitted and received from the other side of the connection.


DTMF Relay Packets (Tx/Rx) field

The DTMF Relay Packets (Tx/Rx) field displays the number of DTMF (dual tone multiple frequency) relay packets transmitted and received. DTMF relay packets are a bandwidth and quality saving feature within the RVON cards.


Silence Detection Packets (Tx/Rx) field

The Silence Detection Packets (Tx/Rx) field displays the number of times a silence detection packet has been sent or received.

NOTE: 	VAD (voice activity detection) must be enabled.


Silence Suppressed Packets (Tx)

The Silence Suppressed Packets (Tx) field displays the number of packets never sent because the packets contained silence.


Packet Interarrival Time (Min/Max) field

The Packet Interarrival Time (Min/Max) field displays the minimum and maximum time elapsed between packets being sent.


Recent Bandwidth Use (Tx/Rx) field

The Recent Bandwidth Use (Tx/Rx) field displays the amount of bandwidth used in Kbytes/sec over the length of the call. The number of voice packets transmitted and received over the last 10 seconds calculates this.


Average Bandwidth User (Tx/Rx) field

The Average Bandwidth User (Tx/Rx) field displays the amount of bandwidth used in Kbytes/sec over the length of the call. The number of voice packets transmitted and received and the length of the connection calculate this.


Invalid Headers field

The Invalid Headers field displays how many IP packets could not be parsed.


Invalid MAC Address field

The Invalid MAC Address field displays how many invalid MAC addresses tried to connect.


Invalid SSRC field

The Invalid SSRC field displays the number of packets with an invalid SSRC (synchronization source).


Invalid Payload field

The Invalid Payload field displays how many incorrectly formatted packets were received.


DSP to Micro Overrun

The DSP to Micro Overrun field displays the number of packets that were lost because the micro was too busy to receive.


Invalid Destination field

The Invalid Destination field displays how many invalid destinations were received.


Lost Packets field

The Lost Packets field displays how many packets were lost.


Serial to Ethernet field

The Serial to Ethernet field displays the serial data that is received on the serial connection and transferred to the Ethernet address of the card to which the serial data is sent.


Bytes Transferred field

The Bytes Transferred field displays the number of bytes transferred from the serial connection to Ethernet.


Bytes Lost field

The Bytes Lost field displays the number of bytes that could not be transferred.


Errors field

The Errors field displays the number of errors that occurred during the transfer.


Tx IP Address field

The Tx IP Address field displays the IP address of the card the serial data is sent to.


Pass-Through Baud Rate

The Baud Rate field displays the baud rate of the serial connection.


Ethernet to Serial field

The Ethernet to Serial field displays the serial data that is received on the Ethernet connection and transferred to the serial connection.


Bytes Transferred field - Eth to Serial

The Bytes Transferred field displays the number of bytes that have been transferred to the serial port.


Bytes Lost - Eth to Serial

The Bytes Lost field displays the number of bytes that could not be transferred.


Errors field - Eth to Serial

The Errors field displays the number of errors that occurred during transfer.


Rx IP Address

The Rx IP Address field displays the IP Address from which data was last received via Ethernet (this address should match the Tx IP Address).


Unexpected Bytes field

The Unexpected Bytes field displays the number of unexpected bytes of data.

Unexpected bytes are data that has come from any IP Address that is not the Tx IP Address. The bytes of data are considered unexpected bytes and are not transmitted.


Cronus Password - Front Panel Configuration field

In the Front Panel Configuration field, enter a password. Passwords can be up to 20 characters long and any alphanumeric combination.


Show RVON Versions checkbox

When selected on the Keypanels Version Information screen, the type of RVON card, the RVON card version, the firmware release date and the IP Address of the card are displayed.


IFB Priorities checkbox

Select IFB Priorities to paste IFB priorities to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing to the IFB priorities.


Trunk IFB Priority

Select Trunk IFB Priorities to paste Trunk IFB priorities to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing to the Trunk IFB priorities.


Trunk Priority

Select Trunk Priorities to paste trunk priorities to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing to the trunk priorities.


IFB Listen Dest

Select IFB Listen Dest to paste IFB Listen destinations to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing to the IFB Listen Destinations.


Paste Special Local check box

Select the Local check box to paste local scroll enable settings to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Paste Special Trunk checkbox

Select the Trunk check box to paste trunk scroll enable settings to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Paste Special AZedit checkbox

Select the AZedit check box to paste AZedit scroll enable settings to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Paste Special LCP-102 check box

Select the LCP-102 check box to paste LCP-102 scroll enable settings to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Talk Key Latch Disables check box

Select the Talk Key Latch Disables check box to paste the talk key latch disable settings to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Listen Key Latch Disables check box

Select the Listen Key Latch Disables check box to paste the listen key latch disable settings to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Talk Key Restrictions check box

Select the Talk Key Restrictions check box to paste the talk key restrictions settings to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Listen Key Restrictions check box

Select the Listen Key Restrictions check box to paste the listen key restrictions settings to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Talk Key Assignments check box

Select the Talk Key Assignments check box to paste the talk key assignments to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Listen Key Assignments check box

Select the Listen Key Assignments check box to paste the listen key assignments to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Enable Tone check box

Select the Enable Tone check box to paste the enable tone settings to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Keypanel Privacy check box

Select the Keypanel Privacy check box to paste the keypanel privacy settings to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


TIF Dial-Out Restrict check box

Select the TIF Dial-Out Restrict check box to paste the TIF dial-out restricts settings to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Key Labels check box

Select the Key Labels check box to paste the Key Label settings to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.

For more information on Key Labels, see Key Labels.


Do Not Interrupt check box

Select the Do Not Interrupt check box to paste the Do Not Interrupt settings to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.

For more on Do Not Interrupt, see Do Not Interrupt.


Panel Poll Delay check box

Select the Panel Poll Delay check box to paste the panel poll delay settings to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Keypanel Type Info check box

Select the Keypanel Type Info check box to paste the keypanel type information to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Vox Settings check box

Select the Vox Settings check box to paste Vox settings to a new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


All Keys check box

Select the All Keys check box to copy all the keys from the selected port to the new or existing setup. De-select the check box to select individual keys from the # column list.


# Column

Individually select the keys from the selected port to copy to the new or existing setup.


Setup Restrict check box

Select the Setup Restrict check box to copy the setup restricts information from the setup page information to the new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Setup Page Assignments

Select the Setup Page Assignments check box to copy setup page assignments to the new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


All Setup Pages

Select the All Setup Pages check box to copy all the setup pages from the selected port to the new or existing setup. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Page 1 to ... check box

Select the Page 1 to … check box to select page one to copy from the selected port. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Page 2 ... check box

Select the Page 2 to … check box to select page two to copy from the selected port. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Page 3 to ... check box

Select the Page 3 to … check box to select page three to copy from the selected port. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Page 4 to ... check box

Select the Page 4 to … check box to select page four to copy from the selected port. De-select the check box to do nothing.


Page 1 drop down list

From the Page 1 drop down list, select the page in the new setup you want to paste page 1.


Page 2 drop down list

From the Page 2 drop down list, select the page in the new setup you want to paste page 2.


Page 3 drop down list

From the Page 3 drop down list, select the page in the new setup you want to paste page 3.


Page 4 drop down list

From the Page 4 drop down list, select the page in the new setup you want to paste page 4.


All Ports check box

Select the All Ports check box in the Destination field, to select all ports to copy the paste criteria you selected. De-select the check box to individually select the ports you want to paste the information to.


Destination # column

From the # column select the ports you want to paste the selected information into.


Duplicates?

Select the Duplicates? icon to check for duplicate alphas in your system after you have been modifying the setup file. By default, AZedit prompts to check for duplicate alphas whenever you open a file from disk.

In a large-scale intercom system, the possibility exists that you may accidentally assign the same name (alpha) to two different resources. Two resources of the same type can NEVER be named the same (for example, two intercom ports should not be named DIR1).


Back

When Back is clicked, AZedit reverts to previously viewed windows, up to 20 consecutively previous screens.

Back is available from the View menu and via the Back button.


Forward

When Forward is clicked, AZedit allows you to follow the same sequence of windows you used to go back. Forward is used in conjunction with Back.

Forward is available from the View menu and via the Forward button


Refresh

In ONLINE or SERVER modes, selecting Refresh restores the most current configuration and status information about an intercom station in AZedit. Use Refresh with any screen that provides status information.

For example, if you are viewing a particular Keypanel/Port screen, by selecting Refresh, you can see which keys are currently activated. For each key that is ON, a red dot appears above the key.

Refresh is available from the View menu and by pressing Ctrl+Space on the computer keyboard.

NOTE: 	The screens refresh automatically every few seconds. However, the time between refreshes can vary, depending on intercom activity, and the size of the intercom system. Use Refresh to ensure you are viewing the most recent information for a particular screen.


Resources

The Resources icon opens the resource tab of the Intercom Configuration window. In this window you can configure your intercom system manually or use the Intercom Sizing Wizard to help in configuring your system.


Error Information

Opens the Error Information screen which displays enhanced error information on recently occurring errors.


What's This icon

The What's This icon allows you to quickly access context sensitive help by clicking on a field.

To use the What's This icon, do the following:

1.	Click the What's This icon.
The What's This icon becomes active as your cursor.

2.	Click the item for which you want to view help.
The help for the particular item you selected appears.


What's New icon

The What's New icon opens the developer's notes that describe the new functionality within the AZedit application.


Grow

The Grow icon gives you the ability to manually increase the size of the font in the application with the click of the mouse.


Shrink

The Shrink icon gives you the ability to manually decrease the size of the font in the application with the click of the mouse.


Toolbars

When Toolbars is selected, a drop-down menu appears listing the different toolbars you can choose to show or hide.

You can show or hide:

•	Standard toolbar

•	Standard 2 toolbar

•	Navigation toolbar

•	Navigation 2 toolbar

•	Status Bar

•	Key Assignment Grid


NavBar or NavBar2

Shows or hides the Navigation or Navigation 2 Toolbar.


Alpha Copy

The Alpha Copy icon transfers and/or restores the defaults to alphas and aliases.

For more information, see Copy Alphas.


Server

The Server icon, when clicked, toggles the SERVER mode ON or OFF. When in server mode all fields turn purple.


Enable Vox check box

Select the Enable Vox check box to activate and use Vox.

NOTE: 	Cronus and the AIO-16 card are the only devices that currently have VOX supported.


Vox Threshold Up/Down Arrows

Use the Up and Down adjustment arrow to increase or decrease the VOX threshold level by
.5dB (from –127dB to 0.0 dB).


Hold Time Up and Down Arrows

Use the Up and Down adjust arrows to increase or decrease the time the port is active from meeting the threshold level set above. Once a port meets or exceeds its threshold level, the hold time determines how long that port will stay active before closing (up to 12.5 seconds).


Enabled via UPL Statement check box

Select the Enable via UPL statement check box is you will allow VOX to be enabled through the use of an UPL statement.


Ethernet Setup Controller (Active) field

Displays the Ethernet settings for the Active Master Controller. When configuring Ethernet you will enter information for such fields as IP Address, Network Mask, Default Gateway, and the MAC Address field.

NOTE: 	To configure Ethernet, you must be connected to the Matrix using a serial cable. The MAC address field automatically populates and cannot be altered.


Ethernet Setup Controller (Standby) field

Displays the Ethernet settings for the Standby Master Controller. When configuring Ethernet you will enter information for such fields as IP Address, Network Mask, Default Gateway, and the MAC Address field.

NOTE: 	To configure Ethernet, you must be connected to the Matrix using a serial cable. The MAC address field automatically populates and cannot be altered.


MAC Address

The MAC (Media Access Control) Address uniquely identifies each node of a network and interfaces directly with the network media. For more information on MAC IDs, contact Telex technical support.


Active IP Address field

The Active IP Address field displays the IP Address of the Master Controller.

1.	When connected serially or by USB, enter the IP address of the Active Master Controller.


Active Network Mask

The Active Network Mask field displays the Network Mask of the Master Controller.

1.	When connected serially or by USB, enter the Network Mask of the Active Master Controller.


Active Default Gateway field

The Active Default Gateway field displays the Default Gateway of the Master Controller.

1.	When connected serially or by USB, enter the Default Gateway of the Active Master Controller.


Standby IP Address field

The Standby IP Address field displays the IP Address of the Standby Master Controller.

1.	When connected serially or by USB, enter the IP address of the Standby Master Controller.


Standby Network Mask field

The Standby Network Mask field displays the Network Mask of the Standby Master Controller.

1.	When connected serially or by USB, enter the Network Mask of the Standby Master Controller.


Standby Default Gateway field

The Standby Default Gateway field displays the Default Gateway of the Standby Master Controller.

1.	When connected serially or by USB, enter the Default Gateway of the Standby Master Controller.


IFB_SLs button
IFB SLs button

Opens the IFB Special Lists configuration screen.


IFB button

Opens the IFBs screen. When the down arrow is clicked, a menu appears with the following selections:

•	IFB Priority – Opens the IFB Priority configuration screen

•	IFB Listen Source – Opens the IFB Listen Source configuration screen

•	IFB Listen Destination – Opens the IFB Listen Destination configuration screen

•	IFB Special Lists – Opens the IFB Special Lists configuration screen


AGRP button

Opens the Assignment Group configuration screen.


RVON button

Opens the RVON Configuration screen.


Vox Button

Opens the Vox Settings screen. Use this screen to set the Vox Settings for a particular port or many ports.


Alphas button

Opens the Port Alpha screen. When the down arrow is clicked a menu appears with the following selections:

•	Party Line – Opens the Party Line Alphas screen

•	IFB – Opens the IFB Alphas screen

•	IFB Special List – Opens the IFB Special List configuration screen

•	GPI Output – Opens the GPI Output screen

•	ISO – Opens the ISO Alphas screen

•	UPL Resource – Opens the UPL Resource Alphas screen

•	Assignment Groups – Opens the Assignment Group Alphas screen

•	GPI Input – Opens the GPI Input Description screen

•	Dim Table – Opens the Dim Table Description screen

•	I/O Card – Opens the I/O Card Descriptions screen

•	PAP and LCP-102 – Opens the PAP and LCP-102 Description screen


PAPs button

Opens the PAP-32 configuration screen.


IFB SL Alphas button

Opens the IFB Special List Alphas screen.


AGRP Alphas button

Opens the Assignment Group Alphas screen.


I/O Card Alphas

Opens the I/O Card Descriptions screen.  The I/O card slot displays and its description


PAP Alphas

Opens the PAP and LCP Descriptions screen.  The PAP and LCP Descriptions screen displays a list of all the PAPs and LCPs and their description.


XCs button

Opens the Crosspoint Controller Status screen.


Toolbox button

Displays a menu of toolbar display choices and the key assignment grid display.  By selecting one of the listed menu items, that item will display. Notice the checkmark next to the item in the menu.  When you deselect that item from the menu, it will hide from the main view.


Font Drop Down button

Displays a menu of font size display choices: small, medium, large, and extra large.


What's New button

Opens the current version of the What's New document that details the major enhancements for the various releases.


Save As button

Opens the Save (Online setup) screen. From here you can save a new setup file with a unique name.


Change Intercom Profile button

Opens the Select Intercom screen. From this screen you can change your intercom connection.


Change User Profile button

Opens the Select User screen where you can choose a different user profile to log onto the intercom system.


Change User Password button

Opens the Change User Password screen.


Shows Intercom Users button

Opens the Intercom Users screen. This screen shows who is currently connected to this intercom.


Configure Authentication Settings button

Opens the Authentication Configuration screen.


Create Desktop Shortcut button

Opens the Create Desktop Shortcut screen. From this screen you can create a shortcut on your desktop. If you have more than one instance of AZedit you can uniquely name each shortcut to better manage your AZedit sessions.


Standard Toolbar button

Shows or Hides the Standard Toolbar. You can also Show (or Hide) the Standard Toolbar by selecting (or deselecting) Standard Toolbar from the View menu.


Standard Toolbar 2 button

Shows or Hides the Standard Toolbar 2. You can also Show (or Hide) the Standard 2 Toolbar by selecting (or deselecting) Standard 2 Toolbar from the View menu.


Navigation Toolbar button

Shows or Hides the Navigation Toolbar. You can also Show (or Hide) the Navigation Toolbar by selecting (or deselecting) Navigation Toolbar from the View menu.


Navigation Toolbar 2 button

Shows or Hides the Navigation Toolbar 2. You can also Show (or Hide) the Navigation Toolbar 2 by selecting (or deselecting) Navigation Toolbar 2 from the View menu.


Key Assignment Grid button

Opens the Key Assignment Grid. For more information, see Key Assignment Grid.


Increase Font Size button

Use the Increase Font Size button to increase the size of the font throughout AZedit. There are four sizes to choose from: small, medium, large and extra large.

NOTE: 	When you decrease the size of the font, this does not include changing the size of the toolbars.  Any toolbar or navigation bar changes you have to Customize a Toolbar.


Decrease Font Size button

Use the Decrease Font Size button to decrease the size of the font throughout AZedit. There are four sizes to choose from:  small, medium, large, and extra large.

NOTE: 	When you decrease the size of the font, this does not include changing the size of the toolbars.  Any toolbar or navigation bar changes you have to Customize a Toolbar.


Intercom Configuration Screen button

Opens the Intercom Configuration screen to the Resource tab.


Error Information button

The Error Information button lights when there are warning messages (mainly dealing with restrictions and Restriction Editor) that have had the “Do Not Show this Warning Again” checkbox selected.

Click the Error Information button to see a suppressed warning message.  The Do Not Show this Warning Again checkbox is selected, however, you can deselect the box from this screen so the warning starts to appear again.


IFB Listen Destination Port field

The Port field displays the port number of the destination you wish the listener port to connect with.

1.	In the Port field, enter the port number of the destination you want to listen to.

NOTE: 	You can also use the drop down alpha box to populate this field.


IFB Listen Destination Alpha drop down box

The Port field displays the port number of the destination you wish the listener port to connect with.

1.	From the Alpha drop down list, select the alpha of the destination you want to listen to.

NOTE: 	You can also manually enter the port number in the Port field.


IFB Listen Destination Set Listen Output button

Once you have chosen the destination listen port, click Set Listen Output button to assign it to the selected port in the Listener column.


IFB Listen Destination Reset button

Click the Reset button when you want to reset the defaults back to the selected IFB Listen Destination.

To select and reset more than one listen destination port, do the following:

1.	On the keyboard, press Ctrl and then select the IFB ports you want to reset.


IFB Special Lists IFB SL field

The IFB SL field displays the IFB SL list number (the default number of IFB SLs is 32, but you can configure the number on the Resources page of the Intercom Configuration screen).

1.	In the IFB SL field, enter an IFB special list number.

NOTE: 	You can also select an alpha from a drop down list to enter the IFB SL number in the Port field.

For more information, see IFB Special Lists.


IFB Special Lists Alpha drop down list

The IFB SL field displays the IFB SL number you want to set to be an IFB special list.

1.	From the Alpha drop down list, select the alpha of the IFB SL you want to setup.

NOTE: 	You can also manually enter the IFB SL number in the IFB SL field.


IFB Special Lists Add to IFB SL button

The Add to IFB SL button adds selected IFBs to an IFB Special List.

NOTE: 	To select more than one at a time, hold the Ctrl key and select multiple IFBs.


IFB Special Lists Remove from IFB SL button

The Remove from IFB SL button removes selected IFBs from an IFB Special List.

NOTE: 	To select more than one at a time, hold the Ctrl key and select multiple IFBs.


Keypanel/Port Configuration Key Label checkbox

Select the Key Label checkbox to display key labels.

For more information on Enabling Key Labels in AZedit, see How to Enable Key Labels.


Screen Saver Line 1

The screen saver option automatically displays when the keypanel has not been used for a period of time. There are two lines for you to type your screen saver message.  Each line accepts up to 39 characters.

NOTE: 	Screen Savers are set for individual keypanels.

Screen saver mode is can only be used with the KP-32 family of keypanels and is set at the keypanel. Keypanels must have firmware version 2.06 or higher to use this feature.


Screen Saver Line 2

The screen saver option automatically displays when the keypanel has not been used for a period of time. There are two lines for you to type your screen saver message.  Each line accepts up to 39 characters.

NOTE: 	Screen Savers are set for individual keypanels.

Screen saver mode is can only be used with the KP-32 family of keypanels and is set at the keypanel. Keypanels must have firmware version 2.06 or higher to use this feature.


Menu Access Password field

Use the Menu Access Password field to set a password for menu access. You can have up to 32 characters for your password. The password may only be a numerical sequence.

NOTE: 	Passwords are set for individual keypanels.

Once the Menu Access Password is set, send your changes to the intercom. When a user tries to access the keypanel menu, they will be prompted for the numerical password.


Service Access Password field

Use the Service Access Password field to set a password for the Service Menu access. You can have up to 32 characters for your password. The password may only be a numerical sequence.

NOTE: 	Passwords are set for individual keypanels.

Once the Service Access Password is set, send your changes to the intercom. When a user tries to access the keypanel service menu, they will be prompted for the numerical password.


Set Priority of Selected Ports

IFB priorities determine which keypanel gets first access to an IFB in cases where two or more keypanels are trying to access the IFB at the same time. By default, the IFB priority for each intercom port can be individually set to any number from 0 through 3. With the priority set to 3, the keypanel overrides any other keypanel set to a lower priority. Keypanels that are set to the same priority can simultaneously access IFBs. You can add more IFB priority levels in the intercom configuration settings (up to 8). Before changing intercom configuration settings, we recommend that you read the intercom configuration description.


Party Line columns

The Party Line column displays the following information:

Port – 	The Port column displays a list of ports on the Intercom System.

Alpha – 	The Alpha column displays a list of alphas (if applicable) for the ports on the intercom system.

P-T – 	The P-T column displays whether the port is configured to be a Party Line Talker. If there is a green YES, the port is a party line talker. If a red NO displays, the port is not configured to be a party line talker.

P-L - 	The P-L column displays whether the port is configured to be a Party Line Listener. If there is a green YES, the port is a party line listener. If a red NO displays, the port is not configured to be a party line listener.

Key? – 	The Key? column only provides a valid indication in ONLINE or SERVER mode. This column indicates when an intercom port is talking or listening to the party line using intercom keys. This column is refreshed (updated with current information) frequently during normal operation. To force a refresh, use the Refresh command on the View menu, or press Ctrl+Space. Possible display indications are:

•	Talk: The port has a talk key pressed to talk to the party line

•	Listen: The port has a listen key pressed to listen to the party line

•	Both: The port has both a talk and listen key pressed for 2-way communication with the party line


IFB Screen columns

The IFB screen column displays the following information:

IFB Column - 	Displays the IFB number. This number cannot be changed. However, you can control how many IFBs are available for use by changing the intercom configuration settings.

Alpha Column - 	This column displays the name that has been assigned to the IFB. Default names are IF01, IF02 etc. You can change these names to ones that are more meaningful to keypanel operators. Click on the row where you want to change the name, and then press Ctrl+F12. (Note: You may have to activate the Ctrl+F12 feature if you want to use it.

DIM Column -	This column lists the Dim Level that you set in the Edit IFB dialog. NO indicates that no dimming value has been set, In this case, the program audio will be completely muted during IFB operation.

LC Column - 	This column indicates the scroll enable settings: LC indicates Local, TK indicates Trunk, and AE indicates AZedit. For each type of scrolling, the letters will appear green if that type of scrolling is enabled, and brown (or red when selected) if that type of scrolling is disabled.

TK Column - 	This column indicates the scroll enable settings: LC indicates Local, TK indicates Trunk, and AE indicates AZedit. For each type of scrolling, the letters will appear green if that type of scrolling is enabled, and brown (or red when selected) if that type of scrolling is disabled.

AE Column - 	This column indicates the scroll enable settings: LC indicates Local, TK indicates Trunk, and AE indicates AZedit. For each type of scrolling, the letters will appear green if that type of scrolling is enabled, and brown (or red when selected) if that type of scrolling is disabled.

Input Column - 	This column indicates the port settings that you have set up for each IFB.

Alpha Column - 	This column indicates the port alpha settings that you have set up for each IFB.

Output Column - 	This column indicates the port settings that you have set up for each IFB.

Alpha Column - 	This column indicates the port alpha settings that you have set up for each IFB.

Gain Column - 	This column lists the analog output gain for the intercom port that has been designated as the IFB Output. If the IFB listening device that is connected to the output port does not have a volume control, you may wish to adjust the analog output gain to suit the listener's preference. The analog output gain can be adjusted either in AZedit or from an LCP-102 that is operating in PAP mode.

Note: 	Double click any IFB to open the Edit IFB screen. From here you can change any of the settings.


IFB Prirorities column
IFB Priorities column

The IFB Priorities screen column displays the following information:

Port – 	The Port column displays a list of ports on the Intercom System.

Alpha – 	The Alpha column displays a list of alphas (if applicable) for the ports on the intercom system

Priority - 	The Priority column displays the priority level for IFBs on the port.

The IFB priorities level can be changed up to 8 levels.  To change the IFB priorities, see Set Priority of Selected Ports.


IFB Listen Source screen columns

The IFB Listen Source screen column displays the following information:

IFB Column - 	Displays the IFB number. This number cannot be changed. However, you can control how many IFBs are available for use by changing the intercom configuration settings.

Alpha Column - 	This column displays the name that has been assigned to the IFB. Default names are IF01, IF02 etc. You can change these names to ones that are more meaningful to keypanel operators. Click on the row where you want to change the name, and then press Ctrl+F12. (Note: You may have to activate the Ctrl+F12 feature if you want to use it.

DIM Column -	This column lists the Dim Level that you set in the Edit IFB dialog. NO indicates that no dimming value has been set, In this case, the program audio will be completely muted during IFB operation.

LC Column - 	This column indicates the scroll enable settings: LC indicates Local, TK indicates Trunk, and AE indicates AZedit. For each type of scrolling, the letters will appear green if that type of scrolling is enabled, and brown (or red when selected) if that type of scrolling is disabled.

TK Column - 	This column indicates the scroll enable settings: LC indicates Local, TK indicates Trunk, and AE indicates AZedit. For each type of scrolling, the letters will appear green if that type of scrolling is enabled, and brown (or red when selected) if that type of scrolling is disabled.

AE Column - 	This column indicates the scroll enable settings: LC indicates Local, TK indicates Trunk, and AE indicates AZedit. For each type of scrolling, the letters will appear green if that type of scrolling is enabled, and brown (or red when selected) if that type of scrolling is disabled.

Input Column - 	This column indicates the port settings that you have set up for each IFB.

Alpha Column - 	This column indicates the port alpha settings that you have set up for each IFB.

Note: 	Double click any IFB to open the Edit IFB screen. From here you can change any of the settings.


IFB Listen Destination columns

The IFB Listen Destination columns display the following information:

Listener column – 	The Listener column displays the listen destination port.

Alpha column -  	The Alpha column displays the listen destination alpha.

Output column - 	The Output column displays the port being listened to.

Alpha column - 	The Alpha column displays the alpha of the port being listened to.


IFB Special Lists column

The IFB Special Lists columns display the following information:

IFB Column - 	Displays the IFB number. This number cannot be changed. However, you can control how many IFBs are available for use by changing the intercom configuration settings.

Alpha Column - 	This column displays the name that has been assigned to the IFB. Default names are IF01, IF02 etc.

NOTE: You can change these names to ones that are more meaningful to keypanel operators. Click on the row where you want to change the name, and then press Ctrl+F12. (Note: You may have to activate the Ctrl+F12 feature if you want to use it.

IFB SL Member?

Column - 	The IFB SL Member? Column displays whether the IFB is part of an IFB SL. If a red “No" appears in this column, the IFB does not belong to a special list. If a green "Yes" appears, the IFB belongs to a special list.

To add IFBs to a special list, see:

•	Add an IFB to an IFB Special List

•	Add Multiple IFBs to an IFB Special List at the Same Time


Special List columns

The Special Lists screen column displays the following information:

Port Column - 	Displays a list of all the port in the intercom system.

Alpha Column - 	This column displays the name that has been assigned to the port.

NOTE: 	You can change these names to ones that are more meaningful to keypanel operators. Click on the row where you want to change the name, and then press Ctrl+F12. (Note: You may have to activate the Ctrl+F12 feature if you want to use it.

SL Member? Column - 	The SL Member? Column displays whether the port is part of an SL. If a red “No" appears in this column, the port does not belong to a special list. If a green "Yes" appears, the port belongs to a special list.

To add Ports to a special list, see:

•	Add/Remove a Port to a Special List


ISO screen columns

The ISO screen column displays the following information:

ISO Column - 	Displays the ISO number. This number cannot be changed. However, you can control how many ISOs are available for use by changing the intercom configuration settings.

Alpha Column - 	This column displays the name that has been assigned to each ISO. Default names are IS01, IS02 etc. You can change these names to ones that are more meaningful to keypanel operators. Click on the row where you want to change the name, and then press Ctrl+F12.

Self? Column -	Yes will display for each ISO that has ISO Self enabled. Otherwise, No is displayed.

LC Column - 	This column indicates the scroll enable settings: LC indicates Local, TK indicates Trunk, and AE indicates AZedit. For each type of scrolling, the letters will appear green if that type of scrolling is enabled, and brown (or red when selected) if that type of scrolling is disabled.

TK Column - 	This column indicates the scroll enable settings: LC indicates Local, TK indicates Trunk, and AE indicates AZedit. For each type of scrolling, the letters will appear green if that type of scrolling is enabled, and brown (or red when selected) if that type of scrolling is disabled.

AE Column - 	This column indicates the scroll enable settings: LC indicates Local, TK indicates Trunk, and AE indicates AZedit. For each type of scrolling, the letters will appear green if that type of scrolling is enabled, and brown (or red when selected) if that type of scrolling is disabled.

Output Port

 Column - 	These columns display the Output Port Number and Alpha that you have selected for each ISO.

Output Port

Alpha Column - 	These columns display the Output Port Number and Alpha that you have selected for each ISO.

Note: 	Double click any ISO to open the Edit ISO screen. From here you can change any of the settings.


GPI Output screen columns

The GPI Output screen column displays the following information:

RY Column - 	Displays the GPI Output number. This number cannot be changed. However, you can control how many GPI Outputs are available for use by changing the intercom configuration. (For example, your basic system hardware gives you 8 GPI outputs. If you do not have any additional UIO-256 frames attached, you can limit your GPI outputs to 8.)

Alpha Column - 	This column displays the name that has been assigned to the GPI output. Default names are RY01, RY02 etc. You can change these names to ones that are more meaningful to keypanel operators. Click on the row where you want to change the name, and then press Ctrl+F12. (NOTE: You may have to activate the Ctrl+F12 feature if you want to use it.

LC Column - 	This column indicates the scroll enable settings: LC indicates Local, TK indicates Trunk, and AE indicates AZedit. For each type of scrolling, the letters will appear green if that type of scrolling is enabled, and brown (or red when selected) if that type of scrolling is disabled.

TK Column - 	This column indicates the scroll enable settings: LC indicates Local, TK indicates Trunk, and AE indicates AZedit. For each type of scrolling, the letters will appear green if that type of scrolling is enabled, and brown (or red when selected) if that type of scrolling is disabled.

AE Column - 	This column indicates the scroll enable settings: LC indicates Local, TK indicates Trunk, and AE indicates AZedit. For each type of scrolling, the letters will appear green if that type of scrolling is enabled, and brown (or red when selected) if that type of scrolling is disabled.

Input Column - 	This column indicates the port settings that you have set up for each GPI input.

Alpha Column -	This column indicates the port settings that you have set up for each GPI input.

Output Column - 	This column indicates the port settings that you have set up for each GPI output.

Alpha Column - 	This column indicates the port settings that you have set up for each GPI output.

Status Column -	This column only displays meaningful information in ONLINE or SERVER mode. If the GPI Output is activated, On will display, otherwise, Off will display. The information in this column will update periodically. To force an update, select Refresh from the View menu at the top of the screen. Or, press Ctrl+Space on the computer keyboard.

Note: 	Double click any GPI Output to open the Edit GPI Output screen. From here you can change any of the settings.


GPI Input screen column

The GPI Input screen column displays the following information:

GPI Input

Column - 	Displays the GPI Input number. This number cannot be changed. However, you can control how many GPI Inputs are available for use by changing the intercom configuration. (For example, your basic system hardware gives you 8 GPI inputs. If you do not have any additional UIO-256 frames attached, you can limit your GPI inputs to 8.)

Keypanel

Column - 	These columns indicate the keypanel and key that you have assigned to be activated by each GPI input. When No Key is assigned as the key type, the Key Type column will be blank. Otherwise, Talk or Listen will display as the key type.

Keypanel Alpha

 Column - 	These columns indicate the keypanel and key that you have assigned to be activated by each GPI input. When No Key is assigned as the key type, the Key Type column will be blank. Otherwise, Talk or Listen will display as the key type.

Key Column - 	These columns indicate the keypanel and key that you have assigned to be activated by each GPI input. When No Key is assigned as the key type, the Key Type column will be blank. Otherwise, Talk or Listen will display as the key type.

Key Type

Column - 	These columns indicate the keypanel and key that you have assigned to be activated by each GPI input. When No Key is assigned as the key type, the Key Type column will be blank. Otherwise, Talk or Listen will display as the key type.

Status Column -	This column only displays meaningful information in ONLINE or SERVER mode. If the GPI Input is activated, ON will display, otherwise, OFF will display. The information in this column will update periodically. To force an update, select Refresh from the View menu at the top of the screen. Or, press Ctrl+Space on the computer keyboard.

Note:	Double click any GPI Inputs to open the Edit GPI Input screen. From here you can change any of the settings.


User Programmable Logic Statements screen column

The User Programmable Logic Statement screen column displays the following information:

UPL Statement

Column - 	Displays the number assigned to the UPL statement.

Enabled

Column -  	This indicates if a statement is enabled or disabled. YES indicates enabled, NO indicates disabled.

Input A Column - 	This indicates the type of input such as a GPI, Keypanel, etc.

Operation

Column - 	This indicates the logical operator if needed (AND, OR, XOR).

Input B Column - 	This indicates the type of input such an s a GPI, Keypanel, etc.

Output Column -	This indicates the type of output such as a key closure, crosspoint force or inhibits, etc.

State Column - 	This indicates the current state of the UPL statement.

Description

Column  -	This gives a brief description of the UPL statement.

Note: 	Double click any UPL Statement to open the Edit UPL Statement screen. From here you can change any of the settings.


User Programmable Logic Resources screen column

The User Programmable Logic Statement screen column displays the following information:

UR Column - 	Displays a list of UPL Resource numbers within the intercom system.

Alpha Column -  	This is a list of alphas assigned to UPL resources in the intercom system.

LC Column - 	This list indicates if a resource is Local scroll enabled.

TK Column - 	This list indicates if a resource is Trunk scroll enabled.

AE Column - 	This list indicates if a resource is AZedit scroll enabled.

Note: 	Double click any UPL Resource to open the Edit UPL Resource screen. From here you can change any of the settings.


Assignment Group - Group field

This box shows the number assigned to the Assignment Group (AGRP) currently being viewed.

You can enter a number to jump to the assignment group. Or you can pick from the Alpha drop down list.


Assignment Group Alpha drop down list

This list shows a list of Assignment Group (AGRP) alphas on the intercom system.

You can pick an Alpha from the drop down list and the Group field will automatically fill with the group number for the assignment group.


Assignment Group screen column

The Assignment Group screen columns display the following information:

Alpha Column - 	Displays Alpha of the assignment type in the assignment group.

Intercom Column - 	This column displays the intercom name where the key assignment is assigned. Because AZedit supports trunking systems, multiple intercom systems may be connected and share port assignments.

Type Column - 	This column displays the type of assignment for that port.

Number

Column - 	This column displays the port number where the assignment resides.

Member? - 	The Member? Column displays whether key assignment is part of an Assignment Group. A “Y” appears in the column indicating it is part of the group.

For more information, see

•	Add / Remove Assignments in Assignment Groups


Add to Group button

The Add to Group button adds the assignment type to the selected Assignment Group.

For more information on Adding Assignments to Assignment Groups, see Add / Remove Assignments in Assignment Groups.


Remove From Group button

The Remove from Group button removes assignment types from the selected Assignment Group.

For more information on Adding Assignments to Assignment Groups, see Add / Remove Assignments in Assignment Groups.


Crosspoint Status - Port field

The Port field displays the number assigned to the port currently being viewed.


Crosspoint Status Alpha drop down list

The Alpha drop-down list displays a list of alphas to choose from.


Crosspoint Status Force button

Clicking the Force button forces a crosspoint closure between the port currently being viewed and the port selected.


Crosspoint Status Inhibit button

Clicking the Inhibit button inhibits a crosspoint closure between the port currently being viewed and the port selected.


Crosspoint Status Release button

Clicking the Release button forces the crosspoint closure between the ports currently being viewed and the port will be released.


Crosspoint Status - Inspect button

Clicking the Inspect button provides detailed status information on the crosspoint connection between the port currently being viewed and the port selected.


Is Talking To.... columns

The Is Talking To… columns display the following information:

Port Column  - 	Displays a list of ports in the intercom.

Alpha Column - 	Displays a list of alphas in the intercom.

Closed Column - 	This indicates if a crosspoint is closed between the port currently being viewed and the selected port.

F/I  - 	This indicates if a crosspoint is either forced or inhibited between the port being viewed and the selected port.


Is Listening To.... columns

The Is Listening To… columns display the following information:

Port Column  - 	Displays a list of ports in the intercom.

Alpha Column - 	Displays a list of alphas in the intercom.

Closed Column - 	This indicates if a crosspoint is closed between the port currently being viewed and the selected port.

F/I  - 	This indicates if a crosspoint is either forced or inhibited between the port being viewed and the selected port.


Is Listening To... field

Is Listening To column display shows which port the specified port is listening to.

For more information see, Vox Settings screen


Is Talking To... field

Is Talking To column display shows which port the specified port is talk with.

For more information see, Vox Settings screen


Set To button

Use the Set To button to set the threshold after you have used the threshold slider to select the desired amount.

For more information see, Vox Settings screen


Threshold Amount (in dB) field

The Threshold Amount field displays the current threshold. Use the slider bar to increase or decrease the threshold amount.

For more information see, Vox Settings screen


Threshold Slider

The Threshold slider is used to increase or decrease the threshold amount.

To use the threshold slider, do the following:

1.	Click and hold the slider.

2.	Drag the slider left to decrease the threshold amount or right to increase the threshold amounts.

For more information see, Vox Settings screen


Threshold field up and down arrows

Use the Up and Down adjustment arrow to increase or decrease the VOX threshold level by
.5dB (from –127dB to 0.0 dB).

NOTE: 	You will only see the threshold change in the Threshold column to the right.

For more information see, Vox Settings screen


Hold Time Arrows

Use the Up and Down adjust arrows to increase or decrease the time the port is active from meeting the threshold level set above. Once a port meets or exceeds its threshold level, the hold time determines how long that port will stay active before closing (up to 12.5 seconds).

NOTE: 	You will only see the hold time change in the Hold Time column to the right.

For more information see, Vox Settings screen


Time Amount (in Sec)

The Time Amount field displays the current hold time. Use the slider bar to increase or decrease the hold time.

For more information see, Vox Settings screen


Time Set To button

Use the Set To button to set the Hold time after you have used the slider to select the desired time

For more information see, Vox Settings screen


Time Slider

The Hold Time slider is used to increase or decrease the hold time amount.

To use the hold time slider, do the following:

1.	Click and hold the slider.

2.	Drag the slider left to decrease the hold time amount or right to increase the hold time amounts.


Show Enabled checkbox

Click Show Enabled Only to view only those ports where Vox is enabled.


Vox Settings screen columns

The Vox Settings screen columns display the following information:

Ports Column - 	Displays all the ports available on the intercom system.

Alpha Column - 	Displays all the alphas for the ports on the intercom system.

Support?

Column - 	Displays a green “Yes” if Vox is supported on the port, otherwise a red “No” appears. In File mode, a – is seen.

Enabled?

Column - 	Displays a green “Yes” if Vox is enabled on the port, otherwise a red “No” appears.

Threshold

 Column - 	Displays the threshold at which Vox on the port will activate.

Hold Time

Column -	Displays the time the port will wait for the presence of audio before turning off.

Audio?

Column - 	Displays a green “Yes” if audio is present on the port, otherwise a red “No” appears

For more information see, Vox Settings screen.


Disable Vox

Click Disable Vox to remove the Vox function for the specified port.


Reset Threshold button

Click Reset Threshold to reset the Vox threshold to the default (-30dB).


Reset Hold Time button

Click Reset Hold Time to reset the hold time to the default (0.5 s).


Crosspoint Gain radio button

Opens the Crosspoint Gain screen.

1.	Select Crosspoint Gain.

2.	Click OK.
The Crosspoint Gain screen appears.

NOTE: 	You can also access the Crosspoint Gain screen by clicking the down arrow next to the gains button in the navigation bar.


Party Lines Gain radio button

Opens the Party Line Gain screen.

1.	Select Party Line Gain.

2.	Click OK.
The Party Line Gain screen appears.

NOTE: 	You can also access the Party Line Gain screen by clicking the down arrow next to the gains button in the navigation bar.


OK button

Accepts the selection and opens the specified screen.


Cancel button

Closes the Select Gain Type screen without opening the gain screen.


Set Gain button

Once you have selected a gain from the drop down list, click Set Gain to set the gain for the specified port.


Listen To....field columns

The Listen To… field columns display the following information

Port Column  - 	Displays a list of ports in the intercom.

Alpha Column - 	Displays a list of alphas in the intercom.

Gain Column - 	Displays the gain level of the selected port.


Reset Gain

Click Reset Gain to reset the gain for the specified port to the default (+0.0dB).


Alpha Columns

NOTE:	If you load an existing 4-character alpha configuration file into the Intercom system, and then set the alpha size to either six or eight. The larger alpha sizes will display the default alpha (for example, N005), until they are edited.

Resource Column - 	Displays a list of resources for the intercom system.

NOTE: 	Output Alphas and Input Alphas only appear on the Port Alpha screen if enabled. All other Alpha screens will show only Alphas and Aliases.

To display output alphas, input alphas and aliases, you must set 2 preferences and a configuration option.

Aliases only appear in a trunk-enabled system. Aliases are names for ports seen by remote intercoms.

Output Alpha (4) Column -  	If applicable, displays the 4-character name of the resource.

NOTE: When you enter a 4-character alpha, and are viewing all sizes on Alpha views, the 4-character alpha will populate the 6-character field and the 8-character field.

Output Alpha (6) Column - 	If applicable, displays the 6-character name of the resource.

NOTE: When you enter a 4-character alpha, and are viewing all sizes on Alpha views, the 4-character alpha will populate the 6-character field and the 8-character field.

Output Alpha (8) Column - 	If applicable, displays the 8-character name of the resource.

NOTE: When you enter a 4-character alpha, and are viewing all sizes on Alpha views, the 4-character alpha will populate the 6-character field and the 8-character field.

Input Alpha (4) Column -  	If applicable, displays the 4-character name of the input resource.

NOTE: When you enter a 4-character alpha, and are viewing all sizes on Alpha views, the 4-character alpha will populate the 6-character field and the 8-character field.

Input Alpha (6) Column - 	If applicable, displays the 6-character name of the input resource.

NOTE: When you enter a 4-character alpha, and are viewing all sizes on Alpha views, the 4-character alpha will populate the 6-character field and the 8-character field.

Input Alpha (8) Column - 	If applicable, displays the 8-character name of the input resource.

NOTE: When you enter a 4-character alpha, and are viewing all sizes on Alpha views, the 4-character alpha will populate the 6-character field and the 8-character field.

Alias (4) Column -  	If applicable, displays the 4-character alias of the resource.

NOTE: When you enter a 4-character alpha, and are viewing all sizes on Alpha views, the 4-character alpha will populate the 6-character field and the 8-character field.

Alias (6) Column - 	If applicable, displays the 6-character alias of the resource.

NOTE: When you enter a 4-character alpha, and are viewing all sizes on Alpha views, the 4-character alpha will populate the 6-character field and the 8-character field.

Alias (8) Column - 	If applicable, displays the 8-character alias of the resource.

NOTE: When you enter a 4-character alpha, and are viewing all sizes on Alpha views, the 4-character alpha will populate the 6-character field and the 8-character field.

Description - 	Displays a more descriptive definition of the resource.

NOTE: 	By double-clicking on any of the resources will open the Edit Alpha screen for that resource. You can change the Alpha associated with the resource from this screen.


Search For: field

The Search For: field is used to choose what key assignments you wish to search for on the intercom system (for example, Port assignments, Party Line assignments, ISOs, etc.).  This is similar to the Find function in Microsoft® Word.


Type pick column

The Type Pick column lists the different types of key assignments available for search. Once you determine the type of key assignment you are searching the # column and Alpha column list the port or resource available and the alpha associated with the port or resource.

For more information see, How to Use the Key Assignment Search feature


Cancel button (global)
Cancel button

The Cancel button closes the active window without saving any changes.


More >> / << Less button

Use the More >> button to expand the Search for: screen to include a Replace With: screen.

Use the << Less button to close the Replace With: portion of the screen.


Replace With: field

The Replace With: field is used to choose what key assignments you wish to replace with the key assignments you search for on the intercom system (for example, Port assignments, Party Line assignments, ISOs, etc.).  This is similar to the Replace function in Microsoft® Word


Selective Replace button

Use the Selective Replace button to replace only specified key assignments (not all key assignments) within the intercom system.


Replace All button

Use the Replace All button to replace all key assignments within the intercom system.


PAP-32 drop down list

The PAP-32 drop-down list displays a list of PAP resources (up to 15), from which you can select.


Panel drop down list

The panel drop-down list displays the main page of the PAP and any expansion panels connected to the Main PAP, from which you choose to view.


Page Browse field

The Page browse allows you to select the page on a PAP unit to view, up to 8 pages.


Page field

The Page field displays the page on a PAP or IFB unit you are viewing, up to 8 pages.


Page Lock checkbox

The Page Lock checkbox locks the front panel of the PAP unit so that the assignments cannot be changed from the front panel of the PAP


Restrictions (R) checkbox

To prevent a keypanel operator from changing a key assignment, click on the Restrict check box (R) above that key assignment. (Or press Ctrl+R on the computer keyboard while the key assignment is selected.)


Program Inputs - assignment fields
Program Inputs and IFB- assignment fields

The Program Inputs assignment field displays the Port for the source of audio.


IFB - assignment field

The assignment field shows the destination IFB assignment the program source is feeding.


Browse button (global)

Use the Browse button to manually navigate to a file or folder.


Repeat Search button

Click Repeat Search to repeat the current search.


Close button

Closes the active screen.


Log Files (.LOG): field

The Log Files (.LOG): field is used to show where log files will be written.  You must have Set standard log mode at startup to: and log to file selected.

1.	In Log Files (.LOG): field, enter the path where you want log files written (for example, C:\TELEX\AZedit\V3.1.1\LOG). Use the browse button to navigate to the folder if you are unsure of the path.


Setup Files (.ADM)

The Setup Files (.ADM) field is used to specify where to save setup files once they have been created.

1.	In the Setup Files (.ADM) field, enter the path to where you want to save your setup files.


Firmware Files (.HEX, .MOT, .BIB) field

The Firmware File (.HEX, .MOT, .BIB) field is used to specify where to save setup files once they have been created.

1.	In the Firmware File (.HEX, .MOT, .BIB) field, enter the path to where you want to save your firmware files.


SNMP Configuration Files (.AZS) field

The SNMP Configuration Files (.AZS) field is used to specify where to save SNMP configuration once they have been configured.

1.	In the SNMP Configuration Files (.AZS) field, enter the path to where you want to save your configuration files.


Warn when attempting to change communication settings

Select the Warn when attempting to change communication settings checkbox when you want a warning to appear that says, “The connected intercom has been resized, or a different intercom has been connected. The application will now reconfigure itself. Any unsent changes to the previous intercom will be lost”.

IMPORTANT:	If you do not the new system to be the default system size, deselect the Make the current size the new system default checkbox.


Restriction Files (.RES) field

The Restriction Files (.RES) field is used to specify where to save restriction files once they have been configured. The Restrictions file can be on a network shared drive so that one computer can run Restrictions Editor and create .RES files for each connected intercom from a central location.

Also, AZedit caches a copy of a .RES file on the local machine.  So, if the network is down, AZedit will still be able to access the most recent copy of the .RES file by using this cached version.  If you are not using a network share, you do not have to specify the Restriction Files directory, AZedit will only look in the cache directory.

1.	In the Restriction Files (.RES) field, enter the path to where you want to save your configuration files.
This directory can be pointed to a network share to allow for more centralized restrictions administrations.

NOTE: 	Restriction files are only used with the Restriction Editor software. For more information, contact Telex Communications technical support.


Restriction Cache Files (>RES) field
Restriction Cache Files (.RES) field

Restriction Cache Files (.RES) are the restriction files that AZedit saves locally to prevent any downtime in case of network failure. These files are saved in the Restrictions Cache Directory (C:\TELEX\AZEDIT\RES).

NOTE: 	If you are not using a network share, you do not have to specify the Restriction Files directory, AZedit will only look in the cache directory.

1.	In the Restriction Cache Files (.RES) field, enter the path to the cached restrictions files.

NOTE: 	Restriction files are only used with the Restriction Editor software. For more information, contact Telex Communications technical support.


Authentication Configuration Files (.AZA) field

When using Authentication, AZedit creates an authentication configuration file (.AZA) that retains the settings you specify for AZedit use.

The AZedit Installation creates a directory under C:\Telex\AZedit\ called AUTH to hold these files. You can change where AZedit is to store these files if you would like.

1.	In the Authentication Configuration Files (.AZA) field, enter the path to the authentication configuration files.


Allow users to add Intercoms checkbox

Select the Allow users to add Intercoms checkbox if you want to allow users to add intercoms systems to the AZedit application.


Allow user to delete Intercoms checkbox

Select the Allow user to delete Intercoms checkbox, if you want to allow users to delete intercoms from AZedit.


Allow user to change the default Intercom

Select Allow user to change the default Intercom if you want to allow users to change the Intercom system that will be the default when AZedit launches.


Allow user to add user profiles

Select the Allow user to add user profiles checkbox if you want to allow users to create user profiles.


Allow user to delete user profiles

Select the Allow user to delete user profiles checkbox if you want to allow users to delete user profiles.


Allow user to change the default user

Select the Allow user to change the default user checkbox if you want to allow users to change what the default user will be at startup.


Hide this dialog (permanently)

Select the Hide this dialog (permanently) checkbox to hide the maintenance tab.  Once you choose this option, there is no way to turn this tab back on through AZedit. You must use Windows® Registry Editor.

To reverse the hide this dialog option, you must change the option in the registry editor.


Intercom Setup box

The Intercom Setup box shows the type of intercom system running and a few of the configuration options available on the intercom system.

Redundant Audio will be active and selected when it is available on the intercom system.

Test Audio will be active and selected when it is available on the intercom system.

"High-Density" will be active and selected when the intercom is configured for a high-density system. Note, this is a software-enabled feature and not manually configured.

For more information, see Intercom Configuration: Resources.


Mode Style drop down list

The Mode Style drop down list gives you the choice between Log Files and SERVER Mode Log Files.  Log Files are logs generated in ONLINE and FILE mode. SERVER Mode Log Files are logs that are generated while in SERVER Mode.


Location browse button

Use the Location browse button to navigate to where the log files are written (either in the Telex file on the PCs hard drive or a network share drive).


Date drop down button

Use the Date drop down calendar to specify a date to look for log files.


Log Window

The Log Window displays log details for specified logs.


All items radio button

When the All items radio button is selected all items will be included in the Save.


Changed radio button

When the Changed radio button is selected only items that have changed will be included in the Save.


Unchanged radio button

When the Unchanged radio button is selected only items that have not changed will be included in the Save.


Restricted radio button

When the Restricted radio button is selected only items that have been restricted will be included in the Save.


Unrestricted radio button

When the Unrestricted radio button is selected only items that have not been restricted will be included in the Save.


Archived radio button

When the Archived radio button is selected only items that have been archived will be included in the Save.


Unarchived radio button

When the Unarchived radio button is selected only items that have not been archived will be included in the Save.


All resources radio button

When the All resources radio button is selected, the save applies to all the resources within AZedit.


Current resource type only radio button

When the Current resource type only radio button is selected, the save applies to the resource type specified in the Select Resource Type drop down list on the Partial Save screen.


Add button (global)

Click Add to add the specific parameters to the partial save.


Remove button

Click Remove to remove the specific parameters from the partial save.


Resource field

The Resource field displays the selected resource.


Description field

The Description field is used to enter a short, user-recognized, definition of the resource. There is a 24-character limit on the description.


Output Alpha (4) field

Use the Alpha (4) or Output Alpha (4) field to change the default Alphas (N001, N002, etc) to a more meaningful name for your users (for example, CAM1, CAM2, etc).  The alpha (4) can only be 4 characters long.

To allow for longer Alphas, you can set the Preferred alpha size: option.


Output Alpha (6) field

Use the Alpha (6) or Output Alpha (6) field to change the default Alphas (N001, N002, etc) to a more meaningful name for your users (for example, CAM1, CAM2, etc).  The alpha (6) may be up to 6 characters long.

To allow for longer Alphas, you can set the Preferred alpha size: option.


Output Alpha (8) field

Use the Alpha (8) or Output Alpha (8) field to change the default Alphas (N001, N002, etc) to a more meaningful name for your users (for example, CAM1, CAM2, etc).  The alpha (8) may have up to 8 characters.

You can set the Preferred alpha size: option.


Input Alpha (4)

Use the Alpha (4) or Input Alpha (4) field to change the default Alphas (N001, N002, etc) to a more meaningful name for your users (for example, CAM1, CAM2, etc).  The alpha (4) may only be up to 4 characters long.

To allow for longer Alphas, you can set the Preferred alpha size: option.


Input Alpha (6) field

Use the Alpha (6) or Input Alpha (6) field to change the default Alphas (N001, N002, etc) to a more meaningful name for your users (for example, CAM1, CAM2, etc).  The alpha (6) may be up to 6 characters long.

To allow for longer Alphas, you can set the Preferred alpha size: option.


Input Alpha (8)

Use the Alpha (8) or Input Alpha (8) field to change the default Alphas (N001, N002, etc) to a more meaningful name for your users (for example, CAM1, CAM2, etc).  The alpha (8) may be up to 8 characters long.

You can set the Preferred alpha size: option.


Alias (4)

Use the Alias (4) field to enter a 4-character alias. Alias names are used to identify destinations in a trunked intercom system to AZedit administrators and keypanel operators in other intercom systems. Aliases are provided because sometimes an Alpha name that is being used in your intercom system is also being used in some other intercom system. In this case, you can enter an Alias name that will not conflict with the name that is already in use. Another reason that you might want to use an Alias is that some other name might be more meaningful to keypanel operators in another intercom system.


Alias (6)

Use the Alias (6) field to enter a 6-character alias. Alias names are used to identify destinations in a trunked intercom system to AZedit administrators and keypanel operators in other intercom systems. Aliases are provided because sometimes an Alpha name that is being used in your intercom system is also being used in some other intercom system. In this case, you can enter an Alias name that will not conflict with the name that is already in use. Another reason that you might want to use an Alias is that some other name might be more meaningful to keypanel operators in another intercom system.


Alias (8)

Use the Alias (8) field to enter an 8-character alias. Alias names are used to identify destinations in a trunked intercom system to AZedit administrators and keypanel operators in other intercom systems. Aliases are provided because sometimes an Alpha name that is being used in your intercom system is also being used in some other intercom system. In this case, you can enter an Alias name that will not conflict with the name that is already in use. Another reason that you might want to use an Alias is that some other name might be more meaningful to keypanel operators in another intercom system.


Next button

Click Next to advance to the next resource in the specified Alpha window without having to close the edit screen.


Prev. button

Click Prev. to go back one resource in the specified Alpha window without having to close the edit screen.


Remote Device Type field

Displays the type of device the RVON card is connected to on the other end of the channel.


Remote IP Address field

Displays the IP Address of the device connected at the other end of the channel.


I/O Card Version Information screen columns

The I/O Card Version Information screen columns display the following:

Slot - 	This column is not applicable for a Zeus Intercom System. For an ADAM or ADAM CS Intercom System, this indicates which of the 2 master controller slots is the active slot. (The other slot is currently the standby master controller slot. For status information on that slot, select Standby Controller from the Status menu.)

NOTE: 	In a multi-frame ADAM intercom system (with SBX cards), Slot identification is only provided for the active master controller in the master frame (frame 001).

Version - 	This column displays the version of the selected I/O card.


Keypanel Version Information screen columns

The Keypanel Version Information screen columns display the following:

Port Column - 	This column displays a list of all the ports in the Intercom System.

Alpha Column - 	This column displays a list of alphas assigned to the ports in the Intercom System.

Version Column - 	This column displays the version of the selected keypanel.


Trunk Master Status screen columns

The Trunk Master Status screen columns display the following:

TM Column - 	This column displays a list of all trunk master connections.

Comm Column - 	This column displays a list of communication statuses (OK, BAD, or -) of the trunk master connections.

Status Column - 	"--    --"

Two consecutive dashes indicate that there has never been any data communication between the trunk master and the local master controller.

Bad Cut:

Indicates that there was a connection to the trunk master, but it is now not connected or there may be a power failure or other problem somewhere in the system.

OK Cur

Indicates that the trunk master is connected and operating, and that it has been updated with the current intercom system configuration.

OK Old

Indicates that the trunk master is connected and operating, but that it has not been updated with the current intercom system configuration.

Errors To

Column- 	The Errors To column displays the number of errors the Master Controller logs that have been sent to the Trunk Master. For further information, click here.

BER To Column - 	The BER (burst error rate) column displays the number of errors that have been sent to the trunk master in the last 10 minutes. For further information, click here.

Errors From

Column  -	The Error To column displays the number of errors the Master Controller logs that have been sent from the trunk master. For further information, click here.

BER From

Column - 	The BER (burst error rate) column displays the number of errors that have been sent from the trunk master in the last 10 minutes. For further information, click here.


Port Status screen columns

The Port Status screen columns display the following information:

Port Column - 	This column displays a list of the ports in the intercom system.

Alpha Column - 	This column displays a list of alphas in the intercom system.

Comm Column - 	This column displays a list of communication statuses (OK, BAD, or -) of the ports.

Status Column - 	"--    --"

Two consecutive dashes indicate that there has never been any data communication between the trunk master and the local master controller.

Bad Cut:

Indicates that there was a connection with a data device, but communication has stopped.

 	OK KP 1-7

Indicates that the device connected to the port is a normally functioning keypanel. The numbers 1-7 indicates the keypanel DIP switch settings for switches SW1-1 through SW1-3 on the keypanel rear panel as summarized in the table below. Refer to the keypanel’s user manual for information on DIP switch settings. In the case of a keypanel that does not have DIP switches on its rear panel, “KP 7” appears to indicate the keypanel is a normally functioning keypanel.

Number	Switch Settings

SW1-1	SW1-2	SW1-3

0	Open	Open	Open

1	Open	Closed	Open

2	Closed	Closed	Open

3	Closed	Closed	Open

4	Open	Open	Closed

5	Open	Closed	Closed

6	Closed	Closed	Closed

7	Closed	Closed	Closed

OK?

Indicates the date device connected to the port is a keypanel with an unknown or earlier version of software.

OK TIF

Indicates the data device connected to the port is a TIF Telephone Interface.

Errors To

Column- 	The Errors To column displays the number of errors the Master Controller logs that have been sent to the port. For further information, click here.

BER To

Column - 	The BER (burst error rate) column displays the number of errors that have been sent to the port in the last 10 minutes. For further information, click here.

Errors From

Column  -	The Error To column displays the number of errors the Master Controller logs that have been sent from the port. For further information, click here.

BER From

Column - 	The BER (burst error rate) column displays the number of errors that have been sent from the port in the last 10 minutes. For further information, click here.

Description

Column - 	The Description column displays a short, user-recognized, definition of the resource.

NOTE: 	When the Show Enhanced Status checkbox is selected the following columns appear in place of current columns.

Errors To 	Poll Delay

BER To	Requests

Errors From	Power Ups

BER From	KP Type

Poll Delay

Column –	The Poll Delay column reports the current poll delay setting. This is set in the keypanel setup screen. See, Keypanel / Ports Setup Main Screen.

Requests

Column - 	The Requests column provides a running count of talk/listen key closures.

Power Ups

Column - 	The Power Ups column provides a running count of how many times the connected device has been turn on.

KP Type

Column - 	The KP Type column reports the type of keypanel that is connected. If the port has been reserved for trunking, “Trunk Port” will display.


Master Controller Status screen columns

The Master Controller Status screen columns display the following information:

MC Column - 	This column identifies the frame number for each active master controller. Ina Zeus or ADAM CS intercom system, this number is always 001. This is also the case for a single-frame ADAM system, or for a multi-frame ADAM system that uses Dual Bus Expansion (DBX ) cards. In a multi-frame ADAM system that uses Single Bus expansion (SBX) cards, the numbers indicate the following:

•	001 Active master controller in master frame

•	002 Active master controller in first slave frame

•	003 Active master controller in second slave frame

•	004 Active master controller in third slave frame

•	005 Active master controller in fourth slave frame

Slot Column - 	The Slot column is not applicable for a Zeus Intercom System. For an ADAM or ADAM CS Intercom System, this column indicates which of the 2 master controller slots is the active slot (The other slot is currently the standby master controller slot. For status information on that slot, select Standby Controller from the Status menu).

NOTE: 	In a multi-frame ADAM intercom system (with SBX cards), Slot indication is only provided for the active master controller in the master frame (frame 001).

Comm Column - 	This column displays a list of communication statuses (OK, BAD, or -) for the master controller.

Status Column - 	This column displays the status of the master controller.  OK indicates the master controller is functioning correctly. Anything else indicates a problem with the card.

Errors To

Column- 	The Errors To column displays the number of errors the Master Controller logs that have been sent to the master controller. For further information, click here.

BER To Column - 	The BER (burst error rate) column displays the number of errors that have been sent to the master controller in the last 10 minutes. For further information, click here.

Errors From

Column  -	The Error To column displays the number of errors the Master Controller logs that have been sent from the master controller. For further information, click here.

BER From

Column - 	The BER (burst error rate) column displays the number of errors that have been sent from the master controller in the last 10 minutes. For further information, click here.


Standby Master Controller Status screen columns

The Standby Master Controller Status screen columns display the following information:

Standby MC

Column - 	This column identifies the frame number for each active master controller. Ina Zeus or ADAM CS intercom system, this number is always 001. This is also the case for a single-frame ADAM system, or for a multi-frame ADAM system that uses Dual Bus Expansion (DBX ) cards. In a multi-frame ADAM system that uses Single Bus expansion (SBX) cards, the numbers indicate the following:

•	001 Active master controller in master frame

•	002 Active master controller in first slave frame

•	003 Active master controller in second slave frame

•	004 Active master controller in third slave frame

•	005 Active master controller in fourth slave frame

Slot Column - 	The Slot column is not applicable for a Zeus Intercom System. For an ADAM or ADAM CS Intercom System, this column indicates which of the 2 master controller slots is the active slot (The other slot is currently the standby master controller slot. For status information on that slot, select Standby Controller from the Status menu).

NOTE: 	In a multi-frame ADAM intercom system (with SBX cards), Slot indication is only provided for the active master controller in the master frame (frame 001).

n/a – 	indicates there is not a standby master controller card inserted in any slot.

Right or Left – 	indicates which of the two available master controller card slots is currently the standby controller.

Comm Column - 	This column displays a list of communication statuses (OK, BAD, or -) for the standby master controller.

Status Column - 	This column displays the status of the standby master controller.

"--    --"

Two consecutive dashes indicate that there has never been any data communication between the standby controller and the master controller during the current edit session. This could be because the device is not connected.

Bad Cut:

Indicates that there was a connection to the standby controller, but it is now not connected or there may be a power failure or other problem somewhere in the system.

OK Cur

Indicates that the standby controller is connected and operating, and that it has been updated with the current intercom system configuration.

OK Old

Indicates that the standby controller is connected and operating, but that it has not been updated with the current intercom system configuration.

Errors To Column- 	The Errors To column displays the number of errors the Master Controller logs that have been sent to the standby controller. For further information, click here.

BER To Column - 	The BER (burst error rate) column displays the number of errors that have been sent to the standby controller in the last 10 minutes. For further information, click here.

Errors From

Column  -	The Error To column displays the number of errors the Master Controller logs that have been sent from the standby controller. For further information, click here.

BER From

Column - 	The BER (burst error rate) column displays the number of errors that have been sent from the standby controller in the last 10 minutes. For further information, click here.


I/O Card Status screen columns

The I/O Card Status screen columns display the following information:

Slot Column - 	This column displays the card in relation to which frame and its position in the frame. For example, 1:011, indicates the card is in Frame 1 and in Slot 11.

Port Column - 	This column displays a list of the ports that are designated to that slot. This column shows the first half of the sixteen ports on an AIO-16.

Port Column - 	This column displays a list of the ports that are designated to that slot. This column shows the second half of the sixteen ports on an AIO-16.

Card Type

Column - 	This column displays the type of card is in slot.

Comm Column - 	This column displays a list of communication statuses (OK, BAD, or -) of the ports.

(blank) = no card present

OK = the card is communicating with the master controller.
BAD = the card is not communicating with the master controller.

Status Column - 	CUR

The information from the master controller is current and up-to-date.

OLD:

The information from the master controller is not current and out –of-date.

CUT

The information is bad and communications are cut.

Errors To

Column- 	The Errors To column displays the number of errors the Master Controller logs that have been sent to the I/O card. For further information, click here.

BER To

Column - 	The BER (burst error rate) column displays the number of errors that have been sent to the card in the last 10 minutes. For further information, click here.

Errors From

Column  -	The Error To column displays the number of errors the Master Controller logs that have been sent from the I/O card.. For further information, click here.

BER From

Column - 	The BER (burst error rate) column displays the number of errors that have been sent from the card in the last 10 minutes. For further information, click here.

Description

Column - 	The Description column displays a short, user-recognized, definition of the resource.

For more information on the two-tier port number system used by the AIO-16 card, see AIO-16 ports and port allocation.


PAP & LCP-102 Status screen columns

The PAP & LCP-102 Status screen columns display the following:

PAP/LCP

Column - 	This column displays a list of all the PAP/LCP-102s in the intercom system.

Comm Column - 	This column displays a list of communication statuses (OK, BAD, or -) between the intercom system and the PAP/LCP-102 connections.

Status Column - 	"--    --"

Two consecutive dashes indicate there has never been any data communication between the PAP or LCP-102 and the master controller during the current edit session. This could be because the PAP or LCP-102 is not connected.

Bad Cut:

Indicates that there was a connection to the PAP or LCP-102, but it is now not connected or there may be a power failure or other problem somewhere in the system.

OK PAP

Indicates that the Program Assist Panel or LCP-102 is connected and operating.

Errors To

Column- 	The Errors To column displays the number of errors the Master Controller logs that have been sent to the PAP or LCP-102. For further information, click here.

BER To

Column - 	The BER (burst error rate) column displays the number of errors that have been sent to the PAP or LCP-102 in the last 10 minutes. For further information, click here.

Errors From

Column  -	The Error To column displays the number of errors the Master Controller logs that have been sent from the PAP or LCP-102. For further information, click here.

BER From

Column - 	The BER (burst error rate) column displays the number of errors that have been sent from the PAP or LCP-102.  in the last 10 minutes. For further information, click here.


UIO Status screen columns

The UIO Status screen columns display the following:

UIO Column - 	This column displays a list of all the UIO-256 units in the intercom system.

Comm Column - 	This column displays a list of communication statuses (OK, BAD, or -) of the UIO-256 units in the intercom system.

Status Column - 	"--    --"

Two consecutive dashes indicate that there has never been any data communication between the UIO-256 and the master controller during the current edit session. This could be because the device is not connected.

Bad Cut:

Indicates that there was a connection to the UIO-256, but it is now not connected or there may be a power failure or other problem somewhere in the system.

OK Cur

Indicates that the UIO-256 is connected and operating, and that it has been updated with the current intercom system configuration.

OK Old

Indicates that the UIO-256 is connected and operating, but that it has not been updated with the current intercom system configuration.

Errors To

Column- 	The Errors To column displays the number of errors the Master Controller logs that have been sent to the UIO. For further information, click here.

BER To

Column - 	The BER (burst error rate) column displays the number of errors that have been sent to the UIO in the last 10 minutes. For further information, click here.

Errors From

Column  -	The Error To column displays the number of errors the Master Controller logs that have been sent from the UIO card. For further information, click here.

 BER From

Column - 	The BER (burst error rate) column displays the number of errors that have been sent from the UIO in the last 10 minutes. For further information, click here.


Clear All button

Select the Clear All button to remove all parameters from the screen.


Send All screen columns

The Send All screen columns display the following:

Type Column - 	The Type column displays the type of resource that is being changed (for example, keypanel, vox, and gain).

Items Column - 	The Items column displays the number of resources affected for each type of resource change specified. When changes are made to two different ports but are made to the same type of resource, they are shown separated by commas (see above).

NOTE: 	When the Details checkbox is selected, the Items column changes to Items Number column and an Alpha column appears to give more details about the changes that are being sent to the Intercom.

Item Number

Column - 	The Item Number Column displays the port number of the resource being changed. If a keypanel on two different ports is being changed, and the details checkbox is selected, the resources will be displayed on their own line (see below).

Alpha

Column - 	The Alpha Column displays the name of the port being changed (for example, N001 or the name you create for the alpha).


Details checkbox

When the Details checkbox is selected, the Items column changes to Items Number column and an Alpha column appears to give more details about the changes that are being sent to the Intercom.


Send All Send button

The Send button sends the changes to the intercom system.  Once you click the send button, the Send progress screen appears which shows you the percentage sent to the intercom.


DBX Link Status screen columns

The DBX Link Status screen columns display the following:

DBX Column - 	The DBX column displays DBX cards listed by frame and slot number. For example, 1:0009 indicates frame 1, card slot number 9.

Comm Column - 	The Comm column displays the communications status of the DBX cards.

Status Column - 	"--    --"

Two consecutive dashes indicate that there has never been any data communication over the DBX cards. This could be because the device is not connected.

OK Active:

Indicates the card is talking and is the active card in the frame.

OK Standby

Indicates the card is talking and is the standby card in the frame.

OK

Indicates the card is talking, but it is neither active nor standby.

(A) Link Up/Dn - 	Any of the following indications can be given:

"--    --": the link is down

OK #: the link is up (for # hops)

OK All:  the link is up (for ALL hops)

The hops count indicates how many consecutive links are up. For instance, if card 1:009 reports Link A status of “OK 3 hops”, that means it could send a message out its Link A and that message could travel up to three hops before coming to a down link. ( A “hop” means the jump from one DBX card to another, and to continue a hop the receiving DBX card turns around and transmits the message out its other port).

OK ALL means that all links are up (in this case every card’s link status should read OK ALL).

(A) # Hops - 	Any of the following indications can be given:

"--    --": the link is down

OK #: the link is up (for # hops)

OK All:  the link is up (for ALL hops)

The hops count indicates how many consecutive links are up. For instance, if card 1:009 reports Link A status of “OK 3 hops”, that means it could send a message out its Link A and that message could travel up to three hops before coming to a down link. ( A “hop” means the jump from one DBX card to another, and to continue a hop the receiving DBX card turns around and transmits the message out its other port).

OK ALL means that all links are up (in this case every card’s link status should read OK ALL).

(B) Link Up/Dn - 	Any of the following indications can be given:

"--    --": the link is down

OK #: the link is up (for # hops)

OK All:  the link is up (for ALL hops

The hops count indicates how many consecutive links are up. For instance, if card 1:009 reports Link A status of “OK 3 hops”, that means it could send a message out its Link A and that message could travel up to three hops before coming to a down link. ( A “hop” means the jump from one DBX card to another, and to continue a hop the receiving DBX card turns around and transmits the message out its other port).

OK ALL means that all links are up (in this case every card’s link status should read OK ALL).

(B) # Hops - 	Any of the following indications can be given:

"--    --": the link is down

OK #: the link is up (for # hops)

OK All:  the link is up (for ALL hops

The hops count indicates how many consecutive links are up. For instance, if card 1:009 reports Link A status of “OK 3 hops”, that means it could send a message out its Link A and that message could travel up to three hops before coming to a down link. ( A “hop” means the jump from one DBX card to another, and to continue a hop the receiving DBX card turns around and transmits the message out its other port).

OK ALL means that all links are up (in this case every card’s link status should read OK ALL).

Audio A - 	Any of the following indications can be given:

"--    --": the link is not being used for audio.

###- ###: this link is being used for the timeslots indicated.

EXAMPLE 1

The following information would be displayed for a 2-frame system without redundant DBX cards. There is one DBX card per frame (in slot 9). Both DBX cards are “active” in their frame, and ALL links are up.

DBX	STATUS	LINK A	LINK B	AUDIO A	AUDIO B

1:009	OK Active	OK ALL	OK ALL	  - 	129-252

2:009	OK Active	OK ALL	OK ALL	  - 	001-124

Link A is not being used for audio in either direction. Link B, in frame 1, is being used to drive timeslots 129-252 from frame 2, and Link B in frame 2, is being used to drive timeslots 1-124 from frame 1.

NOTE: 	In systems where there is only 1DBX card per frame (2 frame, and 3 frame systems without redundant controllers), and if test audio is enabled, then only 124 timeslots can be forwarded between frames. A DBX link can forward 128 timeslots, but test audio requires 4 timeslots per link. In the 256x256 (2 frame), and 384x384 (3 frame) system which have only 1 DBX card per frame, all timeslots per link are needed for audio, but if test audio is enabled, the last timeslots in each frame are not available.

This means that the last four ports in each frame can listen to, but not talk to ports in other frames. Similarly, ports in other frames can talk to, but not listen to the last four ports in each frame. Within any frame, any port can talk or listen to any other port in that frame, the timeslots are only lost going between frames.

Test Audio is artificially generated audio by the DBX that it can produce, publish, forward, receive, and test. It is used by the DVX to ensure that the links are passing valid audio between frames. If the DBX detects that the link is up, but that the audio is corrupt, the DBX tears down the link and builds it up again.

EXAMPLE 2

DBX	STATUS	LINK A	LINK B	AUDIO A	AUDIO B

1:009	OK Active	OK 1	- -	129-252	-

2:009	OK Active	OK 1	- -	001-124	-

In this example, the link connecting Port B of 1:9 to Port B 2:9 has been broken. The audio automatically switched over to the A links, and the “hop” count for the A links shows 1 instead of ALL.

NOTE: 	Even though this intercom is called a 2-frame, non-redundant, system, it actually has redundant audio because both links go between frame 1 and 2. The intercom does not have redundant control because there is only one DBX card per frame, and if any card fails, connectivity is lost.

Note, it is possible for the audio from frame 1 to frame 2 to be carried on one link, while audio in the other direction is carried on another link.

Audio B - 	Any of the following indications can be given:

"--    --": the link is not being used for audio.

###- ###: this link is being used for the timeslots indicated.

EXAMPLE 1

The following information would be displayed for a 2-frame system without redundant DBX cards. There is one DBX card per frame (in slot 9). Both DBX cards are “active” in their frame, and ALL links are up.

DBX	STATUS	LINK A	LINK B	AUDIO A	AUDIO B

1:009	OK Active	OK ALL	OK ALL	  - 	129-252

2:009	OK Active	OK ALL	OK ALL	  - 	001-124

Link A is not being used for audio in either direction. Link B, in frame 1, is being used to drive timeslots 129-252 from frame 2, and Link B in frame 2, is being used to drive timeslots 1-124 from frame 1.

NOTE:	In systems where there is only 1DBX card per frame (2 frame, and 3 frame systems without redundant controllers), and if test audio is enabled, then only 124 timeslots can be forwarded between frames. A DBX link can forward 128 timeslots, but test audio requires 4 timeslots per link. In the 256x256 (2 frame), and 384x384 (3 frame) system which have only 1 DBX card per frame, all timeslots per link are needed for audio, but if test audio is enabled, the last timeslots in each frame are not available.

This means that the last four ports in each frame can listen to, but not talk to ports in other frames. Similarly, ports in other frames can talk to, but not listen to the last four ports in each frame. Within any frame, any port can talk or listen to any other port in that frame, the timeslots are only lost going between frames.

Test Audio is artificially generated audio by the DBX that it can produce, publish, forward, receive, and test. It is used by the DVX to ensure that the links are passing valid audio between frames. If the DBX detects that the link is up, but that the audio is corrupt, the DBX tears down the link and builds it up again.

EXAMPLE 2

DBX	STATUS	LINK A	LINK B	AUDIO A	AUDIO B

1:009	OK Active	OK 1	- -	129-252	-

2:009	OK Active	OK 1	- -	001-124	-

In this example, the link connecting Port B of 1:9 to Port B 2:9 has been broken. The audio automatically switched over to the A links, and the “hop” count for the A links shows 1 instead of ALL.

NOTE: 	Even though this intercom is called a 2-frame, non-redundant, system, it actually has redundant audio because both links go between frame 1 and 2. The intercom does not have redundant control because there is only one DBX card per frame, and if any card fails, connectivity is lost.

Note, it is possible for the audio from frame 1 to frame 2 to be carried on one link, while audio in the other direction is carried on another link


Remote Intercom Status screen columns

This screen shows a two-column list box on the right-hand side. The first column lists the remote intercom names. The second column displays the communications status for each intercom (either OK or -).

There are four operations that can be performed from this screen, as indicated by the four radio button options on the right side of the screen. The text description of options 1 and 3 changes depending on the intercom highlighted in the list.

The four options available are:

1.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

2.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refers to resources in all intercoms that are not communicating.

3.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in the selected intercom, where the resources are scroll restricted.

4.	Clear all key assignments in this intercom that refer to resources in all intercoms, where the resources are scroll restricted.

The first two options refer to the case where an intercom that used to be in service has been removed from service (disconnected from the Trunk Master). These options allow you to remove all key assignments for a disconnected intercom (or intercoms) from all keypanels in your intercom.

The last two options refer to the case where remote resources that had been available to this intercom, and had been programmed onto keys, are now scroll restricted and are not available to this intercom. These options allow you to remove restricted resource key assignments from all keypanels in your intercom.

Once one of the four options is selected and the Clear button is pressed a dialog will appear asking for confirmation of the clearing action. By clicking on the OK button you will acknowledge that the clear command should be carried out. If you wish to cancel the operation, click on the Cancel button.


Edit IFB Input field Port Number

The Input Port Number field provides the input port number for the specified IFB being edited.


Edit IFB Input field Port Alpha

The Input Port Alpha field provides the input port alpha for the specified IFB being edited.


Listen Source

To use the Listen Source feature, a mic feed from the talent's mic, through the mix console, and is then connected to an available input port in the matrix. The port number or alpha is entered on the Edit IFB screen in the Listen Source Field, Remember, the port alpha for this input source must be entered first under Port Alpha settings. Verify the port is not a duplicate alpha in the system.

When the listen source is set, go to the keypanel and assigned the IFB to a keypanel key.


Edit UPL Description field

The Description field provides an English text description of what the UPL statement you create will do. This allows you to see what will come from the different inputs and outputs.


Edit GPI Input Port Number field

The GPI Input Port Number field displays the number of the port to which you want to assign the GPI Input.

1.	In the Port Number field, enter the number of the port to which you want to assign the GPI Input.

NOTE:  	You can also use the Port Alpha drop down list to select the Alpha of the port. Once the Alpha is selected, the Port Number field dynamically fills with the correct port number


Edit GPI Input Port Alpha drop down list

The GPI Input Port Alpha field displays the alpha (name) of the port to which you want to assign the GPI Input.

1.	In the Port Number field, enter the number of the port to which you want to assign the GPI Input.

NOTE:  	You can also use the Port Alpha drop down list to select the Alpha of the port. Once the Alpha is selected, the Port Number field dynamically fills with the correct port number.


Edit ISO Number field

The ISO Output Number field displays the Output Port Number that you have selected for each ISO.


Edit ISO Alpha field

 The Output Port Alpha field displays the alpha that you have selected for each ISO.


Edit ISO Output Port Number field

The Output Port Number displays the port number you have selected for each ISO.


Eidt ISO Output Port Alpha drop down list
Edit ISO Output Port Alpha drop down list

The Output Port Alpha drop down list lets you pick the alpha port you have selected for each ISO.


Crosspoint Inspection - Crosspoint Details

The Crosspoint Details displays the input and output connections being inspected.


Crosspoint Inspection - Inspection Status

The Inspection Status displays the status of the current inspection being performed.


Results of Crosspoint Inspection screen

The Results of Crosspoint Inspection field displays the status of the Crosspoint: either OPEN or CLOSED. If the crosspoint is closed, the reason for closure will display at the bottom of the screen.

The gain settings for both crosspoints will also be displayed, as well as the overall gain.


Repeat button

Click the Repeat button to perform the current crosspoint inspection again.


LCP-Setup Page 1

Select the Setup Page 1 radio button to set Page 1 as the active setup page


LCP- Setup Page 2

Select the Setup Page 2 radio button to set Page 1 as the active setup page


LCP- Setup Page 3

Select the Setup Page 3 radio button to set Page 1 as the active setup page


LCP- Setup Page 4

Select the Setup Page 4 radio button to set Page 1 as the active setup page


Enable Authentication Support checkbox

Select Enable Authentication Support to activate Authentication on Intercom System. When you deselect the Enable Authentication Support checkbox, it disables authentication but does not erase the settings.


J9 Serial Sessions checkbox

Select the J9 Serial Sessions checkbox if you want to enable Authentication on all J9 serial sessions.


J10 Serial Sessions checkbox

Select the J10 Serial Sessions checkbox if you want to enable Authentication on all J10 serial sessions.


Ethernet Sessions checkbox

Select the Ethernet Sessions checkbox if you want to enable Authentication on all Ethernet sessions.


USB Sessions checkbox

Select the USB Sessions checkbox if you want to enable Authentication on all USB sessions.


Intercom Users field column display

The Intercom Users field columns display the following:

User - 	The user column displays the name of the user added to the Authentication file (

Password? -	The Password? column displays whether the user has a password associated with the authentication file for the intercom or not.

Admin? - 	The Admin? column displays Yes if the user is an administrator for the Intercom. If not, a No is displayed.

Restricted? - 	The Restricted? column displays Yes if a restrictions file should be used by AZedit. If not, a No is displayed.


Restrictions File

A Restrictions File is a file of restrictions set for a specific user. For example, you can set restrictions so that certain users are unable to create new users within the intercom system.

Restriction files are created within Telex's Restriction Editor.


Auth Add button

Click Add to open the Add User screen.

You can add users to the selected intercom from this screen, as well as set passwords and restriction file use.


Auth Edit button

Click Edit to edit the selected (highlighted) user profile.


Auth Delete button

Click Delete to delete a user profile from the intercom system.


Auth Load button

Click Load when you are finished adding user profiles. This will load the Authentication File to the current intercom system.


Add/Edit User field - User Name field

In the User Name field, enter the user name for the user you are adding to the authentication file.

There is a 24-character limit on the user name field. Anything over 24 characters will be truncated.


Add/Edit User screen - Password field

In the Password field, enter a password for the user you are creating.


User is an Administrator checkbox

Select the User is an Administrator checkbox if you would like to make this user an administrator of this intercom system.


User Requires Restrictions checkbox

Select the User Requires Restrictions checkbox if you would like to have a restrictions file applied to this user.


Add User - Name field

In the Name field, enter the name of the user you want to add to the intercom system.


Add User - Intercom combo box

The Intercom combo box allows you to copy settings that already exist and apply them to the new user.

1.	From the Intercom drop down list, select the Intercom settings you want to copy.


Add User - User combo box

The User combo box allows you to copy settings that already exist and apply them to the new user.

1.	From the User drop down list, select the user settings you want to copy.


Select User - User column

The User column displays a list of current users. You can select a user by highlighting the name and clicking OK.


Select User - Add button

The Add button opens the Add user screen. From the Add user screen, you can add users to the User list for the Intercom.


Select User - Delete button

The Delete button is used to delete user profiles from the Authentication file.

To delete a user from the authentication file, highlight the user name and click Delete.


Select User - Default button

The Default button allows you to choose a user profile to use as a default profile. A default profile is one that holds attributes that are shared by all users in the intercom system. By naming a default profile, you are able to set one profile and copy those attributes to individual users.

To select a default profile, highlight a user profile and click Default.


Select Intercom - Intercom column

The Intercom column displays a list of Intercoms available.

To switch intercoms, do the following:

1.	Highlight the intercom you want to switch to.

2.	Click OK.
When you switch intercoms, you will be disconnected from ONLINE mode and revert to FILE mode.

3.	Click the connect icon [image] to enter ONLINE mode.


Select Intercom - Add button

1.	Click Add to open the Add Intercom screen.

2.	From this screen, you can add intercoms to the available list.

3.	You can either browse for a certain system, or manually add an intercom.

NOTE: 	You must be connected to the Matrix to be able to browse for Intercom systems. However, if you are manually adding intercoms to the list, you do not have to be connected.


Select Intercom - Delete button

Use the Delete button to delete intercom systems from the available list.

To delete a system from the available list, highlight the intercom, and then click Delete.


Add Intercom - Name field

Use the Name field to manually add the name of an intercom. You can also use the browse button to pick the intercom from a list.


Add Intercom - browse button

1.	Click Browse to browse for an intercom to add to the available list. When browse is clicked, the Available Intercoms window appears with the available intercoms listed.

NOTE: 	You must be connected to the Matrix to be able to use the browse button


Add Intercom - Main field

Use the Main field to enter the main IP address.

When connected to the network with Ethernet an intercom system has two Master Controllers (the Active and Standby).  Where the Standby Master Controller acts as the Active Master Controller's backup in failover protection.

The Main IP Address is the IP Address given to the Active Master Controller. If you do not know the IP Address, you can browse to find the machine you want to configure.

Basically, there are two IP Address that AZedit can use to contact the intercom system – the Main and Partner. If AZedit gets no response from one of the IP addresses, then it switches to the other IP Address.


Add Intercom - Partner field

Use the Partner field to enter the partner IP address.

When connected to the network with Ethernet an intercom system has two Master Controllers (the Active and Standby).  Where the Standby acts as the Active Master Controller's backup.

The Partner IP Address is the IP Address given to the Standby Master Controller.

Basically, there are two IP Address that AZedit can use to contact the intercom system – the Main and Partner. If AZedit gets no response from one of the IP addresses, then it switches to the other IP Address.


Add Intercom - Main Browse button

The Main browse button is used to search for the Intercom listed in the Name field and then fill in the IP Address in the Main field.  This is an alternate way to search for the IP Address, rather than using the Name field browse button to search on the Available Intercom screen.


Select Intercom - Default button

The Default button allows you to choose an intercom to use as the default intercom. A default intercom is an intercom system that doesn’t have any customizations that are specific to a particular group.

To select a default intercom, highlight an intercom, and click Default.


Intercom checkbox

Select the Intercom checkbox if you want to display and connect to the name of the intercom in the shortcut name.

NOTE: 	You can see what will display in the Shortcut Name and Description fields.


Intercom field

By default, the name of the current intercom appears in the Intercom field. You can change this name to display any name you want to appear, however, if the name you input is not a valid intercom name it will not connect without prompting you to select a configured intercom.

NOTE: 	You can see what will display in the Shortcut Name and Description fields.


User Name checkbox

Select the User Name checkbox if you want the user name to appear in the shortcut name.

NOTE: 	You can see what will display in the Shortcut Name and Description fields.


User Name field

By default, Default will appear in the User Name field. You can change this name to display any name you want to appear.

NOTE:	You can see what will display in the Shortcut Name and Description fields.


Shortcut Name field

The Shortcut Name field displays what is seen when the shortcut is created. By default, the intercom name and user name are shown. You can change this to anything you want to display regardless of selections made for displaying the Intercom and User Name checkboxes.


Create Shortcut - Description field

The Description field displays a description of the shortcut that is created. By default, the description tells the intercom and the user that will be connected. You can change this to display a more meaningful description.


RVON status RVON Card drop down

From the RVON Card drop down list, select the slot where the RVON card is located.


RVON Status IP Address field

The IP Address field displays the IP Address of the selected card.


Connected Users screen column

The Intercom Users field columns display the following:

User - 	The user column displays the name of the user names of current users logged onto AZedit.

Connection -	The connection column displays the IP Address of the user listed.

Note: 	In the status bar at the bottom of the page, you can also see the number of users logged into the intercom system.


Vox Tab - Vox Threshold

The Vox Threshold field displays the point vox activates on the keypanel. This field cannot be changed. To change the vox threshold, use the vox threshold arrows to increase or decrease the threshold.


Vox Tab - Hold Time

The Hold Time field displays the amount of time to hold the port open without activity. This field cannot be changed. To change the hold time field, use the hold time arrows to increase or decrease the hold time.


RVON connection status icon

This button opens the View RVON Connection Status screen.


Versions icon

The Versions icon opens the Select Device screen where you can select the type of device you would like to see software (firmware) versions loaded. The choices are Master Controller, Keypanels, and I/O Cards.


Keypanel Print Options icon

The Keypanel Print Option icon opens either the Keypanel Print Options screen or displays a page of the different resources and their settings.

When you click the Keypanel Print Options icon on the Keypanels/Ports screen, the Keypanel Print Options screen appears. However, when you click the icon on any other screen a printable report of resources appears.


Use Key Labels checkbox

Select the Use Key Labels checkbox to print key labels instead of the alphas.


Keypanel Print Options OK button

Click OK when you are finished selected the options for the Keypanel Print Options screen. This opens the printable report with all the configurations you specify.


Password icon

Opens the Edit User screen so you can change a users password.


I/O Gain Screen columns

The I/O Gain screen columns display the following information:

Port column -	The input column displays a list of ports in the intercom system.

Alpha column - 	The alpha column displays a list of alphas in the intercom system.

Input Gain

column - 	The input gain column displays a list of the current input gain values for each port/alpha.

Output Gain

column - 	The output gain column displays a list of the current output gain values for each port/alpha.


Interpanel Dim Table Screen columns

The Interpanel Dim Table screen columns display the following information:

Port column -	The input column displays a list of ports in the intercom system.

Alpha column - 	The alpha column displays a list of alphas in the intercom system.

DIM Member? - 	The DIM Member? column indicates if a given port is a member of the current DIM assignment being viewed.


Select Device - Master Controller radio button

Select the Master Controller radio button to open the Master Controller Version Information screen.


Select Device - Keypanels radio button

Select the Keypanels radio button to open the Keypanel Version Information screen.


Select Device - I/O Cards radio button

Select I/O Cards radio button to open the I/O Cards Version Information screen.


Paste Special - Key Labels

Select the Key Labels check box to paste the key label settings to a new or existing setup file. Deselect the check box to do nothing.


Paste Special - Vox

Select the Vox check box to paste the vox settings to a new or existing setup file. Deselect the check box to do nothing.


Search For: drop down list

The Search For: drop down list lets you select the intercom system you want to perform the search.


Replace With: drop down list

The Replace With: drop down list lets you select which intercom system resource parameters you want to replace the found (from the Search For: search) parameters.


Cancel Changes to ALL ports check box

Select Cancel Changes to ALL Ports if you do not want to make any changes to any ports you already modified.


Continue button

Click the Continue button to apply the changes you have specified.


Crosspoint Controller Status Screen columns

The Crosspoint Controller Status screen columns display the following information:

XC Column - 	This column identifies the frame number for each active crosspoint controller. In a Zeus or ADAM CS intercom system, this number is always 001. This is also the case for a single-frame ADAM system, or for a multi-frame ADAM system that uses Dual Bus Expansion (DBX ) cards. In a multi-frame ADAM system that uses Single Bus expansion (SBX) cards, the numbers indicate the following:

•	001 Active master controller in master frame

•	002 Active master controller in first slave frame

•	003 Active master controller in second slave frame

•	004 Active master controller in third slave frame

•	005 Active master controller in fourth slave frame

Comm Column - 	This column displays a list of communication statuses (OK, BAD, or -) for the crosspoint controller.

Status Column - 	This column displays the status of the crosspoint controller.  OK indicates the crosspoint controller is functioning correctly. Anything else indicates a problem with the card.

Errors To

Column- 	The Errors To column displays the number of errors the crosspoint controller logs that have been sent to the master controller. For further information, click here.

BER To Column - 	The BER (burst error rate) column displays the number of errors that have been sent to the crosspoint controller in the last 10 minutes. For further information, click here.

Errors From

Column  -	The Error To column displays the number of errors the crosspoint controller logs that have been sent from the master controller. For further information, click here.

BER From

Column - 	The BER (burst error rate) column displays the number of errors that have been sent from the cross controller in the last 10 minutes. For further information, click here.


Intercom Sizing Wizard button

Opens the Intercom Sizing Wizard.  The wizard walks you through each step of setting up your intercom system, asking a series of specific questions, resulting in an easy and efficient setup procedure.


LCP-102 Frame ID and Polling ID drop down box

From the LCP-102 drop down box, select the LCP-102 Frame ID and Polling ID which you want to display. In a multiple frame system, you will see the different frames designated as follows:

1: 01	2: 01

1: 02	2: 02

1: 03…	2: 03…

NOTE: 	You can also use the LCP Description drop down box  to select the Frame ID and Polling ID. Simply, choose the LCP description, and then Frame ID is automatically populated with your choice.


LCP Description drop down box

From the LCP Description drop down box, select the LCP description you want to display. The description contains the LCP Name, the Frame ID, and the Polling ID.


LCP-102 Mode drop down box

There are three (3) display modes for the LCP-102 : Input / Output Gains, PAP, and CDP.

•	In I/O gains mode you can assign and adjust the analog input and output gains for up to 64 intercom ports.

•	In PAP mode, you can select the program input source and set its level for each of 64 IFBs.

•	In CDP mode, you can assign up to 64 intercom ports to any combination of party lines and then adjust the listen level for each participant on that party line.

NOTE: 	If you place a check mark in the Mode Enabled check box, an operator at the LCP-102 can access the currently selected mode and then change settings. If you remove the check mark, you can only access this mode and change settings using AZedit.

For more information, see LCP-102 Level Control Panel Description.


Prompt when duplicate alpha is created

Select the Prompt when duplicate alpha is created check box if you want a warning message to appear when a duplicate alpha is created on the intercom system. De-select if you do not want to receive the warning message.

The default setting is enabled (checked).


Show preview of changes to be sent during send changes

Select the Show preview of changes to be sent during send changes check box if you want a preview box to appear detailing the changes about to be sent to the intercom system. De-select if you do not want to see this preview box.

The default setting is enabled (checked).


Prompt to enter FILE mode during ONLINE save

Select the Prompt to enter FILE mode during ONLINE save check box if you want a warning message to appear when a save is done in ONLINE mode. De-select if you do not want to receive the warning message.

The default setting is enabled (checked).


SNMP - Name

The SNMP Name field is the name of the Intercom System in which SNMP is configured.

1.	In the Name field, enter the name of the desired intercom system.

NOTE: 	The System Information area is purely for documentation purposes. This is so the user knows which system is configured and how.


SNMP - Location

The SNMP Location field is the physical Location of the intercom system (for example, 3rd floor, Sacramento).

1.	In the Location field, enter the physical location of the intercom system that is running on SNMP.

NOTE: 	The System Information area is purely for documentation purposes. This is so the user knows which system is configured and how.


SNMP - Contact

The SNMP Contact is the person responsible for the specified SNMP Device.

1.	In the Contact field, enter the name of the person responsible for the specified intercom system.

NOTE: 	The System Information area is purely for documentation purposes. This is so the user knows which system is configured and how.


SNMP - Read-Only

The Read-Only field allows you to set the password that provides read-only access via SNMP.

The default entry is public. Public allows everyone every access to Read the SNMP structure.


SNMP - Read-Write

The Read-Write field allows you to set the password that provides read-write access via SNMP.


SNMP - Traps

A SNMP Trap is a notification event issued by a managed device (the Intercom System) to the network management station when an event or error occurs. When an event or error occurs a message is sent to the SNMP Monitoring Software with the Trap Community String description.

The Traps community string specifies the community string that is included in all SNMP traps generated by the intercom

In the Traps field, enter the trap identifier for the SNMP event monitoring.


SNMP - Use list of valid hosts?

Select the Use list of valid hosts? checkbox if you want to only allow queries to the specified SNMP Monitoring machines. You can specify the IP address of these machines in the Valid Host IP Address list.


SNMP - Input IP Address field

The Valid Host IP Address field allows you to add up to five (5) IP Addresses of host machines that will accept SNMP requests.  You must enter a valid IP Address structure for the Add button to become active.

1.	In the Valid Host IP Address field, enter the IP Address of the SNMP Monitoring machine allowed to make queries on the system.

2.	Click ADD.


SNMP - Add button

The Add button adds the IP Address of the SNMP Monitoring machine to a list of approved IP Addresses.


SNMP - IP Address list

The Valid Host IP Address list displays the IP Addresses of the machine that will accept SNMP queries.


SNMP - Remove IP Address

The Remove button removes the selected IP Address of the machine.


SNMP - Trap Target Input field

The SNMP Trap Target is the IP Address of the computer where the Trap messages are sent. You can have up to five (5) devices configured to accept these messages.

In the SNMP Trap Target field, enter the IP Address of the computer where you want Trap messages sent.


SNMP - Trap Target Add button

The Trap Target Add button adds the IP Address of the computer to a list of Trap Targets.


SNMP - Trap Target list

The SNMP Trap Target list is a list of all IP Addresses of the computers where you want Trap messages sent.


SNMP - Trap Target Remove button

The Trap Target Remove button removes the selected IP Address of the computer from the list of Trap Targets.


SNMP - Load button

The Load button loads a saved copy of an SNMP file. When using SNMP for the first time, you must save your SNMP file before you load it to the intercom system.


SNMP - Save button

The Save button saves the SNMP file you create. The SNMP file is saved to a directory you specify.


SNMP - Apply button

The Apply button applies the new SNMP file or modifications to the intercom system.


SNMP - Cancel button

The Cancel button cancels the changes that you have made and closes the window.


Intercoms window

The Intercoms window displays a list of intercoms (active and standby) in the system.

To connect to an Intercom, do the following:

1.	From the Intercoms window, select the Intercom that you want to connect to, and then click OK.

NOTE: 	When you have a Standby Master Controller installed, a black and white intercom icon will appear in this window.


Available Intercoms - Name field

The Name field displays the four-character intercom selected in the Intercoms window.


Available Intercoms - Type field

The Type field displays the type of Intercom system is selected (for example, Cronus Intercom).


Available Intercoms - Status field

The Status field displays the status of the selected intercom system. Values for this field are: Active and Standby.

NOTE: 	When standby appears in the field it is referring to the Standby Master Controller that acts as the Active Master Controller's backup in failover protection.


Available Intercoms - IP Address

The IP Address field displays the Active IP Address of the intercom system selected.

When connected to the network with Ethernet an intercom system has two Master Controllers (the Active and Standby).  Where the Standby Master Controller acts as the Active Master Controller's backup in failover protection.

Basically, there are two IP Address that AZedit can use to contact the intercom system – the Main and Partner. If AZedit gets no response from one of the IP addresses, then it switches to the other IP Address.


Available Intercoms - IP Partner field

The IP Partner field displays the Standby IP Address of the intercom system selected.

When connected to the network with Ethernet an intercom system has two Master Controllers (the Active and Standby).  Where the Standby Master Controller acts as the Active Master Controller's backup in failover protection.

Basically, there are two IP Address that AZedit can use to contact the intercom system – the Main and Partner. If AZedit gets no response from one of the IP addresses, then it switches to the other IP Address.


Available Intercoms - Connections field

The Connections field displays the number of connections available on the selected intercom.


Available Intercoms - Description field

The Description field displays a description of the selected intercom.


Edit GPI Output Number field

The Edit GPI Output Number field displays the Output Port Number that you have selected for each GPI Output.


Edit GPI Output Alpha field

The Edit GPI Output Alpha field displays the Output Port Alpha that you have selected for each GPI Output.


GPI Input Resource Number

Displays the number of the GPI Input currently being edited.


UPL Resources - Display Number

Displays the UPL Resource number currently being edited.


UPL Resources - Display Alpha

Displays the UPL Resource alpha currently being edited.


Paste Special - All checkbox

Select the All checkbox to paste the scroll enable settings to all resources.


Paste Special - Resource List

From the Resource list, select the resources to which you want to paste the scroll enable settings.


Clear Key Assignments - Assignments

The Assignments field displays the remote assignments you have selected to clear from the operation status.


Clear Key Assignments - Intercom field

The Intercom field displays the name of the intercom where the assignments reside.


Clear Key Assignments - Proceed button

Click Proceed to clear the selected key assignments.


Clear Key Assignments - Operation Status bar

The Operation Status bar gives a visual representation on the status of the clear key assignment progress.


Edit Alpha/Description Screen

The Edit Alpha / Description screen displays the following editable information:

Resource Field -	The Resource field displays the selected resource.

Description Field - 	The Description field is used to enter a short, user-recognized definition of the resource. There is a 24-character limit on the description.

NOTE: 	Output Alphas and Input Alphas only appear if they are enabled. If they are not enabled, the screen will show only Alphas and Aliases.

To display output alphas, input alphas and aliases, you must set 2 preferences and a configuration option.

Aliases only appear in a trunk-enabled system. Aliases are names for ports seen by remote intercoms.

Output Alpha (4) Field - 	User the Alpha (4) or Output Alpha (4) field to change the default Alphas (N001, N002, etc.) to a more meaningful name for your users (for example, CAM1, CAM2, etc.). The alpha (4) can only be 4 characters long.

Output Alpha (6) Field - 	Use the Alpha (6) or Output Alpha (6) field to change the default Alphas (N001, N002, etc.) to a more meaningful name for your users (for example, CAM1, CAM2, etc.). The alpha (6) may be up to 6 characters long.

Output Alpha (8) Field - 	Use the Alpha (8) or Output (8) field to change the default Alphas (N001, N002, etc) to a more meaningful name for your users (for example, CAM1, CAM2, etc.). The alpha (8) may have up to 8 characters.

Input Alpha (4) -	Use the Alpha (4) or Input alpha (4) field to change the default Alphas (N001, N002, etc) to a more meaningful name for your users (for example, CAM1, CAM2, etc.). The alpha (4) may only be up to 4 characters long.

Input Alpha (6) -	Use the Alpha (6) or Input alpha (6) field to change the default Alphas (N001, N002, etc) to a more meaningful name for your users (for example, CAM1, CAM2, etc.). The alpha (6) may only be up to 6 characters long.

Input Alpha (8) -	Use the Alpha (8) or Input alpha (8) field to change the default Alphas (N001, N002, etc) to a more meaningful name for your users (for example, CAM1, CAM2, etc.). The alpha (8) may only be up to 8 characters long.

Alias (4) -	Use the Alias (4) field to enter a 4-character alias. Alias names are used to identify destinations in a trunked intercom system to AZedit administrators and keypanel operators in other intercom systems. Aliases are provided because sometimes an Alpha name that is being used in your intercom system is also being used in some other intercom system. In this case, you can enter an Alias name that will not conflict with the name that is already in use. Another reason that you might want to use an Alias is that some other name might be more meaningful to keypanel operators in another intercom system.

Alias (6) -	Use the Alias (6) field to enter a 6-character alias. Alias names are used to identify destinations in a trunked intercom system to AZedit administrators and keypanel operators in other intercom systems. Aliases are provided because sometimes an Alpha name that is being used in your intercom system is also being used in some other intercom system. In this case, you can enter an Alias name that will not conflict with the name that is already in use. Another reason that you might want to use an Alias is that some other name might be more meaningful to keypanel operators in another intercom system.

Alias (8) -	Use the Alias (8) field to enter a 8-character alias. Alias names are used to identify destinations in a trunked intercom system to AZedit administrators and keypanel operators in other intercom systems. Aliases are provided because sometimes an Alpha name that is being used in your intercom system is also being used in some other intercom system. In this case, you can enter an Alias name that will not conflict with the name that is already in use. Another reason that you might want to use an Alias is that some other name might be more meaningful to keypanel operators in another intercom system.


KP-32 Talk/Listen button

  The Talk/Listen button lets you select Listen Level 1, Talk Level 1 or Talk Level 2 to display in the keypanel assignments on the Keypanel/Ports screen. This feature is only available with KP-32 family products.


Proceed button

Click Proceed to initiate the current action.


Port Status Clear Button

Opens the Clear Port Status screen. The Clear Port Status screen allows you to select specific ports you want to clear the errors from.


All ports radio button

Select All Ports if you want to clear all errors from every port.


Only Selected Ports radio button

Select Only Selected Ports if you want to clear all errors from only those specified ports.


Error Counters checkbox

Select the Error Counters checkbox if you want to clear the error counters column on the Port Status screen.


Message Counters checkbox

Select the Message Counters checkbox if you want to clear Messages from the Port Status screen.


"Bad Cut" Status checkbox

“Bad Cut” indicates there was communication with a data device, but communication has stopped. Select the “Bad Cut” checkbox if you want to clear the Bad Cut status indicator.


Key Closures for Disconnected Panels checkbox

Select the Key Closures for Disconnected Panels checkbox if you want to clear this status indicator from the Port Status screen.


Other Alpha - Party Line radio button

Select the Party Line Alpha radio button to open the Party Line Alpha screen.


Other Alphas - IFB Alphas radio button

Select the IFB Alphas radio button to open the IFB Alpha screen.


Other Alphas - IFB Special List Alphas radio button

Select the IFB Special List Alphas radio button to open the IFB Special List screen.


Other Alphas - Special List Alphas radio button

Select the Special List Alphas radio button to open the Special List Alpha screen.


Other Alphas - GPI Output Alphas radio button

Select the GPI Output Alphas radio button to open the GPI Output Alpha screen.


Other Alphas - ISO Alphas radio button

Select the ISO Alphas radio button to open the ISO Alpha screen.


Other Alphas - UPL Resource Alphas radio button

Select the UPL Resource Alphas radio button to open the UPL Resource Alpha screen.


Other Alphas - Assignment Group Alphas radio button

Select the Assignment Group Alphas radio button to open the Assignment Group Alpha screen.


Other Alphas - GPI Input Descriptions radio button

Select the GPI Input Descriptions radio button to open the GPI Input Descriptions screen.


Other Alphas - Inter Panel Dim Descriptions radio button

Select the Inter Panel DIM Description radio button to open the Inter Panel Dim Descriptions screen.


Other Alphas - PAP and LCP Descriptions radio button

Select the PAP and LCP Descriptions radio button to open the PAP and LCP Descriptions screen.


Other Alphas - I/O Card Descriptions radio button

Select the I/O Card Descriptions radio button to open the I/O Card Description screen.


Capabilites Conflict Message
Configuration Conflict Message

You will see the Configuration Conflict message whenever you connect to the intercom system and the configuration of AZedit does not match the configuration of the master controller in the intercom system. This can happen for several reasons:

Newly installed application or firmware

You may see the configuration conflict message if you just installed the application and you are connecting to the intercom system for the first time. You may also see the message if you just updated the master controller firmware in the intercom system. In either case, you should normally select Yes, reconfigure this application. This will set the application to match the intercom system master controller.

If you intend to always use the application with just one intercom system, we recommend that you DO NOT CHECK Don't show this message again. In this way, you will normally not see the configuration conflict message again, but you will see it if someone takes the unusual step of changing the Intercom Configuration settings.

Using the application on several intercom systems

You may also see the configuration conflict message if you are using the same copy of the application with several different intercom systems. In this case, there are two ways to proceed.

•	If you wish to create unique setup files for each intercom system: You could select Yes, reconfigure this application. Then, DO NOT check Don't show this message again. This will allow you to create setup files that match the unique configuration of whatever intercom system you are connected to.

•	If you wish to share setup files between several intercom systems: You may wish to connect to the largest of these intercom systems, then select Yes, reconfigure this application. Also check Don't show this message again. This will now allow you to create and use setup files for several different intercom systems, but keep in mind that those settings that do not fit within a smaller intercom system will not load. For example, if your largest intercom system has 256 intercom ports and your smallest intercom system has 64 ports, you can use the same setup files with both systems, but all intercom ports above 64 will be ignored for the smaller intercom system.

The master controller firmware may need to be updated

You may also see the configuration conflict message if you are connecting to an intercom system that has older firmware, which supports fewer features than your version of AZedit. In this case, you may wish to contact your intercom system service representative and find out if updated master controller firmware is available. When you obtain updated firmware and need help installing it, search for keyword update in help.

NOTE: For detailed information about the intercom configuration settings, click here.


Resources Contained in File

This resource list can appear under a variety of conditions when you are sending, loading, merging, or previewing files. The columns in the list contain the following information:

Resource Type Column: This column indicates the type of resources that are contained in the file. If the file was created using the Partial Save command, you will only see those resources listed that were saved in the file.

Maximum Column: For each type of resource contained in the file, this column displays the maximum quantity of that resource that could possibly be contained in the file. (The maximum quantities were set either when the file was created, or by using Intercom Configuration setup.)

Details Column: This column lists the actual resources that are contained in the file. For example, if the file allows a maximum of 64 intercom ports, and there are 64 actual intercom ports contained in the file, this column will display ALL (1-64). On the other hand, if the file was saved using the Partial Save command, and only intercom ports 1-3 and 7 were saved, the Details column would display 1-3, 7.

File Mismatch Warning

In some cases, you may see a warning at the bottom of the list. This warning indicates that there is a difference between the resource settings in the file and AZedit, or between the file and the master controller in the intercom system. This warning can occur for a variety of reasons, including:

•	In FILE mode, when you attempt to merge (or preview during merge) a setup file that has a different resource configuration than the file that you are currently editing (i.e. one file has more or fewer total intercom ports, party lines, etc. than the other).

•	In ONLINE mode, if you use the Load File or Send File command, and the file that you are opening or previewing has a different resource configuration than the ONLINE configuration. If the file that you are loading or sending contains fewer resources than the ONLINE configuration, all of the settings in the file should fit within the ONLINE configuration. If the file contains more of some types of resources than the ONLINE configuration, then those resources will be discarded which do not fit within the maximum resources settings of the ONLINE configuration.

If you have updated the master controller firmware and you are now attempting to load or send a file that was created and saved before you did the update. In this case, the master controller has probably obtained new features or enhanced configuration settings, so that the older file that you are attempting to load should entirely fit within the new system settings.

Examples:

•	You are operating in FILE mode, and the setup file that you are currently editing has 136 ports set in its resource configuration. You select Merge from the File menu and attempt to merge a file that only has 64 ports set in its resource configuration. In this case, all of the ports will merge into the file that you are currently editing.

•	You are operating in FILE mode, and the setup file that you are currently editing has 64 ports set in its resource configuration. You select Merge from the File menu and attempt to merge a file that has 136 ports set in its resource configuration. In this case, only the first 64 ports will merge into the file that you are currently editing, and the remaining ports will be discarded (however, your original merge file will remain intact).

•	You are in ONLINE mode, and the default intercom system resource configuration allows 64 intercom ports. You then use the Send File command and attempt to send a file which has 128 intercom ports. Only ports 1-64 will be loaded and sent.

•	You are in ONLINE mode, and the default intercom system resource configuration allows 64 intercom ports. You then use the Load File command to load a partial save file. The partial save file allows a maximum of 128 intercom ports, but the file only contains ports 3-9. Ports 3-9 will be successfully merged into the online configuration.


Warning: Reconfigure Intercom Resources

All configuration information, such as key assignments etc. will be erased from the intercom system, and you will have to restore these from a disk copy. If your configuration information is not saved to disk, press the Cancel button and save your configuration before proceeding. If you proceed, be prepared for a brief disruption in intercom communications. Also, make sure you remove the standby master controller cards before clicking the Apply button.

After you click the Apply button, the application will lose contact with the intercom system. After a few moments, you should see a prompt allowing you to retry the connection. You may have to click Retry 2-3 times before the application will successfully reconnect. After the active master controller(s) have been updated, you can reinstall the standby master controllers, and they will be updated from the master.


Select Intercom Configuration

This message can occur for either of the following reasons:

•	You have been working in ONLINE mode, and now you wish to create a new setup file or open a setup file from disk. In this case, the message is telling you that the ONLINE intercom configuration (in the master controller) does not match the default AZedit configuration settings. If you are creating a new file and you select Use Default Configuration, the new file will be set to the same configuration as AZedit. If you select Use Current Configuration, the new file will be created with the same configuration as the master controller. If you are opening an existing setup file, it does not matter which item you select:, since the setup file will open with its preset configuration settings. For further information about the intercom configuration settings, click here.

•	You are working in FILE mode on a setup file that has intercom configuration settings that are different from the AZedit default configuration settings. In this case, the message lets you select whether you wish to continue using the non-default settings, or whether you want to return to the AZedit default settings. If you are creating a new file, and you select Use Default Configuration, the new file will be set to the same configuration as AZedit. If you select Use Current Configuration, the new file will be created with the same configuration settings as the file that you have been working on. If you are opening a previously saved file, it does not matter which selection you make, since AZedit will use the settings that are already saved in the setup file that you open. For further information about the intercom configuration settings, click here.


IFB Output Bus Warning

This intercom port is currently defined as an IFB output. You can still make changes to the settings as with any other Keypanel / Port. However, typically, a port that is used as an IFB output does not have a keypanel connected. Usually, there is some type of IFB belt pack or similar device connected instead. Such a device doesn't have any talk or listen keys, so you won't normally be making any key assignments. However, you may still want to change the Scroll Enable settings.


Application Unable to Automatically Enter Server Mode

This message will occur at startup if AZedit is unable to connect to an intercom system and Auto Enter Server Mode is selected in the Options menu under Preferences.


Configuration Change

This message may occur after you have updated master controllers. We recommend that you place a check mark next to Make the current size the new system default, then let the application reconfigure itself. This will allow AZedit to see any new features that have been added by the update.


Changing the intercom configuration in FILE mode is not recommended!

You can access the Intercom Configuration screens in FILE mode to view configuration settings, but we recommend that you do not change any settings while in FILE mode. If you do, the settings for AZedit and for individual setup files may not match the actual settings in the intercom system master controller. For example, if you configure AZedit to have 256 intercom ports, but there are actually only 64 intercom ports in your intercom system, you will not be able to send setup information to your intercom system for intercom ports 65 to 256.

To just view the AZedit configuration settings, click OK on the Warning message. For a description of the configuration settings, click here.


Make this the AZedit Default

If you select Yes, AZedit will be configured to your new Intercom Configuration settings, but these may not match the Intercom Configuration in the master controller. For example, if you define 4 talk levels in FILE mode and make this the AZedit default, but the master controller only has 2 levels, then only 2 levels will be used and the master controller will ignore the other 2.

If you select No, AZedit will not be reset to your new Intercom Configuration settings. However, the settings for your

We do not recommend that you change the AZedit default settings in FILE mode. The only time you might wish to do this is if you are running the same copy of AZedit to configure several different intercom systems.


Warning: Changing the Intercom Configuration in ONLINE Mode

You can view the intercom configuration settings in ONLINE mode, but you should not make any changes until you completely understand how the intercom configuration works. Also, you should expect at least several minutes of downtime for the intercom system when making configuration changes. And, if you have not saved your intercom configuration to disk, you must do so before proceeding.

Save Command

Intercom Configuration Description

How to reconfigure the intercom configuration


Remove Standby Master Controller

If you do not remove the standby master controller before changing the intercom configuration, the standby master controller will automatically restore the old configuration settings after you change them. To prevent this, remove the standby master controller, then proceed to reconfigure the active master controller, then reinstall the standby master. The new configuration settings will then be loaded into the standby master controller.

NOTE: 	In a multi-frame ADAM system, you only need to remove the standby master controller in the master frame (frame 1).

NOTE: 	For master controller identification, click here.


Party Line Setup Access

Access party line setup by any of the following means:

•	Click the PL button [image] on the toolbar at the bottom of the screen

•	Select Party Line from the System menu at the top of the screen.

•	Press the F3 button on the computer keyboard. (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

If you need help while viewing the Party Lines setup screen, press the F1 key.


IFB Setup Access

Access IFB setup by any of the following means:

•	Click the IFB button [image] on the toolbar at the bottom of the screen.

•	Select IFB from the System menu at the top of the screen.

•	Press the F4 button on the computer keyboard. (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

If you need help while viewing the IFB setup screen, press the F1 key.


Special List Setup Access

Access Special List setup by any of the following means:

•	Click the SL button [image] on the toolbar at the bottom of the screen.

•	Select Special List from the System menu at the top of the screen.

•	Press the F5 button on the computer keyboard. (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

If you need help while viewing the Special List setup screen, press the F1 key.


Keypanel Setup

Access keypanel setup to assign keys and other features by any of the following means:

•	Click the KP button [image] on the toolbar at the bottom of the screen

•	Select Keypanel Assignment from the System menu at the top of the screen

•	Press the F2 key on the computer keyboard. (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

If you need help while viewing the Keypanels / Ports setup screen, press the F1 key.


Point to Point Listen Gain Adjustment

Access point-to-point listen gain by either of two methods:

•	In the Keypanel / Ports view: Click the KP button on the toolbar to select the Keypanel / Ports view. In the Port text box or the Alpha list box, select the intercom port for which you want to adjust a listen gain. Then, click the Gain button at the upper-right side of the screen. This will open the Gain Setup dialog box. Press F1 if you need help with this dialog.

•	Using the XPT Gain button on the toolbar: Click the XPT Gain button [image] on the toolbar. This will open the Crosspoint Gains view. Press F1 if you need help with this view.


Analog I/O Gain Adjustment Access

In the System menu, point to Gains, then select Analog Input / Output Gains.
This will open the Analog Input / Output Gains view.

Using the Analog I/O Gain button on the toolbar: Click the I/O Gain button [image] on the toolbar. This will open the Analog I/O Gain view. Press F1 if you need help with this view.

If you need help while viewing Crosspoint Gains, press the F1 key.


Searching for Key Assignments

AZedit has a convenient search feature that makes it easy to find all instances of any key assignment. Access this feature by any of the following means:

•	Click the search button

•	In the Edit menu, select Search for Key Assignment.

•	Press Ctrl+F on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

Any of these methods will open the Search for Key Assignment dialog.  If you need help while viewing this dialog, press the F1 key.

Related Topic: Moving a User to a New Intercom Port.


Intercom Configuration Access

1.	Close all open dialogs.

2.	From the Options menu click on Intercom Configuration.

3.	If a warning message appears, make sure you read it before proceeding, and then click OK.

4.	Click on Resources or Options to view settings.

Important! 	Do not change any intercom configuration settings until you fully understand how the intercom configuration works.

lntercom Configuration Description.


Communications Setup

Use communications setup to set the COM port and baud rate settings for the Serial port, Network or USB connection between the configuration computer and the intercom system.

To access communications setup, do the following:

1.	From the Options menu, select Communications to open the Communications dialog.
You can press F1 for further assistance while viewing the communications dialog.

Or

1.	Click the Communications icon in the toolbar at the top of the screen,


GPI Output Setup Access

Access GPI Output setup by any of the following methods:

•	Click the GPI OUT button on the toolbar,

•	Press F6 on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	Select GPI Output from the System menu

Any of these methods will open the GPI Outputs list box. You can then press F1 to get help.


ISO Setup Access

Access ISO setup by any of the following methods:

•	Click the ISO button on the toolbar,

•	Press F7 on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	Select ISO from the System menu

Any of these methods will open the ISOs list box. You can then press F1 to get help.


GPI Input Setup Access

Access GPI input setup by any of the following methods:

•	Click the GPI IN button on the toolbar,

•	Press F8 on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	Select GPI Input from the System menu

Any of these methods will open the GPI Inputs list box. You can then press F1 to get help.


UPL Statement Setup Access

Access UPL Statement setup by any of the following methods:

•	Click the UPL button on the toolbar

•	Press Shift-F8 on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	From System menu, point to User Programmable Logic, then select UPL Statements.

Any of these methods will open the User Programmable Logic Statements list box. You can then press F1 to get help.


Inter-panel Dim Table Setup Access

Access Dim Table Setup by any of the following methods:

•	Click the Dim button on the toolbar,

•	Press F10 on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	Select Dim Table from the System menu

Any of these methods will open the Inter-panel Dim Tables setup screen. You can then press F1 to get help.


LCP-102 Setup Access

Access LCP-102 setup by either of the following methods:

•	Click the LCP-102 button on the toolbar at the bottom,

•	Select LCP-102 from the System menu

•	Press Ctrl+F2 on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

Either of these methods will open the LCP-102 Setup screen. You can then press F1 to get help.


Crosspoint Gain Adjustment Access

Access the Crosspoint Gain screen by any of the following methods:

•	Click the Gain button [image] on the toolbar, then select Crosspoint Gains from the Select Gain Type box and click on OK

•	Press Shift+F2 on the computer keyboard, then select Crosspoint Gains from the Select Gain Type box and click on OK. (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	From the System menu at the top of the screen, point to Gains, then select Crosspoint Gains.

Any of these methods will open the Crosspoint Gains screen. You can then press F1 to get help.


Port Alpha Setup Access

You use Port Alpha setup to assign names for intercom ports. Access Port Alpha setup by any of the following means:

•	Click the Port Alpha button on the toolbar

•	Press F12 on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	Select Port in the Alphas menu at the top of the screen

Any of these methods will open the Port Alphas selection screen. You can then press F1 to get help.


Keypanel Version Information Access

In Online mode, you can find out the firmware version for KP-12 and DKP keypanels by either of the following methods:

•	Click the Keypanel Version button on the toolbar

•	Close all open dialog windows. Press Ctrl+Shift+V on the computer keyboard. Select Keypanels, and then click OK.

•	Close all open dialog windows. In the Status menu at the top of the screen, select Software Versions, and then click on Keypanels.

Either of these methods will open the keypanel version information screen. You can then press F1 to get help.


Port Status Screen Access

In Online mode, you can use the Port Status Screen to find out if data devices connected to intercom ports are operating correctly, and you check the general condition of the data link from the device to the intercom system. Access the Port Status screen by the following method:

•	Click the Port Status button on the toolbar

•	Close all open dialog windows. In the Status menu at the top of the screen, click on Port.

In the Port Status screen, you can press F1 to get help.


Master Controller Status Screen Access

Description

You use the Master Controller Status screen in Online mode to check for communication errors between the master controller and the configuration PC. You can also use it to update the firmware in master controllers.

Access

To access the Master Controller Status screen, close all open dialog windows.

From the Status menu select Master Controller, or click the MC Status button on the toolbar,

While viewing the Master Controller Status screen, you can press F1 to get help.


Master Controller Version Information Screen Access

You can find out the firmware version for the active master controller in Online mode by either of the following methods:

•	Click the MC Version Information button on the toolbar,

•	Close all open dialog windows, and make sure AZedit is the active window. Then, press Ctrl+Shift+V on the computer keyboard. Select Master Controllers, then click OK

•	Close all open dialog windows. In the Status menu at the top of the screen, point to Software Versions, then click on Master Controllers.

Either of these methods will open the Master Controller Version Information screen. You can then press F1 to get help.


Crosspoint Status Access

In Online mode, you can use the Crosspoint Status screen to check for closed and open talk and listen paths between intercom ports. You can also use Crosspoint Status to Force talk or listen paths to always be on, or inhibit them so that they are always off. Access Crosspoint Status by any of the following means:

•	Click the XPT button on the toolbar,

•	Press F11 on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	In the System menu, select Crosspoint

Any of these methods will open the Crosspoint Status screen. You can then press F1 to get help.


Partly Line Gain Adjustment Access

You use Party Line Gains to adjust the level at which specific intercom ports hear specific party lines. Access Party Line Gains by any of the following methods:

•	Click the Gain button on the toolbar [image], and then select Party Line Gains from the Select Gain Type dialog box and click on OK.

•	Press Shift F2 on the computer keyboard, then select Party Line Gains from the Select Gain Type dialog box and click on OK. (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	Select Gains from the System menu, and then select Party Line Gains.

Any of these methods will open the Party Line Gains screen. You can then press F1 to get help.


Port Setup for Non-keypanel Devices

Even when there is no keypanel connected to an intercom port, you may wish to change some of the port settings. You do this by accessing the port the same as for keypanel setup.

•	Click the KP button on the toolbar at the bottom of the screen,

•	Select Keypanel Assignment from the System menu at the top of the screen

•	Press the F2 key on the computer keyboard. (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

Once you are viewing the Keypanel / Ports setup screen, press the F1 key for complete Keypanel / Port help, or click here for non-keypanel port help.


IFB Priority Setup Access

IFB Priorities Description

You can set IFB priorities for several keypanels at the same time by either of the following methods:

•	Click the IFB Priorities button on the toolbar at the bottom of the screen,

•	From the System menu at the top of the screen, select IFB Priority

•	Press Shift+F4 on the computer keyboard. (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

You can also set the IFB priority for an individual keypanel during keypanel setup. In the Keypanels / Ports setup screen, click on the Edit button.


Audio I/O and DBX Card Status Screen Access
Audio I/O and DBX Card Status Screen Access (AZedit)

Description

You use this screen in ONLINE mode to check for communication errors between the Master Controller and the Audio I/O cards (AIO-8 & AIO-16) and DBX cards. You can also use it to update the firmware in Audio I/O and DBX cards.

Access

1.	Close all open dialog windows.

2.	From the Status menu click AIO and DBX Card.

Or

1.	Click the AIO or DBX Card status buttons on the toolbar at the bottom of the screen,  [image] and

While viewing the Audio I/O and DBX Card Status screen, you can press F1 to get help.


Audio I/O Card Version Information Screen Access (AZedit)

NOTE: 	Audio I/O Card Version Information applies to ADAM CS, ADAM, and Cronus Intercom Systems.

You can find out the firmware version for the Audio I/O cards in ONLINE mode by either of the following methods:

•	Click the I/O Card Version button on the toolbar at the bottom,

•	Close all open dialog windows, and make sure AZedit is the active window. Then, press Ctrl+Shift+V on the computer keyboard. Select I/O Cards, then click OK

•	Close all open dialog windows. In the Status menu at the top of the screen, point to Software Versions, then click on I/O Cards.

Either of these methods will open the Master Controller Version Information screen. You can then press F1 to get help.


UPL Resource Setup Access

•	Click the UPL Resource button on the toolbar at the bottom,

•	In the System menu, point to User Programmable Logic, then click on UPL Resources.


Intercom Configuration Options Screen

Access intercom configuration options as follows:

1.	Close all open dialogs.

2.	From the Options menu, select Intercom Configuration, and then select the Options tab.


Special Function Access

Special Functions may be accessed during keypanel setup while assigning keys.


DBX Link Status Access

Description

You use the DBX Link Status screen in Online mode to check operation of the DBX (Dual Bus Expansion) cards in a multi-frame ADAM intercom system. (Not applicable to multi-frame systems that use Single Bus Expansion (SBX) cards.) You can also this screen to update the firmware in DBX cards.

Access

•	Close all open dialog windows. Then, in the Status menu at the top of the screen click on DBX Links.

Or

•	Click the DBX Link Status button on the toolbar at the bottom,

While viewing the DBX Link Status Screen, you can press F1 to get help.


Intercom Sizing Wizard Access

To access the Intercom Sizing Wizard, do the following:

1.	From the Options menu, select Intercom Configuration.
A warning appears.

2.	Click OK.
The Intercom Configuration screen appears.

3.	Click Intercom Sizing Wizard.
The Intercom Sizing Wizard begins.

NOTE: 	In ONLINE mode, the wizard will automatically determine your intercom system size, and then will walk you through a series of screens to get more specific information to configure your system.

In FILE mode, you will have to pick your intercom system, and then the wizard will walk you through the different options to determine the intercom system setup.


IFB SL Setup Access

Access IFB SL setup by any of the following methods:

•	Click the IFB SL button on the toolbar

•	Press Alt+F5 on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	Select IFB SL from the System menu

You can then press F1 to get help.


Assignment Groups Setup Access

Access Assignment Groups setup by any of the following methods:

•	Click the AGRP button on the toolbar

•	Press Ctrl+F9 on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	Select Assignment Groups from the System menu

You can then press F1 to get help.


RVON Configuration Access

Access RVON Configuration by any of the following methods:

•	Click the RVON button on the toolbar

•	Select Miscellaneous, then RVON Configuration from the System menu

NOTE: 	You must have an RVON Card in the intercom system for this menu item to appear.

You can then press F1 to get help.


VOX Setup Access

Access Vox setup by any of the following methods:

•	Click the VOX button on the toolbar

•	Press Ctrl+F9 on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	Select Vox from the System menu

You can then press F1 to get help.


PAP32 Setup Access

Access PAP32 setup by any of the following methods:

•	Click the PAPs button on the toolbar

•	Press Ctrl+Shift+F2 on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	Select PAP Assignment from the System menu

You can then press F1 to get help.


LCP Setup Access

Access Assignment Groups setup by any of the following methods:

•	Click the LCPs button on the toolbar

•	Press Ctrl+F2 on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	Select LCP-102 Assignments from the System menu

You can then press F1 to get help.


IFB Source Setup Access

Access Assignment Groups setup by any of the following methods:

•	Click the Lstn Src button on the toolbar

•	Press Ctrl+F4 on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	Select IFB Listen Source from the System menu

You can then press F1 to get help.


IFB Destination Setup Access

Access Assignment Groups setup by any of the following methods:

•	Click the Lstn Dest button on the toolbar

•	Press Ctrl+Shift+F4 on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	Select IFB Listen Destination from the System menu

You can then press F1 to get help.


Display Software Versions

Access the Software Versions screens by any of the following methods:

•	Click the Versions button on the toolbar

•	Press Ctrl+Shift+V on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	Select Software Versions from the Status menu

You can then press F1 to get help.


Log View Access

Access the Log View by any of the following methods:

•	Click the Logs button on the toolbar

•	Select View Log from the Logging menu

You can then press F1 to get help.


UIO Status Access

Access UIO Status by any of the following methods:

•	Click the UIOs button on the toolbar

•	Select UIO-256 from the Status menu

You can then press F1 to get help.


Key Assignment Grid Access

Access Key Assignment Grid by any of the following methods:

•	Click the [image] button on the standard toolbar

•	Right-click on a main screen, and then select Show Grid

•	Select Key Assignment Grid from the View menu.

You can then press F1 to get help.


Authentication Configuration Settings Access

Access the Authentication Configuration Settings by any of the following methods:

•	Click the [image] button on the standard toolbar

•	Select Configuration… from the Authentication menu

You can then press F1 to get help.


Preference Settings Access

Access AZedit Preference Settings by any of the following methods:

•	Click the [image] button on the standard toolbar

•	Select Preferences from the Options menu

You can then press F1 to get help.


Paste Special Settings Screen Access

Access Paste Special Settings by any of the following methods:

•	Click the [image] button on the standard toolbar

•	Select Paste Special… from the Edit menu

You can then press F1 to get help.


Search For Key Assignment Screen Access

Access the Search For Key Assignment screen by any of the following methods:

•	Click the [image] button on the standard toolbar

•	Press Ctrl+F or Alt+F3 on the computer keyboard (Close all dialogs first. Also, AZedit must be the active window.)

•	Select Search for Key Assignment from the Edit menu

You can then press F1 to get help.


Customize Toolbars Configuration Access

Access the Customize Toolbars Configuration screen by any of the following methods:

•	Select Customize Toolbars from the View menu.


Keypanel Screen Saver Setup Access

Access the Keypanel Screen Saver setup screen by any of the following methods:

•	Select Miscellaneous, and then Keypanel Screen Saver from the System menu


Keypanel Menu Password Setup Access

Access the Keypanel Menu Password setup screen by any of the following methods:

•	Select Miscellaneous, and then Keypanel Menu Password from the System menu.


Cronus Password Setup Access

Access the Keypanel Menu Password setup screen by any of the following methods:

NOTE: 	A Cronus Intercom System must be connected and active for this menu item to appear.

•	Select Miscellaneous, then Cronus Password from the System menu.


Ethernet Setup Access

Access Ethernet Setup by any of the following methods:

•	Select Ethernet Setup… from the Options menu

You can then press F1 to get help.

NOTE: 	To be able to make changes to the Ethernet setup screen, you must be connected to the intercom via an USB connection either on the Cronus or an ADAM running a MCII-e master controller.


SNMP Configuration Access

Access SNMP Configuration by any of the following methods:

•	Select SNMP Configuration… from the Options menu

You can then press F1 to get help.


Port Description

Port General Description

Ports are the individual channels that devices are connected to.  Devices include:

•	2-way communication devices, such as keypanels, belt packs etc.

•	Audio sources, such as broadcast feeds or background music

•	Miscellaneous audio output devices, such as powered loudspeakers, PA systems etc.

Communication between Ports

The audio signal from any input port can be routed to any output port. For example, during keypanel setup, you assign keypanel keys so that keypanel operators can talk and listen to other intercom ports. Communication of this type is called point-to-point communication. You can also route signals between intercom ports without keypanels. One way to do this is to force crosspoints in the Crosspoint Status screen. Another way to do it is with a GPI input.

Port ID Numbers and Alphas

Intercom ports have identification numbers 001, 002 etc. These numbers cannot be changed, but may not be commonly known to intercom system users. Each intercom port also has a default name, called an "alpha", because this name appears in the alphanumeric displays on keypanels when you assign the ports to keys for talking and listening. The default alpha names are N001, N002 etc. These default alpha names can be changed to ones that are meaningful to keypanel operators using Port Alpha setup.

Port Gains

RTS Keypanels are calibrated to send and receive audio at the standard operating levels of the intercom system. No audio gain adjustment is normally required when connecting these. However, many other types of devices may not operate at the standard intercom system levels. To assure signal level compatibility between the various types of devices and the intercom systems inputs and outputs, there are separate analog input and output gain adjustments for each intercom port. In addition to the analog input and output gain adjustments for each intercom port, it is also possible to adjust the listen gain for any specific intercom port when listening to any other specific intercom port. This is called the point-to-point listen gain adjustment.

See also Crosspoint Description.


Party Line (PL) Description

A Party Line (also called a conference line) is a group of intercom ports, which can always talk and/or listen to each other. Party lines have default names PL01, PL02 etc. You assign members to a party line using Party Line setup. Once a party line has been set up, it can optionally be assigned to a keypanel key using Keypanel setup. When you assign a party line to a keypanel key this allows the keypanel operator to talk and/or listen to the party line without being a member.

IMPORTANT: 	Do not confuse special lists and party lines. It is very easy to do this!

A special list is used when a keypanel operator needs to occasionally talk or listen to a group of intercom ports that are otherwise unrelated.

A party line is typically used when several users of non-keypanel devices (such as belt packs or camera intercoms) are engaged in a specific common activity and they need to talk and/or listen to each other all the time. Keypanels are almost never members of party lines (although they can be). However, a keypanel key can be assigned to occasionally talk or listen to a party line if desired.

Just remember: party lines are primarily set up for party line members, with occasional access by keypanel operators, while special lists are set up exclusively for keypanel operators to talk or listen to several unrelated intercom ports.


Special List (SL) Description

A special list is a group of intercom ports that a keypanel operator can talk or listen to by activating a single key. Special lists are typically used for paging, all call, group call etc. Special lists have default names SL01, SL02 etc. You define the members of the special list using Special List setup. Once a special list has been set up, you typically assign it to a keypanel key using Keypanel setup. The keypanel operator can then activate the special list key to talk or listen to all members of the special list.

IMPORTANT: Do not confuse special lists and party lines. It is very easy to do this!

A special list is used when a keypanel operator needs to occasionally talk or listen to a group of intercom ports that are otherwise unrelated.

A party line is typically used when several users of non-keypanel devices (such as belt packs or camera intercoms) are engaged in a specific common activity and they need to talk and/or listen to each other all the time. Keypanels are almost never members of party lines (although they can be). However, a keypanel key can be assigned to occasionally talk or listen to a party line if desired.

Just remember: party lines are primarily set up for party line members, with occasional access by keypanel operators, while special lists are set up exclusively for keypanel operators to talk or listen to several unrelated intercom ports.


UPL (User Programmable Logic) Resource Description

A UPL resource is a key assignment type that is used as an input condition for a UPL Statement. UPL Resources have default names U001, U002 etc. Once you have named a UPL resource, you assign it to a keypanel key using keypanel setup. Then, you use UPL statement setup to create a UPL Statement, which will instruct the intercom system to perform a specific action when the UPL Resource key is pressed.

UPL Resource Examples

Using a UPL Resource Key to Load a Setup file

Using UPL Resource Keys to Control Talk and Listen for Non-Keypanel Devices


Special Function Descriptions

Special functions are special key assignments. There are separate special functions for talk and listen keys:

Special functions for talk keys

All-Call (AC)

DIM

Special functions for listen keys

Auto-Follow (AF)

Auto-Listen (AL)

Auto-Mute (AM)

Auto-Reciprocal (AR)

Auto-Table (AT)

All-Call (AC) Description

Talk keys only. When a talk key is assigned as an all-call talk key, activating that key will also activate the talk paths for all talk keys to the left of it (up to, but not including another all-call key).

Tip

Another way of accomplishing the same thing is by setting up a special list. In fact, if you want to talk to the same group of destinations from any of several keypanels, a special list is probably a better choice because once you set up the special list, you can assign it to any key without consideration of what is assigned to other keys.

DIM Description

For talk level 2 assignment only, when talk level 1 is a point-to-point key assignment. This assignment is used with inter-panel dim tables. For a complete description of this feature, click here.

Auto-Follow (AF) Description

Auto-follow (for listen keys only): This special function causes a listen key assignment to always be the same as the talk key that is paired with it. Auto-follow is a convenient assignment because you only have to assign a listen key once. Then, whenever you change the talk key assignment, the listen key automatically follows to the new assignment.

Tips

•	Many users find it convenient to assign auto-follow to all listen keys on all intercom ports. That way, they rarely have to bother with listen key assignments, because as they change talk key assignments, the listen key assignments automatically change as well. It is very easy to assign auto-follow to all listen keys for all ports. For further information, click here.

•	When you assign auto-follow to a listen key, you will still have to manually activate the listen key to hear certain types of destinations. For example, if you activate a talk key to talk to a party line, you will also have to activate a listen key if you want to listen to the party line. The same is also true for belt packs connected to intercom ports. This is because party lines and belt packs cannot themselves activate talk crosspoints in the intercom system (the talk button on most belt packs is simply a microphone on/off switch). In cases where you need to activate both a talk and a listen key to communicate with a destination, try using auto-listen.

Auto-Listen (AL) Description

Auto-listen (for listen keys only): This special function causes a listen key assignment to always be the same as the talk key that is paired with it. Auto-Listen is similar to Auto-Follow EXCEPT that listening automatically activates whenever the talk key is activated. Auto-listen is sometimes a good listen key assignment for use with party lines or other non-keypanel devices such as belt packs. This is because these devices do not have the talk-back capability that keypanels have. If you find that you are always activating the listen key when you want to talk to a particular destination, you might want to assign auto-listen to that listen key. Auto-listen is generally required when listening to party lines or belt packs from a keypanel that does not have listen keys.

Auto-Mute (AM) Description

Listen keys only. This special function causes a listen key assignment to always be the same as the talk key that is paired with it. Auto-Mute is similar to Auto-Follow EXCEPT that listening is automatically muted when the talk key is activated. Auto-mute is useful for talking to devices that echo your voice back to you. If you find that you need to activate the listen key when conversing with a destination, but you hear an echo whenever you activate the talk key and talk back, consider assigning auto mute to the listen key.

Auto-Reciprocal (AR) Description

Listen keys only. This special function causes a listen key's assignment to always be the same as the talk key that is paired with it. Auto-Reciprocal is similar to Auto-Follow EXCEPT that listening is forced continuously on, even when the talk key is off. Auto-reciprocal is useful, for example, when you wish to continuously monitor a party line from a keypanel without actually making the keypanel a listener on the party line.

Auto Table (AT) Description

For use only with a listen key when the corresponding talk key has been assigned to an IFB. This special function causes a listen key's assignment to always be the same as the Listen Source for whatever IFB is currently assigned to the talk key. (You define the Listen Source during IFB setup.) Auto Table is convenient in a broadcast environment when a director needs 2-way communication with the IFB talent, AND the IFB keys are being reassigned frequently during the course of a program to talk to new talent locations. Several IFBs can be set up in advance, and their Listen Sources can be defined during setup. Then when the IFB key is reassigned on the director keypanel, the Listen Source for each new IFB will automatically become the listen key assignment for the IFB key.


IFB Description

IFB, also known as interrupted fold-back, interrupted feedback, or switched talk back, is a method for a keypanel operator to interrupt an audio source that someone is listening to and then talk to that listener. When the keypanel operator is finished talking and turns off the IFB key, the original audio source "folds back", or reconnects, to the listener. IFB could be used, for example, to interrupt background music on a PA system while someone is paging. Mostly, though, it is used in broadcasting to cue talent, such as news anchors, field reporters, etc.

ADAM and ADAM CS intercom systems running this version of AZedit and version 9.9.0 or later master controller firmware are capable of 4 variations of IFB.

•	Standard, one-way IFB, where the keypanel operator only needs to talk to the listener.

•	Two-way IFB, where the keypanel operator can talk and monitor the talent during IFB operation.

•	Two-way IFB, where the keypanel operator can talk and several people can monitor the talent over an external speaker or other device during IFB operation.

•	Tone override IFB, which uses an external control box and a 2400 kHz tone to control IFB operation. This type of IFB requires specialized equipment and is not generally used.

IFB Setup Procedures

Master Controller Version Information


ISO Description

ISO is a type of key assignment used by a keypanel operator to completely cut off an intercom port from the rest of the intercom system and then converse in private with that intercom port. There is also an option, called ISO Self, which cuts the keypanel operator off from the rest of the intercom system, as well during the ISO operation. When the ISO key is released, normal intercom operation is automatically restored. ISO is often used in a broadcasting environment, and may be referred to as "Camera ISO". In this application, camera operators are often assigned to a party line. ISO provides a means for a keypanel operator to isolate a particular camera from the party line and then direct that camera operator without outside interference.

ISOs have default names IS01, IS02 etc. Once an ISO has been named, you use ISO Setup to define the intercom port that will be isolated. Then, you use keypanel setup to assign the ISO to an intercom key. After all changes have been sent to the intercom system, the keypanel operator will be able to isolate the specified ISO output by pressing the ISO key.


System GPI Description

ADAM, ADAM CS, Cronus, and Zeus intercom systems have a General Purpose Interface port (GPI). The GPI port has 8 control outputs (also referred to as Relays in AZedit) and 8 control inputs. Here is the location of the port:

ADAM: Located on XCP-ADAM-MC Master Controller Breakout Panel, J11

ADAM CS: Located on ADAM CS back panel, J903

CRONUS: Located on Cronus back panel, GPIO J9

ZEUS: Located on Zeus back panel, GPI J27

Additionally, all of these intercom systems can connect to one or more UIO-256 Universal Input / Output frames, each of which provides 16 control outputs and 16 control inputs.

GPI Connector Pin-out

GPI Outputs (also referred to as Relays in AZedit) can be used to activate external devices directly from keypanel keys. For example, you could activate an external lighting control device from a keypanel key. A GPI output can also be set up to activate whenever anyone talks to a particular intercom port. For example, you could connect a 2-way radio to an intercom port. You could then set up a GPI output to activate whenever anyone talks to the transmitter. GPI outputs can also be used to activate external devices from UPL statements. For example, if you want some external lights to activate at 5 pm every day, you can set up a UPL statement that will activate a GPI output at 5 pm every day. You can then use that GPI output to control the lights. Additionally, GPI outputs can be used as input conditions for UPL statements. For example, you could use your GPI output that activates the external lights as an input to another UPL statement. The output action for this UPL statement could be to activate another GPI output, which lights a console LED to provide confirmation that the external lights are on.

GPI outputs have default name RY01, RY02 etc. Once you have assigned a name to a GPI output, you can use the GPI output in either of ways: You can set up the GPI output so that it activates whenever anyone talks to a particular intercom port. You do this using GPI OUT setup. Or, you can assign the GPI output directly to a keypanel key so that pressing that key will activate the GPI output. You do this using keypanel setup.

GPI Inputs can be used to activate key assignments. For example, let's say that an operator at an audio mixing console does not have a keypanel, but the console does have a line-level microphone output. This microphone output could be connected to the input of an intercom port. Let's use port 1 for example. Let's also say that the console has a microphone on/off switch that can be connected to an external device. This switch could be connected to a GPI input (in some cases a few extra components may be needed). We'll use GPI input number 1 in this example. (Now, let's say that the audio mixing console operator wants to talk over an amplified public address speaker that is receiving audio from the audio output of intercom port number 2. To set this up, you would assign GPI input number 1 to activate a key at intercom port 1. Let's say key number 1. Note that there does not have to be an actual keypanel connected to the intercom port to assign a key. In this case, the GPI input becomes a virtual keypanel key. Once the GPI input has been assigned to key 1 of intercom port 1, you would use keypanel setup to assign key 1 to talk to intercom port number 2. Here is what happens when the mixing console operator presses the microphone key: GPI input number 1 activates and triggers the key 1 assignment for intercom port 1. This connects the microphone input from intercom port 1 to the speaker output at intercom port 2, and the console operator will be heard over the public address speaker.

GPI Inputs can also be used as inputs to UPL statements. For example, you could program a console switch to load an entirely new intercom system setup file. Let's say the setup file is located on your computer's hard disk and is called 5pmset.adm. To set this up, you would connect the console switch to a GPI input (in some cases a few extra components may be needed). Then, you would create a UPL statement that would contain the instructions "If GPI input #1 is asserted, load file '5pmset.adm' from disk and send it to the intercom."  See UPL Statement Setup for further information about this feature.

Return to GPI General Description


Inter-panel Dims Description

An Inter-panel Dim Table is simply a list of two or more keypanels that are located in close proximity to one another. In this situation, if the keypanels are using a speaker/microphone combination, feedback could occur if two keypanels have keys activated to communicate with the same destination, or if one keypanel has a key activated to talk to the destination and the other is receiving audio from the destination. By using an inter-panel dim table, the intercom system will automatically mute, or dim, one or both keypanel speaker outputs while this situation exists. When you configure a dim table, you can also define the amount of speaker dimming.

Inter-panel Dim Table Setup Access

Inter-panel Dim Table Setup Example


User Programmable Logic (UPL) Description

User Programmable Logic (UPL) is a powerful feature, which lets you quickly and easily program the intercom system to perform output actions that you specify based on input conditions that you specify. For example, you can program the intercom system to load a new setup file at a specified time, or whenever someone presses a particular keypanel key. Or, you can program talk and listen paths to turn on or off at specified times. Using UPL Statement Setup, you can quickly and easily build the custom operations you need to get the most out of your intercom system.

UPL Statement Examples

UPL Resource Description


Trunking Description

Trunking applies to ADAM, ADAM CS, Cronus, and Zeus Intercom Systems. Trunking allows personnel in separate intercom systems to communicate with one-another using intercom ports that have been reserved for this purpose. When a keypanel operator presses an intercom key to talk to a person in another intercom system, one of the reserved trunking ports is used to connect the keypanel operator to the destination in the other intercom system. When the conversation is finished, the reserved trunking port is released for someone else to use. Trunking requires an additional piece of equipment called a TM2000 Trunk Master or MTM2000 Mini-Trunk Master, which is used to manage the interconnected intercom ports.

By default, trunking is not activated because it is frequently not used. If your intercom system is equipped with the TM2000/MTM2000 Trunking Master Controller, click here to find out how to enable trunking.


Destination

A destination is whatever a talk key talks to or a listen key listens to. Destinations include intercom ports, party lines, IFBs, ISOs, etc.


TIF Telephone Interface Description

The TIF Telephone Interface is a device that lets you connect two phone lines to two intercom ports. The TIF has dial-in and dial-out capability. Persons calling into the intercom system can access specific intercom stations by entering intercom port identification numbers using the phone's keypad. Other features include: password protection for incoming calls; auto-answer capability; redial, and 32 programmable auto-dial numbers.

By default, support for the TIF is not enabled. If you add a TIF to your intercom system, enable support as follows:

1.	Close all open dialogs.

2.	In the Options menu, select Preferences.

3.	Click on the Advanced tab.

4.	On the Advanced Settings screen select Enable TIF/phone support.

5.	Click Apply, then OK.
TIF support should now be enabled. You do not need to send this change to the intercom system.

When you connect the TIF to an intercom port, you should also check the Port is TIF check mark for that intercom port. This will activate the enhanced dialing support for the KP-12 and KP-32 keypanels.

1.	Access Keypanel Setup.

2.	In the Port or Alpha box, select one of the intercom ports being used by the TIF.

3.	Click the Edit button.

4.	Click the Advanced tab.

5.	Place a check mark next to Port is TIF.

6.	Click Apply or OK.

7.	Repeat from step 2 for the other intercom port (if any) being used by the TIF.

8.	Send the changes to the intercom system.


LCP-102 Level Control Panel Description

The LCP-102 combines the features of an Analog I/O Gain Adjustment Panel, a Camera Delegate Panel, and a Program Assign Panel in a single frame that is only 2 rack units high. You can easily switch between its three panel modes and make rapid configuration changes using the menu selector on the front panel. In each mode, you can make up to 64 assignments and then adjust the levels for those assignments. For example, in TRIMS mode, you can assign and adjust the analog input and output gains for up to 64 intercom ports. In PAP mode, you can select the program input source and set its level for each of 64 IFBs. In CDP mode, you can assign up to 64 intercom ports to any combination of party lines and then adjust the listen level for each participant on that party line. The LCP-102 connects to the auxiliary data port of any ADAM or ADAM CS Intercom System, and it also has a loop connector for connection to another auxiliary device, such as another LCP-102, or a UIO-256 Universal Input/Output frame. Since a single LCP-102 provides trim adjustments for 64 ports, only one unit is required to completely configure an ADAM CS Intercom System. For larger ADAM Intercom Systems, up to 15 additional LCP-102 frames can be connected via the loop connectors.

The LCP-102 may be used on Zeus and Cronus intercom systems, if needed.

Note: 	In AZedit adjusting analog I/O gains is the same as adjusting analog I/O trims at an LCP-102. And, in the LCP-102 setup screen the Analog I/O Gains mode is the same as TRIMS mode at an LCP-102.


Trunk IFB Description

Trunking Description

Trunk IFB priority determines which keypanel gets first access to a remote IFB in cases where two or more keypanels are trying to access it at the same time. For each keypanel, the trunk IFB priority can be set to any number from 1 through 3. With the priority set to 3, the keypanel overrides any other keypanel set to a lower priority. Keypanels that are set to the same priority can simultaneously access IFBs.


Intercom Configuration Description

The Intercom Configuration is split into two groups: resources and options.

Note: 	If you are not already viewing the intercom configuration settings, click here to find out how to access the settings.

Resources are the quantities of intercom ports, party lines, etc. that are available. Options describe quantities for such things as the number of talk levels for each talk key, or the number of setup pages for each keypanel. Some options also slightly modify the operation of the intercom system.

For some resource and option settings, the maximum quantity allowed is primarily limited by the amount of available hardware. For example, in the Resources list, the actual number of Audio I/O Cards limits the quantity of Ports in the intercom system. For other resources and options, the quantity is primarily limited by the amount of available memory in the master controller. For example, a party line does not itself represent any hardware; it is basically a definition of who is a member of the party line. However, each party line definition requires a certain amount of master controller memory. Similarly, in the Options list, you can define 2-4 talk levels for all talk key assignments. The more talk levels you define, the more master controller memory will be required.

The intercom configuration is actually defined in 3 places within your intercom system: 1) within the master controller 2) within AZedit and 3) within each setup file. We normally recommend that you set the intercom configuration in the master controller first, then apply these settings to AZedit afterward. Once you have done this, your setup files will automatically be set to the same settings as the master controller and AZedit. The only time where a user might not want all 3 settings to match is when configuring several independent intercom systems. The following paragraphs contain a more detailed discussion of the 3 resource settings, and also how to manage the memory limitations.

Master Controller Intercom Configuration

In ADAM CS and ADAM intercom systems, the master controller configuration is the key to your intercom system, because whatever is defined here is all that will be allowed for actual intercom operation. As you may have guessed, it is possible to increase or decrease the quantities of some types of resources and options in the master controller to free up memory for larger quantities of other resources. There are also reasons why you might want to reduce or eliminate quantities of resources and options that are not required:

Advantages of reducing master controller intercom configuration settings

•	The intercom system will power up faster with fewer resources.

•	Less memory resources will be used in the system controller. For example, in larger, multi-frame intercom systems, where the number of intercom ports can exceed several hundred, the configuration information for the ports themselves will require a large portion of the system memory. In such cases, unused IFBs, ISOs etc. can be removed from the resource configuration to make room for resources that are being used.

•	Scroll lists will be smaller (when viewing them both in AZedit or from a keypanel).

•	AZedit will connect to the intercom system faster (fewer items to upload).

•	AZedit will update faster (fewer items to query).

•	Saving/Loading files will be faster (less data to upload, less data to save/load).

•	Setup files will require less disk space with fewer resources.

•	Checks for duplicate names (alphas) will be faster with fewer resources.

•	Sending changes to the intercom system will be faster with fewer resources.

•	You will not mistakenly configure resources that do not exist (i.e. using ports that do not have Audio I/O Cards).

Disadvantages of reducing master controller intercom configuration settings

•	If you add more hardware later (More Audio I/O Cards, for example) you will have to readjust your master controller and AZedit configuration settings. Changing setting in the master controller can take up to 10 minutes. You may also have to reconfigure your setup files. This may require 2-3 minutes per file if you have several files.

•	You won’t be able to use CSedit (in place of AZedit) if the size is non-standard (a very unlikely scenario for most users).

Procedure to change the master controller intercom configuration settings

AZedit Intercom Configuration Settings

NOTE: 	AZedit versions 2.0 and higher do not use the .ini file. The application defaults are defined through the registry editor (found at Registry Editor /Telex/Intercoms/Default/Users/Default/Preferences).

For AZedit, the INI file (AZedit.ini, located in the AZedit folder) defines the quantity for each resource and option, and these quantities can be changed. To assure that you are viewing the intercom configuration for the application, and not for a setup file or for the master controller, proceed as follows:

1.	If you have been working on a setup file in FILE mode, save any changes you have made. If you have been working on the online setup file in ONLINE mode, send your changes to the intercom system.

2.	Select New from the File menu, or click the New File button.

3.	If you see the message "Select Intercom Configuration", select Use Default Configuration (from INI file). If you do not see this message, the default configuration settings are already selected.

4.	You can now view the intercom configuration settings for the application. In the Options menu, select Intercom Configuration. If you see a warning message, read the message, then click OK.

5.	Click the Resources tab. When you first install AZedit, it is set to the default resources for a 1-frame ADAM intercom system. If you are using AZedit with an ADAM CS Intercom System, or with a multi-frame ADAM Intercom System, you will want to change this. Although you can change the AZedit resource settings at this time, we recommend that you change the master controller configuration settings first, then select those settings as the AZedit default settings when prompted to do so. See Procedure to change the master controller intercom configuration settings.

Setup File Configuration Settings

Whenever you open a setup file, the intercom configuration settings for that setup file are loaded. You can change the intercom configuration to different settings than the AZedit default settings. However, the only time you might want to do this is when you are creating setup files for several different intercom systems, each with a different set of resources. Usually, you will create your setup files using the default application resources. To create a new file with the default INI settings, select New from the File menu. Then choose to use the default INI settings if prompted. (If you are not prompted, the default settings are already selected.) Note: you may have some previously created AZedit setup files that you want to reconfigure to match current AZedit default settings, or some other settings. For further information, see Changing the Configuration Settings in Setup files.


Tone Generator Description

Digital matrix keypanels are equipped with internal tone generators for signal tracing and troubleshooting. The tone signal feeds right into the mic circuit, so it can be used as a voice substitute for testing purposes.

If a keypanel is programmable, you can turn the tone generator on and off from the keypanel. You can also turn the tone generator on or off for any keypanel using the Enable Tone check box in AZedit (Keypanels / Ports screen, Edit button, Advanced tab).

Using the tone generator


Setup Page vs Key Numbers

You use key numbers when you set up GPI inputs and assign them to keys. You also use key numbers when you are setting up UPL statements. The panel, and not the setup page, as shown below determine key numbers:

Key Numbers 1-15: Keys 1-15 of Main panel*

Key Numbers 17-32: Keys 1-16 of Expansion panel 1

Key Numbers 33-48: Keys 1-16 of Expansion panel 2

Key Numbers 49-64: Keys 1-16 of Expansion panel 3

NOTE: EXP1 defines the top row of keys on the KP32, while EXP3 defines the top row of the EKP32.

For example, if you assign setup page 3 to the main keypanel, then setup page 3 will have key numbers 1-15. However, if you assign setup page 3 to expansion panel 1, it will have key numbers 17-32.

* Do not use key number 16 of the Main panel, because it is reserved for incoming messages (call waiting).


Alpha and Alias Description

Alphas are the names that appear in the alphanumeric displays on keypanels when keys are assigned to talk to destinations in the intercom system. Alpha names for intercom ports are assigned using Port Alphas setup.

Aliases are used only with trunked intercom systems. Alias names are used to identify destinations in your intercom system to AZedit administrators and keypanel operators in other intercom systems. Aliases are provided because sometimes an Alpha name that is being used in your intercom system is also being used in some other intercom system. In this case, you can enter an Alias name that will not conflict with the name that is already in use. Another reason that you might want to use an Alias is that some other name might be more meaningful to keypanel operators in another intercom system.


Scroll Enable Description

Scroll Enable check boxes appear in the setup views for the following destination types: intercom ports, party lines, IFBs, Special Lists, GPI Outputs, UPL Resources, and ISOs. The Scroll Enable check boxes controls who can view destinations in scroll lists and assign those destinations to keypanel keys. When you are using AZedit within your own intercom system, you always have access to the complete scroll lists. However, access for everyone else is controlled as follows:

Local: If Local is checked, any keypanel operator in your intercom system that has a programmable keypanel can find the destination name in a scroll list and assign it to a key. If you remove this check mark and send the change to the intercom system, keypanel operators will not see the destination name in their scroll lists, and therefore, will not be able to assign it to a key. They will also not be able to assign it using keypad numeric entry (KP9X series keypanels). And, if the destination name appears in any display on their keypanel, they will not be able to copy it to any other key.

Trunk: The Trunk check box is only selectable if trunking has been activated. If you place a check mark here, any keypanel operator in a remote intercom system that has a programmable keypanel can view the destination in a scroll list and assign it to a key on their keypanel. If you remove this check mark and send the change to the intercom system, remote keypanel operators will not be able to view the destination or assign it to a key by any means.

AZedit: This item is also only selectable if trunking has been activated. If you place a check mark here, an AZedit user in a remote intercom system will be able to view the destination in a scroll list and assign it to keypanel keys in the remote intercom system. If you do not want remote AZedit users to have access, remove the check mark and send the change to the intercom system.

LCP-102: This item appears only in the Keypanels / Ports main screen. If this item is enabled and checked, the intercom port will be displayed in the IFB input scroll list of an LCP-102 operating in PAP mode. This means the port can be selected as the program source for an IFB input.

Note: 	You may wish to turn off all Scroll Enable check boxes for all intercom ports, party lines, etc. You can do this very quickly. For further information, click here. (Use the Back button in the Main Help Window to return to any previous topic when finished.)


Copy Command Description and Usage

This command is available on the Edit menu and also via the Copy button.

This command copies all of the configuration information from the screen that you are currently viewing and places it on the Windows Clipboard. The Copy command usually copies all of the information related to the screen that you are viewing. For example, if you are viewing the Keypanel / Ports configuration screen, Copy will copy not only all of the key assignments on the current setup page, but also all of the key assignments on the other 3 setup pages as well. The Edit/Advanced and Edit/Setup settings will also be copied. (However, Gain settings are not copied.)

After copying a screen, use the Paste or Paste Special command to paste what you have copied to another screen of the same type.

•	Paste: Edit menu or

•	Paste Special: Edit menu only

Copy is often used along with the Paste Special command to make changes in one intercom port, party line, etc. and then paste those changes to all other screens of the same type. For a few examples, see Listen Key Setup using Copy and Paste Special, or Scroll Enable Setup using Copy and Paste Special.


Intercom System Gain Adjustments

There are three types of gain adjustments available in the intercom system. Here is a brief description of each one:

Crosspoint Gain

Crosspoint Description

You use crosspoint gain when you want to adjust the level at which a specific intercom port hears some other specific intercom port. Normally, you will only use this adjustment when you intentionally want a specific person to hear a specific audio source at a level above or below the normal intercom audio. If you ever need to adjust a level, and it is not specific to one intercom port, you may want to consider the Analog Input / Output Gain Adjustment (below).

For example, let's say a particular keypanel operator at intercom port 1 wants to listen to background music at a reduced level, but nobody else in the intercom system cares to have background music. In this case, you could use a crosspoint gain adjustment. For example, if the music source is connected at intercom port 2, you could adjust the gain at which intercom port 1 listens to intercom port 2.

Now, instead of only one person, suppose that 10 people want to listen to the background music. In this case, if you use the crosspoint gain adjustment, you will have to select each listener's intercom port and then adjust the gain at which that port hears intercom port 2. This means 10 different adjustments. However, in this case, you can accomplish the same thing with a single Analog Input Gain adjustment, described below.

Crosspoint Gain Adjustment Access

Party Line Gain

Party Line Description

You use party line gain when you want to adjust the level at which a specified intercom port hears a specific party line.

Party Line Gain Access

Analog Input / Output Gain

For each intercom port, there are two analog gain adjustments: analog input gain and analog output gain.

The analog input gain adjusts the input level to the intercom port. You might adjust a port's input gain when you are connecting a device, such as a program source, which is being supplied at a higher or lower level than the standard intercom system level. You might also use this adjustment when you are connecting an audio source that is at the normal system level, but you want to intentionally increase or decrease the level relative to the normal intercom system level. You might do this with a background music source, for example. You would not normally use this adjustment when the input device is a keypanel.

The analog output gain adjusts the final output level from the intercom port. Typically you would make an adjustment here when connecting the output of an intercom port to some external device that requires a different input level than the standard intercom system level. You would not normally use this adjustment with keypanels.


Crosspoint Description

General

When one intercom port talks to another intercom port, it does this via what is commonly referred to as a "crosspoint". The crosspoint is basically the connecting point between the talker and the listener. There is separate talk and listen crosspoints between every intercom port and every other intercom port in the intercom system.

Methods of Crosspoint Activation

Keypanel Key Assignments: Crosspoints turn on and off as keypanel operators press keys to talk and listen to each other. You assign keys using keypanel setup.

Forced Crosspoint: You can force a specific intercom port to always talk or listen to another intercom port. You can force crosspoints in the Crosspoint Status screen.

Party Lines: When an intercom port is assigned to talk and/or listen to a party line, the talk and/or listen crosspoints are permanently closed between that intercom port and all other intercom ports that are members of the party line. Removing a member from a party line will release the crosspoints. Members are assigned to party lines using party line setup.

Talk vs Listen

In terms of crosspoints, talking from one port to a second port is the same thing as the second port listening to the first port. However, this does not mean that any intercom port can arbitrarily listen to another intercom port. For example, lets say a keypanel operator at intercom port 1 presses a talk key to talk to a keypanel operator at intercom port 2. This causes 2 things to happen. First, pressing the key causes a data message to be sent to the intercom system, which tells the intercom system to turn on the crosspoint that connects intercom port 1 to intercom port 2. Second, pressing the key activates the microphone amplifier in the keypanel at intercom port 1. This allows the person at intercom port 2 to hear the person at intercom port 1. Note that the person at intercom port 2 could activate the same crosspoint by activating a listen key. However, since this does not turn on the microphone in the keypanel at intercom port 1, nothing can be heard (unless the microphone is already on to talk to some other destination).


Screen Types and Help Access

AZedit uses 2 screen types for information display and/or user input: Main Screens and Dialog Screens.

Main Screens are available either by clicking on the toolbar buttons at the bottom of the screen, or by selecting items in the System menu at the top of the screen. You can get help information on the Main Screens by pressing the F1 key on the computer keyboard, or by clicking the Help button on the toolbar.

Dialog Screens are generally opened from within the Main Screens. You can get help on dialog screens by pressing the F1 key.


Local vs Remote Intercom Description

The Local intercom system is the intercom system that your configuration computer is connected to. Most intercom systems have only this Local intercom system.

A few intercom systems may have trunking connections to other intercom systems using a Trunking Master Controller Frame. If your intercom system has this type of connection, the local intercom system is the intercom system that your configuration computer is currently connected to. Remote intercom systems are everything else.

Trunking Description


Resource Types

PP = Point-to-point (or port-to-port)

PL = Party Line

IFB = IFB

SL = Special List

RY = Relay or GPI OUT

ISO = ISO

UR = UPL Resource

SF = Special Function


Scroll List Description

Scroll Lists are lists of names, or alphas. For example, there is a scroll list for party lines, or a scroll list for intercom ports. You use these scroll lists in AZedit when assigning keys on keypanels. Keypanel operators can also use these scroll lists at their keypanels to assign keys. If your intercom system is part of a larger trunking* intercom system, AZedit operators in remote intercom systems, as well as keypanel operators in remote intercom systems can use scroll lists to assign destinations in your intercom system to keys in their intercom system. You can control access to scroll lists, and therefore control the ability of other people to assign keys, by changing the Scroll Enable settings.

* For more information about trunking, click here.


Logging Description

You use logging to record intercom key activations and deactivations. Each time a key is pressed or released, a new record is created. Log Viewer is the name of the program used to record logging. It is included with AZedit. Log Viewer can be run separately, or it can be run from the Logging menu in AZedit.

NOTE:	In version 3.0 and higher, the setup folders are not version specific; therefore, they will appear under C:\TELEX\AZedit, where before they would be housed under each version. This is because as upgrades of AZedit are installed, existing log files will not have to be moved to a new location, if desired. Use the Logging tab to under Options→Preferences to change the log file location, if desired.

The Logging menu contains the following items:

View Log

This runs Log Viewer. You can also open Log Viewer from the Log Viewer.exe file in the folder where AZedit is installed. Here you can open and view log files. You can monitor intercom activity by watching the new records appear in the log.

Disable Logging

This stops Log Viewer from recording any intercom key activity.

Log to File

This starts the Log Viewer recorder. Log Viewer automatically creates a log file as soon as key activity begins. It will then append each new record to the log file. Log Viewer will name the file according to the format: year/month/day.log. Example: 991201.log would be the log file created for December 01, 1999. By default Log files will be stored in the folder C:\TELEX\AZedit\V20800B\LOG (the version showing as the version you are running). You may also specify a folder in a different location, if desired by doing the following:

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences.
The Preferences notebook opens.

2.	Click Logging.
The logging page appears.

3.	You may change "c:\ to specify your desired directory. Example change: c:\Telex\AZedit\

4.	Click Apply.

5.	Click OK.

Log to Serial Port

This is only available for ADAM CS and ADAM Intercom Systems. It will output the log data on a dedicated RS232 port of the intercom system. If you have the appropriate communications software to communicate with this port, you can use it to capture the logging text to a file or to monitor intercom activity. For the ADAM Intercom System, the dedicated logging port is located on J9 of the XCP-ADAM-MC Master Controller Breakout Panel: pin 3 is RX and pin 8 is TX. For the ADAM CS Intercom Frame, the dedicated logging port is located on J902: pin 3 is RX and pin 8 is TX. In either case, the port parameters are 9600-baud, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit. There is no handshaking on this port.

Log Record Format

The format for each log record is as follows:

[Yymmdd] [hhmmssff] [nnn-aaaa] [mm-ff-nnn-aaaa] [xx]

Brackets delimit the data fields in each record, and the data in the fields are as follows:

Yy/mm/dd > Date

Hh:mm:ss.ff > Time (ff = frames)

nnn-aaaa > requester's port number and corresponding 4-character alpha

mm-ff-nnn-aaaa > target matrix number, function type, function number, function alpha. (Target matrix number 00 means the local matrix.)

xx > one of the 4 pairs TY, TN, LY, or LN, where T=talk, L=Listen, Y=yes (key on), and N=no (key off)

Example: if a keypanel at intercom port 4 with alpha "DIR " calls local party line 3 with alpha "CAM ", the following might be logged:

[99/12/01] [17:22:04.13] [004-DIR] [00-PL-003-CAM] [TY]

[99/12/01] [17:22:24.08] [004-DIR] [00-PL-003-CAM] [TN]

There are some peculiarities when it comes to trunking. For example, suppose HAP calls BIFF (a point-to-point in a different matrix). A line such as the following might be logged:

[99/12/01] [17:23:09.00] [017-HAP] [07-PP-103-BIFF] [TY]

One or two lines that connect Hap to a trunk might then follow this. For example, the following line might get added:

[99/12/01] [17:23:09.00] [041-TK19] [00-PP-017-HAP] [LY]

This reflects that port 41 (trunk 19) effectively turned on a listen key assigned to Hap so that the trunk could hear Hap, i.e. so that Hap's audio is fed to the trunk.


IFB Priorities Description

IFB priorities determine which keypanel gets first access to an IFB in cases where two or more keypanels are trying to access the IFB at the same time. By default, the IFB priority for each intercom port can be individually set to any number from 0 through 3. With the priority set to 3, the keypanel overrides any other keypanel set to a lower priority. Keypanels that are set to the same priority can simultaneously access IFBs. You can add more IFB priority levels in the intercom configuration settings (up to 8). Before changing intercom configuration settings, we recommend that you read the intercom configuration description.

To set IFB on ports, see IFB Priorities Main Screen

Intercom configuration description

Procedure to change the intercom configuration settings


Keypanels / Ports Active Indications

When AZedit is operating in ONLINE or SERVER mode, you can monitor Keypanel / Port activity using the same screen that you use for keypanel setup.

Note: 	Like other screens in ONLINE mode, the Keypanels / Ports screen is periodically refreshed (updated with current information). However, you can also force a refresh. Either select Refresh from the View menu, or press Ctrl+Space on the computer keyboard.

Active Key Indication

When a talk or listen key is on, a red dot will appear above the key's combo box.

Port Status Icons

The following items are displayed in the Port Status group (upper-right corner of the Keypanels / Ports screen): Most of these icons activate based on keypanel features detected by the intercom system master controller.

Heartbeat Icon: Indicates that a data device (keypanel, TIF, or Camera Delegate Panel) is connected to the intercom port

Warning Icon: Indicates that the intercom port is defined as an IFB output (in the IFB Setup screen).

Headset Icon: Indicates that the connected keypanel has a headset selected

LED Icons: Indicate the on/off state of any local GPI inputs and outputs. These indicators function only when a keypanel with a local GPI port is connected. Green=On (Asserted), Red=Off (Inhibited), Gray=None, IN=GPI Input, OUT=GPI Output.

Question Mark Icon: Indicates that the keypanel type you have selected (with the Edit button) does not match what is reported by the intercom system.

Keypanel / Port Setting Icons

The following icons are displayed in the Keypanel / Port Settings group (next to the Port Status group). These icons remind you that certain selections have been made using the Edit button.

Musical Note Icon: Indicates that Enable Tone is checked.

Sunglass Icon: Indicates that Keypanel Privacy is checked

No Phone Dial Icon: Indicates that TIF Dial-Out Restrict is checked

Modem Icon: Indicates that a Panel Poll Delay has been specified

Phone Icon: Indicates that Port is TIF is checked

"No" Symbol: Indicates that Setup Restrict is checked.


Master Controller Description

General Information

Master Controller (MC) Cards occupy the rightmost 2 slots in the front of an ADAM or ADAM CS frame. One slot is for the active master controller, and one slot is for the backup master controller. At any given time, either one of these (but not both) will be the active MC card, or the other MC card will be in standby mode. The active MC card is the one that is currently controlling the intercom frame. However, as keypanel keys are turned on and off, or as you make changes to the intercom system configuration, both the active and standby MC are updated. If there is any failure of the active MC, the standby MC will immediately take control of the frame and become the active MC.

MC cards are required in all frames in a multi-frame system that uses Single Bus Expansion (SBX) and in a multi-frame system that uses Dual Bus Expansion (DBX) cards. In a DBX system, the MC function is changed to a Peripheral Controller, and the DBX cards take over many of the MC functions.

MC Responsibilities in a non-DBX system:

communicate with trunk master

communicate with AZedit

communicate with command line protocol

communicate with PAPs and LCP-102s

communicate with UIO-256

maintain local and remote alphas

distribute alphas to AIO cards

handle keypanel assignment changes (from keypad)

all crosspoint closures and volumes

all functionality (PL, SL, IFB, ISO, etc...)

user programmable logic

storing and retrieving setup in flash

messaging via coaxial links to other frames

passing audio between frames

MC / DBX Responsibilities in a DBX system:

MC Card Responsibilities

communicate with trunk master

communicate with AZedit

communicate with command line protocol

communicate with PAPs and LCP-102s

communicate with UIO-256

maintain local and remote alphas

distribute alphas to AIO cards

handle keypanel assignment changes (from keypad)

DBX Card responsibilities

all crosspoint closures and volumes

all functionality (PL, SL, IFB, ISO, etc...)

user programmable logic

storing and retrieving setup in flash

messaging via coaxial links to other frames

passing audio between frames

Active Master Controller Identification for ADAM and ADAM CS

You can identify the active master controller in an ADAM CS or single-frame ADAM system* by either of two means:

•	If the master controller cards are equipped with LED displays, the active master controller is the one where the top-left red LED is lit (LED 23).

•	In AZedit, you can connect to the intercom system, then access the Master Controller Status screen. In that screen, the Slot column indicates which master controller is active. Right indicates the right-most slot in the frame, and Left indicates the slot immediately to the left of the right-most slot.

* Note: 	Multi-frame ADAM intercom systems using SBX cards have a master frame, and all other frames are slave frames. As with a single-frame system, there is both an active and a standby master controller in each frame. However, only the active master controller in the master frame communicates directly with AZedit, and you can only use AZedit to identify the slot for this card. The active master controllers in the slave frames can only be identified by the LED displays. If your master controller cards do not have LED displays, and you suspect a problem with one of the master controller cards in a slave frame, you can force a reset on that card (press the recessed reset button on the top-front of the card). When you do this, the other master controller in that frame will become the active master controller.


Setups Folder

By default, setup files are saved in a subfolder called Setups. This folder is located in your AZedit folder. If you ever use the Uninstaller Utility to remove the AZedit software from your computer, the Setups subfolder will not be removed. This allows you to remove an old version of configuration software and then install an updated version without deleting any previously created setup files. However, we recommend that you always maintain a backup copy of your Setups folder.


Firmware Folder

From time-to-time, you may receive firmware updates for various components of your intercom system. We recommend that you save copies of these updates in the Firmware subfolder. This folder is located in your AZedit folder. If you ever use the Uninstaller Utility to remove the AZedit software from your computer, the Firmware subfolder will not be removed. This allows you to remove an old version of configuration software and then install an updated version without deleting any firmware files. However, we also recommend that you always maintain a backup copy of your Firmware folder.

See also: Downloading Hardware Updates.


Communication Errors

The intercom system has an error detection and correction system to deal with normally occurring transient disruptions in the data communication links between devices. Occasional power spikes, or relay activation in close proximity to a cable could cause such disruptions, for example. Typically, such transient events will cause acceptable error rates and will have no effect on performance. It is only when error rates are abnormally high that some sort of corrective action may be required. Acceptable error rates vary, depending on the type of device. Refer to the notes, below.

Errors To

Indicates total accumulated errors to the data device from the master controller. This error counter resets at 255 unless reset manually.

Errors From

Indicates total accumulated errors from the data device to the master controller. This error counter resets at 255 unless reset manually.

BER To

Indicates the error rate to the data device from the master controller during the last ten minutes of operation. If less than 10 minutes have passed since the last reset, the 10-minute error rate is calculated based on the number of errors and the amount of time that has already passed.

BER From

Indicates the error rate from the data device to the master controller during the last ten minutes of operation. If less than 10 minutes have passed since the last reset, the 10-minute error rate is calculated based on the number of errors and the amount of time that has already passed.

Notes

Port Status Screen: Error rates of no more than one error per hour are normal. Error rates between one per hour and one per minute are higher than normal but may not cause significant problems. Error rates greater than one per minute usually require immediate attention. High error rates here could be caused by a faulty transmitter or receiver in the master controller or the data device (keypanel, TIF Telephone Interface, etc.). More often than not, however, the problem will be caused by the cable or system grounding. See the cable and grounding notes, below.

Master Controller Status Screen: This screen shows communication errors between the master controller and the configuration PC. A faulty transmitter or receiver in the master controller or PC could cause high error rates here. Or, if the PC is an older model, it may simply not be able to keep up with the current baud rate setting. More often than not, however, the problem will be caused by the cable or system grounding. See the cable and grounding notes, below.

Standby Controller Status Screen (ADAM, ADAM CS, ZEUS, and CRONUS): This screen shows communication errors between the master controller and the standby master controller. Error rates should normally be quite low: the BER rate will frequently be 0, and it may take a very long time for the Err rates to accumulate to any level.

Trunk Master Status Screen (ADAM, ADAM CS, ZEUS, and CRONUS): This screen shows communication errors between the master controller and an optional Trunk Master Controller. Error rates of no more than one error per hour are normal. Error rates between one per hour and one per minute are higher than normal but may not cause significant problems. Error rates greater than one per minute usually require immediate attention. High error rates here could be caused by a faulty transmitter or receiver in the master controller or the trunk master controller. More often than not, however, the problem will be caused by the cable or system grounding. See the cable and grounding notes, below.

I/O Card Status Screen (ADAM, ADAM CS, ZEUS, and CRONUS): This screen shows communication errors between the master controller and each Audio I/O card. Due to a design characteristic of one of the chips on the I/O card, the reported rates may appear higher than for other devices. However, there is no actual affect on system performance, and as long as all cards are reporting similar error rates, no action is required.

PAP and LCP-102 Status Screen: This screen shows communication errors between the master controller and any connected Program Assign Panel or LCP-102 Level Control Panel. Error rates of no more than one error per hour are normal. Error rates between one per hour and one per minute are higher than normal but may not cause significant problems. Error rates greater than one per minute usually require immediate attention. High error rates here could be caused by a faulty transmitter or receiver in the master controller or the PAP/LCP. More often than not, however, the problem will be caused by the cable or system grounding. See the cable and grounding notes, below.

UIO-256 Status Screen: This screen shows communication errors between the master controller and any connected UIO-256 Universal Input/Output Frame. Error rates of no more than one error per hour are normal. Error rates between one per hour and one per minute are higher than normal but may not cause significant problems. Error rates greater than one per minute usually require immediate attention. High error rates here could be caused by a faulty transmitter or receiver in the master controller or the UIO-256. More often than not, however, the problem will be caused by the cable or system grounding. See the cable and grounding notes, below.

Cable and Grounding Notes

Any of the following can be a factor in communication error rates between devices that are interconnected by cables:

Cable type: Common twisted-pair telephone wire is recommended for best performance. With shielded wire, error rates are generally higher, because of the additional cable capacitance (5-30 errors per 24 hours).

Grounding practices: Many devices connected separately to earth ground can cause ground loop problems. All grounds should be returned to a common point.

Crosstalk: Especially when using non-twisted wiring, crosstalk can be caused by long parallel runs of data cables in close proximity to each other containing differing data streams.

Noise induction: running intercom cables near lighting cables, etc can cause this.

Confusing high and low sides of different lines: Each audio/data plus (+) and minus (–) connection should be isolated from all other plus and minus connections, and all minus connections should be isolated from chassis or earth ground connections.


Dialog Window

Dialog Windows are the smaller windows that appear in front of the main screen. You use the dialog windows to enter data as you configure the intercom system.


Latching and Latch Disable Description

Some keypanels and expansion panels feature electronic key latching, where tapping a key will latch it in the on position and tapping it again will turn it off. For keypanels that have the electronic latching feature, latching can be disabled for individual keys by checking the "D" check box above each key in the Keypanels / Ports setup screen. For example, if a talk key is assigned to talk to an intercom port that is connected to a public address (PA) system, you might want to disable latching on that key. This will assure that someone does not accidentally leave an open mic to the PA system.

NOTE: The only panels where latching does not work, are those with mechanical latching keys, such as the KP96/7


GPI Port Pin-out

All 25-pin GPI Port connectors have the same pin-out as follows:

Pin No.	Function

1	GPI In #1 (+5 to +18 VDC)

2	GPI In #2 (+5 to +18 VDC)

3	GPI In #3 (+5 to +18 VDC)

4	GPI In #4 (+5 to +18 VDC)

5	GPI In #5 (+5 to +18 VDC)

6	GPI In #6 (+5 to +18 VDC)

7	GPI In #7 (+5 to +18 VDC)

8	GPI In #8 (+5 to +18 VDC)

9	Common

10	Common

11	Common

12	Common

13	Common

14	GPI Out #1

15	GPI Out #2

16	GPI Out #3

17	GPI Out #4

18	GPI Out #5

19	GPI Out #6

20	GPI Out #7

21	GPI Out #8

22	Common

23	Common

24	Common

25	Common

GPI Inputs for UIO-256, ADAM, and ADAM CS: Connect +5 to +18 VDC between any GPI input and common to activate that GPI input.

GPI outputs UIO-256: Activating a GPI output causes a relay contact closure between that output and common. The relay contacts are rated for 0.5A at 120 VAC; 1A at 24 VDC; 0.3A at 60 VDC.

GPI Outputs for ADAM and ADAM CS: Activating a GPI output causes an active high output. You may have to use an external circuit to convert this to an active low output as shown below:


Server Mode Description

In SERVER Mode, AZedit acts like a file server, sending setup files to the intercom system, either at scheduled times, or when certain events occur. You can send entire setup files, or partial setup files that were created using partial save. Server mode is typically used with UPL statements.

Server Mode Activation or Deactivation

Mode Pane Description


Setup File Description

Setup files define your key assignments, party line setups, etc. A setup file can contain the complete definition of the intercom system setup, or it can contain only a portion or the setup. For example, a setup file can define all of the key assignments for all keypanels within the intercom system. Or, it can contain the key assignments for just one keypanel.


Audio I/O Card Description (ADAM, ADAM CS)
Audio I/O Card Description (ADAM, ADAM CS, and Cronus)

The Audio I/O cards provide the audio and data connections for the intercom ports.


Local GPI Description

The Local GPI is an optional module currently available for KP-12 and KP-32 keypanels. It installs in the rear panel and adds the following features:

Local GPI Outputs: the keypanel operator via the MENUS, KEY ASGN, and LOCAL I/O menu, can program these. These outputs can be used to activate external devices from keypanel keys. Available local GPI outputs include:

•	Two DPDT relays with available NC, NO and COM contacts

•	Two open-collector output devices

Local GPI Inputs: the keypanel operator via the MENUS, SERVICE, and OPTO-ISO menu can program these. The inputs can be programmed for remote activation of key groups or individual keys, or local GPI outputs. The inputs can also be used to change the current setup page of key assignments. Available local GPI inputs include:

•	Four opto-isolated control inputs.

Although originally designed to provide local input and output control capabilities for keypanels, local GPI inputs and outputs can now also be used via the UPL statement feature of AZedit.

UPL Statement Access


Online Mode Description

In ONLINE Mode, the configuration computer is connected to the intercom system, and AZedit is communicating with the intercom system. In online mode, you can make changes to the intercom system setup, such as changing key assignments, or setting up party lines, etc. You can also view various types of intercom activities. And, you can check the status of various components of the intercom system.

Connecting and Disconnecting

Mode Pane Description


File Mode Description

In FILE Mode, the configuration computer is not communicating with the intercom system, and FILE will display in the mode pane in the lower-right corner. In FILE mode, you can create new setup files, and also open and edit existing setup files. FILE mode is recommended if you are making many changes and want to save your file to disk periodically, but do not need to immediately download the changes to the intercom system.

Entering File Mode from Online or Server Mode

Mode Pane Description


Program Assign Panel Description

A Program Assign Panel is an optional rack-mount component that lets a user select program input ports for IFBs without having to run AZedit. Changes made at the Program Assign Panel also appear in the IFB main screen in the configuration program.


Lookup Alphas

A Lookup Alpha is a secondary alpha (alphas are the alphanumeric name used for display purposes) that can be assigned to an intercom port. Lookup alphas are used with special keypanels that support 9400+ keypad sequences. If your intercom system does not use this type of keypanel, you typically will not need to activate this feature. The 9400+ keypad sequences are typically used in a television studio environment. They let keypanel operators assign keypanel keys using standard names for studio functions rather than the normal alpha names or the intercom port numbers. Standard studio function names include ED01, ED02, and ED03 for edit rooms 1, 2, and 3, or VT01, VT02, VT03 for VTR rooms 1, 2, and 3. Within AZedit, one of these standard studio function names can be assigned as the lookup alpha name for an intercom port. The normal alpha name is also assigned. Then, when a keypanel operator assigns a keypanel key using one of the studio function names, the master controller looks for a lookup alpha that matches the studio function name. If it finds a match, it displays the normal alpha name in the display above the assigned key. For example, if intercom port 5 has the alpha name "FRED" and the standard lookup alpha name of "VT02" the operator could assign VT02 to the key, but FRED would appear in the keypanel display. The keypanel operator doesn't need to know that VTR room 2 is connected at intercom port 5, or that the alpha name for that port is FRED.


IFB Tone Override

IFB Tone Override is used only with a TIM-940 Tone Activated Switcher and a 2400 Hz tone source. The program source (the audio that the IFB listener normally hears) does not pass through the intercom matrix (via the IFB Input) as for normal operation, but passes through the TIM-940 instead. Here is how it works. The IFB program audio source is connected to the IFB input of the TIM-940. The defined IFB output from the matrix is connected to the control/audio input of the TIM-940. The 2400 Hz tone source is connected to an audio input port of the intercom matrix, and this port is then entered under Tone Override Input during IFB setup. As usual, the IFB is then assigned to a keypanel key. During normal operation, the program audio passes through the TIM-940 uninterrupted and goes to the IFB listener. When the keypanel operator presses the IFB key, that keypanel operator's voice audio, plus the 2400 Hz signal is routed, via the defined IFB output, to the TIM-940 control/audio input. The TIM-940 removes the 2400 Hz tone from the audio signal and uses this tone to cut off the program audio and then route the keypanel operator's voice to the IFB listener.


IFB Auto Table Description

Auto Table (AT) is a listen key assignment for use with an IFB talk key. Auto table provides a convenient way to assure that the listen key can always listen to whatever IFB is currently assigned to the talk key, even when the IFB talk key's assignment is changed frequently. If you are not familiar with IFB operation, first take a look at the IFB Description. Then, for an understanding of how auto table works, you might try working through the IFB Setup Procedure, and in particular, the steps which describe how to setup and use a Listen Source.


Test Audio Description

DBX cards use test audio to constantly monitor the audio being passed between frames. If an audio problem persists, the DBX cards will try to correct it. Without test audio, the links between frames could be operational, but it would be possible that no audio was being passed.

How It Works

General Test Audio Sequence

When the intercom frames are powered on, there is a negotiation process between the DBX cards at both ends of each port-to-port link. The negotiation decides which one will be the master DBX card and which will be the slave DBX. (Note that there are two independent port-to-port links for each DBX card, and the master-slave negotiation goes on independently for each link.) If the negotiation succeeds, LEDs 13 and 14 on the front of the DBX cards will display the master-slave outcome. Once the master-slave relationship is negotiated for a link, the master DBX card initializes with a test audio data value of 3 and periodically sends this data value in the audio packet stream to the slave DBX card. At the same time, the slave DBX card initializes with a test data value of 6, which it periodically sends in the audio packet stream to the master DBX card. When the slave DBX card receives packets from the master DBX card, it publishes them onto the audio back plane in its frame. The slave DBX card then reads the packets back and tests the packets containing the date value that was sent by the master DBX card. If the value is correct (3 in this case), it multiplies this value by 2 to obtain 6. It then transmits this value back to the master DBX card in the other frame. The master DBX card then publishes this value onto the back plane in its frame and then reads it back. If the value is 6 as expected, it multiplies the value by 2 to obtain 12 and then transmits this value back to the slave DBX card. In theory, this sequence of events continues indefinitely.

Old Test Audio

There may be occasional delays in the test audio process, such that a DBX card may briefly receive the prior data value from another DBX card. For example, let’s say that the slave DBX card has received the expected value of 3, and is periodically sending 6 back to the master DBX card. However, the master DBX card has already received and validated this value, and is now sending the next value, 12, to the slave DBX. Once the master DBX sends data value 12, it expects to receive data value 24 back. For a period of time, though, it may still receive the value 6 because the slave DBX has not yet had time to process the new information sent to it. The value 6 represents old test audio. If the old test value persists for more than .5 seconds, the receiving DBX card will activate an LED that indicates “old test audio” (Actually, there are two old test audio LEDs per port, which correspond to LED 9 and 10 on the front of the DBX card. See note 1 below for further information.) Normally, the new expected value will be received before any further action is taken, and the old test audio LED will turn off. You may infrequently or never see the LED indicator flicker. If old test audio persists for more than 4 seconds, the DBX card will tear down the link between the frames and attempt to restart it. Normally the DBX card at the other end of the link has by now also determined that something is wrong and will also attempt to restart. Once a link has been torn down, all audio communications between the two frames will cease until the link is restored. During normal operation, an old test audio signal should never persist long enough to cause a link to restart, and this is indicative of some type of hardware or cable problem.

Bad Test Audio

If a DBX card receives a test audio data value that is not the expected value and is also not the old test audio value, this is known as bad test audio. If bad test audio persists for more than .5 seconds, the bad test audio LED will light. (Actually, there are two bad test audio LEDs per port, which correspond to LED 11 and 12 on the front of the DBX card. See note 1 below for further information.) If bad test audio persists for more than 3 seconds, the DBX card will attempt to restart the link. Once this happens, the DBX card at the other end of the link will also attempt to restart. There will be a loss of audio between the frames while the DBX cards attempt to restart. During normal operation, a bad test audio signal should never persist long enough to cause a link to restart, and this is indicative of some type of hardware or cable problem.

Note 1: 	The previous description of test audio was simplified slightly for purposes of explanation. In actuality, there are two separate Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs) for each DBX port. Each ASIC processes one half of the audio data bits, and there are separate tests and LED for each ASIC.

Note 2:	Normally, you should leave test audio on (checked) in AZedit. However, there are two situations where you might consider deactivating this feature. 1) You can make an additional 8 intercom ports (2-frame system) or 12 intercom ports (3-frame intercom system) available by turning test audio off. You cannot make any additional ports available in systems over 3 frames. (See the note 3, below, for further explanation. 2) There could be an inaudible audio problem with an AIO card, but the problem could still cause a test audio reset. This means the audio communications between frames could be disrupted every 5 seconds due to a problem that is not really going to affect normal communications anyway. If you are under time constraints to get the intercom system operational, you could try to temporarily turn off the test audio and then click the Apply button. Keep in mind that this will cause a system reset and it will take a few minutes for the system to restart. Also, you will have to reload the intercom setup file afterward. Later, when you have time to troubleshoot and correct whatever is causing the text audio reset, you can then reactivate the test audio feature.

Note 3: 	A stand-alone ADAM frame can have up to 136 intercom ports (or 272 with High Density wiring). For more information on High Density, see "High Density". In a multi-frame intercom system, only 128 intercom ports can intercommunicate between frames. However, since at least one DBX card must be installed in each frame of a multi-frame DBX system, there will not be more than 128 audio ports per frame anyway. Test audio uses the last 4 time slots in each frame to exchange the test audio between the frames. The intercom ports associated with these 4 time slots still function normally for communication with other intercom ports within the same frame, but they cannot be used for normal intercommunications between frames. The only time this presents a problem is in the case of a 2-frame, or 3-frame DBX intercom system. In either of these intercom system configurations, there will be 1 DBX card installed in each frame, and there could be up to 16 Audio Input/Output (AIO) cards installed, giving up to 128 intercom ports. However, with test audio turned on, the time slots corresponding to ports 125 to 128 will be used for test audio. This means that ports 125-128 in each frame cannot be used outside the frame. However, these 4 ports can still communicate normally with other intercom ports in the same frame.


Timeslot Description

ADAM, ADAM CS, and Zeus intercom systems use a method called Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) to route audio communications. In this method, each analog communication signal coming into an intercom port is converted to a digital stream. The digital stream for each port is then broken up into packets, and a packet from each port is then assembled into a packet stream. Each packet has a specific position in the packet stream, and this position is called its timeslot. The TDM system continuously cycles through the timeslots and builds the packet stream by placing the next available packet from each intercom port into its appropriate timeslot. In order for a destination to receive communications from a specific intercom port, the packets are extracted from the appropriate timeslot, reassembled into a digital stream, converted back into an analog signal, and then delivered to the destination.


Dual Bus Expansion (DBX) Card Description

Dual Bus Expansion (DBX) Cards are used to interconnect multiple ADAM frames to create larger intercom systems.


Redundant Audio Description

Redundant Audio applies only to multi-frame ADAM intercom systems using Dual Bus Expansion (DBX) cards. It is a method of interconnecting the frames so that there are two DBX port connections between every frame and every other frame (each port has both a receive and a transmit connection). In a non-redundant configuration, if there were a failure of the DBX port connection between 2 frames, there would be a loss of communication between those frames. (Some multi-frame, non-redundant configurations may offer partial redundancy because a link path may still exist through a third frame.) In a true redundant configuration, if one DBX link fails, the other link will automatically take over, and intercom communications may proceed as usual.


Group Calls Description

Group Calls allow users to page a group or department consisting of a number of panels when they are not looking for one person in particular and just want to talk to anyone in that group. It is also useful when a user is looking for a particular individual in a group, but does not know at which station they are seated.

When someone in the group answers the page, a private conversation is initiated.

For instance suppose a group has been configured for the Tape room and user A needs to talk to anybody in Tape. User A can call the Tape group and his audio will go to every panel in the Tape group. When anybody in the Tape group calls him back, say user B for instance, a standard point-to-point conversation between A and B is initiated and A’s audio no longer goes to all panels in the Tape group even though he is still using the Tape group key to talk.

The point-to-point conversation is maintained as long as wither A or B still has their talk key on. When panels release their talk keys, the private conversation is ended and the next use of the group call key will initiate another page.

A group Call is limited to having a maximum of 16 members. In addition, a port may be a member of only one Group. Group Calls are scrollable, although they are not enabled by default for local scrolling on a keypanel. Group Calls are not remotely scrollable, so the Trunk and AZedit scroll enable flags are unused at this time.

If the output port is defined (non-zero) in the Group Call Resources screen, then any page to his group will also show up as a tally on the device attached to this output port. These devices are called “Large Display Panels” and are typically situated in a large room so that all the people working in this room can view the page panel.

A Large Display Panel can have up to four positions to display calls (pages) as they are received. In some Installations, when a page is answered it is deleted from the Large Display panel. In other installations pages are not deleted when they are answered. This is a function of the intercom firmware and is not configurable via AZedit.

Large Display Panels are also supported at what are called “sub-id’s”. Normally, panels are located on an AIO card at polling ID’s 1-8. Large Display Panels can appear at polling ID’s up to 32. For more information on sub-ids, click here.

A Large Display Panel may also have a speaker associated with it (either built in or separately connected to the audio circuit of the output port). The first checkbox in the Group Call option area is labeled “Switch Audio to P.A.” and when checked, the audio from a group call page is routed to the Large Display Panel speaker (P.A.) and does not go to all of the members of the group.

If a page is answered and another page comes into the same group, the person who answered the first page does not normally receive a tally to indicate the second call (because they are presumably occupied by the first call). The second checkbox in the Group Call option area is labeled “2nd Call Tally” and when checked this allows group members who are already in private conversations from previously answered pages to still receive the tallies from new pages.

Once a page has been answered, if another page to the same group comes in, the person who answered the first page does not normally hear the audio from the second call (again, because they are already occupied by the first call). The third checkbox in the Group Call option area is labeled “2nd Call to Keypanel” and when checked this allows group members who are already in private conversations to also hear the audio from new pages. This option is disabled if the “Switch Audio to P.A.” option is already enabled.

Suppose users A and B are members of Group 1 and users C and D are members of Group 2. Also suppose that A pages group 2 and that C answers so that A and C are in a private conversation. Now suppose that D has something to add to the conversation between A and C. If D calls Group 1, B will hear the page, but A may not (depending on the 2nd Call options). D really wants to talk to A, not B. The fourth checkbox in the Group Call option area is labeled “Merge New Calls” and when checked this allows subsequent calls between two Groups that are already in a private conversation to be merged together. Only one of the Groups involved must have the “Merge New Calls” option set.

For instance, in the above example, if the “Merge New Calls” option were set for either Group 1 or Group 2, then when D paged Group 1 he would have been merged into the private conversation between A and C.

Group Calls also have an alpha, alias, and a description (like all other scrollable resources), which are available via the Alphas toolbar button, or via the |Alphas| menu.


Sub-ID's Description

Sub-IDs are used in conjunction with the Large Display Panels that can be used with Group Calls.

Normally a keypanel may be attached to an AIO card and will be polled at an ID of 1-8. Using this scheme, AIO card one supports keypanel ports 1 to 8 and AIO card two supports keypanel ports 9 to 16 (at ID’s 1 to 8 on that card), etc…

If a Large Display panel is connected at ID 3 (for example), it is possible to also connect up to 3 other Large Display Panels at ID’s 11, 19 and 27. These ID’s are determined by applying the formula (m + n * 8) where m is equal to the main ID (in this case 3) and n is the Sub-ID number from 1-3. The polling ID’s from 9-16 are called sub-ID 2, the ID’s from 17-24 are called Sub-ID 3, and the ID’s from 25-32 are called Sub-ID 4. Currently we only support the Main ID’s from 1-8 and Sub-ID’s 1 and 2 (polling ID’s from 9-16 and 17-24).

The purpose of Sub-ID’s is to allow multiple Large Display Panels to be positioned around a large room or in several related rooms to service the same Group. A page to a Group with an output port defined fro a Large Display Panel will show a tally on all the Large Display Panels at that port (including all Sub-ID’s).

Support for Sub-ID’s is not very noticeable. Only the |Status| Ports screen and the |Status| Software Versions| Keypanels screen make any reference to Sub-ID’s and that is only if Sub-ID support has been enabled by compiling it into the application.

When Sub-ID’s are supported there are a series of four radio buttons along the bottom of the screen in both the Port Status and Version screens. The radio button options are labeled:

•	Main ID

•	Sub-ID 2

•	Sub-ID 3

•	Sub-ID 4 (This option is currently grayed out and unsupported.)

The user may select one of the three available choices (the default is Main ID) to view the status and/or version of any Large Display Panels connected at Sub-ID’s or the Main ID set.

From these screens you may also choose to download firmware to the panels so that it is possible to download new firmware into Large Display Panels even at Sub-ID addresses.


Key Assignment Grid

The Key Assignment Grid provides easy access to key assignments for programming keypanels. To use the grid simply click on the assignment type combo box and select the assignment type from the list that appears. Based on the assignment selected, the alphas will appear in the grid below. Clicking on the border of the grid’s outer frame and dragging the mouse can resize the grid. Once the alpha appears that you wish to assign, place the mouse pointer over the assignment, hold down the left mouse button, and drag the assignment to the desired key (either talk or listen).

To open the key assignment grid, do the following:

1.	From the standard toolbar, click the assignment grid icon [image].
The Key Assignment grid opens.

You can also select Key Assignment Grid from the View menu or right click anywhere (except a talk or listen field) on an open screen in AZedit and select Show Grid.

The assignment types are abbreviated:

PP – Point-to-Point

PL – Party Line

IFB – Interrupt Fold-Back

IFB SL – Interrupt Fold-Back Special List

SL – Special List

GPIout – GPI output

ISO – Isolate

UPL – Universal Programming Language (resource)

SPCL – Special Function (e.g. AL, AF, AC, etc…)


Intercom Sizing Wizard Description

In AZedit version 2.08.00 or higher, an Intercom Sizing Wizard is provided to help users setup their intercom systems quickly and easily. The primary function of this wizard allows users to configure their intercom systems without worrying about incorrect configuration options. The wizard walks you through each step of setting up your intercom system, asking a series of specific questions, resulting in an easy and efficient setup procedure.

NOTE: You can use this wizard in ONLINE mode or FILE mode. If you plan on using the Intercom Sizing Wizard in ONLINE mode, you must remember to select the Allow Intercom Resizing in Online Mode checkbox.

For information on how to access the Intercom Wizard, see Intercom Sizing Wizard Access or How to Use the Intercom Sizing Wizard.


"High Density"

High Density refers to the number of ports available for use within a multi-frame system.  For example, a standard frame has 128 ports available for use; however, when high density is selected, the number of ports available becomes 256 (including the DBX cards. 272 ports without DBX cards).  As the number of frames increases, the number of ports available on each frame decreases to accommodate the number of DBX cards used to connect the frames.


Standard Toolbars

The Standard Toolbars at the top of the AZedit application window helps you perform common tasks within the application easily and quickly. Each icon represents a different task that you can perform. You can customize the toolbars to have only the icons you use most. Also, there is a second customizable standard toolbar available, if needed.

Both the Standard Toolbar and the Standard Toolbar 2 can either be docked to the top of the screen or float separate from the screen. By default, the Standard Toolbars are docked to the top of the application.

Customizable Toolbars

Standard Toolbar Icons

Common Tasks

•	Show/Hide the Standard Toolbars

•	Dock/Undock the Toolbars

•	Customize the Toolbars


Standard Toolbar Icons

The Standard Toolbar and Standard Toolbar 2 contain icons for many of the common tasks performed in AZedit (for example, Save and Send).

ICONS

New	Open
Merge	Save
Save As	Partial
Print	Connect
Load	Activate
Send	Abort
Undo	Redo
Clear	Cut
Copy	Paste
Search	Toolbars
Font Size	Back
Forward	Help
What's This	What New
About	Preview
Paste Special	Server
Setup	Toolbar
Toolbar 2	Navbar
Navbar 2	Status
Grid	Grow
Shrink	Refresh
Duplicates	Alpha Copy
Refresh Alpha	Preferences
Communications	Resources
Error Info


Navigation Bar Icons

The Navigation and Navigation Bar 2 contain icons for many of the screens in AZedit. By clicking an icon, you can get to most screens in AZedit quickly and easily.

ICONS

- Opens the Keypanel/Ports screen	– Opens the Party Line screen
- Opens the IFB screen	- Opens the Special Lists screen
- Opens the GPI Outputs screen	- Opens the ISO screen
- Opens the GPIs screen	- Open the UPL screen
- Opens the User Programmable Logic Resources screen	- Opens the Assignment Groups screen
- Opens the Crosspoint Status screen	- Opens the RVON Configuration screen
- Opens the Vox Settings screen	- Opens the LCP-102 screen
- Opens the PAP-32 screen	- Opens the IFB screen
- Opens the IFB Priorities screen	- Opens the IFBs screen
- Opens the IFB Listen Destination screen	- Opens the Inter-panel Dim Tables screen
- Opens the Gains popup menu (Crosspoint, Party Line, Input/Output Gains) screen	- Opens the Crosspoint Gains screen
- Opens the Party Line Gains screen	- Opens the Input/Output Gains screen
- Opens the Alpha popup menu	- Opens the Port Alpha screen
- Opens the PL Alpha screen	- Opens the IFB Alpha screen
- Opens the IFB Special Lists Alphas screen	- Opens the Special List Alpha screen
- Opens the GPI Output Alpha screen	- Opens the ISO Alpha screen
- Opens the UPL Resource Alpha screen	- Opens the Assignment Group Alpha screen
- Opens the GPI Input Description screen	- Opens the Inter-panel Dim Descriptions screen
- Opens the Standby Master Controller screen	- Opens the DBX Card Status screen
- Opens the PAP-32 Status screen	- Opens the UIO Status screen
- Opens the Trunk Master Status screen	- Opens the Trunk Status screen
- Opens the Remote Intercom Status screen	- Opens a popup menu of the different versions screen
- Opens the Master Controller Versions screen	- Opens the I/O Card Versions screen
- Opens the Keypanel Versions screen	- Opens the Log Viewer screen


Navigation Bars

The Navigation Toolbars at the bottom of the AZedit application window helps you to maneuver around the application easily and quickly. Each icon represents a different screen that you can open by simply clicking. Besides being able to jump to different screens within AZedit, you can customize the navigation toolbars to have only the icons you use. For example, you can customize the navigation bar to only have an icon for the Keypanel/Ports screen, the RVON and all the status screens. Also, there is a second navigational bar available, if needed.

Both the Navigation and Navigation 2 Toolbars can either be docked to the bottom of the screen or float separate from the screen. By default, the Navigation Toolbars are docked to the bottom of the application screen.

Customizable Toolbars

Navigation Bar Icons

Common Tasks

Show/Hide the Navigation Toolbars

Dock/Undock the Toolbars

Customize the Toolbars


Customizable Toolbar

The Navigation Toolbars and the Standard Toolbars are fully customizable. You can put as many or as few icons on the toolbar to fit your AZedit environment. For example, if you do not use UPL statements, you can take the UPL button off the toolbar or vice versa. There are separate customization screens for both the Navigation Toolbar and the Standard Toolbar.

Standard Toolbar and Standard Toolbar 2 screen

Navigation Toolbar and Navigation Toolbar 2 screen

Common Tasks

Customize the Toolbar


IFB Special Lists

An IFB Special List is similar to a Special List, except that the members are IFBs instead of ports. The default number of IFB SLs is 32. The number of IFB SLs is a configurable option on the Resources page of the Intercom Configuration screen. You can designate the number of IFB SLs from 0-999.

An IFB special list has an alpha, alias, and description, as well as scroll restriction flags. They are assigned to keypanel keys via AZedit or by scrolling. Talking with an IFB Special List is the equivalent to calling its IFB members individually. For more information on adding IFBs to a Special List, see Add an IFB to an IFB Special List or Add Multiple IFBs to an IFB Special List at the Same Time.

NOTE: Requires the following minimum firmware versions:

Master Controller v9.22.0

DVX v1.13.0 with Peripheral Controller v10.13.0

TM-2000 v8.5.1 (for remote access to IFB SLs)


Assignment Groups

An Assignment Group is a list of arbitrary key assignments (both local and remote) of any key type that can be created in AZedit and which is available in a single scroll list to any keypanel. Assignment Groups logically group different types of key assignments into one single scroll list. For example, you can combine all ports, party lines, and IFBs associated to a studio into 1 Assignment Group that can then be called up by a keypanel.

An Assignment Group has an alpha, alias, and description, as well as scroll restriction flags. They are not available to remote intercoms, however can have remote keys assigned to them. Also, Assignment Groups can contain key assignments that are scroll restricted. For more information on using Assignment Groups, see How to Create an Assignment Group.

NOTE: 	At the keypanel, press PGM/SEL in an idle state that brings up a list of Assignment Groups sorted by alpha. Press PGM/SEL again to select a specific group.

Requires the following minimum firmware versions:

Master Controller v9.22.0

DVX v1.13.0 with Peripheral Controller v10.13.0

KP-32 v2.0.1

KP-96 v8.9


Optimizations for Multiple AZedit Sessions

Several optimizations have been made in order to improve communications when using multiple AZedit sessions on the same intercom.

•	Most often, the serial traffic from AZedit is for refreshing the current display. Cutting down on the refreshes reduces serial traffic and improves the communications reliability on other serial sessions. In version 2.7 or later, AZedit automatically stops refreshing the screen when the application is minimized. It is recommended to have users of AZedit (in multiple AZedit sessions) minimize their session when it is not in use.

•	Version 2.7 or higher also allows the user to manually pause the automatic refresh by pressing PAUSE on the keyboard [image]. Refresh is resumed by clicking OK on the Pause dialog.

•	Other optimizations to serial communications include increasing the number of time a failed message is retired, and breaking large message into several smaller messages.

NOTE: 	Saving a setup file, sending changes or a setup file, and downloading firmware are not interrupted by any of the refresh pause mechanisms.


Where are the Cronus USB Drivers located?

The Cronus USB driver files are now bundled with the AZedit installation. You can find the drivers in the USB directory below the AZedit installation directory.

When the Cronus intercom is first connected to the computer, the New Hardware wizard appears. Choose to manually select the driver location and point it to the C:\Telex\AZedit \Vxxx\USB (where xxx is the version of software you have.

NOTE: Cronus drivers have been bundled with AZedit software from version 2.06.06 or higher.


Authentication

Authentication is the process of determining whether someone is, in fact, who he or she declares to be. In private and public computer networks (including the Internet), and similarly AZedit, authentication is commonly done through the use of user profiles and passwords.  Intercoms supporting authentication may require a username and password for each AZedit session.

With the introduction of Ethernet connections, it is easier for users to log onto AZedit from more places within the network and beyond.  Because of this capability, the security of your Intercom can become compromised.  With Authentication, a level of security is placed on your intercom that requires the use of profiles and personal passwords.

Authentication is can be enabled on J9, J10, USB and Ethernet sessions.  However, the J1 or serial connection session will always be unauthenticated.

Authentication is configured through AZedit, where usernames and passwords are specified for each user.  You can configure users as administrators for the different intercom systems or can require a restrictions file to be present. For more information on the restrictions file and Restriction Editor, see X. Editing authentications requires Administrator status or connection on an authenticated system.

When user profiles are present users can change their passwords and have passwords remembered for future automated logons.


User Profiles

With the ability to have multiple AZedit sessions running different intercom sessions and allowing for multiple users on each computer, controlling access is made easier through the use of user profiles.  User profiles include configuration, capabilities, communication settings, preferences and toolbar configurations. Profiles are stored separately for each intercom. For example, if you have 3 intercom systems (Intercom 1, Intercom 2, and Intercom 3), each intercom system will have its own user profile folder.


Improve VOIP - Quality of Service

Being able to enable Priority Packets lets you set up priority filters to process high priority network traffic before normal traffic. In the case of the RVON products, it lets you set audio packets with a higher priority than data packets when being sent over the network.  This is done with the use of a Router Switch that supports high priority packets. For more information on Router Switches with High Priority Packets, consult your system administrator.


Status Bar Description

The Status Bar runs along the bottom of the AZedit application gives the user information detailing the status of the intercom system (for example, mode information, assignment information, user information, and transmit and receive status.


AIO-16 ports and port allocation

With the introduction of an AIO-16 card into the ADAM frame layout the number of possible ports available doubles from 136 to 272 ports. This is because instead of 8 channels of audio per card, you now have 16 channels of audio per card. However, to be backwards compatible with the AIO-8 cards, the 16 channels had to be divided into two separate groups of eight channels per card (a bottom group and a top group). For example, if you have an AIO-16 card in slot one of an ADAM frame, the bottom group of eight channels will have ports 1-8 assigned to them, while the top group of eight channels will have ports 137-144 assigned to them.

The ADAM Intercom System can run both the AIO-8 and the AIO-16 card in the same frame. You can position your AIO-8 and AIO-16 cards in any slot or in any sequence within the ADAM frame. However, when mixing the AIO-8 and AIO-16 cards, it is important to know that the port numbering is consistent with the two-tier port system. For example, in slots 1,2,3 and 4 you have AIO-8 cars and in slot 5 you have an AIO-16 card. The port numbering scheme assigns 8 ports per card for the first four slots. When assigning ports to slot 5, the bottom group of ports is assigned in sequence with the AIO-8 cards; however the top group of ports associated with the AIO-16 card is assigned the corresponding ports with the card position. This means that ports 137 through 168 are unused and the top group of ports used by the AIO-16 card starts with port 169.

Essentially, the port numbering is static, in that the port numbers used do not change whether you are using an AIO-8 or an AIO-16 card. Rather it is a question of whether the ports exist or not.


Restriction Editor

Restrictions Editor is a 32-bit Windows® application designed to run under Windows 2000® and Windows XP®.  It may also run on Windows NT/95/98/ME® with Internet Explorer V6.0 or later.

NOTE: 	Restrictions Editor requires a copy of Azedit.exe be available in order to determine the AZedit menu structure for creating restrictions.

The Restrictions Editor is a tool to create restriction files for use with AZedit Intercom software.  Restriction Files allow administrators to manage user access to resources and features.  AZedit includes support for user restrictions by reading a text file (the restrictions file) and parsing out the set of resources and features available to each user.

The Restrictions Editor provides a user interface to the restrictions text file, allow you to view and modify the restrictions set for each AZedit user. The Restrictions Editor groups related sets or resources and features together on easily navigable screens so that you can conveniently examine and change the restriction sets in context. Restrictions are implemented by having separate restriction files for individual intercoms (each of which could contain separate sets of user restrictions).


VOX definition

Vox or voice operated switch is a switch that operates when sound over a certain threshold is detected. It is usually used to turn on a transmitter or recorder when someone speaks. It is sometimes used instead of a push to talk button on transmitters or to save storage space on recording devices. The circuitry usually includes a delay or hold time threshold that leaves the circuit activated when the sound stops. This keeps the circuit from turning off during short pauses in speech.


Resources Screen - Left side

Frames

This number should be set to the number of ADAM frames in your intercom system. If you want to change the number of frames in your system, you must use the Intercom Sizing Wizard.

NOTE: 	If you are just starting a multi-frame ADAM system for the first time, the system cards may contain default settings that do not match your actual hardware. By default, a multi-frame system using DBX cards will think it is a 3-frame system with test audio and redundant audio activated, when in reality you have a 5-frame system you would need to change the frame number from 3 to 5.

Ports

Depending on the Intercom Type, Frame settings, and DBX card settings, ports are automatically calculated and set to the maximum possible intercom ports for that configuration. For example, if you have a 1-frame ADAM intercom system, the maximum possible intercom ports will be 136 (17 Audio I/O cards x 8 ports per card).

Port Description

Intercom Sizing Wizard

Uses the Intercom Sizing Wizard to either help you plan future additions to your intercom system or to reconfigure your system after additions have been made. The Intercom Sizing Wizard is an easy, efficient and effective way to upgrade your intercom system walking you through a series of questions about your intercom system. The Intercom Sizing Wizard can be used in either FILE or ONLINE mode.

Number of Ports

Depending on the number of Adam Frames that are in your system, the number of ports for each frame (up to eight frames) is displayed. This field only displays when multi-frame systems are present.


Resource Screen middle column

Party Lines

Party Lines may be set to any amount within memory limits, or may be reduced to 0 if no party lines are used. If party lines are reduced to 0, all party line (PL) features will become unselectable, and there will not be any party line scroll list at keypanels.

Party Line Description

IFBs

IFBs may be set to any amount within memory limits, or may be reduced to 0 if no IFBs are used. If IFBs are reduced to 0, all IFB features will become unselectable, and there will not be any IFB scroll list at keypanels. Also, Program Assign Panels will not be able to operate.

IFB Description

Special Lists

Special Lists may be set to any amount within memory limits, or may be reduced to 0 if no special lists are used. If special lists are reduced to 0, all special list (SL) features will become unselectable, and there will not be any special list scroll list at keypanels.

Special List Description

GPI Outputs and GPI Inputs

All ADAM, ADAM CS, and Zeus frames include 8 GPI inputs and 8 GPI outputs. (In a multi-frame ADAM system, only the GPI inputs and outputs of the first frame, called the master frame, are used.) Additional GPI inputs and outputs are supplied by optional UIO-256 Universal Input / Output frames. If you do not have any UIO-256 frames, you can reduce GPI inputs and outputs to 8. If you don't plan on using the GPI at all, you can reduce the quantity to 0. If GPI inputs or outputs are reduced to 0, all GPI features will become unselectable, and there will not be any GPI scroll list at keypanels.

GPI Description

ISOs

ISOs may be set to any amount within memory limits, or may be reduced to 0 if no ISOs are used. If ISOs are reduced to 0, all ISO features will become unselectable, and there will not be any ISO scroll list at keypanels.

ISO Description

Assignment Groups

Displays the default number of Assignment Group (AGRP) assignments. AGRPs may be set to any amount within memory limits, or may be reduced to 0 if no AGRPs are used. If AGRPs are reduced to 0, all AGRP features will not be selectable, and there will not be any AGRP scroll list at the keypanels.

Assignment Groups

UPL Resources

UPL Resources may be set to any amount within memory limits, or may be reduced to 0 if no UPL resources are used. If UPL Resources is set to 0, all UPL resource features will become unselectable, and there will not be any UPL resource scroll list at keypanels.

UPL Resource Description

UPL Statements

UPL Statements may be set to any amount within memory limits, or may be reduced to 0 if no UPL statements are used. If UPL statements are reduced to 0, all UPL features will become unselectable.

UPL Description

Inter-panel Dims

Inter-panel Dims may be set to any amount within memory limits, or may be reduced to 0 if no inter-panel dim tables are used. If inter-panel dims are reduced to 0, references to this feature will become unselectable.

Inter-panel Dim Table Description

PAP / LCP-102

The minimum allowed setting for this is 15.

PAP Description

LCP-102 Description


Keyboard Shortcuts for AZedit

Keyboard Shortcut Keys
up to and including version 2.0 and later

Context	Keyboard Shortcut	Description
All main screens	F1	Opens Help for the active screen
	F2	Opens the Keypanels/Ports screen
	F3	Opens the Party Line screen
	F4	Opens the IFBs screen
	F5	Opens the Special Lists screen
	F6	Opens the GPI Outputs screen
	F7	Opens the ISOs screen
	F8	Opens the GPI Inputs screen
	F10	Opens the Send All screen (ONLINE mode only)
	F11	Opens the Crosspoint Status screen
	F12	Opens the Send screen (ONLINE mode only)
	Shift+F1	Activates the “What’s This” Help
	Shift+F2	Opens the Port Alphas screen
	Shift+F3	Opens the Party Line Alphas screen
	Shift+F4	Opens the IFB Alphas screen
	Shift+F5	Opens the Special Lists Alphas screen
	Shift+F6	Opens the GPI Outputs Alphas screen
	Shift+F7	Opens the ISO Alphas screen
	Shift+F8	Opens the GPI Input Alphas screen
	Shift+F12	Opens the Other Alphas screen
	Shift+Alt+F5	Opens the IFB Special List Alphas screen
	Shift+Alt+F10	Opens the Inter Panel Dim Descriptions
	Ctrl+space bar	Refresh data; re-upload alphas from intercom (ONLINE mode only)
	Ctrl+left arrow	Go back to previous view
	Ctrl+right arrow	Go forward to next view
	Ctrl+Shift+F12	Uploads Alphas from the Intercom (ONLINE mode only)
	Ctrl+N	Create a new file
	Ctrl+O	Open a file
	Ctrl+M	Merge a File (FILE mode only)
	Ctrl+S	Save current file
	Ctrl+A	Save current file with a new name (Save As)
	Ctrl+P	Perform a partial save
	Ctrl+G	Go ONLINE (FILE mode only)
All screens	Ctrl+C	Copy
	Ctrl+V	Paste
	Alt+Backspace	Undo last action
	Ctrl+Z	Undo last action
	Ctrl+Shift+Z	Redo last action
	Ctrl+F	Opens the Search for Key Assignment screen
	Ctrl+F12	Opens the Edit Alpha screen for most current resource (must be enabled in the Preferences)
Any Alpha screen	Enter	Opens the Edit Alpha/Description screen
Any text field	Shift+1 (on keyboard keypad)	Moves cursor to end of text field
	Shift+7 (on keyboard keypad)	Moves cursor to beginning of text field
All main screens	Ctrl+Shift+V	Opens the Select Device for Version Display (ONLINE mode only)
All screens	Ctrl+Backspace	Opens the first drop down menu on the current screen
Keypanel/Ports screen	Ctrl+Enter	When cursor is in a Listen or Talk field, the Select Key Assignment screen appears.
	Shift+Enter	When cursor is in a Listen or Talk field, the Gain Setup screen appears.
Any column view	Shift+Page Down	Selects all entries in the column
	Ctrl+Shift	Allows you to select blocks of entries in the columns
	Ctrl	Allows you to select multiple specific entries from the column
All main screens	Ctrl+F2	Opens the LCP-102 screen
	Ctrl+F8	Opens the UPL Resources screen
	Ctrl+F9	Opens the Assignment Groups screen
	Ctrl+F11	Opens the Vox Settings screen
	Ctrl+F12	Opens the Edit Alpha/Description screen
Keypanel/Ports screen	Ctrl+W	Shows the current listen levels for the keypanel being viewed
All screens	Alt+E	Opens the Edit drop down menu
	Alt+T	Opens the Status drop down menu
	Alt+O	Opens the Option drop down menu
	Alt+L	Opens the Logging drop down menu
	Alt+H	Opens the Help drop down menu
	Alt+F	Opens the File drop down menu
	Alt+N	Opens the Online drop down menu
	Alt+U	Opens the Authentication drop down menu
	Alt+A	Opens the Alphas drop down menu
	Alt+V	Opens the View drop down menu
All main screens	Ctrl+Alt+F4	Opens the IFB Priorities screen
All screens	Alt	Activates the main drop down menu
All sub-screens (for example, keypanel/port configuration)	Ctrl+F1	Whichever field is active on the screen, the context help will display
Any notebook window (a window with tabbed pages)	Ctrl+Tab	Moves to the next page, going from left to right
	Ctrl+Shift+Tab	Moves to the preceding page, going from right to left)
Any screen	Tab	Moves the cursor to the next field
	Shift+Tab	Moves the cursor to the previous field
Any main screen	Alt+F2	Opens the Select Gain Type screen
	Alt+F3	Opens the Search for Key Assignment screen
	Alt+F4	Exits the AZedit application
	Alt+F5	Opens the IFB Special Lists screen
	Alt+F8	Opens the UPL Statements screen
	Alt+F10	Displays the right-click drop down menu, if applicable
Keypanel/Ports screen, any talk or listen field	Ctrl+R	Toggle key restriction state
	Ctrl+Shift+R	Toggle key restriction state, and set all keys to the right to the same state
	Ctrl+Alt+R	Toggle key restriction state, and set all keys the left to the same state
	Ctrl+D	Toggle latch disable state
	Ctrl+Shift+D	Toggle latch disable state, and set all keys to the right to the same state
	Ctrl+Alt+D	Toggle latch disable state, and set all keys to the left to the same state
Keypanel/Ports screen (View by Setup Page enabled)	Shift+Page Down	Display next setup page/panel
	Shift+Page Up	Display previous setup page/panel
LCP-102s screen	Shift+Page Down	Display next setup page/panel
	Shift+Page Up	Display previous setup page/panel
Most screens	Ctrl+Page Down	Display next keypanel, PL, SL, etc.
	Ctrl+Page up	Display previous keypanel, PL, SL, etc
Keypanel/Ports screen	Ctrl+Tab	Toggle between setup page and panel oriented views
	Ctrl+Shift+Tab	Toggle between setup page and panel oriented views (for all ports)
	Alt+<	Shift keypanel display to the left (when panel has more than 16 keys)
	Alt+>	Shift keypanel display to the right (when panel has more than 16 keys)
Keypanel/Ports screen, KP-32 keypanel, View by Panel Type selected	Ctrl+T	Toggle KP-32 key assignment viewing between talk and listen keys
Keypanel/Ports screen	Ctrl+1	View talk level 1 key assignments
	Ctrl+2	View talk level 2 key assignments
	Ctrl+3	View talk level 3 key assignments
	Ctrl+4	View talk level 4 key assignments
	Ctrl+Shift+1	View listen level 1 key assignments
	Ctrl+Up	View previous key level
	Ctrl+Down	View next key level
	Ctrl+Home	Move focus to port number edit box


Intercom Configuration: Resources

Important!  	We strongly recommend that you read and understand the Intercom Configuration Description before changing settings on this screen.

This screen lets you view the list of resources for your intercom system. You can also change the resource settings.

1.	In ONLINE or SERVER mode, this screen shows you the Intercom Type, and the configuration settings that are currently saved in the controller cards. If you are starting a new intercom system for the first time, these settings may not be correct, and you may have to make changes.

2.	If you start AZedit in FILE mode (without opening a setup file) this screen will show you the current AZedit resource settings. Normally, these settings should match the ONLINE configuration. However, if you are using the same copy of AZedit to configure several unrelated intercom systems, this may not always be the case.

NOTE: You may have received a copy of AZedit before receiving your intercom system. This allows you to start creating setup files without having a system. Before you start creating setup files, you should set the AZedit default resources to match the intercom system that you expect to receive. Read the descriptions for each resource, below. Then select the desired settings and click the Apply button. Accept the new settings as the AZedit default settings.

3.	If you open a setup file in FILE mode, this screen will show you the Resource settings for that setup file. Normally, these settings should match the ONLINE settings for the intercom system where the setup file is used.

Frames

This number should be set to the number of ADAM frames in your intercom system.

NOTE: 	 If you are just starting a multi-frame ADAM system for the first time, the system cards may contain default settings that do not match your actual hardware. For example, by default, a multi-frame system using DBX cards will think that it is a 3-frame system with test audio and redundant audio activated. If you in fact have a 5-frame system you would need to change the frame number from 3 to 5.

Ports

Depending on the Intercom Type, Frame settings, and DBX card settings, ports are automatically calculated and set to the maximum possible intercom ports for that configuration. For example, if you have a 1-frame ADAM intercom system, the maximum possible intercom ports will be 136 (17 Audio I/O cards x 8 ports per card).

Port Description

Intercom Sizing Wizard

Uses the Intercom Sizing Wizard to either help you plan future additions to your intercom system or to reconfigure your system after additions have been made. The Intercom Sizing Wizard is an easy, efficient and effective way to upgrade your intercom system walking you through a series of questions about your intercom system. The Intercom Sizing Wizard can be used in either FILE or ONLINE mode.

Intercom Sizing Wizard Description

Number of Ports

Depending on the number of Adam Frames that are in your system, the number of ports for each frame (up to eight frames) is displayed. This field only displays when multi-frame systems are present.

Party Lines

Party lines may be set to any amount within memory limits, or may be reduced to 0 if no party lines are used. If party lines are reduced to 0, all party line (PL) features will become unselectable, and there will not be any party line scroll list at keypanels.

Party Line Description

IFBs

IFBs may be set to any amount within memory limits, or may be reduced to 0 if no IFBs are used. If IFBs are reduced to 0, all IFB features will become unselectable, and there will not be any IFB scroll list at keypanels. Also, Program Assign Panels will not be able to operate.

IFB Description

Special Lists

Special lists may be set to any amount within memory limits, or may be reduced to 0 if no special lists are used. If special lists are reduced to 0, all special list (SL) features will become unselectable, and there will not be any special list scroll list at keypanels.

Special List Description

GPI Outputs and GPI Inputs

All ADAM, ADAM CS, and Zeus frames include 8 GPI inputs and 8 GPI outputs. (In a multi-frame ADAM system, only the GPI inputs and outputs of the first frame, called the master frame, are used.) Additional GPI inputs and outputs are supplied by optional UIO-256 Universal Input / Output frames. If you do not have any UIO-256 frames, you can reduce GPI inputs and outputs to 8. If you don't plan on using the GPI at all, you can reduce the quantity to 0. If GPI inputs or outputs are reduced to 0, all GPI features will become unselectable, and there will not be any GPI scroll list at keypanels.

GPI Description

ISOs

ISOs may be set to any amount within memory limits, or may be reduced to 0 if no ISOs are used. If ISOs are reduced to 0, all ISO features will become unselectable, and there will not be any ISO scroll list at keypanels.

ISO Description

Assignment Groups

Displays the default number of Assignment Group (AGRP) assignments. AGRPs may be set to any amount within memory limits, or may be reduced to 0 if no AGRPs are used. If AGRPs are reduced to 0, all AGRP features will not be selectable, and there will not be any AGRP scroll list at the keypanels.

Assignment Groups

UPL Resources

UPL Resources may be set to any amount within memory limits, or may be reduced to 0 if no UPL resources are used. If UPL Resources is set to 0, all UPL resource features will become unselectable, and there will not be any UPL resource scroll list at keypanels.

UPL Resource Description

UPL Statements

UPL statements may be set to any amount within memory limits, or may be reduced to 0 if no UPL statements are used. If UPL statements are reduced to 0, all UPL features will become unselectable.

UPL Description

Inter-panel Dims

Inter-panel dims may be set to any amount within memory limits, or may be reduced to 0 if no inter-panel dim tables are used. If inter-panel dims are reduced to 0, references to this feature will become unselectable.

Inter-panel Dim Table Description

PAP / LCP-102

The minimum allowed setting for this is 15.

PAP Description

LCP-102 Description

Intercom Type

In ONLINE or SERVER mode, AZedit reports the type of intercom system that it is connected to. If you don’t have an intercom system yet, but wish to create setup files, you may have reset the Intercom Type to the actual type of intercom system that you will be configuring.

Redundant Audio

If the intercom frames are interconnected for redundant audio, make sure this box is checked. If you are using a non-redundant connection, this box should not be checked.

Redundant Audio Description

Test Audio

DBX cards use test audio to constantly monitor the audio links between frames. If a problem is detected, the affected DBX card will attempt to restart the link. By default, test audio is activated.

Test Audio Description

“High Density”

In a multi-frame system, high density refers to the number of ports available for use in a frame.  For example, in a standard 2-frame system, each frame has 128 ports to use. However, when that 2-frame system is configured to be a “High Density” system, each frame has 256 ports available for use.  High Density is commonly used when there are AIO-16 cards present.

"High Density"

Reset to Defaults

Resets all settings to the values you previously set as the default. If you are just starting AZedit for the first time, the default settings will be a 1-frame ADAM system (no DBX).

Test, Cancel, and Apply Buttons

Help (same as F1 key)

Intercom Configuration Description

Procedure to change the intercom configuration


Advanced Tab Description

Priorities

•	IFB Priority

•	Trunk IFB Priority

•	Trunk Priority

Panel Poll Delay

•	Description

•	Activating this Feature

IFB Listen Destination

•	Description

•	IFB Setup Procedure

Options

•	Enable Tone

•	Keypanel Privacy

•	TIF Dial Out Restrict

•	Key Labels

•	Do Not Interrupt


TIF Dial Out Restrict

Select TIF Dial-Out Restrict to prevent a keypanel operator at this intercom port from dialing out via a TIF Telephone Interface. The keypanel operator will still be able to receive incoming phone calls via the TIF INTERFACE, but it will not be possible to send a hang-up signal from the keypanel. In most cases, the TIF INTERFACE will detect that the caller at the far end has hung up (either by a loop interrupt, battery reversal, or the presence of dial tone) and it will also hang up. However, some telephone systems do not provide any hang up indication. In this case, if an incoming call is answered from a keypanel that has TIF dial-out restrict activated, the phone line will remain engaged after the caller at the other end hangs up.


Trunk Priority Description

Trunking Description

Depending on how many trunking ports are set up, there may be occasions when not enough are available for all the people that want to use them. In such cases, trunk priority settings control the order in which keypanels get access to the scarce trunking ports. Each keypanel can be assigned a trunk priority ranging from 1 through 10. With a trunk priority setting of 10, a keypanel will take over a trunking port from a keypanel with a lower setting when there are no other trunking ports available.


Panel Poll Delay Description

Panel Poll Delay is typically used when a keypanel’s data line is connected to the intercom port via a modem link from a remote location. In this situation, there may be a slight delay in data transmission from the remote keypanel to the intercom system. This may cause sporadic operation or no operation at all. However, by setting a delay time, the intercom system will wait a little longer for data transmissions from the remote keypanel. The delay time can be set anywhere from 0 milliseconds (1/1000 of a second) to 500 milliseconds (500/1000’s of a second, or 1/2 second).

Important: 	Connect only one remote keypanel per Audio I/O card, and assign only one panel poll delay per Audio I/O card. Also, since excessive poll delay can impair system performance, use the minimum delay required to assure proper operation of the remote keypanel. However, allow for the possibility of fluctuations in the delay time.


Setup Tab Description

General Information about Setup Pages

Use the Setup tab settings to properly configure an intercom port for use with a keypanel. Each keypanel can have up to four setup pages of key assignments, and each setup page can assign up to 16 pairs of talk and listen keys. Typically, one setup page is used for the main keypanel, and one setup page is used for each expansion panel connected to the main keypanel (if there are any). Note that some keypanels may have more or less than 16 keys. Therefore, there may be cases where you will not use all 16 keys on a setup page. There may also be cases, such as with the KP-32 keypanel, where the keypanel itself uses not only all of the keys on one setup page, but also all of the keys on another setup page. Assure that each keypanel port is correctly configured for the type of keypanel and usage of setup pages as follows:

Show Type Radio Buttons

•	Set by User: This lets you manually select keypanel and expansion panel model names in the Type selection boxes. You must select Set by User if you want to setup keypanels in FILE mode. You must also select this option if your intercom system master controller cannot correctly determine (in ONLINE mode with Reported by Intercom selected) the type of keypanel that is connected to the intercom port.

•	Reported by Intercom: If you do all of your keypanel setup in ONLINE mode, the master controller will configure the Type selection for you. (Currently only supported for the KP-32. Check with your intercom representative for availability of updated firmware for the KP-8T, KP-12, DKP-8, DKP-12, MKP-4, WKP-4, BKP-4, and TKP-4. This feature is not supported for the KP9X series keypanels).

Type List Boxes

•	If Show Type is set to Reported by Intercom, and you are working ONLINE, the Type list boxes will automatically be set correctly.

•	If Show Type is set to Set by User, you must use the list boxes to select the correct keypanel and expansion panel types.

Type List Box Notes:

1.	Most of the keypanel types in the Type list box are self-explanatory, being simply various models of keypanels. A few selections, such as the TIF INTERFACE and the CDP-950 may not be generally thought of as keypanels, though they are in fact specialized types of keypanels.

2.	If you are using one or more GPI inputs to activate key assignments at a particular intercom port, we recommend that you set Show Type to Set by User and then set the Type list box for the Main Panel to Virtual. This will help to remind you that GPI inputs are being used to control key assignments for this port. For more information on this subject, see System GPI Description.

Default View Radio Buttons

•	by Panel Type: The Keypanel / Ports screen will only display the correct quantity of Talk and Listen keys based on the Type settings. For example, a setup page that is assigned to the KP-12 will display only 12 Talk and Listen keys. Typically, view by Panel Type should be the preferred viewing mode because then you won't try to assign more keys than are actually available on the keypanel.

•	by Setup Page: The Keypanel / Ports screen will display all 16 Talk and Listen key assignments that are available on a setup page, regardless of whether the keypanel or expansion panel has that number of keys.

NOTE: 	When viewing the setup pages for a particular intercom port, you can switch back and forth between view by Panel Type and view by Setup Page by pressing Ctrl+Tab on the computer keyboard. If you want to change the view mode for all intercom ports, use Shift+Ctrl+Tab.

NOTE: 	View mode has a slightly different affect when assigning keys on a KP-32 keypanel. For further information, click here.

Setup Page List Boxes

If the keypanel and expansion panels have been automatically selected (AZedit in ONLINE mode and Show Type set to Reported by Intercom) the Setup Pages will also be assigned automatically to match the keypanel / expansion panel configuration.

If you have manually selected the keypanel and expansion panel types, then you must use the Setup Page selection boxes to assign a setup page to each keypanel and expansion panel.

NOTES:

•	If you are not using expansion panels, just assign a page to the Main keypanel, and select No Setup Page for all expansion panels.

•	KP-12: There are two types of expansion panels for the KP-12: the EKP-12, with 12 keys, and the EKP-20, with 20 keys. One or more of each type can be connected to the KP-12 in any order, and there may not be an absolute relationship between setup pages and expansion panels. In this case, simply assign enough setup pages to expansion panels to take care of the total number of expansion panel keys that are available. Example 1: Suppose there is only an EKP12 expansion panel connected to the KP-12. In this case, assign Expansion Panel 1 to any available setup page. This will take care of all 12 keys on the expansion panel, with 4 keys left over. Example 2: Suppose an EKP20 and an EKP-12 is connected to the KP-12. This means there are a total of 32 expansion panel keys available. In this case, assign Expansion Panel 1 to any available setup page to take care of the first 16 expansion keys. Then assign Expansion Panel 2 to another setup page to take care of expansion keys 17-32.

Setup Page Options

Setup Restrict

By default, keypanel operators can change the setup page usage from their keypanels. If you do not want the keypanel operator to do this, check the Setup Restrict check box.

NOTE: 	You may wish to check the Setup Restrict check box for all intercom ports. You can do this quite easily using the Copy and Paste Special commands. For more information, click here.


Gain Setup for Ports

Point to Point Listen Gains

Party Line Listen Gains

Analog I/O Gain Settings

Port Gain Reset


Point to Point Listen Gains

Use point-to-point listen gain to adjust the level at which the currently selected intercom port hears a selected other intercom port.

1.	Select an intercom port in the Input Port text box, or use the Input Port Alpha list box.

2.	Select a new gain level in the Gain list box. This will be the new level at which the port listed at the top of the screen will hear the port that you selected in step 1.

Gain adjustments will take effect when you send your changes to the intercom system. Gain settings will also be saved in your setup file if you save it to disk.

Important: 	Do not make an adjustment here, when it would be better to adjust an Analog Input gain. For example, suppose there is an external audio source connected at port 1, and keypanels at ports 2 through 5 have keys assigned to listen to the external audio source. Now, suppose all of the keypanel operators find that they are always turning their volume controls down when listening to port 1, and are then turning them up again to listen to everything else. You could adjust the point-to-point listen level from port 1 to each of the keypanel ports. However, the real problem is that the external audio is coming into port 1 at a level that is higher than the normal system level. To correct this, reduce the analog input gain for port 1 instead of adjusting point-to-point gains for ports 2 through 5. You can access Analog Input / Output Gains by pointing to Gains in the System menu.

NOTE: 	When you adjust the level at which one port hears another port, keep in mind that this will affect all communications between the two ports. Let’s look at a few examples using various types of communication where port 1 is talking to port 2:

Example 1, Point to Point: Port 1 could press a point-to-point talk key to talk to port 2. Port 2 will hear port 1 at whatever level has been set in the Point-to-Point Listen dialog.

Example 2, Special List: Port 2 could be a member of a special list. Let's say the special list is named CREW. Port 1 could have a key assigned to talk to special list CREW. In this case, port 2 will also hear port 1 at the level that is set in the Point-to-Point Listen dialog for port 2. Even though port 1 is not using a point-to-point key, there is still a point-to-point relationship between port 1 and every member of special list CREW.

Example 3, IFB: Port 2 could be specified as the output port for an IFB. Let's say the IFB is named TAL1. Port 1 could have a key assigned to talk to IFB TAL1. In this case, port 2 will hear port 1 at the level that is set in the Point-to-Point Listen dialog for port 2. Even though port 1 is not using a point-to-point key, there is still a point-to-point relationship between port 1 and the output specified by the TAL1 IFB, which is port 2. Now, let's say that port 3 also has TAL1 assigned to a key. If the point-to-point listen setting for port 2 listening to port 3 is different than the setting for port 2 listening to port 1, the levels will sound different when port 1 or port 3 talk to port 2 using the TAL1 key.

NOTE: Point-to-point listen gain is the same thing as Crosspoint Gain, and the adjustment can be made in either place.


Party Line Listen Gains

Use this to adjust the level at which a specific intercom port hears a specific party line.

1.	Select a party line in the Party Line text box, or use the Party Line Alpha list box.

2.	Select a new gain level in the Gain list box. This will be the new level at which the port listed at the top of the screen will hear the party line that you selected in step 1.

Gain adjustments will take effect when you send your changes to the intercom system. Gain settings will also be saved in your setup file if you save it to disk.

NOTE: You can also set the party line listen gains using party line gain setup.


Analog I/O Gain Settings

The Input Gain setting indicates the amount by which the input level to this intercom port has been increased or decreased from the normal 0 dB level. The Output Gain setting indicates the amount by which the output level from this intercom port has been increased or decreased from the normal 0 dB level.

NOTE: 	You can view the current input and output gain settings for this intercom port, but you cannot make changes in this dialog box. To make changes to these settings, close the Gain Setup dialog box. Then, in the System menu, point to Gains, and select Analog Input/Output Gains from the fly out menu. This will open the Analog Input / Output Gains view. Press the F1 key on the computer keyboard if you need help with that view.


Port Gain Reset

1.	Click the Port Gain Reset button to open the Gain Reset dialog, which allows you to select which gains you want to reset.

Gain resets will take effect when you send your changes to the intercom system. Gain settings will also be saved in your setup file if you save it to disk.


Gain Reset Dialog

1.	Click one or both check boxes to select which type of gains you want to reset. Then click OK.

Gain resets will take effect when you send your changes to the intercom system. Gain settings will also be saved in your setup file if you save it to disk.

NOTE: 	You cannot reset Analog I/O Gains in this dialog. To reset Analog I/O Gains, close all open dialogs. Then, in the System menu, point to Gains, and select Analog Input / Output Gains. This will open the Analog Input / Output Gains view. While in that view, press the F1 key for help if necessary.


Edit IFB

The Input field specifies which intercom port is being used for input from an external audio program source. (In a broadcasting environment, you would typically set the Input to whatever intercom port is receiving the broadcast mix, minus the talent mic audio. If you are setting up an IFB for use with interruptible background music on a PA system, you would set the Input to the intercom port where the music input is connected.)

1.	To define the Input, either type the number of the intercom port in the Port Number text box, then press the Tab key on the computer keyboard. Or, select the name of the intercom port in the Port Alpha list box.

NOTE: The IFB Input should be left blank (0) if you are using the tone override feature as described below.

2.	The Output field specifies which intercom output port will hear the IFB messages from a keypanel operator. In a broadcasting environment, this is the intercom port where the talent earset is connected. For interruptible background music, this might be the intercom port where a paging speaker output is connected.

3.	By default, when a keypanel operator talks to the IFB output, the program source audio (talent mix-minus, background music, etc.) will be completely cut off at the talent earset, paging speaker, etc. The keypanel operator will therefore be heard without any background noise. The Mute setting in the Dim Level field specifies this. If you do not want the program audio to completely mute, select a different value in the Dim Level list box. For example, if you select –6 dB, the IFB output level will be perceived as being reduced by about half when the keypanel operator talks to the IFB output.

NOTE: IFB dimming does not apply when you are using the tone override feature as described below.

4.	Frequently, IFB operation is just a one-way communication. For example, in a paging application, the keypanel operator simply wants to talk over the PA speaker. For this application, you do not need to specify a Listen Source. However, in a broadcast application, the keypanel operator may actually want to establish a two-way communication path with the talent. In this case, you can set the Listen Source to the intercom port that is receiving input from the talent microphone. Note that this should not be the talent mix minus, but the actual unmixed microphone signal.

5.	Select any of the Scroll Enable check boxes to determine how the IFB will appear in scroll lists.

6.	The Tone Override Input box is grayed-out and not selectable by default.
This feature is only used with an optional TIM-940 Tone Activated Switcher. For further information, click here.
This completes the IFB setup.

7.	Click Done to exit the Edit IFB dialog and return to the IFB main screen.

NOTE: Once you have set up an IFB, you will have to complete one or more of the following steps to use it:

8.	Assign the IFB to a key on the keypanel that will talk to the IFB output.

9.	If you defined a Listen Source, you must also assign the listen key that is associated with the IFB talk key. This key could be assigned to the Listen Source intercom port. However, we recommend that you use the Auto Table (AT)s

If you are currently working in FILE mode, use Save to save your changes to disk. (Use Send File later, in ONLINE mode, to send your IFB setup information to the intercom system.) If you are currently working in ONLINE mode send your changes to the intercom system.

At this point, you can send all of your changes to the intercom system. Then, when the keypanel operator activates that key, the program source will reduce by the amount specified in the IFB Dim Level field, and the keypanel operator can then talk to the person at the IFB output without that person being bothered by the program audio.


Edit GPI Output

1.	In the Input field, select which port or ports will activate the GPI output. There are two options: 1) select a specific port which can activate the GPI output, or 2) select All, which will allow any port to activate the GPI output. Use either of the following methods to make your selection:

a.	position the cursor in the Input Port Number text box and type a port number, or type ALL, then press the Enter key

b.	in the Input Port Alpha list box, select a specific port, or select All

2.	In the Output field, select an output port. Whenever the selected input port talks to this output port, the GPI output will activate.

3.	Select any of the Scroll Enable check boxes to determine how the GPI output will appear in scroll lists.

4.	Click the Next or Prev button to select and setup additional GPI outputs. Or, click Done to finish.

This completes the GPI output setup procedure. Remember to send these changes to the intercom system.


Edit ISO

1.	Select the output port that you want to isolate during ISO activation. Use either of the following methods:

a.	position the cursor in the Output Port Number text box and type the port number, then press the Enter key

b.	select the port in the Output Port Alpha list box

2.	When an output port is isolated, it is completely cut off from everyone else in the intercom system, except the person who activates the ISO key. However, the person that activates the ISO key can still receive incoming calls during ISO operation. To block incoming calls, place a check mark in the ISO Self check box.

3.	Select one or more of the Scroll Enable check boxes to change the type of scrolling that you want to allow.

4.	Click the Next or Prev button to select and setup additional ISOs. Or, click Done to finish.

This completes the ISO setup procedure. To use an ISO, assign it to a key on a keypanel using the Keypanel Setup procedure.

Remember to you send your changes to the intercom system.


Edit GPI Input

In this dialog, you select the intercom port and the intercom "key" that will be activated whenever the selected GPI input is activated. Note that there does not have to be an actual keypanel installed at the selected intercom port. Each GPI input itself acts like a key. Alternatively, you could connect a keypanel to the intercom port and set up one or more GPI inputs as well. This would allow you to activate key assignments not only by pressing the keypanel keys, but also by activating the GPI inputs. In either case, you set up the GPI input as follows:

1.	Select an intercom port by either of the following methods:

a.	position the cursor in the Keypanel Port Number text box and type the port number, then press the Tab key

b.	select a port in the Keypanel Port Alpha list box

NOTE: 	To completely clear a GPI input assignment that you set up previously and stop using it, enter 0 in the Keypanel Port Number text box, or select the blank key assignment in the Keypanel Port Alpha list box.

2.	Position the cursor in the Key Number text box and type a key number between 1 and 64.

3.	More about setup pages and key numbers

4.	Identify which type of key the GPI input will activate by selecting the Talk Key or Listen Key check box.

NOTE: 	You can temporarily deactivate a GPI input by checking the No Key box. This is the same as entering 0 for the key number. The No Key assignment is included so that you can reactivate the GPI input again later without having to redefine all of the parameters.

5.	Click Done.

6.	After a GPI input is setup, go to keypanel setup. Select the intercom port and key you assigned above, and then assign that key as described in the keypanel setup procedure.

This completes the GPI input setup procedure. After you send these changes to the intercom system, activating the GPI input will activate the destination that you have assigned to the key.


Edit UPL Statement

Comment text box

You can use the comment field for any optional comments regarding the UPL statement.

Enabled check box

You may wish to deactivate a UPL statement, but keep it for future use. To disable the UPL statement, remove the check mark.

Invert check box

This check box inverts the input condition. For example, the input condition could be "Talk Key", which, by itself, means "If a specified talk key is on".  Now, by checking the invert check box, the meaning would change to "If a specified talk key is off". The invert check box is often used in one UPL statement to cancel an action caused by some other UPL statement. (See the Important Note for Force Talk Key and Force Listen Key.)

Input Condition List Boxes

Input conditions are used to specify what types of events will cause the intercom system to perform an output action. Each UPL statement can have one or two input conditions.

Input Condition	Description

UPL Statement	If a specified UPL statement is true, …

GPI Input	If a (system) GPI input is activated, …

GPI Input (Local)	If a (local) GPI input is activated, …

GPI Output	If a (system) GPI output is activated, …

GPI Output (Local)	If a (local) GPI output is activated, …

Talk Key	If a specified talk key on a keypanel is on, …

Listen Key	If a specified listen key on a keypanel is on, …

UPL Resource	If a UPL Resource key is activated, …

Crosspoint	If a specified crosspoint is activated, …

Input Talking	If a specified port is talking to anyone, …

Output Listening	If a specified port is listening to anyone, …

Headset Transfer	If the headset transfer switches on a keypanel is activated...

Current Date	If the current date is, …

Current Time	If the current time is, …

IFB Interrupted	If the specified IFB is interrupted, ….

Operation List Box

Operations are required when:

•	The input condition is Current Date or Current time.

•	Both A and B Input conditions are specified.

In all other cases, the Operation list box is left blank.

Operations for Current Time and Current Date

Operation	Description

=	When the current time (or date) equals…

! =	When the current time (or date) does not equal…

<	When the current time (or date) is before…

>=	When the current time (or date) is later than or equal to…

>	When the current time (or date) is later than…

<=	When the current time (or date) is before or equal to…

NOTE: 	Operations for current time have a 5-second window. For example, if you put in a test for equality for a specific time (e.g. "=12:00:00"), the given time is matched for a 5-second window, i.e. it will return TRUE for the time 12:00:00 through 12:00:05. A test for inequality returns TRUE for all but this 5-second window.

Operations for Two Input Conditions

Operation	Description

AND	If input A and input B are both true, then …

OR	If input A or input B (or both) are true, then …

XOR	If input A or input B (but not both) are true, then …

NOTE: 	It may appear from the above, that you cannot use the relational Operations AND, OR, or XOR with Current Time and Current Date. However, this is not the case. For example, you may wish to load a file named 5pmset.adm when the Current Time is 4:30 pm AND the Current Date is 04/15/98. To do this, you set up one UPL statement that uses Current Time as the Input condition, and another UPL Statement that uses Current Date as the Input Condition. For both of these statements, you select “Do Nothing” as the Output Action. You then create a third UPL statement that uses the other two UPL Statements as Input Conditions, with AND as the Operation. The final description of the third UPL Statement would read: “If the results of UPL statement #1 are true, AND the results of UPL statement #2 are true, load file ‘5pmset.adm’ from disk and send it to the intercom system.” As you can probably see from this example, with just a few simple Input conditions and Operation types, it is possible to program a wide variety of actions.

Output Action List Box

The Output Action list box specifies what will occur when the specified input conditions are true. The following output actions are available:

Close Crosspoint	Close the crosspoint from the specified input to the specified output

Inhibit Crosspoint	Open the crosspoint from the specified input to the specified output

Assert GPI Output	Activate the specified (system) GPI output

Inhibit GPI Output	Deactivate the specified (system) GPI output

Assert GPI Output (Local)	Activate the specified (local) GPI output

Inhibit GPI Output (Local)	Deactivate the specified (local) GPI output

Force Talk Key Closure	Force the specified talk key on (Important!)

Force Talk Key Open	Force the specified talk key off (Important!)

Dim Crosspoint Volume	Causes the specified output to hear the specified input at a reduced volume level.

Load File	Causes a file to be loaded from disk and sent to the intercom system. (The intercom system must be operating in SERVER mode.)

Force Listen Key Closure	Force the specified listen key on (Important!)

Force Listen Key Open	Force the specified listen key off (Important!)

NOTE: 	In most cases, when the input conditions for a UPL statement are true, the output action will occur. Then when the input conditions cease to be true, the output action will terminate. The two exceptions are Load File and Force Key (Talk or Listen). When a UPL statement loads a file, there is now way to "unload" the file when the UPL statement is no longer true. When a talk or listen key is forced on (or off) with a UPL statement, you must use a second UPL statement to force the key off (or on) when the first UPL statement becomes false. See Important Note for Forced Talk and Listen Keys. Also, for an example of how this works, see Using Keypanel Keys to Control Talk and Listen for Non-Keypanel Devices.

Description

As you build a UPL statement, a plain-text description of the statement will be built in the Description box.


Select Gain Type

Click Crosspoint Gains or Party Line Gains, then click OK.


Edit Alpha / Description

Tip: 	You used either of two methods to open this dialog, and you may not be aware of the alternate method. Both methods are convenient under certain circumstances:

•	To name several intercom ports, party lines etc. at the same time.

•	To name an intercom port, party line etc. while you are setting it up, use Ctrl-F12.

1.	In the Description text box, type a brief description (up to 24 characters) of what you are naming. For example, if you are editing the Alpha and Description for party line 1, and the party line will be used for a group of cameras in studio 1, you might type Studio 1 Cameras. Note that the descriptions are optional, but can help to identify resources while you are editing the intercom configuration.

2.	In the Alpha text box, type a 4-character name or abbreviation*. This is the name that will appear in keypanel alphanumeric displays, and it should be meaningful to keypanel operators. For a camera party line in studio 1, you could use "1CAM", for example.

3.	If the trunking feature is activated, there will be an Alias text box*, and the same name that you typed for the Alpha will also appear here. This is the name that will appear in keypanel alphanumeric displays in remote intercom systems. If a different name will be more meaningful to keypanel operators in a remote intercom system, type that name instead. You should also type a different name if the current name conflicts with a name that is already in use in a remote intercom system.

4.	If the Lookup alphas feature is activated in the Intercom Configuration Options menu, you can enter one of the standard lookup names for use with CS9400+ keypad sequences.

5.	Click Next or Previous if you want to view or change another Alpha / Description of the same type. Or, click Done if you are finished.
You can click Cancel at any time to quit without changing the currently selected Alpha / Description. However, any other Alpha / Description that you changed will remain changed. To cancel these changes, use the Undo button.

* NOTES

There is no Alpha, or Alias, or Lookup alpha for either GPI Input or Inter-panel Dim. This is because these items are never assigned to keys.


Save and Save As

Select a drive and folder where you want to save the setup file. We recommend you use the Setups folder, which is located in your AZedit folder.

Note: Use only Windows 3.1 file names (no more than 8 characters).


Open

Select the drive or network location where the file is located that you want to open. After selecting the desired file, you can click the Preview button to view the list of resources that are contained in the file. While viewing the list of resources, you can press F1 for help, or click here. Click OK to open the file.


Partial Save

Use this dialog in either ONLINE or FILE mode to select items in the current setup file and then save only those items to a file. You can also use this dialog to see which items you have changed during the current edit session.

NOTE: When you first open the Partial Save Dialog, all items that you have changed (but have not yet saved or sent to the intercom system) are already selected and can be immediately saved to a file if desired. You can simply press OK and immediately save only those items. Or, you can remove or add items as follows:

1.	In the Select Resource Type list box, select the resource type that you want to add or remove. The list of available resources for that type will appear in the Available window. Also, any resources of that type that you have changed will be listed in the Selected window.

2.	To add items, select them in the Available window and then click Add.

3.	To remove items from the Selected window, select them and then click Remove.

4.	Repeat steps 1-3 for each resource type that you want to save.

Important: If you have made changes to any settings that affect an intercom port or a keypanel, read this. The settings for intercom ports are split into 2 groups: Port settings and Keypanel settings. Port settings consist of the port name (Alpha), the Scroll Enable settings, the IFB priority setting, and (if trunking is enabled) the Trunk Priority and Trunk IFB Priority settings. Keypanel settings consist of key assignments, the Setup Restrict setting (for setup pages), the Setup Page assignments, and the Enable Tone, Keypanel Privacy, and TIF Dial-Out Restrict settings (accessible via the Edit button). When you are using Partial Save to save Keypanel / Port settings, make sure you look at both Ports and Keypanels in the Select Resource Type list box.

5.	Click OK when you are ready to save. Select a drive and folder as when saving any other file. Use only Windows 3.1 file name conventions (no more than 8 characters).


Print

Party Line, Special List, Dim Table Print

In the Party Line, Special List or Dim Table setup views, the print command will print the setup information for the party line, special list, or Dim table that you are currently viewing.

IFB, GPI Out, ISO, GPI In, UPL Print

In the IFB, GPI Out, GPI In, or UPL Statement main screens, the print command prints the summarized information for all IFBs, GPI Outputs, etc.

Crosspoint (XPT) Print

In the Crosspoint Status view, the print command prints the crosspoint status from the selected intercom port to all other intercom ports.

Crosspoint Gain Print

In the Crosspoint Gain view, the print command prints the crosspoint gain information for the selected intercom port listening to each of the other intercom ports.

Party Line Gain Print

In the Party Line Gain view the print command prints the party line gain information for the selected intercom port listening to each of the party lines.

Alpha Print

In the Port Alpha view, the print command prints the list of names for whichever type of resource (intercom ports, party lines, etc.) is currently selected.

LCP-102 Print

In the LCP-102 setup view, the print command prints the complete setup information for all LCP-102's in all modes of operation.

Status and Version Information

In any of the views listed in the Status menu, the print command prints the complete information for the selected view.


Print Setup

The print setup dialog lets you select whatever options are available for the currently selected printer.


Print Preview

You can view the print result before printing.


Search for Key Assignment

To Search for a Key assignment, do the following:

1.	In the Search for Key Assignment dialog box, select the radio button for the type of key assignment that you want to search for.

2.	In the list at the right side of the dialog box, select the name of the key assignment, and then click Do Search. Or, just double-click on the name.
The Key Assignment Search Results list will appear. This list contains the names of all ports that have keys assigned to the name you selected.

3.	Click the first name in the list, and then click Go To Panel. Or, just double-click on the first name in the list.
The Keypanel / Ports edit screen will open for the chosen port.

4.	Locate the intercom key with the name you are looking for.

NOTE: The key may not be on the current setup page. In this case select another setup page in the Page list box. You might have to check all 4 setup pages to locate the key.

Now, use the normal key assignment procedure to change or delete the key assignment.

5.	Repeat the above steps until all intercom ports in the search list have been changed.

NOTE: For a detailed example of how to use search when moving a user to a new intercom port, click here.


Key Assignment Select LCP-102

1.	Select the desired assignment type from the list box.

2.	Scroll through the alphas in the list box to locate the alpha that you want to assign to the key.

3.	Double-click on the alpha to assign it to the key, or click once on the alpha, then click the OK button to make the assignment.


Application Preferences, General Settings

Automatically create .BAK files (default = checked)

When this item is checked, a backup setup file will be saved every time you save a setup file. The backup setup file will be created in the same folder as the setup file. It will have the file extension .bak, while the setup file will have the file extension. adm. The backup setup file retains all of the previous settings. In this way, if you want to undo all of the changes that you have made since the last time you saved the setup file, you can simply open the .bak file, and then resave it using Save As on the File menu. When you do this, change the .bak extension to the .adm extension.

If you remove the check mark from this box, no backup files will be created, and you will not be able to recover your previous settings after saving a setup file.

Confirm file name before Save in FILE mode (default = checked)

When this item is checked, you will be given a chance to confirm the file name and folder location whenever you save a setup file. If you remove the check mark, you will not see the confirmation message.

Warn when editing keypanel setup for IFB output port (default = checked)

Typically, an intercom port being used as the output port for an IFB does not have a keypanel connected. Usually, there is some type of IFB belt pack or similar device connected instead. Such a device does not have any talk or listen keys, so you should not normally be making any key assignments to that intercom port. You can still assign keys as with any other intercom port, but chances are pretty good that you may have forgotten that the port is set up as an IFB output. Consequently, the configuration software will normally display a reminder message if you open an intercom port for editing that has been defined as an IFB output port. If you do not want to see this reminder message, you can remove the check mark from this setting.

Automatically latch disable keys when IFB is assigned checkbox

If this option is checked, the act of assigning an IFB on a keypanel will cause the key where the IFB is assigned to have its latching option disabled.

Warn when setting key states on an incompatible keypanel

If this option is checked, a warning will be generated when a key state is set on a keypanel that does not support the feature.

Setup Files (.ADM):

This must be filled in with the path to where the Setup Files will be stored (for example, C:\TELEX\AZedit\V3.1.1\Setup).


Application Preferences, Startup / Shutdown Settings

Auto connect at startup (default=checked)

If this box is checked, AZedit will always attempt to connect to the intercom system whenever you run the application. If it can connect, it will automatically upload the intercom system setup file, and ONLINE will display in the lower-right corner of the screen (unless SERVER mode is also activated, below). ONLINE mode is convenient if you are mostly using the configuration software to monitor and/or make changes to the current intercom system configuration. However, some users may prefer to work on setup files offline (in FILE mode) and save them to disk for later transmission to the intercom system. In this case, you may wish to remove the check mark from this setting. Note that you can also exit to FILE mode at any time from ONLINE mode.

Auto enter SERVER mode (default=unchecked)

When this item is checked, AZedit will always attempt to connect to the intercom system whenever you start the application. (It does not matter what setting is selected for Auto connect at startup.) If it can connect, it will automatically enter SERVER mode, and SERVER will be indicated in the lower-right corner of the computer screen. In this mode, you can monitor system activity and view settings in the online file, but you cannot make changes, and you cannot manually send new files to the intercom system. If the application cannot connect to the intercom system, it will generate an error message, and will then enter FILE mode. SERVER mode is ideal if your system configuration is working well and requires no changes.

NOTE: If Auto enter SERVER mode cannot be selected, you may have to activate the server feature. Click on the Advanced tab and place a check mark next to Enable SERVER mode support. Click Apply, then select the Startup / Shutdown tab again. Auto enter SERVER mode can now be selected.

Important: SERVER mode is required if your intercom system is using UPL statements to periodically download setup files. You can permanently configure this application for SERVER mode operation by placing a check mark next to this item and then removing the check mark next to Enable SERVER mode support (located under the Advanced tab settings).

Warn about changes in configuration (default =checked)

If this item is checked, you will see a Configuration Conflict message whenever you connect to an intercom system and AZedit detects that its configuration is set differently than the intercom system. For more information, click here.

Save window position on exit (default=checked)

If this item is checked, the size and position of the application window will be saved when you exit the application. The same window position and size will then be used when you restart the application. If this item is not checked, the application will always start at full-screen size.

Ask for confirmation before exit (default=checked)

Leave this box checked if you want confirmation when you exit the application. If you remove the checkmark, the application will shut down immediately, without confirmation, when you exit. The confirmation may seem inconvenient, but it does provide some protection against accidental activation of the close window button or accidental selection of the Exit command on the File menu.

Save advanced communications settings locally

If this box is checked, the system will remember the advanced communications settings after a 1st birthday event. This is important in the situation where multiple PCs running AZedit are connected to the system. If the box is not checked AND a 1st birthday occurs, then only the PC connected to the system using the standard connector will have control of the system.


Application Preferences, Alphas Settings

Alpha and Alias Description

NOTE: The intercom will automatically set the Alpha size to show, if it can tell what size the keypanel uses, however, it will default to 4-character alphas if the size is not apparent.

Default alpha size (default = 4)

By default, this item is set to a 4-character alpha and alias length, and the item is not selectable. For keypanels that can display more than 4-characters (as of this writing, there are none) you will have to activate this item as follows:

1.	Exit AZedit.

2.	Open the AZedit.ini file in a text editor, such as Windows Notepad.
This file is located in the AZedit folder of your computer.

3.	Scroll down to the [alphas] settings.

4.	Change EnableMultiSizeSupport=N to EnableMultiSizeSupport=Y.

5.	Save the AZedit.ini file as a plain text file in the same location and with the same name.

6.	Restart AZedit.

7.	In the Options menu, select Preferences, and then select the Alphas tab.
The Default alpha size list box should now be selectable, and you can select any of the available sizes.

Sort alphas (Default = by number)

This item controls the order in which resources (ports, party lines, etc.) are sorted in scroll lists.

Allow alpha edit from any view (CTRL+F12) (default=checked)

CTRL+F12 alpha editing is a convenient way to change the name for an intercom port, party line etc. while you are setting it up. For more information about this feature, click here.

Show all alias sizes on alpha views (default = unchecked check box, not selectable)

This item can only be selected after you activate the Default alpha size list box as described previously. As of this writing, there are no keypanels that support multiple alias sizes.

Automatically check for duplicate alphas after opening a file (default = checked)

We recommend that you leave this checked. For more information, click here.

Prompt before checking for duplicate alphas (default = checked)

If this item is checked, you will be asked if you want the application to proceed with an automatic check for duplicate alphas when opening a file. In a very large intercom system, a check for duplicate alphas can take some time. The prompt lets you bypass the check and save some time when you know that the file that is being opened does not contain any duplicate alphas.


Application Preferences, Logging Settings

Logging Description

Enable SERVER mode logging (default = not checked)

When checked, this allows standard talk/listen logging while the application is running in SERVER mode.

NOTE: If Enable SERVER mode logging cannot be selected, you may have to activate the server feature. Click on the Advanced tab and place a check mark next to Enable SERVER mode support. Click Apply, and then select the Logging tab again. Enable SERVER mode logging can now be selected.

Enable standard talk/listen logging support (default = checked)

This must be checked if you want to record talk and listen key activity.

Set standard log mode at startup to: (default = not checked)

This item must be checked in order for the following items to be selectable.

Disable Logging

Turns off logging if it has been enabled using Log to File or Log to Serial Port.

Log to File

Records talk and listen key activations to a file on disk.

Log to Serial Port

Works only with ADAM and ADAM CS Intercom Systems. Outputs the talk and listen key activity via a dedicated RS232 port of the intercom system. For the ADAM Intercom System, the dedicated logging port is J9 of the XCP-ADAM-MC Master Controller Breakout Panel: pin 3 is RX and pin 8 is TX. For the ADAM CS Intercom Frame, the dedicated logging port is J902: pin 3 is RX and pin 8 is TX. Your computer must be running appropriate communications software (Hyperterminal, Crosstalk, Procom etc.) to capture the logging text to a file or to monitor intercom activity. The port parameters are 9600-baud, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit. There is no handshaking on this port.

Log Files (.LOG):

This must be filled in with the path to where the Log Files will be stored (for example, C:\TELEX\AZedit\V3.1.1\LOG).


Application Preferences, Advanced Settings

Enable panel poll delay support (default = not checked)

This should only be checked if you are connecting keypanels to the intercom system via a remote modem link. Panel Poll Delay description.

Enable TIF / phone support (default = not checked)

This need only be checked if you have a TIF INTERFACE Telephone Interface

Enable trunking support (default = not checked)

This applies only to ADAM and ADAM CS Intercom Systems. It should only be checked if your intercom system is part of a larger trunking intercom system.

Enable SERVER mode support (default = checked)

Place a check mark here if you want to use Server mode.

Allow intercom resizing in ONLINE mode (default = not checked)

This applies only to ADAM and ADAM CS Intercom Systems. Place a check mark here if you need to change the intercom configuration in the master controller cards.

Allow crosspoint inspection in FILE mode (default = not checked)

This feature exists only to demonstrate crosspoint inspection when the application is running in FILE mode and is not communicating with the intercom system. You can view true crosspoint inspection in ONLINE or SERVER modes. Crosspoint Inspection is located in the Crosspoint Status screen.

Allow firmware download (default = checked)

This must be checked if you want to use AZedit to update firmware in intercom system components.

Allow key state changes (default = not checked

If this feature is checked, keys on keypanels can be turned on and off via the keypanel view.

Firmware Files (.HEX, .MOT, .BIB):

This must be filled in with the path to where the Firmware Files will be stored (for example, C:\TELEX\AZedit\V3.1.1\FIRMWARE).

SNMP Configuration Files (AZS):

This must be filled in with the path to where the SNMP Configuration Files will be stored (for example, C:\TELEX\AZedit\V3.1.1\SNMP).


Merge Dialog

Select the drive or network location where the file is located that you want to merge into the setup file that you are currently editing. After selecting the desired file, you can click the Preview button before you load the file, to view the list of resources that are contained in the file. Or, you can just click OK, and the list of resources will also appear, with the option to cancel the load or merge. While viewing the list of resources, you can press F1 for help, or click here.


Key Assignment Search Results

1.	Click on the first name in the list, and then click on Go To Panel. Or, just double-click on the first name in the list.
The Keypanel / Ports edit screen will open for the chosen port.

2.	Locate the intercom key with the name that you are looking for.

NOTE: The key may not be on the current setup page. In this case select another setup page in the Page list box. You might have to check all 4 setup pages to locate the key.

3.	Use the normal key assignment procedure to change the key assignment.
You should enter the name of the new intercom port to which the user will be connected.

4.	Repeat the above steps until all intercom ports in the search list have been changed.


Communications Dialog

To connect to the intercom system via a COM port on your computer, click the Serial radio button. Then, select the COM Port to which the intercom system is connected. Note: you can select COM1 to COM4 in the list, or type in some other COM port number if that number is available on the configuration computer.

The Baud Rate that you select here must match the baud rate setting in your intercom system hardware. By default, AZedit is set for COM1 and 38,400 kbps (38.4K baud). This must match the baud rate setting of the master controllers in the ADAM or ADAM CS frame (DIP switch #1). The 38,4000 kbps setting provides the fastest possible file uploads and downloads, but you may experience more communication errors operating at this speed than at a lower baud rate setting. Cable lengths of 30-50 ft (9-15 meters) have been used successfully with the 38,4000 kpbs setting. However, this may not always work under all operating conditions. If you suspect that you are experiencing communication problems operating at this speed, check the Master Controller Status screen. Rapid accumulations of communication errors will be indicated in the right side of that screen. In such cases, check cable construction, or cable routing, or use a shorter cable. Try to find a remedy which will still permit operation at 38,4000 kbps.

NOTE: If you need to reduce the baud rate (for whatever reason) you may be able to recoup some upload/download speed by reducing or eliminating unused resources in the master controller intercom configuration. For more information about the intercom configuration, click here.

Advanced Settings (ADAM Only)

An ADAM Intercom System can communicate with up to 3 separate AZedit sessions, each running on separate computers. Multiple sessions are not supported for ADAM CS. To use this feature, you must configure the Advanced communications settings on the computer running the primary AZedit session. This is the computer connected to J1 of the XCP-ADAM-MC Master Controller Breakout Panel. Second and third computers can then be connected to J9 and J10 of the Master Controller Breakout Panel.

Baud Rate: Select the highest baud rate that will work correctly. Unlike the baud rate setting for the primary AZedit session, which is set by a master controller DIP switch, the baud rates for second and third computers are set in software, and there are no DIP switches.

Protocols enabled define what can be connected to port. If AZedit is selected, you can run either of these configuration programs on the second and third computers. You can also use the second or third computer in SERVER mode with UPL statements.  Note: If more than one computer is connected in SERVER mode, all must have any setup files that need to be downloaded. This is because it is indeterminate which one will be requested to send a setup file. Normally, it is recommended that only one computer be connected in SERVER mode.

Command line protocol is used with terminal emulation programs such as Windows Hyperterminal, Pro Com, Crosstalk, etc. Command line protocol is used for automation purposes (routing switches etc. for video etc.)


Paste Special Dialog for Scroll Enable

Generally, you will use this screen to set the Scroll Enable settings for all party lines, IFBs etc. in one operation.

Scroll Enable Setup for all Party Lines or all Special Lists

1.	Access party line setup or special list setup.

2.	Set the Scroll Enable check boxes the way that you want them to appear for all party lines.
It does not matter which party line you use to do this.

3.	In the Edit menu at the top of the screen, select Copy.

4.	In the Edit menu, select Paste Special.
The Paste Special dialog for Scroll Enable will appear.

5.	In the Destination field, select All, then click Paste.

6.	Send your changes to the intercom system.

Scroll Enable Setup for all IFBs, or all GPI Output, or all ISO's

1.	Access IFB setup, or GPI OUT setup, or ISO setup.

2.	Double-click on any IFB, or GPI Output, or ISO to open the Edit dialog.
It does not matter which one you select.

3.	In the Edit dialog, set the Scroll Enable check boxes the way that you want them to appear for all IFBs, or all GPI Outputs, or all ISO's.

4.	Click Done to return to the list of IFBs, or GPI Outputs, or ISO's.

5.	In the Edit menu at the top of the screen, select Copy.

6.	In the Edit menu, select Paste Special.
The Paste Special dialog for Scroll Enable will appear.

7.	In the Destination field, select All, then click Paste.

8.	Remember to send your changes to the intercom system.


Paste Special Dialog for Keypanels / Ports

After you have copied the entire setup for an intercom port (using the Copy command in the Edit menu), use this dialog window to paste selected portions of the copied setup to select other intercom ports or to all intercom ports. Here are some examples of common uses for Copy and Paste Special:

Key Restriction Setup using Copy and Paste Special

Setup Page Restriction using Copy and Paste Special

Assigning Auto-Follow to all Listen Keys using Copy and Paste Special

Scroll Enable Setup using Copy and Paste Special


Confirmation-ONLINE Save As

When you save the ONLINE configuration to a file on disk, AZedit will always upload the current intercom settings before proceeding with the save. These settings are then merged with any changes that you have made, but have not yet sent to the intercom system. Thus, the file that you save actually contains current system settings plus any changes that you have made.

If you choose to stay in ONLINE mode, you can later send changes you have made to the intercom system, and your ONLINE configuration will then match what you saved to disk (assuming that no keypanel operators make any changes after you save).

If you choose to enter FILE mode, note that the current system settings, plus your changes, will be saved to disk; however, the changes will not be sent to the intercom system. In this case, if you want to update the intercom system to match the file that you have saved, you must enter ONLINE mode. Then, select Send File, and send the file that you saved.

The reason for the prompt to either stay in ONLINE mode or exit to FILE mode is that you may have one of several reasons for saving the current ONLINE configuration:

1.	You may have completed work on your intercom system configuration and have verified that everything is working correctly. Now, you want to make a backup copy of that configuration. In this case, you can either stay in ONLINE mode to continue monitoring intercom system operation. Or, you can disconnect from the intercom system by entering FILE mode. (See the note about backup copies, at the end of this topic.)

2.	You may wish to take a "snapshot" of the current intercom system configuration before making trial changes in ONLINE mode. Then, if you decide you want to undo your changes, you can use Send File in the Online menu and send your saved file to the intercom system to restore the previous settings.

3.	You may wish to take a "snapshot" of the current intercom system and then edit that snapshot in FILE mode to be a new setup file. Later, you can enter ONLINE mode and send the new configuration to the intercom system.

NOTE: A backup copy of your intercom system configuration is not needed for protection against a loss of power to the intercom system, since the system's master controller retains the system configuration even during a loss of power. However, the backup copy does give you protection against a complete failure of the master controller itself. (A backup master controller in the ADAM or ADAM CS frame also accomplishes this.) Also, a backup disk copy gives you protection against unwanted changes to the intercom system configuration.


Select Device Dialog

1.	Click the radio button for the type of device that you want to look at, then click OK.

NOTE: There is no selection for the Standby Master Controller because this circuit card only communicates when it becomes the Active Master Controller. If you want to view the Standby Master Controller version, eject the Active Master Controller from the frame. (The Active Master Controller is the one with the upper-left red LED turned on, or red LED number 23.) Once you have ejected the Active Master Controller, the Standby Master Controller will then take over as the new Active Master Controller.


Download Device Firmware Dialog

See Downloading Hardware Updates.


Duplicate Alpha Warning

You may see this warning when you assign an alpha name that is already being used. You may also see this warning when you select Check for duplicate alphas in the Alphas menu. The abbreviations in the Type column indicate the following communication types:

IFB Indicates a conflict with an IFB name

ISO Indicates a conflict with an ISO name

PP Indicates a conflict with an intercom port name

RY Indicates a conflict with a GPI Output name

SF Indicates a conflict with a Special Function name

SL Indicates a conflict with a Special List name

UR Indicates a conflict with a UPL Resource

If you are checking for duplicate alphas, and you want to change a duplicate name, double-click on that name in the duplicate alpha list and then make the change.


Send All

This dialog lists all of the resources that you have changed since the last time you sent changes to the intercom system. All of these changes will be sent. You cannot select items to send. If you check Details, the alpha name associated with each item will be displayed.

NOTE: The settings for intercom ports are split into 2 groups: Port settings and Keypanel settings. Port settings consist of the port name (Alpha), the Scroll Enable settings, the IFB priority setting, and (if trunking is enabled) the Trunk Priority and Trunk IFB Priority settings. Keypanel settings consist of key assignments, the Setup Restrict setting, the Setup Page assignments, and all Advanced settings. Note that since port Alphas are associated with the Port settings, you will not see an Alpha name displayed next to a Keypanel setting when you check Details.


Open

Select the drive or network location where the file is located that you want to open. After selecting the desired file, you can click the Preview button to view the list of resources that are contained in the file. While viewing the list of resources, you can press F1 for help, or click here. Click OK to open the file.


Save

1.	Select the drive and folder where you want to save your file.

2.	Enter a File Name in the File Name text box.
 File names must use the Windows short file name convention of 8 characters.

3.	Click Save.
The file is saved.

To activate the saved file, you must LOAD the file into AZedit and then SEND changes to the intercom.


Save As

Select the drive and folder where you want to save your file, and then enter a File Name in the File Name text box. File names must use the Windows short file name convention of 8 characters.


Keypanel Print Options

You can print the setup page and key assignment information for selected keypanels. You can also print designation strips. Designation strips are commonly used with keypanels that do not have alphanumeric displays but do have a designation strip holder to identify the key assignments.

Select Keypanels: Select one or more keypanels (or All Keypanels) at the left side of the screen.

Setup Page Report: Click on this if you want to print all of the talk and listen key assignments for all 4 setup pages.

Designation Strips: Click this if you want to print designation strips to fit in keypanels designation strip holders.

•	Use Listen Assignments: Normally, only the talk key assignments are printed. If you want to print the listen key assignments instead, check this box.

•	Compressed Output / Expanded Output: If neither of these boxes is checked, designation strips will be printed for each setup page, with space between the setup pages. If Compressed Output is checked, all designation strips will be printed with no space between them. This saves extra work when cutting the strips apart. If Expanded Output is checked, the designation strips will print not only with space between the setup pages, but also, with space between keys 1-8 and 9-16 of each setup page. These strips require the most work to cut apart.


Load File

1.	Select the drive and directory where the file is located that you want to load.

2.	Click Open.
The setup file is loaded into AZedit.


Send File

1.	Select the drive and directory where the file is located that you want to send.

2.	Click Send.
The setup file is sent to the intercom.


Cancel Changes

Cancel the operation without making changes.


About Help

This help version covers 3.1.1 and earlier of AZedit. Copyright © 2006


Select Active Setup Page

In each of the 3 operating modes (Analog I/O Gains, PAP, CDP) there are 4 setup pages. Each setup page contains a complete set of assignments for the front panel of the LCP-102. You can view and change assignments on all 4 pages in AZedit, but only one page are used by the LCP-102. This is the active page.


Edit UPL Resource

Check the Scroll Enable check boxes to determine how the UPL Resource will appear in scroll lists.


Crosspoint Inspection Results

When the crosspoint is open

Input Gain and Output Gain will be displayed for the affected intercom ports. For example, suppose you are inspecting the crosspoint for intercom port 1 listening to intercom port 2. Assume for a moment that the crosspoint was closed. In this case, the microphone signal from the person at intercom port 2 will enter the intercom system at the port 2 input and will be affected by the port 2 Analog Input Gain setting. The signal will then be internally routed to the output of intercom port 1. Assuming no other internal gain adjustments, the signal will only be affected by the port 1 Analog Output Gain setting. AZedit already knows what settings you have entered for input and output gain, so even if the crosspoint is not closed, it can display the pertinent gain information as follows:

Port 2 input gain: This is the current Analog Input Gain setting for intercom port 2. A setting of +0.0 dB indicates that the port 2 input signals is entering the intercom system unaffected. Settings of +1.0 dB, +2.0 dB, etc. indicate that the port 2 input gain is being boosted. All other settings being equal, this means that all ports, including port 1 will hear intercom port 2 at a higher level than normal. Settings of -1.0 dB, -2.0 dB, etc. have the opposite effect.

Port 1 output gain: This is the current setting for the Analog Output Gain from intercom port 1. A setting of +0.0 dB indicates that the port 1 output signal is exiting the intercom system unaffected. Settings of +1.0 dB, +2.0 dB, etc. indicate that the port 1 output gain is being boosted. All other things being equal, this means that port 1 will hear all other ports, including port 2, at a higher level than normal. Settings of -1.0 dB, -2.0 dB, etc. have the opposite effect.

When the crosspoint is closed

The Input and Output Gain will be displayed as described above. All other pertinent gain information for the entire audio path will also be displayed as follows:

Current Gain: This is the combined effect of any or all of the following settings which might currently be activated, and which can all modify the gain of a crosspoint:

•	Crosspoint Gain

•	Party Line Gain

•	Inter-panel Dim Table participation

•	IFB Dim Level (specified during IFB setup )

•	Dim Crosspoint Volume (a UPL Statement Output Action specified during UPL statement setup)

A setting of +0.0 dB indicates no effect. Settings of +1.0 dB, +2.0 dB, etc. indicate a boost in level. Settings of -1.0 dB, -2.0 dB, etc. indicate a cut in level. Generally, you will rarely see more than one of the above settings affecting a crosspoint at the same time. However, there are occasions where this might happen. In this case, the settings will be added together. When this happens, keep in mind that the numbers you are looking at are standard audio reference levels and not absolute numbers. When you add two audio signals together that are at the same audio level, you actually double the level. In terms of audio reference levels, each doubling of level represents a change of +6.0 dB.

Example: A keypanel operator at intercom port 1 presses a listen key to listen to a person at intercom port 2. Port 2 is also a member of party line 1, and the keypanel operator at port 1 is also listening to party line 1 via another listen key. This is an unlikely scenario, but if it does happen, the point-to-point listen gain for port 1 listening to port 2 will be add together with the party line listen gain setting for port 1 listening to party line 1. If both of these settings happen to be +0.0 dB, the result will be a Current Gain of +6.0 dB. The keypanel operator at port 1 will actually perceive a slight boost in level from the person at intercom port 2 with respect to the other members of the party line.

Overall path gain: This number indicates the combined effect of the crosspoint gain, input gain, and output gain settings. A setting of +0.0 dB indicates no effect: intercom port 2 will hear intercom port 1 at the standard level. Settings of +1.0 dB, +2.0 dB, etc. indicate that the combined effect of all the adjustments will cause port 2 to hear port 1 at a higher level than normal. Settings of -1.0 dB, -2.0 dB, etc. have the opposite effect.

Crosspoint Inspection in FILE mode

If Allow crosspoint inspection in FILE mode is activated (Options menus, Preferences, Advanced tab), you can view a "DEMO" of crosspoint inspection. In FILE mode, AZedit has no way of knowing the actual status of a crosspoint. However, it can demonstrate the theoretical effect of a closed crosspoint by generating a random key press simulation and then looking up all of the relevant gain settings. It then displays this "DEMO" information in a manner similar to what was previously described above for a closed crosspoint. The primary purpose of the DEMO feature is to demonstrate to prospective users how the crosspoint inspection feature operates when no intercom connection is currently available.


Reset Intercom Configuration

NOTE: For assistance with this procedure, contact your intercom system technical support representative.


Intercom Resizing Test Results

If the message indicates that the test was a success, click the OK button in the Test Results dialog, then click the Apply button in the Intercom Configuration dialog. When you see the check box Make this configuration the system default, you will normally want to place a check mark. Otherwise, your changes will only be remembered


Clear port status information

This dialog lets you clear error counters and status messages for one or more intercom ports. For example, the intercom system will generate a "Bad Cut" message for an intercom port where it previously detected a keypanel but now does not detect one. This could happen not only if the keypanel fails, but also if it is turned off or disconnected and moved to another port. Once a keypanel is repaired or turned on, the "Bad Cut" status message for that port will automatically clear, but such is not the case for a keypanel that has been moved. In this case you may want to clear the "Bad Cut" status messages for that port.


Partial Save (from FILE mode)

Select the drive and folder where you want to save your file, then enter a File Name in the File Name text box. File names must use the Windows short file name convention of 8 characters.


Partial Save (Online setup)

Select the drive and folder where you want to save your file, then enter a File Name in the File Name text box. File names must use the Windows short file name convention of 8 characters.


Keypanel Privacy

The keypanel privacy feature prevents other keypanels from listening to the private keypanel by means of a point-to-point listen key. However, if the private keypanel talks to another keypanel, it will be heard.

NOTE: Keypanel privacy does not prevent someone from listening to a private panel via other means. For example, if the private keypanel is a member of a party line or special list, it can be heard by anyone listening to the party line or special list.

The keypanel privacy feature requires ADAM Master Controller Firmware Version V9.5.0 or greater.


Intercom Configuration: Options

Important!  We strongly recommend that you read and understand the Intercom Configuration Description before changing settings on this screen.

This screen lets you view the current settings for the number of talk levels, setup pages, etc.

1.	In ONLINE or SERVER mode, this screen shows you the Options settings in the master controller.

2.	If you start AZedit in FILE mode (without opening a setup file) this screen will show you the AZedit Option settings.

3.	If you open a setup file in FILE mode, this screen will show you the Option settings for that setup file.

This screen also lets you reconfigure Options. We recommend that you have a thorough understanding of the intercom configuration before attempting to do this.)

Talk levels

Talk levels define how many resources can be assigned to a talk key and then activated when that key is pressed. You can enter any number from 2-4. For example, if talk levels is set to 4, you will be able to assign up to 4 intercom ports to a talk key. You can then talk to all 4 ports by pressing the talk key.

Listen levels

Currently, 1 listen level is allowed, and this number cannot be changed.

Panels with Key Labels

Key Labels Per Panel

Setup pages per port

Currently, 4 setup pages are allowed for each port, and this number cannot be changed.

Physical panels per port

Currently, 1 keypanel and 3 expansion panels (4 panels total) are allowed per port, and this number cannot be changed.

Keys per setup page

Currently, 16 talk/listen key pairs are allowed per setup page, and this number cannot be changed

Maximum IFB priority

You can have from 1-8 IFB priority levels.

Use input alphas

Input alphas are currently not supported.

Auto listen functions pick up all talk levels

When this box is checked, and auto-listen is assigned to a key, and the key also has several assigned talk levels, the keypanel operator will automatically be able to talk and listen to all talk levels whenever the talk key is activated.

Allow for remote trunk master (ADAM, ADAM CS)

Check this setting when your intercom system is connected to a remote trunk master via a modem. In this case, there may be some data transmission delay, so the timeout period will be extended to compensate. Also, the normal baud rate for direct connection to the trunk master (76.8 kbaud) will be changed to 9600 baud for the modem connection. (This overrides the setting of dip switch 4 on the master controller card in an ADAM or ADAM CS frame.)

Don’t generate tallies for in-use trunk assignment

An In-Use Tally is used to let you know that a keypanel is in-use (i.e. has a talk key on). If user A has a key assignment for user B and user B has their talk key on, then the key assignment for user B on user A’s panel will display an in-use tally (the form of the tally varies depending on the type of keypanel) if the Generate In-use Tallies checkbox is enabled.

In-use tallies are enabled or disabled during system configuration. Changing this option requires the reconfiguration of the intercom. The “Generate In-Use Tallies” checkbox will be disabled if the connected intercom does not support In-Use Tallies.

NOTE: This check box overrides the setting of DIP switch 3 on the ADAM Master Controller Cards.

Don’t generate tallies for off-hook TIF assignments

Selecting this box turns off tally indications provided at keypanels to notify users there is a TIF assignment off the hook.

NOTE: This check box overrides the setting of DIP switch 3 on the ADAM Master Controller Cards.

Don’t generate indefinite PL tallies

Selecting this box turns off tally indications provided at keypanels to notify users there is a TIF assignment off the hook.

NOTE: This check box overrides the setting of DIP switch 3 on the ADAM Master Controller Cards.

Always stack callers in call waiting window

This check box has the same function as the Keypanel Incoming Message dip switch (DIP switch 2 on the master controller card in an ADAM or ADAM CS frame). Normally, when a call is received by a keypanel, the keypanel checks for a talk key assigned to the caller. If there is an assigned talk key, the display for that key will flash, and the keypanel operator may then press that key to talk back. If no key is assigned, the caller's name will appear in the incoming messages window (also called call waiting window), and the keypanel operator may press the incoming messages key to talk back. Some intercom systems may have many keypanels that do not have alphanumeric talk key displays (such as the KP95-0, MKP-4, WKP-4 and BKP-4 keypanels). In this case, it may be preferable to have all caller's names appear in the Incoming Messages window, since it will not be possible to identify which talk key to press for talk back.

Configure onboard GPI in FR9528 mode

By default, this option is selected for use with an FR9528 Relay Frame. Remove the check mark if you are using the GPI connector on your ADAM or ADAM CS frame instead of an FR9528.

Generate snoop tallies

Select this option if you want users to know when they are being listened to on the their keypanel. A tally is generated when someone is listening on the port for a specified keypanel.

Reset to Default button

Click to restore the original settings for all options.

Test, Cancel, and Apply Buttons

Help (same as F1 key)

Intercom Configuration Description

How to reconfigure the intercom configuration


Copy Alphas

You use this screen to quickly copy and paste selected alpha or alias names. For example, you could copy all Alpha names and paste them to all Alias names. This is something you might want to do if you have just added trunking to a previously operating intercom system and now you want to add Alias names.

1.	Select the type of names that you want to copy (ports, party lines, etc.) in the Type list box.

2.	Select the source of the names in the Source list box.

NOTE: if you select Default Alphas, AZedit will create the original default names if they no longer exist. In the case of intercom ports, for example, default alphas N001, N002, etc. will be created.

3.	Select where you want to paste the copied names in the Destination list box.

4.	The Select Items column lists the port numbers, or party line numbers, etc. based on the Type that you previously selected. To copy and paste all, place a check mark in the All check box. Otherwise, remove the check mark, and individually select which intercom ports or party lines, etc. that you want to copy and paste.

5.	Click OK to perform the copy and paste.


Important Note for Forced Talk and Listen Keys

A UPL statement that forces a key open or closed will not also cause the key to return to its previous state again when the input condition is removed. You must create a second UPL statement if you want to do this. Here is simple approach that will work in all cases:

1.	Select the first UPL statement as the Input A condition for your second UPL statement.

2.	Check the Invert Input A check box.

3.	For the output action, select the opposite action of the first UPL statement. If the first UPL statement forced the key closed, the second UPL statement should force it open.


Intercom Configuration Test, Cancel and Apply Buttons

Test button

This button is active only in ONLINE mode. After you make changes to settings, click Test to make sure there is enough memory in the master controller to accommodate the changes. If the test indicates successful, you can click the Apply button. If the test is not successful, you will have to reduce the quantity of one or more items (either in the Options tab or in the Resources tab).

Apply button

Warning! Clicking Apply will erase all setup information, such as key assignments, party line setups, etc. If you have not saved your setup, click Cancel, and save it before proceeding. You will then have to restore your intercom setup from the saved file after clicking the Apply button.

If you are in operating in ONLINE mode, clicking Apply will erase all intercom system information in the system master controller and will cause the intercom system to reset with the new settings. You will then have to reload any previously saved setup information from disk. (Use the Send File command).

If you are operating in FILE mode, clicking Apply will erase all setup information and will record your new settings to the AZedit startup file (AZedit.ini, located in the AZedit folder). You will then have to reload any previously saved setup file from disk.

Cancel button

By clicking the Cancel button, the changes you made are not activated and the Intercom Configuration screen closes without making any changes.


Port is TIF

Port is TIF appears only when TIF INTERFACE support is set up. This check box enables the enhanced dialing features of the KP-12 and KP-32 keypanels.

NOTE that the TIF-951 can interface to 2 separate intercom ports, so make sure Port is TIF is checked at both ports.

TIF-951 description and setup notes


Select Key Assignment

NOTE: When starting AZedit, the names for key assignments and intercom systems will not display properly until all alphas are uploaded. In a very large intercom system, this could take several minutes. Before attempting any kind of key assignment make sure the upload alphas message is not displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen.

Also make sure the upload remote alphas message is not displayed if you have a trunking intercom system.

1.	If your intercom system is trunked, an intercom system list box will appear at the upper-left. Select the intercom system where the destination is located that you want to assign. Otherwise, skip to step 2.

2.	In the list at the left, click on the type of key assignment that you want.

NOTE: "Phones" will only appear in the list if a TIF INTERFACE is connected and operating. In this case, you can select "Phones" rather than "Ports" to assign a phone key.

3.	In the list at the right, click on the desired name. Then click OK. (Or double-click.)

4.	The selected name will appear in the key assignment combo box.

NOTE: When you select Special Functions, you can use the no assignment name (----) as a way to erase a previous assignment.


Select Control Assignment


Tally Events for TIF or Trunk Use

Event	KP9X No Tally Indication	KP9X Tally Indication	KP-12 No Tally Indication	KP-12 Tally Indication	KP-32 No Tally Indication	KP-32 Tally Indication
Some other keypanel has a TIF off-hook via a TIF key.	None	Flashing alpha	None	Solid red talk LED	None	Solid red talk LED
This panel is trying to talk but can't talk to remote IFB due to low trunk IFB priority	None	Flashing alpha	Solid green talk LED	Solid green talk LED	Solid green talk LED	Flashing alpha and solid green talk LED
Incoming TIF call not answered yet	Flashing alpha	Normal alpha alternating with **	Solid red talk LED	Yellow flashing talk LED	Solid red talk LED	Red flashing talk
This panel can talk and is talking to remote IFB	None	Flashing alpha	Solid green talk LED	Solid green talk LED	Solid green talk LED	Flashing alpha and solid green talk LED
This panel is talking to TIF	None	None	Solid green talk LED	Solid green talk LED	Solid green talk LED	Flashing alpha and solid green talk LED
This panel is talking to remote ISO	None	Flashing alpha	Solid green talk LED	Solid green talk LED	Solid green talk LED	Flashing alpha and solid green talk LED


Auto Dials Edit

This dialog allows the changing of the scroll enables and phone number for the given Auto Dial resource.

The Auto Dial phone number can consist of any of the following characters:

0123456789*#()-+

The ()-+ characters are stored and displayed, but are not “dialable” (they are not valid characters to send to the TIF to dial).


Clear Key Assignments

This dialog allows you to confirm the clearing of key assignments (by clicking on the OK button), or canceling the operation (by clicking on the Cancel button).


Vox Tab Description

VOX (voice activated switching) is a setting or threshold level of audio at which point a channel becomes active. When a threshold is set, a microphone will not activate until the preset audio level is attained. This prevents a channel from staying ON when no one is around in a high activity area.

VOX is supported in Cronus Intercom system and in intercoms with AIO-16 cards. Through AZedit, you can control enabling and disabling VOX, as well as setting the threshold level and the hold time.

VOX support requires the following minimum firmware versions:

•	Master Controller V9.25.0, or Master Controller II-e V1.1.0

•	DBX V1.15.0 with Peripheral Controller V10.15.0, or Peripheral Controller II-e V1.15.03

•	AIO-16 V1.1.0 or later

•	Cronus V1.1.0 or later

For information on how to enable Vox, see Enable Vox.


Vox Settings screen

VOX (voice activated switching) is a setting or threshold level of audio at which point a channel becomes active. When a threshold is set, a microphone will not activate until the preset audio level is attained. This prevents a channel from staying ON when no one is around in a high activity area.

VOX is supported in Cronus Intercom system and in intercoms with AIO-16 cards. Through AZedit, you can control enabling and disabling VOX, as well as setting the threshold level and the hold time. For information on enabling vox, see Enable Vox.

VOX support requires the following minimum firmware versions:

•	Master Controller V9.25.0, or Master Controller II-e V1.1.0

•	DBX V1.15.0 with Peripheral Controller V10.15.0, or Peripheral Controller II-e V1.15.03

•	AIO-16 V1.1.0 or later

•	Cronus V1.1.0 or later


Application Preferences, Authentication

Warn when attempting to change communications settings (default = checked)

When selected, a warning message appears when you try to change any communications settings in AZedit.

See, Communications Dialog

Restriction Files (.RES):

This must be filled in with the path to where the Firmware Files will be stored (for example, C:\TELEX\AZedit\V3.1.1\FIRMWARE).

Restriction Cache Files (.RES):

This must be filled in with the path to where the Firmware Files will be stored (for example, C:\TELEX\AZedit\V3.1.1\FIRMWARE).

Authentication Configuration Files (AZA):

This must be filled in with the path to where the SNMP Configuration Files will be stored (for example, C:\TELEX\AZedit\V3.1.1\SNMP).


Application Preferences, Maintenance

Allow user to add Intercoms (default = checked)

If this feature is selected, users are able to add Intercoms in AZedit.

Allow user to delete Intercoms (default = checked)

If this feature is selected, users are able to delete Intercoms in AZedit.

Allow user to change the default Intercom (default = checked)

If this feature is selected, users are able to change the default Intercoms in AZedit.

Allow user to add User profiles (default = checked)

If this feature is selected, users are able to add User profiles in AZedit.

Allow user to delete User profiles (default = checked)

If this feature is selected, users are able to delete User profiles in AZedit.

Allow user to change the default User (default = checked)

If this feature is selected, users are able to change the default User in AZedit.

Hide this dialog (permanently)  (default = not checked)

WARNING: 	If this feature is selected you will not be able to recover the maintenance tab through AZedit. You must use How to redisplay the maintenance tab using the Registry Editor.

This setting is mainly used to keep users from changing rights for adding and deleting information in the AZedit application.


IFB SL Screen

Use the IFB SL Screen to create IFB Special Lists. An IFB Special List is similar to the traditional special list, except instead of grouping ports, IFB assignments are grouped. Unlike Special Lists, IFB Special Lists do not have relays or tallys associated with them.

For more information, see IFB Special Lists.

To create IFB Special Lists, see Add an IFB to an IFB Special List and Add Multiple IFBs to an IFB Special List at the Same Time.


Assignment Groups Screen

Use the Assignment Groups screen to create assignment groups. Assignment Groups logically group different types of key assignments into one single scroll list.

For more information, see Assignment Groups.

To create Assignment Groups, see How to Create an Assignment Group and Add / Remove Assignments in Assignment Groups.


RVON Configuration Screen

Use the RVON Configuration screen to configure your RVON connections. On this screen, you will configure both ends of the connection.

SETTINGS FOR THE RVON CARD

This area of the screen is used to configure the selected RVON card, either in an ADAM frame or in a Cronus system.

RVON Card: From the drop down list, select the physical slot where the RVON card is located.

IP Address: Enter the IP Address of the RVON card.

Network Mask: Enter the Network Mask for the RVON card

Default Gateway: Enter the Default Gateway for the RVON card.

SETTINGS FOR THE PASS-THROUGH SERIAL TO ETHERNET

This area of the screen is used to configure the IP to which the RVON card will connect with and the speed (baud rate) at which to make the connection.

Target IP Address: Enter the IP Address of the device the RVON card will connect with.

Serial Baud Rate: From the Serial Baud Rate drop down list, select the speed to connect to the device (9600 bps, 19.2 Kbps, 38.4 kbps).

SETTINGS FOR CONNECTED DEVICE

RVON Channel: Select the channel you want to use to communicate to another device across the network.

Device IP Address: Enter the IP Address of device to which you want to connect.

Device Type: From the Device type drop down list, select the type of device to which the RVON device is connecting.

Device Channel: Select the channel on the device to which the RVON device will communicate.

Codec Type: From the CODEC Type drop down list, select the Codec type you want to use for this channel

Packet Size: From the Packet Size drop down list, select the size of each audio packet you want to allow.


Select User Screen

Use the Select User screen to add users permissions list to logon to the AZedit session. At AZedit Version 3.1.1 and higher, authentication is supported to allow an increased security of the intercom system, if desired.

For more information on Authentication, see Authentication.

To enable Authentication, see Authentication Configuration Screen, How to Add a User in AZedit, and Create an Administrator Profile


Select Intercom Screen

Use the Select Intercom screen to quickly and easily log on to a different AZedit session.

NOTE: The Authentication security may be in place for the intercom you are trying to access. You may be required to log on with a password to the new intercom.

For more information on Authentication, see Authentication.


Show Connected Users Screen

Use the Show Connected Users screen to see who is logged onto the current AZedit session.


Authentication Configuration Screen

Use the Authentication Configuration screen to configure authentication on your intercom system.  You can configure it to work over J9 or J10 serially, Ethernet or USB.

NOTE: All Authentication settings are void when connecting serially over J9. This means there will be no security measures for the intercom system that is connected to J9 by a serial cable.

For more information, see Authentication


Create Shortcut screen

Use the Create Shortcut screen to create a shortcut to the AZedit session. This is useful when you have multiple AZedit sessions configured on one terminal.

For more information on shortcuts, see How to Create a Desktop Shortcut to AZedit.


Log View Screen

Use the Log View Screen to see the different logs written. Double click any log to view the contents.


Keypanel Screen Saver Screen

Use the Keypanel Screen Saver screen to create a screen saver for keypanels connected to the Intercom System.

For more information on the Screen Saver, see How to create/change the screen saver display or How to set the delay time for screen saver mode


Keypanel Passwords Screen

Use the Keypanel Password screen to set a password for access to either the entire keypanel (Menu Access) or to just the Service Menu.

NOTE: This password can be up to 32 characters long


Ethernet Setup Screen

Use the Ethernet Setup screen to view the Ethernet settings for both the Left (Active) and Right (Standby) Controllers.

NOTE: To configure Ethernet, you must be connected to the Matrix using a serial cable. The MAC address field automatically populates and cannot be altered.


SNMP Configuration Screen

Use the SNMP Configuration screen to configure SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) for your Intercom System. Simply put, SNMP allows you to send messages when specified events occur over the Intercom System.


Available Intercom Screen

Use the Available Intercom Screen to select the intercom to which you want to connect to. This screen can also be used to display the system settings.


Cronus Password Screen

 Use the Cronus Password screen to create a password to access the Cronus Intercom System menu structure.

NOTE: This password can be up to 32 characters long


Text Box

A text box is a box where you type text. After typing your text, press the Enter key to record the changes.


Check Box

A check box is a box where you click to insert or remove an "X".


Radio Button

A radio button is a button that you click on to select that item.


List Box

A list box is a box with a scroll button. Click the scroll button to open the list, then scroll to the item that you want. Click on that item to select it.


Combo Box

A combo box is a box where you can either type a name, or select a name from a list by right-clicking on the box.


Undo Button

Use the Undo to cancel one or more previous changes (up to 20). Note: every time you save your file, Undo is cleared to 0 previous actions. You can only undo actions taken after your last save.


Talk Level 2 Key Assignment

You can assign a second device to activate along with a normal talk key assignment (talk level 1). This is called a Talk Level 2 Assignment. Talk Level 2 is typically used with inter-panel dim tables, or to activate a relay or GPI Output.

Note: You can only assign talk level 2 after you have assigned talk level 1.

You can also activate additional talk levels. In the Options menu, select Intercom Configuration, then select the Options Tab. You can set Talk levels to 2, 3, or 4.

Note:	 More than 2 talk levels requires the following firmware:

•	ADAM Master Controller firmware version V9.6.1 or greater.

•	ADAM Audio Input / Output card firmware version V9.5.1 or greater.